Pisač Euroterm6100a - 6180a - Man - en PDF

6100A/6180A
User Guide
6100A/6180A Paperless graphic recorder

Versions 5.1 and later
HA028910/9
June 2011
Declaration of Conformity
Manufacturer's name: Eurotherm Limited
Manufacturer's address: Faraday Close, Worthing, West Sussex,

BN13 3PL, United Kingdom
Product type: Paperless graphic recorders
Models: 6100A Status level A1 and above

6180A Status level A1 and above
6100E Status level A1 and above
Safety specification: EN61010-1: 2001
EMC emissions specification: EN61326-1: 2006 Class A
EMC immunity specification: EN61326-1: 2006 Industrial locations
Eurotherm Limited hereby declares that the above products conform to the safety and
EMC specifications listed. Eurotherm Limited further declares that the above products
comply with the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC, and also with the Low Voltage Directive
2006/95/EC.
Signed: Dated:
Signed for and on behalf of Eurotherm Limited.
Kevin Shaw
(R&D Director)
IA249986U670 Issue 3 Jly 10 (CN26590)
© 2011 Eurotherm Limited

All rights are strictly reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, modified, or transmitted
in any form by any means, nor may it be stored in a retrieval system other than for the purpose to act as
an aid in operating the equipment to which the document relates, without the prior written permission
of Eurotherm Limited.
Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The specifi-
cations in this document may therefore be changed without notice. The information in this document is
given in good faith, but is intended for guidance only. Eurotherm Limited will accept no responsibility
for any losses arising from errors in this document.
100/180 mm PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER: USER GUIDE
PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER
USER GUIDE
LIST OF SECTIONS
Section Page
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
3 PROCESS VARIABLE DISPLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4 SETTING UP THE RECORDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
5 FILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
6 BRIDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
7 SCREEN BUILDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
8 MODBUS TCP SLAVE COMMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
9 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
10 EVENT INPUTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
11 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
12 ASCII PRINTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
13 PORTABLE CASE OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
14 REMOTE CJ BLOCK OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
15 THERMAL UNIFORMITY SURVEY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
ANNEX A: SPECIFICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
ANNEX B: REFERENCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
ANNEX C: WEB SERVER DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
INDEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
EFFECTIVITY
This manual refers to recorders fitted with software version 5.1. To determine the software version fitted
to the recorder, the 'About' screen may be accessed as described in section 4.6.11.
HA028910 User Guide

Issue 9 June 11 Contents Page i
PAPERLESS GRAPHICS RECORDER USER GUIDE
LIST OF CONTENTS
Section Page
SAFETY NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
SYMBOLS USED ON THE RECORDER LABELLING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1 UNPACKING THE RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2.1 Signal wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
CONNECTOR WIRING DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2.2 Supply voltage wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
LINE SUPPLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
LOW VOLTAGE SUPPLY OPTION* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.3 ACCESS FLAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.3.1 Stylus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.3.2 Card slot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
LED INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.3.3 USB Front Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.4 LOCKABLE FLAP OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.4.1 Flap lock operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
ARCHIVE INACTIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
ARCHIVE ACTIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3 PROCESS VARIABLE DISPLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
TRUNCATION OF NUMERIC VALUES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
CURRENT TRACE ALARM ICONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.1 STATUS BAR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.1.1 Current access level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.1.2 Page name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.1.3 Alarm indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
INSTRUMENT ALARM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
CHANNEL ALARM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
CHANGE BATTERY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
DISK ICON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
FTP ICON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
CONFIGURATION LOCKED INDICATOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
TRIAL MODE INDICATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.1.4 Summary menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
INSTRUMENT ALARM SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
ACK ALL ALARMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
ALARM SUMMARY PAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ALARM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
BATCH SUMMARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
MESSAGE LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
MESSAGE TYPE FILTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
PERIOD FILTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
OPTION MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
REMOVE MEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.2 NAVIGATION KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.2.1 Key functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
ROOT MENU KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.3 FIRST SWITCH-ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.3.1 Access to Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
TROUBLE SHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
TEXT STRING ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.4 DISPLAY MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
TREND HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
TIME CHANGE RECORDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.4.1 Vertical Trend display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.4.2 Horizontal Trend display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
User Guide HA028910

Contents Page ii Issue 9 June 11
LIST OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
Section Page
3.4.3 Circular Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
TREND MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
NORMAL VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
NORMAL VIEW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
FULL SCREEN DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
TIMESTAMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
OTHER NOTES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3.4.4 Vertical bargraph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
FACEPLATES ABOVE THE BARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
FACEPLATES AT RIGHT-HAND EDGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.4.5 Horizontal bargraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.4.6 Numeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.5 OPERATOR NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4 SETTING UP THE RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.1 ARCHIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.1.1 Local Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
BRING ARCHIVE UP TO DATE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
ARCHIVE ALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
ARCHIVING WITH THE LOCKABLE FLAP OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4.1.2 Remote archiving (FTP transfer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4.2 SAVE / RESTORE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.2.1 Save. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
SAVE AS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.2.2 Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.2.3 New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.2.4 Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.2.5 Import screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.2.6 Export screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.2.7 Import User Linearisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.2.8 Export User Linearisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.2.9 Import printer driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.3 CONFIG KEY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.3.1 Instrument configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
INSTRUMENT NAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
NORMAL/SAVER DISPLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
SAVE AFTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
MODBUS ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
MODBUS SECURITY DISABLED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
COMMS CHANNEL TIMEOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
PRESET HOUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
PRESET MINUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
DISABLE WARNING DIALOGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
SHOW OPERATOR NOTES LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.3.2 Group configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
GROUP NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
TREND UNITS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
DESCRIPTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
TREND TYPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
A/B SWITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
TREND SPEED/TREND INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
CIRCULAR SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
CIRCULAR SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
CIRCULAR CHART FULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
START AT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
GRID TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
NONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
LINEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
FROM POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
RECORDING ENABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
RECORDING SPEED/RECORDING INTERVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
TREND HISTORY DURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
ARCHIVE TO MEDIA ENABLE/ARCHIVE VIA FTP ENABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
ALARM MESSAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
HA028910 User Guide

Issue 9 June 11 Contents Page iii
Section Page
4.3.2 Group configuration (continued)
ACK MESSAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
POINT TYPE/SELECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.3.3 Channel/Alarm configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
CHANNEL NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
VALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
INPUT TYPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
LIN TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
INPUT LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
INPUT HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
SHUNT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
RANGE LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
RANGE HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
RANGE UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
SCALED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
OFFSET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
SCALE TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
FILTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
BREAK RESPONSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
COLD JUNCTION COMPENSATION (CJC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
DESCRIPTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
A/B SWITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
SPANNED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
ZONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
PV FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
MAXIMUM DECIMAL DIGITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
COLOUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
ALARM NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
ENABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
TYPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
SETPOINT SOURCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
HYSTERESIS EXAMPLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
RATE-OF CHANGE ALARM EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
JOB NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
CATEGORY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
WHILE/ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
ALARM MESSAGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.3.4 Views Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
HOME TIMEOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
HOME GROUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
SCOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
GROUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
DISPLAY ENABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
HOME PAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
DISPLAY MODE ENABLING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.3.5 Archive configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
COMPRESSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
FLASH SIZE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
SHORTEST TREND HISTORY / DURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
CSV CHECK BOXES, DATE/TIME FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
SHOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
MEDIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
ARCHIVE TO MEDIA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
MEDIA FILE FORMAT/FTP FILE FORMAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
ON MEDIA FULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
MEDIA SIZE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
REMOVABLE MEDIA CAPACITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
MEDIA FULL EVENT LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
ARCHIVE TO REMOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
REMOTE PATH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
PRIMARY REMOTE HOST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
PRIMARY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
SECONDARY REMOTE HOST/LOGIN/PASSWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
CSV FILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
User Guide HA028910

Contents Page iv Issue 9 June 11
Section Page
4.3.5 Archive configuration (Continued)
MEDIA FILE FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
CSV DATE/TIME FORMAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
FTP FILE FORMAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4.3.6 Event configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
OPERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
SOURCE 2 SENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
DESCRIPTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
JOB NUMBER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
CATEGORY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
WHILE/ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
EVENT EXAMPLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
4.3.7 Event Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
4.3.8 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
MESSAGE ENTRY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
4.3.9 User Linearisation Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
4.3.10 Batch recording option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
AUDITOR MESSAGES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
BATCH SUMMARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
THERMAL UNIFORMITY SURVEY (TUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
OPERATOR INITIATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
NON OPERATOR INITIATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
EVENT SOURCES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
4.3.11 Maths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
REMAINING CONFIGURATION ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
FUNCTION DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
MODBUS ADDRESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
4.3.12 Totalisers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
4.3.13 Counters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
COUNTER MODBUS ADDRESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
4.3.14 Timers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Configurable parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
SELF-START EXAMPLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
4.3.15 Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
MODBUS ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
4.3.16 Master comms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
MASTER COMMS CONFIGURATION MENU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
DETECT THIS SLAVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
DETECT ALL SLAVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
SHARE SOCKET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
MASTER COMMS CHANNEL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
READING DIGITAL VALUES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
MASTER COMMS DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
4.3.17 Output channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
MASTER COMMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS (RETRANSMISSION). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4.3.18 Demand Writes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
DEMAND WRITE CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
WRITING TO A SPECIFIC REGISTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
DEMAND WRITES WITH AUDIT TRAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
HA028910 User Guide

Issue 9 June 11 Contents Page v
Section Page
4.3.19 E-mails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
E-MAIL CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
E-MAIL DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
4.3.20 Reports configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
4.3.21 Ethernet/IP™ Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
MESSAGING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
TABLE ENTRY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
CONFIGURING A PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
4.3.22 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
TRIAL MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
VIRTUAL CHANNELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
SIMULATION OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
4.4 SECURITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
4.4.1 Access levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
SETTING PERMISSIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
ACCESS WHEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
DOMAIN NAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
NEW PASSWORD/RETYPE PASSWORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
CONNECT FROM REMOTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
REMOTE USER NAME/REMOTE PASSWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
LOGIN DISABLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
EDIT OWN PASSWORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
CHANGE ALARM SETPOINTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
ACKNOWLEDGE ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
EDIT MATHS CONSTANT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
RESET MATHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
PRESET TOTALISERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
PRESET COUNTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
START/RESET TIMERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
SET CLOCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
ADJUST I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
ARCHIVING CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
SAVE/RESTORE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
PASTE/DELETE FILES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
FULL CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
FULL SECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
BATCH CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
CAN SIGN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
CAN AUTHORIZE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
PERFORM UPGRADES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
EVENT PERMISSION 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
EVENT PERMISSION 2 TO 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
EDIT OUTPUT CHANNEL DEFAULT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
ACTION DEMAND WRITES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
FORCE CHANGE OF PASSWORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
ENTER BATCH DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
ALLOW WEB SERVER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
4.4.2 Management (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
CHANGES NOT RECORDED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
4.4.3 Add user. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
NEW USER ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
NEW FULL USER NAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
NEW DOMAIN NAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
NEW PASSWORD/RETYPE PASSWORD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
BASED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
4.4.4 Remove user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
4.4.5 Change Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
TROUBLE SHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
4.4.6 Clear Password Cache. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
USER PASSWORD AUTHENTICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
PASSWORD CACHE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
CLEAR PASSWORD CACHE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
User Guide HA028910

Contents Page vi Issue 9 June 11
Section Page
4.4.7 Active Directory server setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
4.5 NETWORK KEY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
4.5.1 Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
INSTRUMENT NUMBER/MAC ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
IP ADDRESS LOOKUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
BOOTP TIMEOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
IP ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
SUBNET MASK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
DEFAULT GATEWAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
SNTP SERVER ENABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
SNTP CLIENT ENABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
SNTP SERVER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
EUROPRP SERVER ENABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
ACTIVE DIRECTORY SERVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
ACTIVE DIRECTORY SECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
PASSWORD CACHE EXPIRY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
4.5.2 Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
LOCAL HOST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
DOMAIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
DOMAIN NAME SERVICE (DNS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
PRIMARY/SECONDARY DNS SERVER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
4.6 SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
4.6.1 Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
4.6.2 Locale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
LONG DATE FORMAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
4.6.3 Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
4.6.4 Input adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
4.6.5 Output Adjust. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
4.6.6 Master Comms Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
4.6.7 Ethernet Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
4.6.8 Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
COPY RULES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
4.6.9 Job search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
SEARCH RESULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
4.6.10 Customise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
FONT SIZE EXAMPLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
4.6.11 About. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
INSTRUMENT VARIANT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
CONFIG REVISION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
LAST UPDATED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
AT VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
CREATED ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
SECURITY REVISION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
SUPPORT FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
4.7 JOBS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
4.7.1 No Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
4.7.2 Drive relay category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
4.7.3 Totaliser category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
4.7.4 Message category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
4.7.5 Maths category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
4.7.6 Clock category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
4.7.7 Counter category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
4.7.8 Timer category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
4.7.9 Batch category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
4.7.10 Recording category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
4.7.11 Trend category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
4.7.12 Output category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
4.7.13 Demand Writes category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
4.7.14 Alarm category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
4.7.15 Archive category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
4.7.16 Email category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
HA028910 User Guide

Issue 9 June 11 Contents Page vii
Section Page
4.7.17 Report category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
SEND REPORT TO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
GROUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
REPORT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
5 FILE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
5.1 FILER OPTION MENU KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
5.2 THE HIDE KEY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
5.3 FILE STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
6 BRIDGE (REMOTE VIEWER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
6.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
6.1.1 Minimum PC requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
SUPPORTED PDA CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
6.2 CONNECTION DETAILS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
6.2.1 Direct PC connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
6.2.2 PC To remote recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
6.2.3 Networked systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
6.3 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
6.4 RECORDER CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
6.4.1 Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
6.4.2 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
6.4.3 Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
6.5 RUNNING THE PROGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
CHANNEL ALARM SOUND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
6.6 OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
6.6.1 Display Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
6.6.2 Alarm acknowledgement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
6.6.3 Status line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
6.6.4 Error messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
NETWORK CONNECTION HAS TIMED OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
UNABLE TO CONNECT TO HOST .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
UNABLE TO RESOLVE HOSTNAME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
FAILED TO AUTHENTICATE THE USER NAME ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF BRIDGE SESSIONS ALREADY RUNNING ON ... . . . 251
THERE APPEARS TO BE NO FREE DISK SPACE ON ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
YOU ARE ALREADY RUNNING A FULL BRIDGE SESSION ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
YOU ARE AUTHENTICATING FULL BRIDGE ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
7 SCREEN BUILDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
7.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
7.1.1 Display Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
7.1.2 Importing/Exporting screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
IMPORTING SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
EXPORTING SCREENS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
7.2 DISPLAY CREATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
7.2.1 Before starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
7.2.2 Screen components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
7.2.3 The properties page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
KEY DESCRIPTIONS (UPPER KEYS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
OPTIONS PAGE ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
7.2.4 Screen creation example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
7.3 PARAMETER DEFINITIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
7.3.1 Basic parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
7.3.2 Advanced parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
7.4 COMPONENT DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
7.4.1 Group Vertical/Horizontal Trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
7.4.2 Group vertical bargraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
7.4.3 Group horizontal bargraph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
7.4.4 Group numeric display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.4.5 Channel vertical/horizontal bargraph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.4.6 Channel Numeric. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.4.7 Channel data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
User Guide HA028910

Contents Page viii Issue 9 June 11
Section Page
7.4.8 Dialogue Action. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.4.9 Navigation Action. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.4.10 Operator button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
7.4.11 Event Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
7.4.12 Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
7.4.13 Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
7.4.14 Round rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
7.4.15 Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
7.4.16 Polyline- series of points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
7.4.17 Polygon - closed area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
7.4.18 Oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
7.4.19 Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
7.4.20 Arc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
7.5 MEASURING UNIT COMPARISONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
7.5.1 XGA screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
7.5.2 QVGA screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
7.6 ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
8 MODBUS TCP SLAVE COMMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
8.1 INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
8.2 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
8.2.1 Function Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
DIAGNOSTIC CODES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
EXCEPTION CODES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
8.2.2 Data types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
DATA ENCODING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
8.2.3 Invalid multiple register writes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
8.2.4 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
TO SEND A LOGIN REQUEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
8.2.5 Text messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
LONG MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
8.3 ADDRESS MAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
8.4 ADDRESS ALLOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
8.4.1 Instrument data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
8.4.2 Channel configuration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
CHANNEL 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
CHANNEL 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
CHANNEL 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
CHANNEL 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
CHANNEL 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
CHANNEL 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
CHANNEL 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
CHANNEL 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
CHANNEL 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
CHANNEL 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
CHANNEL 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
CHANNEL 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
8.4.3 Channel Run-Time data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
CHANNEL 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
CHANNEL 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
CHANNEL 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
CHANNEL 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
CHANNEL 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
CHANNEL 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
CHANNEL 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
CHANNEL 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
CHANNEL 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
CHANNEL 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
CHANNEL 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
CHANNEL 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
HA028910 User Guide

Issue 9 June 11 Contents Page ix
Section Page
8.4.4 Group data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
GROUP 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
GROUP 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
GROUP 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
GROUP 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
GROUP 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
GROUP 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
8.4.5 Feature identification table (FIT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
8.4.6 Indirection tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
8.4.7 IEEE 32-bit channel configuration data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
CHANNEL 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
CHANNEL 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
CHANNEL 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
CHANNEL 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
CHANNEL 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
CHANNEL 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
CHANNEL 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
CHANNEL 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
CHANNEL 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
CHANNEL 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
CHANNEL 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
CHANNEL 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
8.4.8 IEEE Area Channel run-time data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
CHANNEL 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
CHANNEL 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
CHANNEL 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
CHANNEL 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
CHANNEL 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
CHANNEL 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
CHANNEL 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
CHANNEL 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
CHANNEL 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
CHANNEL 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
CHANNEL 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
CHANNEL 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
8.4.9 Permanent ID table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
8.5 DATA TRANSMISSION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
FUNCTION CODES AND EXCEPTION CODES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
TEXT STRINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
8.5.1 Function code 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
REQUEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
RESPONSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
EXCEPTION RESPONSES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
8.5.2 Function code 04. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
8.5.3 Function code 06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
REQUEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
RESPONSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
8.5.4 Function code 08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
8.5.5 Function code 16 (Hex 10). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
REQUEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
RESPONSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
9 ANALOGUE OUTPUT OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
9.1 SIGNAL WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
9.2 SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
9.3 CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
9.4 OUTPUT ADJUST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
9.4.1 Adjustment procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
9.4.2 Adjustment removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
10 EVENT INPUT OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
10.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
10.2 SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
10.3 SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
User Guide HA028910

Contents Page x Issue 9 June 11
Section Page
11 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
11.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
11.2 FUSING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
11.2.1 Fuse Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
11.2.2 Access to the user connections/fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
11.2.3 User wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
12 ASCII PRINTER OUTPUT OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
12.1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
12.2 WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
12.2.1 Serial communications ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
12.2.2 DC connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
12.3 CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
12.3.1 Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
LINK ERROR COUNT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
PROTOCOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
BAUD RATE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
STOP BITS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
PARITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
PRINTER TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
PRINTER NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
PRINTER STATUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
PRINTER TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
PRINT MESSAGES FROM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
MESSAGES TO PRINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
12.3.2 Reports configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
REPORT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
DESCRIPTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
NUMBER OF FIELDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
FIELD N TYPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
STYLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
POINT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
LINE FEED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
12.4 IMPORTING PRINTER DRIVERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
12.5 REPORT EXAMPLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
12.5.1 Group Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
GROUP NUMBER 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
12.5.2 Channel configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
CHANNEL 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
CHANNEL 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
CHANNEL 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
CHANNEL 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
12.5.3 Event Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
EVENT NUMBER 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
12.5.4 Report Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
12.5.5 Serial Communications Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
12.6 TSP600 SWITCH SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
13 PORTABLE CASE OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
13.1 BASIC OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
13.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
13.1.2 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
SUPPLY VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
INTERNAL WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
13.2 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY (TRS) OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
13.2.1 Internal wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
13.3 HTM2010 QUARTERLY TEST KIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
13.3.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
13.3.2 Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
SUPPLY VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
INTERNAL WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
13.3.3 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
HA028910 User Guide

Issue 9 June 11 Contents Page xi
Section Page
13.4 THERMOCOUPLE OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
13.4.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
13.4.2 Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
SUPPLY VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
THERMOCOUPLE WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
13.4.3 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
13.5 LOW SUPPLY VOLTAGE OPTION*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
13.6 REMOTE CJC BLOCK OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
13.6.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
13.6.2 Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
13.6.3 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
14 REMOTE CJ BLOCK OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
14.1 LARGE FRAME RECORDER WITH INTEGRAL CJC BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
14.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
14.1.2 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
14.1.3 Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
14.2 LARGE FRAME RECORDER WITH REMOTE CJC BLOCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
14.2.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
14.2.2 Signal wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
14.2.3 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
14.3 SMALL FRAME RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
14.3.1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
14.3.2 Signal wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
SIGNAL WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
14.3.3 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
15 TUS OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
15.1 PRE CALIBRATION AND POST CALIBRATION ENABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Pre calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Post calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
15.2 INPUT ADJUST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
ADJUST PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
15.3 CHART MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
15.4 OTHER ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Annex A: SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
INSTALLATION CATEGORY AND POLLUTION DEGREE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Installation category II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Pollution degree 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Recorder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Universal input board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
WORST CASE ERROR CALCULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
PREVIOUS INSTRUMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Relay output board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Event input board). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Analogue output board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (ASCII Printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Annex B: REFERENCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
B1 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
B1.1 MAIN DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
B1.2 SPECIAL MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
B1.3 DISPLAY TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
B1.4 TOUCH CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
B1.4.1 Touch screen calibrate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
B1.4.2 Touch screen verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
B1.4.3 Main menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
B1.5 SYSTEM SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
User Guide HA028910

Contents Page xii Issue 9 June 11
Section Page
B1.6 DIAG SUMMARY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
B1.6.1 MAC Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
B1.6.2 Software version number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
B1.6.3 Serial 1/Serial 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
B1.6.4 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
B1.6.5 Lockable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
B1.6.6 Option boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
RELAY OUTPUT BOARDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
EVENT INPUTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
B1.6.7 Input boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
B1.6.8 Main menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
B1.7 QUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
B2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
B2.1 TOUCH SCREEN CLEANING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
B2.2 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
B2.2.1 Battery replacement procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
B2.3 FLAP RELEASE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
B3 OPTION ENABLING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
B4 COLOUR SELECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
B5 TCP PORT NUMBERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
B6 ASCII CHARACTERS FOR SERIAL COMMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
B7 TIME ZONE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
B8 HISTORY MAINTENANCE OPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
B8.1 KEYCODE EXTRACTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
B8.2 ERASING HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
B9 MENU STRUCTURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Annex C: WEB SERVER DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
C1 INTRODUCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
C2 INTERNET LINKS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
C3 ACCESS TABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
C3.1 INSTRUMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
C3.1.1 Instrument alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
C3.1.2 Global channel alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
C3.2 TRENDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
C3.2.1 Horizontal trend. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
C3.2.2 Vertical trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
C3.2.3 Numeric display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
C3.3 MESSAGE LOGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
C3.4 HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
C3.5 ABOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
HA028910 User Guide

Issue 9 June 11 Contents Page xiii
This page is deliberately left blank
User Guide HA028910

Contents Page xiv Issue 9 June 11
SAFETY NOTES
WARNING
Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the apparatus, or disconnection of
the protective earth terminal is likely to make the apparatus dangerous under some fault condi-
tions. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
Note: in order to comply with the requirements of safety standard BS EN61010, the recorder shall
have one of the following as a disconnecting device, fitted within easy reach of the operator, and
labelled as the disconnecting device.
a. A switch or circuit breaker which complies with the requirements of IEC947-1 and IEC947-3
b. A separable coupler which can be disconnected without the use of a tool
c. A separable plug, without a locking device, to mate with a socket outlet in the building.
1. Before any other connection is made, the protective earth terminal shall be connected to a protec-
tive conductor. The mains (supply voltage) wiring must be terminated within the connector in such
a way that, should it slip in the cable clamp, the Earth wire would be the last wire to become discon-
nected.
2. In the case of portable equipment, the protective earth terminal must remain connected (even if the
recorder is isolated from the mains supply), if any of the I/O circuits are connected to hazardous volt-
ages*.
3. The mains supply fuse within the power supply is not replaceable. If it is suspected that the fuse is
faulty, the manufacturer’s local service centre should be contacted for advice.
4. Whenever it is likely that protection has been impaired, the unit shall be made inoperative, and se-
cured against accidental operation. The manufacturer’s nearest service centre should be contacted
for advice.
5. Any adjustment, maintenance and repair of the opened apparatus under voltage, should be avoided
as far as possible and, if inevitable, shall be carried out only by a skilled person who is aware of the
hazard involved.
6. Where conductive pollution (e.g. condensation, carbon dust) is likely, adequate air conditioning/fil-
tering/sealing etc. must be installed in the recorder enclosure.
7. Signal and supply voltage wiring should be kept separate from one another. Where this is impracti-
cal, shielded cables should be used for the signal wiring.
8. If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by
the equipment might be impaired.
* A full definition of ‘Hazardous’ voltages appears under ‘Hazardous live’ in BS EN61010. Briefly, under
normal operating conditions, hazardous voltages are defined as being > 30V RMS (42.2V peak) or > 60V
dc.
SYMBOLS USED ON THE RECORDER LABELLING

One or more of the symbols below may appear as a part of the recorder labelling.
! Refer to the manual for instructions
Protective earth
This recorder for ac supply only
This recorder for dc supply only
This recorder for either ac or dc supply
Risk of electric shock
HA028910 User Guide

Issue 9 June 11 Page 1
USER GUIDE
1 INTRODUCTION
This document describes the installation, operation and configuration of a paperless graphic recorder.
The recorder comes in two versions, which differ in physical size, and in the number of I/O channels and
options available, but otherwise are identical (i.e. the operation and configuration procedures are the
same for both).
The standard recorder comes equipped for FTP transfer and is also fitted with ‘Bridge’ (Remote viewing)
software.
1.1 UNPACKING THE RECORDER

The recorder is despatched in a special pack, designed to give adequate protection during transit.
Should the outer box show signs of damage, it should be opened immediately, and the recorder exam-
ined. If there is evidence of damage, the instrument should not be operated and the local representative
contacted for instructions. After the recorder has been removed from its packing, the packing should
be examined to ensure that all accessories and documentation have been removed. The packing should
then be stored against future transport requirements.
2 INSTALLATION
2.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

Figures 2.1a and 2.1b give installation details for the small and large frame cases respectively.
Note: It is recommended that the rear face of the panel be centre-punched at suitable positions
to locate the tips of the case clamps. Otherwise, particularly on smooth surfaces, the clamps can
‘wander’ as they are tightened, leading to inefficient clamping and possible damage to the record-
er mounting slots.
The unit is inserted through the panel aperture from the front of the panel. With the weight of the re-
corder supported, a panel clamp is inserted into each of the mounting slots (one each on the left- and
right-hand sides). The jacking screws are then tightened sufficiently to clamp the recorder into position.
EXCESS FORCE SHOULD NOT BE USED IN TIGHTENING THESE SCREWS.
User Guide HA028910

Page 2 Issue 9 June 11
2 INSTALLATION (Cont.)
Standard terminal cover: 246.5 mm
Long terminal cover: 288 (closed); 415mm (open)
24.75 211.5 mm
144 mm mm
Safety Earth
137 mm
144 mm
Front view Side elevation
106.9 mm
(RHS)
102 mm
35 mm
Access Flap
Panel thickness = 3 to 25 mm. Optimum thickness

depends on panel material
Panel cutout
138mm x 138mm (+1 - 0)
or
View on underside
137 mm
5.44 x 5.44 inches
(+0.04 - 0.00)
Minimum recommended inter-unit spacing
Side clamps Top/bottom clamps
x = 15 mm (0.6 inch) x = 10 mm (0.4 in)
y = 10 mm (0.4 in) y = 15 mm (0.6 inch)
Panel clamping
Maximum installed angle

a˚ = b˚ = 45 degrees max
Vertical
a˚ b˚
Figure 2.1a Mechanical installation details - small frame unit
HA028910 User Guide

2 INSTALLATION (Cont.)
260.90 mm
292 mm 211 mm
28.34
Safety Earth
mm
Front view
292 mm
279 mm
216 mm
Side elevation
Access Flap
x Panel thickness range = 6 to 25 mm.

Optimum thickness depends on panel material
Panel cutout
281mm x 281mm (+1 - 0)
or
279 mm
11.07 x 11.07 inches
(+0.04 - 0.00)
Minimum recommended inter-unit spacing View on underside
Side clamps Top/bottom clamps
x = 25 mm (1 inch) x = 12.5 mm (0.5 in)
y = 12.5 mm (0.5 in) y = 25 mm (1 inch)
y
Vertical
MAXIMUM INSTALLED ANGLE

a˚ = b˚ = 45 degrees max
a˚ b˚
Panel mounting technique
Figure 2.1b Mechanical installation details -large frame unit
User Guide HA028910

2.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
2.2.1 Signal wiring

Figures 2.2.1a and 2.2.1b show connector locations for the small and large-frame recorders respectively.
The figures are not to the same scale.
Figure 2.2.1c shows details of universal input board wiring and figure 2.2.1d gives the pinouts for option
boards.
CONNECTOR WIRING DETAILS

Maximum wire size = 4.13mm2 (11 AWG)
Minimum wire size = 0.081mm2 (28 AWG)
Design torque = 0.35Nm.
Safety Earth Safety Earth

USB 1 USB 2 (M4) USB 1 USB 2 (M4)
USB Ports (option) USB Ports (option)
E E
L N L N
Serial comms (option) Serial comms (option)
Port 1 Port 2 Ethernet Mains (supply) Port 1 Port 2 Ethernet Mains (supply)
RJ45 connection RJ45 connection
Option slot 1 Option slot 2 Option slot 1 Option slot 2
Option slot 3 Option slot 4 Option slot 3 Option slot 4
Input channels 7 to 12
Input channels 1 to 6 Input channels 1 to 6
Safety Earth
USB 1 USB 2 (M4)
USB Ports (option)
E
L N
Serial comms (option)
Port 1 Port 2 Ethernet Mains (supply)
RJ45 connection
Option slot 1 Option slot 2
Figure 2.2.1a Connector locations - small frame units
HA028910 User Guide

2.2.1 SIGNAL WIRING (Cont.)
USB Ports (option)

USB1 USB2 E
Port 1 Port 2 L N
Ethernet Safety Earth
RJ45 (M4) Mains (supply)
Serial comms (option) connection
Option board 5 Option board 6
Not used Option board 9
Input
Inputchannels
channels43
1 to 748
Input
Inputchannels
channels31
1 to 736
Input
Inputchannels
channels19
1 to 724
Input
Input channels
channels 71 to
to 12
7
Figure 2.2.1b Connector locations - large frame units
User Guide HA028910

Input board pinouts
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Channels Channels Channels Channels Channels Channels
1, 7, 13, 19, 25, 2, 8, 14, 20, 26, 3, 9, 15, 21, 27, 4, 10, 16, 22, 28, 5, 11, 17, 23, 29, 6, 12, 18, 24, 30,
31, 37, 43 32, 38, 44 33, 39, 45 34, 40, 46 35, 41, 47 36, 42, 48
Cold
V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I junction V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I
V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I
Attenuator Shunt
assembly assembly
+ - + - + -
-20 to + 20 V dc
Thermocouples -200 to + 200 V dc DC milliamps
dc millivolts
V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I
RTD RTD Potentiometer

3-wire resistance 2-wire resistance Potentiometer
thermometer thermometer
-30V < Vin < +0.8V = active

V+ V- I +2V < Vin < 30V = not active
+0.8 < Vin < 2V = not defined
V+ V- I
nc Not active (2 to 30 V)
Active (0.8 to -30 V)
com no Vin
Minimum contact = 60m sec User 0V
Digital input (contact closure) Digital inputs (voltage levels)

(Not channels 1, 7, 13 etc) (Not channels 1, 7, 13 etc)
Figure 2.2.1c Analogue Input board wiring
HA028910 User Guide

Relay outputs
Max number of boards = 4 for small frame or 9 for large frame
nc
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
c
Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3
no
nc c no nc c no nc c no nc c no nc c no nc c no Contacts shown in
power off/alarm state
Three changeover relays
nc
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
c
Rly 1 Rly 2 Rly 3 Rly 4 Rly 1 Rly 2 Rly 3 Rly 4
c nc c nc c nc c nc c nc c nc c nc c nc Contacts shown in
Four normally closed relays
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
c
Rly 1 Rly 2 Rly 3 Rly 4 Rly 1 Rly 2 Rly 3 Rly 4
no
c no c no c no c no c no c no c no c no Contacts shown in
Four normally open relays
Event inputs (max 4 option boards)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 3 4 5 6 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 C
Event input Number Event input Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 C 1 2 3 4 5 6 C
Behaviour undefined for

+0.8 < Vin < +2 V
Input 6 shown;
+2 to +30 V
inputs 1 to 5 identical
+0.8 to -30 V
User 0V
Contact closure inputs Voltage inputs
Analogue outputs (max 4 option boards)

I+ I+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 V+ – V+ –
+ - - +
V+ – I+ V+ – I+ V+ – I+ V+ – I+ Voltage Current
outputs outputs
Channel Channel Channel Channel
1 2 1 2
Figure 2.2.1d Option wiring sheet 1
User Guide HA028910

1 5
6 9
View on solder-bucket face

of user socket
EIA232C EIA485 (5-wire) EIA485 (3-wire)

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 NC 1 RxA 1 Link to pin 7
2 Rx 2 NC 2 NC
3 Tx 3 NC 3 NC
4 DTR 4 NC 4 NC
5 Signal ground 5 Signal ground 5 Signal ground
6 NC 6 RxB 6 Link to pin 8
7 NC 7 TxA 7 TxA/RxA
8 NC 8 TxB 8 TxB/RxB
9 9 9
Figure 2.2.1d (Cont.) Option wiring sheet 2 (Serial communications)
2.2.2 Supply voltage wiring
WARNING
DC supply voltages must never be applied to recorders fitted with isolated transmitter power sup-
plies.
Note: The minimum recommended wire size is 20AWG equivalent to 16/0.2 (0.5mm2).
LINE SUPPLY
The supply voltage to the recorder is terminated using an IEC socket which is connected to the mating
plug at the rear of the recorder. The recorder is suitable for use with all ac voltages between 85 and 265
V RMS (47 to 63 Hz), and requires 50 W max. power. For recorders without transmitter power supplies,
supply voltages between 110V dc and 370V dc are also suitable.
LOW VOLTAGE SUPPLY OPTION*

Not suitable for recorders fitted with the isolated transmitter power supply option.
The low voltage supply option is terminated at a three-pin connector (plug mounted on recorder - socket
on supply cable) as shown in figure 2.2.2. The option allows the use of ac or dc supplies with the follow-
ing characteristics:
AC: 20 to 42V RMS (45 to 400 Hz)
DC: 20 to 54V (See warning above)
Power: 50 W max.
Earth
+V or ac 0V or ac
Figure 2.2.2 Low voltage supply pinout (view on fixed connector face)
*Consult factory for availability
HA028910 User Guide

2.3 ACCESS FLAP

Note: See also section 2.4 if the lockable flap option is fitted. Lockable flaps are identi-
fied by means of a padlock symbol printed towards the right hand end of the flap label.
Stylus storage
USBFront
Door lock (option) SD or
Compact Flash
card
a) Insert finger(s) and pull forwards and down (small frame) b) Behind flap details (small frame)
SD or
Compact USB
Stylus Flash card Front
storage
lock
Door n)
(op t io
c) Insert finger(s) and pull forwards and down (large frame) d) Behind flap details (large frame)
Figure 2.3 Access flap detail
The access flap is located immediately below the recorder screen. To open the flap, insert one or more
fingers under the flap handle, and pull it outwards and down (figure 2.3). A lockable version of the flap is
available - see section 2.4 for details. Located behind the flap are (from left to right):
1. a stylus (press to eject)
2. a slot for a Compact Flash or Secure Digital (SD) card
3. a USB port (usbfront).
User Guide HA028910

2.3.1 Stylus
A stylus suitable for use on the touch screen is located in a storage area to the left of the Compact Flash/
SD Card slot.
2.3.2 Card slot

The slot for the Compact Flash or SD card is located centrally behind the flap. If an SD card is already
fitted, it is removed by pressing on the card, to unlatch it, then pulling the card out of the slot. If a Com-
pact Flash card is already fitted, it is removed by a double operation of the eject button. See details in
figures 2.3.2a and 2.3.2b, below
CAUTION
Removal of the memory device whilst archiving is in progress causes irreparable damage to the
filing structure on the device, rendering it unusable. For this reason, archiving should be sus-
pended (section 4.1) (wait for the green section of the disk icon (section 3.1.3) to go ‘white’) before
the device is removed. It is strongly recommended that the ‘Remove Media’ facility described in
section 3.1.4 (Summary menu) be used to ensure that it is safe to remove the memory device. For
recorders fitted with a lockable flap, see also section 2.4.
SD card Eject button Compact

(Push in - Push out) (Press twice) Flash card
Figure 2.3.2a SD card details Figure 2.3.2b Compact Flash card details
LED INDICATORS
Three LED indicators are located above the card slot as shown in figure 2.3.2c, below.
Card activity
LED (yellow)
Power/watchdog USBFront
LED (green) Power LED (yellow)
Figure 2.3.2c indicating LEDs (SD card

Card-slot
Compact Flash card similar)
2.3.3 USB Front Port

A type-A USB socket is located to the right of the Compact Flash/SD Card slot. This port can be used to
connect a mouse, a keyboard, a barcode scanner, a ‘memory stick’ or a floppy disk drive. If more than
one such device is required at a time, two further, rear panel USB ports (USB 1 and USB 2) are available as
an option. Maximum current per USB device = 500 mA.
Note: It is the responsibility of the user to establish the electromagnetic susceptibility of any USB
peripheral connected to the recorder. Refer to the USB port specification in Annex A for details.
HA028910 User Guide

2.4 LOCKABLE FLAP OPTION

This option allows the access flap below the display screen to be locked against unauthorized access to
the Compact Flash/SD card. It also provides some protection (in the form of a warning message) against
the inadvertent removal of such a card whilst archive data is being written to it. Removal of the memory
device whilst it is being written to will not only corrupt the current archive, but might also damage the
memory device irreparably, rendering it unusable. See also section 3.1.4.
Notes:
1. Control of the flap lock is available only to users with ‘Archiving Control’ permission enabled.
2. Control of the flap lock is not possible via Bridge software.
3. The description below applies only to Archive data.
2.4.1 Flap lock operation

ARCHIVE INACTIVE
1. Touch the root menu or alarm status area at the top of the screen.
2. Touch the ‘Unlock Flap’ key (figure 2.4.1a).
3. Archiving is suspended, the internal solenoid releases the catch, to allow the flap to be opened, and
a pop-up message appears ‘OK to remove archive media’ (figure 2.4.1b).
4. After approximately five seconds, the solenoid returns the catch to the locked position. The flap
can be returned to the closed position whether or not the flap lock is engaged. It is up to the user to
ensure that the flap is properly closed and locked.
Touch Root menu key or Alarm area

(e.g. channel alarm symbol)
Summary
Instrument Alarm Summary
Ack all Alarms

Root Menu
Alarm Summary
Home Operator
Batch Summary
File Unlock Flap Message Log
Goto View Goto Group Unlock Flap
Figure 2.4.1a Unlock Flap key locations
Archive Media
OK to remove archive media
Ok
Figure 2.4.1b ‘OK to remove archive media’ message
User Guide HA028910

2.4.1 FLAP LOCK OPERATION (Cont.)

ARCHIVE ACTIVE
1. Touch the root menu key or alarm status area at the top of the screen.
2. Touch the ‘Unlock Flap’ key (figure 2.4.1a).
3. The flap unlocks for 5 seconds in the normal way (to allow access to the stylus and the usbfront port),
but a warning message appears on the screen (figure 2.4.1c).
a) If the ‘Cancel’ key is operated, the message disappears. Subsequently, if this is a Demand Ar-
chive the ‘Demand archive finished’ message appears when the archive is complete. Archiving
is not suspended, so operate the ‘Suspend Archiving’ key before removing the memory device.
This ensures that no attempt will be made by the recorder to write to the device until ‘Resume
Archiving’ is operated.
b) If the ‘Cancel’ key is not operated (the warning message remains on the screen), then when the
archive is complete, archiving is automatically suspended and the flap unlocks again for five
seconds, allowing the memory device to be removed. The message on the screen changes to
‘OK to remove archive media’ (figure 2.4.1b), although, for demand archives this is masked by
the ‘Demand archive finished’ message.
DO NOT REMOVE Archive Media!

Will advise when OK to remove...
Cancel
Figure 2.4.1c ‘Do Not Remove Archive Media’ message

4. Archiving automatically resumes:
a. 15 seconds (max.) after a memory device is inserted.
b. after 10 minutes if no new memory device is inserted (i.e. the flap was opened for a reason other
than to replace the memory device).
Note A System message is generated each time the flap is unlocked.
HA028910 User Guide

3 PROCESS VARIABLE DISPLAY

The operator interface consists of a touch-sensitive screen, showing either process variable values in one
of a number of formats, or, showing configuration or operational details for use in setting up the recorder.
This section (3) describes the process variable displays. Section 4 describes the Configuration displays.
Figure 3, below, depicts a typical trend display for a large-frame unit and gives details of the various
areas of the display page. The small frame display is similar, but the navigation keys are printed on a strip
below the chart area instead of being drawn on the screen.
Notes:
1. Dialogue boxes, message boxes etc. cause Process Variable displays to ‘freeze’ for as long as
the box is on display. Root and Option menus (amongst others) time-out (i.e. are removed from
the display) after approximately one minute. Messages, however, are displayed until the opera-
tor takes action to remove them. It should be noted, especially, that several message boxes
may be active at one time, but only the oldest one is visible, until it is removed to reveal the
‘next oldest’ message, and so on.
2. Many of the screen components can be customised as to colour/size etc. as described in sec-
tion 4.6.10 (Customise).
TRUNCATION OF NUMERIC VALUES
If the amount of space on the display page is insufficient to display the full width of the process variable
or scale value, then the displayed value is rounded down and the number of decimal places reduced. If
the width is still too restricted, the value is displayed in ‘scientific’ format, or if this is still too wide, the final
visible character of the integer part of the value is replaced by a ‘?’ (as depicted in figure 3.4.4b)
Page Name and batch status Change battery alarm Disk icon FTP activity indicator
(if option fitted) (% free space)
Channel alarm Configuration locked indicator
Instrument alarm Time and date
Current access level or
user name
Group name
Status bar Logged out No Batch in Progress 99%
Channel descriptor Channel 1 73.98V

Channel value
Channel scale 0.00 20.00 40.00 60.00 80.00 100.00
Off channel(s) An animated bar appears

Current trace alarm over the date, when the
Other traces icons 11:52:04 recorder is busy.
Alarm threshold marker (Pen icon) 28/01/04
(absolute high) Though normally pale
28/05/05 11:51:33 Alarms(s) off 3(1) Scale (Current) trace blue, the bar is gold-
(Diamond icon) coloured when the
recorder configuration is
11:50:44
28/05/05
being updated remotely
via Bridge software.
Channel 3 alarm 1 off
time and date
11:49:24
28/05/05
11:48:04
Time/date stamp 28/05/05
28/05/05 11:47:51 Alarms(s) on 3(1)
Channel 3 alarm 1 on 11:46:44

28/05/05
time and date
11:45:24
28/05/05
Navigation keys
Figure 3 Trend display definitions (large frame unit)
User Guide HA028910

3 PROCESS VARIABLE DISPLAY (Cont.)

CURRENT TRACE ALARM ICONS
In each of the different types of PV display, each channel’s faceplate gives the status of the channel’s
alarms. The status of each alarm is shown by one of the icons depicted in table 3, either flashing (if it is
active and unacknowledged) or on continuously (if it is active and acknowledged). (See section 3.1.4,
below, for a description of how to acknowledge alarms.) Absolute alarm threshold icons and deviation
alarm bars appear in any display which includes a scale (except circular charts). For deviation alarms the
bar stretches from (Reference - Deviation) to (Reference + Deviation).
Note: ‘Trigger’ alarms do not display threshold marks or bars, or faceplate symbols.
Absolute High
Absolute Low
Absolute Absolute Deviation Rate of
Deviation in low high In / Out change
Deviation out Horizontal d R d No
indication
scales
Rate-of-change Rising Vertical No
d d
R indication
scales
Rate-of-change Falling For Deviation alarms, R = Reference; d = deviation
Faceplate symbols Scale symbols
Table 3 Alarm icons
3.1 STATUS BAR

This appears across the top of the display, and contains the items described below.
3.1.1 Current access level

There are four access levels available (Logged out, Operator, Engineer and Service), and the current level
is displayed in this key at the top left hand corner of the display. Touching this key calls the login page as
described in section 3.3.1 (Access to configuration) below. If a user has been added (using the ‘Add User’
part of the Security setup - section 4.4.3, below), then the ‘Full User Name’ is displayed instead of the ac-
cess level.
3.1.2 Page name

Initially this shows the current group’s descriptor. The name changes according to context for example
‘Operator’ or ‘Config-Archive’ If the Batch option is fitted, this area contains batch information as well
as the page name. Touching the area calls the Batch Status page. See section 4.3.10 for further Batch
details.
HA028910 User Guide

3.1.3 Alarm indication

This area of the display can contain a number of status icons: Instrument alarm, Channel alarm, Battery
change, Disk status, FTP in progress, Configuration locked, and so on. Pressing this area of the screen
calls the ‘Summary menu’ (section 3.1.4) allowing the user to view active instrument alarms, to acknowl-
edge all channel alarms, to display the Alarm Summary or Message Log page. Media removal strategy is
also controlled from this pop-up. If the access flap ‘Lock’ option is fitted, see also section 2.4.
For channel alarm symbols refer to ‘Current Trace Alarm Icons’, above.
INSTRUMENT ALARM
This indicator appears, flashing, if any of the following errors are active. The instrument alarm summary
page, described in Section 3.1.4, allows the user to view such instrument alarms as are active.
Active Directory server error The Active Directory server (section 4.5.1) cannot be accessed.
Archive failed -(message) Message explains archive failure.
Battery-backed RAM cleared This message appears if the battery has failed, and the unit has
been switched off.
Clock failure Internal clock was corrupt at power up, or the time has never been
set. Can be caused by battery failure, in which case the battery
icon will also be visible. The error is cleared by setting the time and
date. Server time forced to 00:00 1/1/1900.
Channel error Indicates a hardware failure in the channel circuit or in the internal
CJ temperature measurement
Channel failure Indicates a hardware failure in the input channel circuit (see note).
DHCP Server failure For instruments with IP address lookup set to ‘Get from DHCP
Server’, this alarm occurs if the recorder cannot obtain an IP ad-
dress from the server. See section 4.5 for details.
FTP Archiving file lost Archive failed. A file which has not been archived, has been detected.
FTP Archiving too slow Remote archive is too infrequent. The recorder effectively switches
to ‘Automatic’ (section 4.3.5) to ensure that data is not lost.
FTP Primary Server Failure This error is set if the recorder fails, after two attempts, to establish
communications with the primary server as defined in Archive Con-
figuration (section 4.3.5). After the second attempt has failed, the
Secondary server is tried.
FTP Secondary Server Failure This error is set if the recorder fails, after two attempts, to establish
communications with the secondary server as defined in Archive Con-
figuration (section 4.3.5). See also ‘FTP Primary Server Failure, above.
Insufficient non-volatile memory... There is insufficient memory available for the configuration. Can
be caused by use of Rolling Average maths functions.
Internal flash: \application\ required repair Error found in the internal file system at power-up, and corrected.
Internal flash: \history\ required repair Error found in the internal file system at power-up, and corrected.
Internal flash: \screens\ required repair Error found in the internal file system at power-up, and corrected.
Internal flash: \user\ required repair Error found in the internal file system at power-up, and corrected.
Internal flash: \user\ is full Appears if the User partition is full. To clear, either user screens
must be simplified or files must be deleted from \User\, or both.
Maths Channel failure Appears if, for example, the divisor of a divide function is zero.
Media Archiving file lost Archive failed. A file which has not been archived, has been detected.
Media Archiving too slow Archive is too infrequent. The recorder effectively switches to ‘Au-
tomatic’ (section 4.3.5) to ensure that data is not lost.
Network boot failure The recorder is unable to establish connection with the BootP or
DHCP server. This might be caused by, for example, cable failure,
network hardware failure, etc.
Output channel failure Indicates a hardware failure in the output channel circuit (see note).
Note: Unlike other instrument alarms, Channel Failure and Output channel failure are not self clearing.
Once the cause of failure is rectified, the recorder must be power-cycled in order to clear the alarm.
User Guide HA028910

3.1.3 ALARM INDICATION (INSTRUMENT ALARMS) (Cont.)

Paper Low/Paper Out Warning messages from the ASCII printer (if fitted).
Printer not responding There is a fault in the serial comms link with the ASCII printer (if fit-
ted).
Recording failure - (message) Message explains recording failure - due to file error, internal over-
flow etc.
Removable media failure This error is set if the archive storage device is corrupt, wrongly
formatted etc. Becomes active only when an Archive is attempted.
Removable media full Archive storage device full. Becomes active only when an Archive
is in progress.
SNTP server failure This error is set if:-
a) the year received from the server is < 2001 or > 2035 or
b) the configured SNTP server cannot be accessed.
Time synchronisation failure Set if 5 or more ‘Time change events’ are caused by the SNTP
server within 24 hrs. A ‘Time change event’ occurs whenever the
recorder time is found to be more than 2 seconds different from
the server time. The alarm does not appear until 24 hours have
elapsed since the first of the five or more Time Change events oc-
curred.
USB over current USB power fault - too much current being drawn by a USB device
(max 500 mA).
USB power fault key USB power fault - too much current being drawn by all USB devices
(max 1100 mA)
USB unsupported Unsupported USB device inserted.
HA028910 User Guide

3.1.3 ALARM INDICATION (Cont.)

CHANNEL ALARM
This red ‘bell’ indicator appears if any channel is in alarm. The symbol is illuminated continuously if all
alarms are acknowledged or flashes if any active alarm is unacknowledged. Refer to ‘ALARM ACKNOWL-
EDGEMENT’ below, for details of how to acknowledge alarms.
CHANGE BATTERY
This flashing indicator first appears when the battery voltage (checked every 15 minutes) indicates that
the battery is approaching the end of its useful life. The indicator continues to flash until the battery is
replaced (B2.2 in Annex B). The indicator does not appear if the battery is not fitted.
DISK ICON
This shows the free space available on whatever mass storage medium is fitted (if any), and selected for
Archive destination (note 1). The disk icon appears soon after the device is inserted (but see note 2).
During archiving, the colour of the central area of the disk changes to green (see note 3). No other disk
activity (e.g. save/restore configuration) is indicated.
This area of the icon coloured

green during any archive activity
(not necessarily to the device
selected in Archive configuration).
99%
Figure 3.1.3 Archive activity indication
Notes
1. The icon appears only when a memory device is present, AND when that memory device has
been selected in the ‘Archive to media’ selection in archive configuration (section 4.3.5). For
example: if a memory stick is inserted in ‘usbfront’, but Archive to Media is set to ‘mediacard’,
then the disk icon appears only if a suitable card is present in the ‘mediacard’ slot.
2. When a disk is inserted into a USB floppy disk drive which is connected to the recorder, the disk
icon appears only after the disk has been accessed, (either by reading from it or writing to it),
or after the file system has been opened by touching the ‘file’ key. (This note does not apply for
disks which have been inserted before the disk drive is plugged in.)
3. The central area goes green whenever local archiving is taking place - not only when archiving
is taking place to the memory device selected in Archive configuration.
FTP ICON
The FTP icon appears to the right of the disc icon position whenever transfer activity is taking place.
CONFIGURATION LOCKED INDICATOR

This symbol appears only when Bridge software is being used, in the following situations:
1. Whilst units are ‘synchronising’ configuration changes
2. Whilst configuration is taking place. If the reconfiguration is taking place at the host pc (Bridge ‘Full’
only), then the symbol appears at the target instrument, and vice-versa.
TRIAL MODE INDICATOR

This symbol is displayed whilst the recorder Trial Mode (section 4.3.22) is enabled.
User Guide HA028910

3.1.4 Summary menu

This pop-up display appears if the Alarm Indication area at the top of the display is touched. Figure
3.1.4a shows the display.
Touch Alarm area
Summary
Ack all Alarms
Alarm Summary
Batch Summary
Message Log
Remove Media
Figure 3.1.4a Summary pop-up menu
INSTRUMENT ALARM SUMMARY

Maths Channel Failure
Printer Error
Ok
Figure 3.1.4b Typical Instrument alarm summary display
This contains a list of the currently active instrument alarms. For a list of possible alarms and their defini-
tions, see section 3.1.3, above.
ACK ALL ALARMS
Ack all Alarms

Confirm acknowledge of alarms?
Yes No
Figure 3.1.4c Ack all Alarms display
‘Yes’ confirms all active, unconfirmed alarms.

This page can also be displayed by touching an alarm in the alarm summary page, described below.
HA028910 User Guide

3.1.4 SUMMARY MENU (Cont.)

ALARM SUMMARY PAGE
As shown in figure 3.1.4d, below, the alarm summary page contains the following information for the cur-
rent group:
1. Alarm identifier. This appears as a point ID, followed by the relevant alarm number in parentheses.
For example, Alarm 1 on maths channel 6 would appear as: D6 (1). Maths channels are prefixed by
‘D’. Totalisers are prefixed by ‘T’ and Counters are prefixed by ‘C’. Input channels are not prefixed.
2 Alarm threshold for absolute alarms only
3 The current process value for the point
4 An alarm symbol (see Table 3). Alarm symbols flash until acknowledged.
Notes:
1. Alarms are always listed in Point/Alarm order with input channels first, followed by derived
channels, totalisers and counters, if these options are fitted.
2 When the alarm source returns to its non-alarm state: Unlatched alarms are removed from
the list whether or not they have been acknowledged; latched alarms remain displayed until
acknowledged. See section 4.3.3 for a description of alarm types and actions.
3. There are no time or history components associated with the Alarm Summary. If Alarm mes-
sages have been enabled in the relevant group’s configuration (section 4.3.2), then alarm initia-
tion/acknowledgement times and dates can be found from the trend and trend history displays,
described in section 3.4 or in Message log described later in this section.
4. If an alarm is active on a channel which is not included in any group, then although the channel
alarm symbol will flash, the alarm will not appear in any of the alarm summary pages.
Touch Alarm area

Summary
Ack all Alarms Goto Group
Alarm Summary Group 2

Group 1
Batch Summary
Group 3 Group 4
Message Log
Unlock Flap
Group 6
Group 5
Alarm Summary: Group 5

1(1) Water temp 1a 60.0000 C 68.5277
2 (1) Water temp 1b 30.0000 C 23.4531
2 (2) Water temp 1b 10.0000 C Touch alarm to23.4531
3 (1) Alarm setpoint
0il pressure 250.000 PSI call 'Acknowledge'
260.3425
dialogue box.
4(1) Transfer (Absolute alarms only) 15.3678
Ack Alarm
Confirm acknowledge of alarm?
Channel no. Channel
(alarm no.) descriptor Yes No Current process Alarm type
value symbol
Figure 3.1.4d Alarm Summary display
User Guide HA028910


ALARM ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Alarms can be acknowledged individually, on a group basis, or globally (all alarms).
INDIVIDUAL ALARMS
Individual alarms are acknowledged from the alarm summary page by touching the relevant item (high-
lights yellow), then touching ‘Yes’ in the resulting pop-up confirmation box. Figure 3.1.4d, above, at-
tempts to show this process.
GROUP ALARMS
Alarms can be acknowledged on a group basis by calling the alarm summary page for the relevant
group, then pressing the Options key (section 3.2), the ‘Ack Group Alarms’ key and finally, ‘Yes’ in the
resulting pop-up confirmation box. Figure 3.1.4e below, attempts to show this process.
Alarm Summary: Group 1

1(1) Water temp 1a 60.0000 C 68.5277
2 (1) Water temp 1b 30.0000 C 23.4531
2 (2) Water temp 1b 10.0000 C 23.4531
3 (1) 0il pressure 250.000 PSI 260.3425
4(1) Transfer 15.3678
Option Menu
Batch
Note
Ack Group Alarms
Ack Group Alarms Confirm acknowledge of alarms?
Yes No
Figure 3.1.4e Group Alarm acknowledgement
ALL ALARMS
To acknowledge all active alarms, touch (e.g.) the channel alarm icon at the top of the screen. From the
resulting ‘Summary’ menu, select ‘Ack all Alarms’, then finally, touch ‘Yes’ in the resulting pop-up confir-
mation box.
Note: The options menu is context sensitive, and may, therefore, not appear as illustrated above.
HA028910 User Guide


BATCH SUMMARY
If the Batch option is fitted (section 4.3.10) a ‘Batch Summary’ key appears in the Summary menu.
Note: The following description shows the situation where batch ‘Scope’ is configured as ‘Group’.
The description is similar when ‘Scope’ = ‘Instrument’ except that there is only one line (Instru-
ment), instead of one line per group.
As shown in figure 3.1.4f, below, the Batch Summary page contains the following batch information:
1. Group names in group number order (if Scope = Group) or Instrument Name if scope = ‘Instrument’
2. Batch active indicator (green spot)
3. Initiation time and date
4. Elapsed time for the batch
5. Batch Field 1 and its ‘value’.
Touch Alarm area

Summary
Ack all Alarms
Alarm Summary
Batch Summary
Message Log
Unlock Flap
Batch Summary - Group Mode

ColourMix1 25/04/06 09:12:18 00:02:41 Batch Number: 060425C1
ColourMix2 25/04/06 08:45:13 00:29:46 Batch Number: 060425M1
ColourMix3 25/04/06 08:50:07 00:24:40 Batch Number: 060425Y1
ColourMix4 25/04/06 09:03:53 00:11:06 Batch Number: 060425K1
Mix1 00:00:00 00:00:00 Mixed batch:
Mix2 24/04/06 23:11:48 09:57:49 Mixed batch: 060424R.. Click to highlight
Group 7 00:00:00 00:00:00 Batch field 1
Batch
Group 9 running 00:00:00 00:00:00 Batch field 1
indicator
Group 10 00:00:00 00:00:00 Batch field 1 Mix2
Add Inputs 00:00:00 00:00:00 Batch field 1 Full Details
Batch Control
Batch start Elapsed Batch Field 1 Batch Field 1
Group names time and date time text values Sort (ON)
Highlight (OFF)
Exit
Figure 3.1.4f Batch Summary page (Group mode - sort OFF; highlighting ON))
Touching anywhere on a group row calls a pop-up menu as shown above. The functions of this menu are
as follows:
User Guide HA028910

BATCH SUMMARY (Cont.)
FULL DETAILS
Touching this key calls the Batch Details page showing the group name, batch status and batch field
details.
BATCH CONTROL
This calls a page similar to the Full Details page, but including a ‘NEW’ key to allow the operator to start a
new batch. If the batch is configured as ‘Start/Stop’ a ‘Stop’ key is also included allowing the user to stop
the batch.
SORT
If Sort is Off (default), the groups appear in Group number order with Group 1 at the top and group 12 at
the bottom. The key legend is ‘Sort (ON)’.
If Sort is On, those groups with batches running appear (in group number order) at the top of the list, fol-
lowed by any remaining groups (also in group number order). The key legend is ‘Sort (OFF)’.
HIGHLIGHT
If Highlight is Off (default), then all groups’ text appears in white. The key legend is ‘Highlight (ON)’.
If Highlight is On then the text associated with groups which have batches running appears in green.
Remaining groups’ text is in white. The key legend is ‘Highlight (OFF)’.
EXIT
Closes the pop-up menu. (It closes itself after approximately 50 seconds.)
HA028910 User Guide


MESSAGE LOG
Note: Message log can also be selected using the Root menu/Goto View/Message log key. This
goes immediately to the first Message Log page for the current group to the screen (i.e. the ‘Goto
Group’ menu does not appear).
If there are more messages than can be displayed in the height of the screen, a scroll bar appears to al-
low ‘hidden’ messages to be displayed.
Messages are retrieved from the history files in batches of 100 messages. If there are more than 100
messages, ‘Earlier messages..’ appears after the hundredth message. Touching ‘Earlier messages..’ calls
the option menu, and touching ‘Earlier messages..’ in this menu, calls the next batch of 100, and so on. If
applicable, operating ‘Later messages..’ / ‘Later messages..’ calls the previously displayed 100 messages.
As can be seen from figure 3.1.4g the list of messages can be ‘filtered’ both by type and by time. For
example, setting the message type to ‘Alarm’ and the period filter to ‘Last Day’ excludes all messages
except alarm messages which have occurred within the previous 24 hours. (For clarity, the figure shows
both filters open. In fact, only one can be open at a time)
Touch Alarm area

Summary
Ack all Alarms
Alarm Summary Goto Group
Batch Summary Group 2

Group 1
Message Log
Group 3 Group 4
Unlock Flap
Group 6
Group 5
Group 5 09:06:22
Engineer
Batch number:050405A12 05/04/05
All Messages All History
Message Log: Group name System Last Hour

05/04/05 09:06:18 Alarm(s) on 1(1) Alarms Last Day
05/04/05 09:06:18 Operator's name: Andrew
Power Up Last 3 Days
05/04/05 09:06:18 Customer: FishesRus
05/04/05 09:06:18 Batch number:020205A12General Last Week
05/04/05 09:06:18 Config Revision:682759 Security Revision
Batches Last746261
Month
05/04/05 09:06:18 Batch start (Engineer)
Logins All History
05/04/05 08:50:30 Configuration revision 682,759 was 682,758
05/04/05 08:50:28 Batch) Name files by Signings
batch true was false
05/04/05 08:50:28 Batch) On start log 3 Audit
was 1Trail
05/04/05 08:50:28 Batch) Field 3 Operator's name: was Batch field 3
Reports
05/04/05 08:50:28 Batch) Field 2 Customer: was Batch field 2
All Messages
05/04/05 08:50:28 Batch) Field 1 Batch number: was Batch field 1
05/04/05 08:50:28 Batch) Batch fields 3 was 1
05/04/05 08:50:50 Config,Signed:Engineer, Authorized:Engineer,New batch fields
04/04/05 16:42:11 Alarm(s) off 2(1)
04/04/05 16:32:50 Alarm(s) off 1(1)
04/04/05 16:31:05 Batch stop (Engineer)
04/04/05 16:31:05 Stop Batch,Signed:Engineer,Authorized:Engineer,Belt Failure
04/04/05 16:29:33 Alarm(s) Ackd 1(1) 2(1)
04/04/05 16:28:05 Ack all alarms,Signed:Engineer,Authorized:Engineer,Belt Failure
04/04/05 16:27:13 Alarm(s) on1(1)
04/04/05 16:27:13 Alarm(s) on2(1)
04/04/05 14:06:22 Config Revision:682759 Security Revision 746261
Figure 3.1.4g Message log page showing message-type picklist
User Guide HA028910

MESSAGE LOG (Cont.)
MESSAGE TYPE FILTER

All Messages All messages are displayed
System Only System messages and instrument alarms are listed
Alarms Only alarm on/off and acknowledgement messages appear.
Power Up Displays power up messages only including Config Revision and Security revision are
included. See ‘About’ (section 4.6.11) for more details.
General Displays e-mails, messages sent via Modbus, operator notes/custom messages etc. if they
do not have to be ‘signed’ (Auditor option 21CFR11 only - see section 4.4 for more details).
If the notes etc. are signed, they appear in the ‘Signings’ message type list.
Batches Displays only batch messages (including Config and Security Revisions if either Auditor
option is enabled).
Logins Lists only changes in login.
Signings This list contains only notes, messages etc. that have been signed (and authorized). This
category is used only when ‘Require Signing’ (and ‘Require Authorization’) is (are) enabled
in the Security/Management menu- see section 4.4 for more details.
Audit trail This list contains Configuration change messages only. This category is used only when
‘Audit Trail’ is enabled - see section 4.4 for more details.
Reports For each report, this contains all the Report’s fields (set up in ‘Reports’ configuration) on
separate lines. Line Feed fields are ignored (i.e. they do not appear).
PERIOD FILTER
This picklist allows the user to select one of the following to define the period of time that the message
list is to encompass:
All History, Last Month (28 days), Last Week, Last 3 Days, Last Day or Last Hour.
HA028910 User Guide

MESSAGE LOG (Cont.)
OPTION MENU
Touching a message (highlights yellow) calls the Option Menu* as shown in figure 3.1.4h, below.
Group name 09:06:22
Engineer
Batch number:050405A12 05/04/05
All Messages All History
Message Log: Group name

05/04/05 09:06:18 Alarm(s) on 1(1)
05/04/05 09:06:18 Operator's name: Andrew
05/04/05 09:06:18 Batch number:020205A12
Option Menu
Batch
05/04/05 08:50:30 Configuration revision 682,759 was 682,758
05/04/05 08:50:28 Batch) Name files by batch true was false
05/04/05 08:50:28 Batch) On start log 3 was 1 Note
Enter History
05/04/05 08:50:28 Batch) Batch fields 3 was 1
Full Details
04/04/05 16:42:11 Alarm(s) off 2(1)
04/04/05 16:32:50 Alarm(s) off 1(1)
Refresh
04/04/05 16:31:05 Stop Batch,Signed:Engineer,Authorized:Engineer,Belt Failure
04/04/05 16:29:33 Alarm(s) Ackd 1(1) 2(1)
To call Option Menu, touch message
04/04/05 16:28:05 Ack all alarms,Signed:Engineer,Authorized:Engineer,Belt Failure
(highlights yellow) or Option key
04/04/05 16:27:13 Alarm(s) on1(1)
04/04/05 16:27:13 Alarm(s) on2(1)
Figure 3.1.4h Message Log options menu

Batch See section 4.3.10.
Note See section 3.5.
Enter history Operating the Enter History key causes the recorder to display that page of history
which includes the highlighted message. See section 3.4 for details of trend history.
When in Trend history mode, operating the Message Log key calls that message log
page which contains those messages which are nearest the trend history cursor time.
Full details If the highlighted message is wider than the display, the whole message can be dis-
played by operating the ‘Full Details’ key.
Refresh/Earlier messages../Later messages..
‘Refresh’ places (at the top of the screen), any messages, which have occurred since
the Message Log page was last entered, or since the last ‘Refresh’. If earlier or later
messages have been selected, then ‘Refresh’ is replaced by ‘Earlier messages..’ or
‘Later messages..’ as appropriate, and operating the key calls the next or previously
displayed group of 100 messages to the display respectively.
* The option menu can also be called by touching the option key. In this case:
a. Enter History calls the current Trend History display, as described in section 3.4, and
b. Because no message is highlighted, the ‘Full Details’ key is not enabled,
Notes:
1 Selecting ‘Enter History’ whilst either ‘Earlier Messages’ or ‘Later Messages’ is highlighted calls
the current History page.
2 If the Option Menu has ‘timed out’ leaving a message highlighted, and the option key is oper-
ated, then this is equivalent to reselecting the message.
User Guide HA028910


REMOVE MEDIA
Note: See section 2.4 if the ‘Lockable Door Flap’ option is fitted.
This key is provided to help ensure that any local memory storage device is removed only when it is ‘safe’
to do so.
Touching the key results in either an ‘OK to remove archive media’, or a ‘DO NOT REMOVE Archive Me-
dia! message, as appropriate. See figure 3.1.4i
CAUTION
Removal of memory devices such as SD cards or Compact Flash cards whilst archiving is taking
place can lead to permanent, irreparable damage to the device, rendering it unusable.
Archive Media DO NOT REMOVE Archive Media!

OK to remove archive media Will advise when OK to remove...
Ok Cancel
Figure 3.1.4i Remove archive media messages
HA028910 User Guide

3.2 NAVIGATION KEYS

Above the lower edge of the display screen are six keys (as shown below, for the small frame unit) which
allow the user to perform various context-related tasks such as to change the display mode (section 3.4),
to access the recorder configuration, to archive data, to select groups etc. In addition to this, left and
right arrow keys or open/close folder keys appear when relevant.
Page up Page down Left Right Option Root
Close Open Left Right

folder folder cursor cursor
Figure 3.2 Navigation keys
3.2.1 Key functions

Page up Used, as appropriate, to recall the previous (higher level) display page, to call the previous
display mode and to scroll through previous text entries.
Where relevant, the function of this key is mimicked by the ‘Close folder’ key.
Page down Used, where appropriate, to call a further (lower level) display page, to call the next display
mode and to scroll through previous text entries.
Where relevant, the function of this key is mimicked by the ‘Open folder’ key.
Left arrow Used a) to select the previous group, b) to navigate backwards through a text string when
editing or c) to select the previous channel whilst in configuration. Where relevant, the
function of this key is mimicked by the ‘Left cursor’ key.
Right arrow Used a) to select the next group, b) to navigate forwards through a text string when editing
or c) to select the next channel whilst in configuration. Where relevant, the function of this
key is mimicked by the ‘Right cursor’ key.
Option Calls a pop-up Options menu allowing the user to carry out functions such as entering/
quitting history, turning channel cycling on and off etc. according to context.
Root Calls the ‘Root Menu’ as described below. To quit the Root menu, touch the root key again.
ROOT MENU KEYS
Home Causes a return to the ‘Home’ page from any page in the recorder. As delivered, the
‘Home’ page is the Group 1, vertical trend display as depicted in figure 3, but this can be
edited (in Config/Views) to be any of the other available groups’ display modes - Horizontal
trend, Vertical bargraph etc.
Operator Causes the top level Operator page to appear. The appearance of this display is dictated by
the security level that the recorder is set to, and by the access level of the user. As despatched
from the factory, the recorder is in ‘logged out’ mode and the Operator page contains only
‘Archive’, ‘Security’ and ‘System’ keys. Further details appear in ‘Access to configuration’ below.
File Allows the file system in that area of Flash memory that is accessible to the user, and the file
system on any bulk storage device fitted, to be viewed. See section 5 for details.
Remove Media This key is provided to help ensure that any local memory storage device is removed only when
it is ‘safe’ to do so. Touching the key results in either an ‘OK to remove archive media’, or a ‘DO
NOT REMOVE Archive Media! message, as appropriate. For more details see section 3.1.4.
Unlock Flap Replaces ‘Remove Media’ (above) for recorders fitted with the lockable flap option (section
2.4).
Goto View Allows the user to select the display mode for the current group, as shown in figure 3.2.1a.
Display modes not enabled for this group in Config/Views configuration page (section
4.3.4) do not appear. As an alternative, display modes can be scrolled-through using the
up and down arrow navigation keys.
Goto View also offers an alternative means of entry to the Alarm Summary page described in
section 3.1.4, and also allows entry to the current group’s Message Log pages, described below.
User Guide HA028910

3.2.1 KEY FUNCTIONS (Cont.)
ROOT MENU KEYS (Cont.)
Goto Group Allows a group to be selected for display. Groups which are not ‘display enabled’ in the
Config/Views page (section 4.3.4) are greyed. An alarm icon appears (as shown for groups
1 and 4, in figure 3.2.1b, below) for any group containing one or more points in alarm. The
icon flashes if any of the group’s alarms have not been acknowledged.
Notes:
1. If there is insufficient space on the display screen for all the enabled groups or views, ‘More...’
keys appear, as necessary, to allow further items to be displayed for selection.
2. In normal operating (e.g. trend) displays, the right arrow key can be used to scroll through
groups in ascending group number order. The left arrow key can be used to scroll through
groups in descending group number order.
Root Menu
Home Operator
File Remove Media
Goto View Goto Group
Goto View: Group 1
Alarm Summary Message Log
Vertical Trend Horizontal Trend

A display mode appears only if it is enabled for the
current group.
Circular Trend Vertical Bargraph
User screen keys appear only if a User Screens
Horizontal Bargraph Numeric Page option is fitted and the relevant screen is enabled
for the current group.
User Screen 1 User Screen 2
See Views configuration (section 4.3.4) for enable/
disable details.
User Screen 3 More...
Figure 3.2.1a Root menu with Goto View sub menu
Goto Group
Root Menu Group 2
Group 1
Home Operator
Group 3
File Remove Media Group 4
Goto View Goto Group Group 5 Group 6

Groups which are not display
enabled in 'Views' configuration
(section 4.3.4) are 'greyed'.
Figure 3.2.1b Root menu with Goto Group sub menu
HA028910 User Guide

3.2.1 KEY FUNCTIONS (Cont.)

ALARM SUMMARY
The Root menu/Goto View/Alarm summary key calls the Alarm summary page for the current group to
the screen. Alternatively, Alarm summary can be selected from the Alarm, Message and Media menu,
but in this case, the user must select an alarm summary group from a pop-up (Goto Group) menu. See
section 3.1.4 for more details of the alarm summary page.
MESSAGE LOG
The Root menu/Goto View/Message log key calls the Message Log page for the current group to the
screen. Alternatively, Message Log can be selected from the Alarm, Message and Media menu, but in
this case, the user must select a ‘Group’ for the Message Log display from a pop-up (Goto Group) menu.
See section 3.1.4 for full details of the message log.
User Guide HA028910

3.3 FIRST SWITCH-ON

When power is applied the recorder initialises, and once this process is complete, the home page is
displayed. It is unlikely that this will contain any useful information because the input channels will not, as
yet, have been configured to suit the type of input signals being applied to them, as described in section
4.
Notes:
1 There is no on/off switch associated with the recorder.
2 Date, time and the message ‘Power Up’ are printed on the chart each time power is applied to
the recorder, followed by a similar message giving ‘Config Revision’ and ‘Security Revision’.
3 A red line is drawn across the width of the chart at power up
The recorder has four security levels as follows:
Logged out Initially, no access to recorder configuration is possible. Only Archive, Login/security and
the System ‘About’ functions can be accessed - via the root menu. Limited or full access
can be permitted from ‘Engineer’ level.
Operator* No access to recorder configuration is possible until access permissions have been set up.
Section 4.4.1 describes how limited or full access can be permitted by an operator with
‘Engineer’ level access.
Engineer* Accessed initially, by entering ‘100’ as the password (section 3.3.1, below). Full access to all
recorder functions is available. Section 4.4.1 describes how the Engineer level password
can be edited and an Operator password can be entered if required. The section also de-
scribes how access permission to some or all of the recorder functions can be granted, or
not, to individual user names and default security levels (except ‘Service’).
Service Full access to all recorder functions and to areas of recorder memory for diagnostic pur-
poses. For use only by Service Engineers.
*Note: For units with the Auditor 21CFR11 Option enabled, the default Engineer and Operator
passwords are both ‘100’.
HA028910 User Guide

3.3.1 Access to Configuration

1 As shown in figure 3.3.1a, once the recorder has initialised, touch the current access level key
2 Touch the ‘Logged out’ field and then touch ‘Engineer’ from the resulting picklist.
3 Touch the blank Password area to call the keyboard display (see figure 3.3.1b).
4 Touch <Numeric><1><0><0><OK> to enter the password ‘100’. The screen reverts to the ‘Home’
page.
5 Operation of the Root key followed by a touch on the Operator key calls the top level page allowing
access to the Archive, Save/Restore, Config, Security, Network and System areas described in sec-
tion 4 below.
1
Touch Current
access level key Logged out Group name 11:52:59
05/04/05
Channel 1 0.0237V
0.0000 0.2000 0.4000 0.6000 0.8000 1.0000
Login 11:52:04
05/04/05
Select the required access level and enter the password if
required.
2
User Logged out Touch 'logged out'
area...
Logged out
Operator
...then touch access
Engineer level required. 11:49:24
05/04/05
Service
3
Touch the password window when it appears, and enter the password.
The Engineer level password is '100' when the unit is despatched from
the factory. Passwords can be edited in 'Security' as described in sec-
tion 4.4.1.
The screen reverts to the home page, with the new access level dis- 11:46:44
played in the 'Current access level' key 05/04/05
Close
Figure 3.3.1a Access to configuration
Notes:
1. For units which have the Auditor 21CFR11 Option enabled, the default Operator password is
‘100’. Otherwise no password is required for default Operator level access. In either case the
Operator access level password can be edited in ‘Security’ configuration. (Section 4.4.1.)
2. The login screen, above, can also be called by operating the Root menu, then ‘Operator’ then
‘Security’, then ‘Login’. In such a case, the screen reverts to the ‘Operator’ page rather than
returning to the home page once login has been achieved.
3. Figure 3.3.1a shows ‘Login by user list’ which is the default method. If either Auditor option
and/or the Security management option is enabled, an alternative procedure is possible where
each user has to enter a name and associated password - i.e. there is no list of users/access
levels to choose from. See section 4.4.2 (Management) for details.
4. For Active Directory users, a password expiry warning message (below) pops up on log-in,
stating how many days remain before the password expires (configured at the Active Directory
server).
Warning
Fred password expires in 2 days
Ok
User Guide HA028910

3.3.1 ACCESS TO CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

TROUBLE SHOOTING
For Active directory users, if login fails, check that the Active Directory Server system alarm is not active
(section 3.1.3) and that one of the TLS options is enabled (section 4.5.1). At the Active Directory server,
check that the password has not expired and that ‘Change Password at next login’ has not been enabled.
TEXT STRING ENTRY

The keyboard which appears when the password area is touched is the same as that which appears when
any non-numeric text string entry is required (e.g. channel descriptor). Figures 3.3.1b and 3.3.1c below
are an attempt, within the limitations of the illustrating process, to depict the available keyboards and
thus the available character set. Actual entry of the text string is by touching the relevant keys.
When editing existing text strings, the existing text string appears highlighted, and will be replaced in its
entirety by the first character entered. To avoid this, the left arrow key* can be touched to ‘unhighlight’ it.
The down and up arrow keys can be used to scroll through previously entered text strings.
Immediately below the keyboard are six keys with the functions listed below. When active, the back-
ground colour changes to yellow for as long as the key is active.
Shift* Once the shift key has been pressed, the next-entered letter appears as a capital; subse-
quent letters are in lower case.
Caps* When pressed, all subsequent letters appear as capital letters until the Caps key is oper-
ated again
BSpc This backspace key deletes character to the left of the cursor.
Ovr If selected, the next-entered character replaces (overwrites) the existing character to the
right of the cursor position. If not selected, the next-entered character in inserted into the
existing text string at the cursor position.
Ok Used to save the new text string and to return to the page from which the keyboard was called.
Cancel Causes a return to the page from which the keyboard was called without saving the new string.
*Notes
1. The character on each display key is always a capital letter, whether or not the actual character
being entered is in capitals or lower case.
2. The cursor keys mimic the function of the left and right arrow Navigation keys.
3. As an alternative, text may be entered using a suitable keyboard connected via the USB port
behind the access flap or (if the relevant option is fitted) one of the USB ports at the rear of the
instrument (section 2.2.1).
Cursor keys
Text string
(all * for password) **
Q W E R T Y U I O P
A S D F G H J K L ˚
Z X C V B N M \ .
Tabs show Alphabet Alphabet 2 Numeric Symbols

active keyboard
(tab positions vary
according to context)
Shift Caps BSpc Ovr Ok Cancel
Shift key Backspace

Caps Lock Overprint
(shown active)
Figure 3.3.1b Alphabet 1 keyboard
HA028910 User Guide

3.3.1 ACCESS TO CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
TEXT STRING ENTRY (Cont.)
Text String
Ä Å Á À a Æ Ç É È Ë
Ê Í Ì Ï Î Ó Ò Ô Ö º
Ü Ú Ù Û ÿ Ñ α β Γ δ
ε η θ µ π Σ τ φ Ω
Alphabet Alphabet 2 Numeric Symbols
Text String
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
0 – E . ,
Text String
! " £ $ % ^ & * ( )
- _ + = { } [ ] : ;
@ ' ~ # < > , . ? /
| ' 3 – ‚ ¿ ¡ ¥ ¢ 2
Figure 3.3.1c Alternative keyboards
User Guide HA028910

3.4 DISPLAY MODES

The display modes described below allow the currently displayed group’s process values (channels, total-
isers etc.- known collectively as points) to be displayed as vertical, horizontal or circular ‘chart’ traces, as
vertical or horizontal bargraphs or as numeric values. The various display modes are cycled-through us-
ing the up/down arrow keys, or a specific mode (or view) can be selected from the Root Menu ‘Goto View’
key. Groups can be scrolled through using the left/right arrow keys. The Home key returns the user to the
Home page (defined in Configuration/Views - section 4.3.4) from anywhere in the Operator or Configura-
tion pages in the recorder. When dispatched, the Home page is Group 1, vertical trend display. See also
the Screen builder description in section 7.
TREND HISTORY
Trend history, allows the user to review group history. The maximum amount that can be reviewed
depends on a number of factors, including how many points are configured, how rapidly the traces are
changing and so on. At a recording rate of 20 mm/hour (see group configuration - section 4.3.2), with
all channels configured, a minimum of 30 day’s worth of traces is available for viewing, provided that the
group contents are not re-configured during this period (in which case, the history starts at the end of the
re-configuration). The amount of trace visible on the screen depends on the recording rate, the higher
the rate, the less trace is visible at any one time.
Notes:
1. Trend history mode is available only for groups with ‘Recording Enable’ enabled (Group con-
figuration - section 4.3.2) and only for vertical, horizontal or circular trend display modes.
2. Trend history mode is vertical for vertical and circular trend modes and horizontal for horizontal
trend mode.
3. Channel cycling is inhibited in trend history mode. To increment the current channel, touch the
faceplate.
4. Group faceplates are not displayed in trend history mode.
5. Operation of the Root/Goto View/Message Log key (section 3.2.1), when in history mode, dis-
plays a message log page containing messages which occurred at or near the selected cursor
time.
6. With A/B switching selected, traces are displayed with the ‘A’ or ‘B’ span/zone, colour settings
etc. obtaining at the cursor time. See sections 4.3.2, 4.3.3 and 4.7, for more details of A/B
switching.
To enter trend history mode, the option key can be used (as shown for vertical trend mode in figure
3.4.1b), or the trace area of the screen can be continuously touched until the screen blanks prior to re-
drawing. A ‘Preparing History, please wait’ message appears whilst the re-drawing calculation is taking
place. Although tracing stops whilst trace history mode is active, no data is lost. Process Variable values
are saved in the recorder memory. Alarms are still scanned-for and any associated action taken.
The trend history display is similar to the real-time trend display, but with a dark background and with the
addition of a slider control and arrow keys for selecting that part of trend history which is to be displayed.
The controls are used as follows:
1 Touching an arrow key key causes the trace history to move an incremental amount.
2 Holding an arrow key continuously, causes continuous movement.
3 Touching and dragging the slider, whilst observing the time/date display, allows the user to select
the section of history exactly. Touching the slider bar either side of the slider causes a page shift in
the relevant direction. The Page up and Page down keys also provide this function.
On first entry to trend history mode, the channel value and the time and date shown in the faceplate
are those at the top edge of the chart. Touching the screen causes a cursor to appear at point of screen
contact. This cursor can be ‘touched and dragged’ to provide a reference point on the current trace.
The displayed value date and time refer to the cursor intersection with the current channel. To return to
real-time trending, the Option key is operated, followed by ‘Exit History’.
HA028910 User Guide

3.4 DISPLAY MODES (Cont.)

TIME CHANGE RECORDS
For vertical and horizontal trend modes a line is drawn across the width of the chart whenever a time
discontinuity in the record occurs. These lines disappear if a configuration change which causes group
history to be lost, is made (such as adding a new channel to a group).
Red line A red line is drawn on the trend history chart at power up.
Blue line A blue line indicates that recording has been disabled/enabled in Group Configuration
(section 4.3.2), or by a recording job (section 4.7.10). Blue lines are not drawn when the
Simulation Option is active.
Green line A green line appears if there has been a time change as a result of a clock job (section
4.7.6), an SNTP synchronisation or by the operator physically changing the recorder time.
Note: Changes from standard time to daylight saving time and back again are not ‘green lined’ in
this way
3.4.1 Vertical Trend display

This display (figure 3.4.1b) shows each point in the display group as though it were being traced on a
white chart. It is possible to change the appearance of the chart in the System key ‘Customise’ area of
configuration (section 4.6.10). It is recommended that some thought be given to ensuring good contrast
between trace colours and background colour.
One of the channels is said to be the ‘current’ or ‘scale’ channel. This channel is identified by its diamond
shaped pen icon and by its descriptor, digital value and scale being displayed on a ‘faceplate’ across the
full width of the screen, above the chart. If a channel is included in the display group but its status is ‘not
good’ for some reason, then its pen icon is hollow.
Faceplates for all the group channels can be displayed, by using the Faceplates On/Off key in the option
menu. If selected On, faceplates (showing colour, descriptor, digital value and units) for all the group’s
channels appear either above the current channel’s faceplate or, if there are too many to fit across the
screen, at the right hand edge of the screen. When necessary, a slider bar appears to allow further (hid-
den) faceplates to be viewed.
Each channel in the display group becomes the ‘current’ channel, in turn, for approximately 10 seconds
– i.e. the channels are cycled-through, starting with the lowest numbered channel. Once the final chan-
nel in the group has been displayed for 10 seconds, the lowest numbered channel is returned to and the
sequence repeats. This scrolling process can be enabled or disabled using the Channel Cycling On (Off)
key in the Option menu.
To select a particular channel to be the current channel, the relevant pen icon can be touched. To cycle
through the channels manually, the faceplate area is touched repeatedly until the required channel is
reached.
The Horizontal Trend display can be called using the down arrow key. Alternatively, any one of the ena-
bled display modes (section 4.3.4) can be selected using the Root Menu, ‘Goto View’ key.
Option Menu
Option Batch
Key
Note
Faceplates On/Off
Channel Cycling Off
Enter History
Figure 3.4.1a Option Menu (Typical)
User Guide HA028910

3.4.1 VERTICAL TREND DISPLAY (Cont.)

Home
Group faceplates (appear only if
Faceplates selected On from
option menu). If there are too
Trend display mode many faceplates to fit across the
Engineer Group name 11:52:59 screen, they appear down the
right edge instead.
05/04/05
Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6
700.87˚C 487.39˚C 235.68˚C 378.99˚C 0.49V 0.85V
Channel 1 700.87
400.00 480.00 560.00 640.00 720.00 800.00 Faceplate for current
11:52:04
05/04/05 channel.
05/04/05 11:51:33 Alarms(s) off 3(1)
Touch and release face-
plate to increment channel
(or touch pen to select

11:49:24
05/04/05
channel).
05/04/05 11:47:51 Alarms(s) on 3(1)

If Channel Cycle On:
Current channel incre-
11:46:44
ments every 10 seconds.
05/04/05
Option Menu
Batch
Note
Faceplates On/Off
Channel Cycling Off
Enter History
Preparing History, please wait

Trend History mode Real time/date
Engineer Group name 11:53:09
04/05/04
Channel 1
400.00 480.00 560.00 640.00
686.84 ˚C
720.00
04/05/04 11:49:54
800.00
Cursor time/date
(Touch faceplate to
increment channel.)
Value at cursor 11:52:04
05/04/05
05/04/05 18:33:04 Alarms(s) off 3(1)

time/date Press bar to
move one
pageful
Press 11:49:24
arrow keys 05/04/05
Cursor to move
minimum
amount
05/04/05 18:28:22 Alarms(s) on 3(1)
14:46:44
05/04/05
Page Page Option Menu

forwards in time backwards in time Batch
(show newer data) (Show older data)
Note
Exit History
Message Log
Figure 3.4.1b Trend display mode and trend history mode
HA028910 User Guide

3.4.2 Horizontal Trend display

Entered from the Vertical Trend display by means of the down arrow key, or selected via the Root Menu
‘Goto View’ key, this display mode (figure 3.4.2a) is similar to the Vertical Trend display described in sec-
tion 3.4.1 above, except that the traces are produced horizontally rather than vertically.

06/04/05
Channel 1 7 0 0 . 8 7˚C
800
Faceplates for current Current pen icon

channel.
Touch either faceplate to
increment channel Bargraph
(or touch pen to select
channel). Non-current
pen icon
Time
(at adjacent gridline) Alarm mark
(Abs High)
14:11:00 14:13:40 14:16:20

06/04/05 06/04/05 06/04/05
400
06/04/05 12:02:20 Alarm(s) off 2 (1)
Message bar Latest message If this arrow head is displayed,

then touching the message bar
displays previous messages
Figure 3.4.2a Horizontal Trend Display
One of the channels is defined as being the ‘current’ or ‘scale’ channel and this is identified on the chart
by its pen icon being diamond shaped rather than triangular as for non-current channels. If a channel
is included in the display group, but its status is ‘not good’ for some reason, then its pen icon is hollow.
Each channel in the display group becomes the ‘current’ channel, in turn, for approximately 10 seconds
– i.e. the channels are cycled-through, starting with the lowest numbered channel. Once the final chan-
nel in the group has been displayed for 10 seconds, the lowest numbered channel is returned to and the
sequence repeats. This scrolling process can be stopped using the Channel Cycling key in the Option
menu.
There are two faceplates associated with this display mode, one above the ‘chart’, showing the current
channel’s descriptor and its digital value; the other - to the right of the ‘chart’ - showing a bargraph rep-
resentation of the current channel’s value, together with a scale showing the low and high range values
for the channel. Touching either of these faceplates causes the current channel number to increment.
To select a particular channel to be the current channel, the relevant pen icon can be touched. In either
case, the bargraph and the background colour of the channel descriptor take the colour of the new cur-
rent channel.
Touching the trace for a few seconds, or using the Option key then ‘Enter History’ calls the Horizontal
trend history page. See section 3.4, above for more details.
Time and date are printed on the ‘chart’ immediately to the right of grid lines, and it is to these grid lines
that the printed time and date relate.
User Guide HA028910

3.4.2 HORIZONTAL TREND MODE (Cont.)

Below the ‘chart’ is a message bar, containing the latest message. If there is more than one message, an
arrow head icon appears near the right-hand end of the message bar. If this arrow head appears, then
touching the message bar calls a pop-up box (figure 3.4.2b) which displays the latest messages. If there
are more messages than can be displayed in the box, a slider control appears, which can be used to ac-
cess previous messages, up to a total of 60 messages. Further messages, cause the oldest messages to
be discarded to keep the total to 60.
Note: At power-up, only those messages which occurred within the ‘time width’ of the page are
displayed

06/04/05
Channel 1 7 0 0 . 8 7˚C
800
View Messages
06/04/05 12:02:20 Batch Number 050406-3
06/04/05 11:11:41 Config Revision:218 Security
Revision:3
06/04/05 11:09:34 Alarm(s) on 1 (1)
06/04/05 11:09:26 Alarm(s) off 1 (2)
06/04/05 11:07:41 Alarm(s) on 1 (2)
06/04/05 11:07:34 Alarm(s) off 1 (1)
06/04/05 11:05:34 Alarm(s) on 1 (1)
06/04/05 11:05:26 Alarm(s) off 1 (2)
06/04/05 11:03:41 Alarm(s) on 1 (2)
06/04/05 11:03:34 Alarm(s) off 1 (1)
06/04/05 11:01:34 Alarm(s) on 1 (1)
06/04/05 11:01:26 Alarm(s) off 1 (2)
06/04/05 10:59:41 Alarm(s) on 1 (2)
06/04/05 10:59:34 Alarm(s) off 1 (1)
06/04/05 10:57:34 Batch Number 050406-2
06/04/05 10:55:41 Config Revision:218 Security
Revision:3
06/04/05 10:55:34 Batch start (Engineer))
Ok
14:11:00 14:13:40 14:16:20
06/04/05 06/04/05 06/04/05
400
06/04/05 12:02:20 Alarm(s) off 2 (1)
Figure 3.4.2b Horizontal Trend mode message dialogue box
The circular trend mode, if enabled, can be called by using the down arrow key. Alternatively, any one of
the enabled display modes (section 4.3.4) can be selected using the Root Menu, ‘Goto View’ key.
HA028910 User Guide

3.4.3 Circular Trend

This allows up to 12 points to be traced as though on a circular chart. More than 12 points can be in-
cluded in the group, but only the first 12 traces and their associated faceplates are included in the real-
time display. Entering Trend History mode (by using the Options button or by continuously touching the
screen for a few seconds), allows all the points to be reviewed, but only in vertical trend history mode,
described in section 3.4 above.
For large frame recorders, two alternative views called ‘Full Screen’ and ‘Normal View’ are available and
are toggled between by means of a push-button key near the top left corner of the screen. In each case,
faceplates can be displayed, or not, as required, using the Option key ‘Faceplates On/Off’ selection. The
diameter of the chart is independent of faceplate on/off selection. When quitting History, Normal view
is always returned to. Small frame recorders use only ‘full screen’ view, (except when viewed via Bridge
software when the small frame recorder behaves in the same way as the large frame recorder).
Notes Alarm icons (section 3) do not appear on circular trend scales.
TREND MODES
The way in which traces are laid down on the chart depends on the action to be taken when the chart is
‘full’, as set up in group configuration - section 4.3.2. The user can select ‘Rotate’ or ‘New Chart’.
ROTATE
In the following description, the word ‘segment’ is used interchangeably with ‘Major chart division’. The
number of Major chart divisions is a function of the selected chart speed, as described in Group Configu-
ration (section 4.3.2).
With ‘Rotate’ selected, the traces start one major chart division anti-clockwise from the top of the chart
and trace clockwise until they reach the top of the chart (‘12 o’clock’). At this point, the chart, complete
with time stamps and traces, rotates one major chart division anticlockwise, and the tracing process con-
tinues. When the chart is ‘full’, the oldest segment-full of tracing is removed, leaving an empty segment
to be traced-on when the chart rotates.
Figures 3.4.3b and 3.4.3c, below show Circular trending in ‘Rotate’ mode.
NEW CHART
With ‘New Chart’ selected, tracing starts at top of the chart (12 o’clock) and continue to trace clockwise
round the chart, back up to the vertical. When the chart is full, it is cleared, new timestamps are dis-
played, and tracing restarts from the top of the chart.
The start time of the tracing can be set as a part (‘Start at’) of group configuration, the choices available
depending on the time per revolution setting. The start time is placed at top centre of the chart, and
‘backfilled’, clockwise, round to the current time.
Figure 3.4.3a, below, shows New Chart mode.
Note: The use of ‘12 o’clock’ above is intended to be illustrative and only to explain angles in
terms of a normal analogue clock face. It does not mean that this position must actually be noon
or midnight in real time.
User Guide HA028910

3.4.3 CIRCULAR TREND (Cont.)
06/04/05 10:00
10:55 10:05
10:50 10:10
10:45 10:15
10:40 10:20
10:35 10:25
10:30
Figure 3.4.3a Circular trend - New chart mode
NORMAL VIEW
Normal view is available only for large frame recorders (also small frame recorders when viewed via
Bridge software). As shown in figure 3.4.3b, below, this provides a view of the chart, together with scale,
chart speed, message bar and navigation keys. The figure shows a view with faceplates selected on.
Logged out Group name 11:05:33

06/04/05
Furnace 1 Temp 13 897.3476˚C 1 hr/rev Furnace 1 Te..
Full Screen
1500.0000 0.0000 0.0000 1500.000
1125.0956˚C
06/04/05 10:10 Chart Speed
Scale for left half
06/04/05 11:05 Scale for10:15
14/08/02 right
of chart half of chart Furnace 1 Te..
1113.9806˚C
06/04/05 11:00 06/04/05 2 10:20
Furnace 1 Te..
1200.9456˚C
06/04/05 10:55 06/04/05 10:25

Flow 1
Chart zero
1365.21l/hr
Flow 2
06/04/05 10:50 06/04/05 10:30
1299.65l/hr
Chart Full scale

Flow 3
06/04/05 10:45 06/04/05 10:35
06/04/05 10:40 989.54l/hr
06/04/05 11:07:52 Engineer,Restarted 11:07
Figure 3.4.3b Circular Trend normal view (with faceplates)
HA028910 User Guide


NORMAL VIEW FEATURES
Scales Two scales are provided, one for the left hand side of the chart, the other for the right hand
side. Channel scaling is a part of channel configuration, as described in section 4.3.3,
below. The scales apply only to values along the horizontal line through the centre of
the chart. Values for other angles (times) can be most easily found from the trace history,
selected from the Option key, or by touching anywhere in the chart or in the green back-
ground area for a few seconds.
Chart speed This displays the currently selected speed of revolution of the chart. This speed is set up as
a part of Group configuration (section 4.3.2)
Faceplates Up to 12 faceplates can be displayed, giving point values and alarm indication.
Message Bar The message bar at the bottom of the screen displays the latest message. If an up arrow
appears at the right hand end of the bar, there is more than one message. Touching the
message bar calls a ‘View Messages’ window, detailing previous messages. See the de-
scription in section 3.4.2 for more details.
FULL SCREEN DISPLAY
As shown in figure 3.4.3c, below, this maximizes the chart diameter, leaving only the chart, chart speed
and faceplates (if selected on) on display. The figure shows a view with faceplates selected off. For the
large frame recorder, faceplate on/off selection can be made only from one of the other display modes,
as the navigation keys are not visible in this display mode.

06/04/05
Normal View
06/04/05 10:10 1 hr/rev
06/04/05 11:05 06/04/05 10:15
06/04/05 11:00 06/04/05 10:20
06/04/05 10:55 06/04/05 10:25
06/04/05 10:50 06/04/05 10:30
06/04/05 10:45 06/04/05 10:35
06/04/05 10:40
Figure 3.4.3c Circular Trend full screen view (with faceplates selected off)
FULL SCREEN FEATURES

Faceplates As described above for Normal View features
User Guide HA028910


TIMESTAMPS
Time and/or date are displayed at every major chart division. The following rules apply:
1. For chart durations of a week or more, only the date is displayed
2. For chart durations of less than a week, both time and date appear, with the following exception:
In ‘New Chart’ mode (unless the chart ‘bridges’ midnight), the date appears only at top centre of the
chart. All other chart divisions are identified by time only.
OTHER NOTES
1. Adaptive recording results in two traces per trend, as in other trend display modes.
2. For successful circular trend display, ‘Circular Settings’ must be enabled for the relevant group (sec-
tion 4.3.2), and ‘Circular Trend’ must be enabled for the group, in Views configuration (section 4.3.4).
If Circular Trend is enabled, but Circular Settings is disabled, then, although the circular chart will
appear, it is unlikely that it will contain any trends.
3. The circular chart speed is unaffected by A/B switching of Trend Speed/Interval (section 4.3.2).
4. Circular trends backfill only to the previous power up.
HA028910 User Guide

3.4.4 Vertical bargraph

Entered from Circular Trend mode by means of the down arrow key, or selected from the Root Menu
‘Goto View’ key, this display mode shows the Process Variable (PV) values as vertical bars with faceplates
containing digital values and alarm data. There are two versions, one with faceplates above the bars (1 to
6 channels - figure 3.4.4a); the other (with faceplates at the right hand edge of the display - figure 3.4.4b)
is used where there are more than six channels.
Note: The description above refers to the 180 mm version of the recorder. For the 100 mm ver-
sion, the faceplates appear above the bars for one or two points, but to the right of the bars for
three or more points.
Operation of the option key calls the Option menu display for this display page, allowing faceplates to be
selected on or off. This feature is available for vertical trend, circular trend and vertical bargraph displays
only.
To call the horizontal bargraph display mode, use the down arrow key. Alternatively, any one of the ena-
bled display modes (section 4.3.4) can be selected using the Root Menu, ‘Goto View’ key.
Trend history mode is not available from this display mode.
FACEPLATES ABOVE THE BARS

See figure 3.4.4a.
As the number of channels in the display group increases, the bars and their faceplates get narrower,
FACEPLATES AT RIGHT-HAND EDGE

See figure 3.4.4b.
As the number of PVs increases, the bars get narrower. As the bars get narrower, so the scale values
become truncated as shown in figure 3.4.4b. The bars have a set minimum width, and if the total number
of points in the group cannot be displayed within the width of the screen, a horizontal scroll bar appears,
allowing ‘hidden’ bars to be viewed. Similarly, the faceplates reduce in height to a minimum readable
height. If there are more point faceplates than can be accommodated within the height of the screen, a
vertical scroll bar appears, allowing hidden faceplates to be displayed as required.
User Guide HA028910

3.4.4 VERTICAL BARGRAPH (Cont.)

06/04/05
Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5
700.87˚C 487.39˚C 235.68˚C 378.99˚C 0.49V
800.00 800.00 400.00 400.00 1.00
400.00 400.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Figure 3.4.4a Vertical bargraph display (1 to 6 channels)

06/04/05
80? 80? 40? 40? 1.0 1.0 80? 80? 40? 40? 1.0 Channel
1.0 500 500 500 500 500 500 100 100 100 100 100 100 1
700.87 C
Channel 2
487.39 C
Channel 3
235.68 C
Channel 4
378.99 C
Channel 5
0.49
Channel 6
0.85
Channel 7
689.43 C
Channel 8
483.72 C
Channel 9
255.81 C
Channel 10
375.01 C
Channel 11
0.53V
Channel 12
0.79
Channel 13
235
40? 40? 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 40? 40? 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0Channel 14
235
Figure 3.4.4b Vertical bargraph display (more than 6 channels)
HA028910 User Guide

3.4.5 Horizontal bargraph

Entered from Vertical bargraph by means of the down arrow key, or selected using the Root Menu ‘Goto
View’ key, this display mode shows the Process Variable (PV) values as horizontal bars with digital values
and alarm data displayed, as shown in figures 3.4.5a and 3.4.5b.
Notes:
1. For large frame recorders, single column format is used when there are up to 12 channels in the
display group; double column for more than 12 channels. For small frame recorders, only the
single column mode is employed, with a scroll bar when necessary.
2. For large frame recorders, up to 26 points can be displayed simultaneously; for small frame
recorders the maximum is 5 points. In either case, if more points are enabled than can be
displayed within the height of the screen, a vertical scroll bar appears allowing currently hidden
channels to be accessed.
To call numeric display mode, use the down arrow key. Alternatively, any one of the enabled display
modes (section 4.3.4) can be selected using the Root Menu, ‘Goto View’ key.
User Guide HA028910

3.4.5 HORIZONTAL BARGRAPH (Cont.)

06/04/05
Channel 1 700.87˚C
400.00 800.00
Channel 2 487.39˚C
400.00 800.00
Channel 3 235.68˚C
0.00 400.00
Channel 4 378.99˚C
0.00 400.00
Channel 5 0.49V
0.00 1.00
Figure 3.4.5a Horizontal bargraph display (single column example)

06/04/05
Channel 1 Channel 2 700.87˚C
400.00 800.00 400.00 800.00

0.00 400.00 0.00 400.00
Channel 5 0.49V Channel 6 0.85V
700.87˚C
0.00 1.00 0.00 1.00
400.00 800.00 400.00 800.00

0.00 400.00 0.00 400.00

Channel 11 0.53V Channel 12 0.79V
700.87˚C
0.00 1.00 0.00 1.00
Channel 13 235V Channel 14 235V
700.87˚C
0 500 0 500
Channel 15 235V Channel 16 320A

700.87˚C
0 500 0 500
Channel 17 316A Channel 18 332A

700.87˚C
0 500 0 500
Channel 19 64% Channel 20 54%
700.87˚C
0 100 0 100
700.87˚C
0 100 0 100

700.87˚C
0 100 0 100
Figure 3.4.5b Horizontal bargraph display (dual column example)
HA028910 User Guide

3.4.6 Numeric
Entered from Horizontal bargraph mode by means of the down arrow key, or selected using the Root
Menu ‘Goto View’ key, this display mode shows the Process Variable (PV) values as digital values. The
format (which is automatically selected) is based on the number of channels in the display group. Figures
3.4.6a, 3.4.6b and 3.4.6c, show typical (large frame) examples of the one, two and three column versions
of this display mode respectively. Within each version, the process variable display areas expand or con-
tract to fill the screen.
A further operation of the down arrow key returns to Vertical Trend Display mode described in section
3.4.1 above, or if user screens are fitted and enabled, to the first user screen (section 7). Alternatively, any
one of the enabled display modes (section 4.3.4) can be selected using the Root Menu, ‘Goto View’ key.
06/04/05
Channel 1
700.87
Channel 2
487.39
Channel 3
235.68
Channel 4
378.99
Channel 5
0.49
Figure 3.4.6a Numeric display mode (1 to 5 channels example)
Note: Figures 3.4.6a, b and c apply to the large frame instrument. For the small frame instrument,
the single column display (figure 3.4.6a) is used for groups with up to four points enabled, and the
two column display (figure 3.4.6b) is used, with scroll bar if necessary, for groups with more than
four points. The small frame recorder does not employ a three-column mode (figure 3.4.6c).
User Guide HA028910

3.4.6 NUMERIC DISPLAY MODES (Cont.)

06/04/05
Channel 1 Channel 2
700.87 487.39
Channel 3 Channel 4
235.68 378.99
Channel 5 Channel 6
0.49 0.85 V
Figure 3.4.6b Numeric display mode example (6 channels)

06/04/05
Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
700.87 487.39 235.68

378.99 0.49 V 0.85 V

689.43 483.72 255.81

375.01 0.53 V 0.79 V

235 V 235 V 235 V

320 A 316 A 331 A

Channel 19
64 %
Figure 3.4.6c Numeric display mode example (19 channels)
HA028910 User Guide

3.5 OPERATOR NOTES

Note: Operator notes should not be confused with similar messages, (described in section 4.3.8),
which appear as a result of job action.
It is possible for the user to enter a note, of up to 120 characters, at any time, from any display page (not
from configuration pages). Each note is associated with the current display group and becomes a part of
that group’s history. The notes appear on vertical and horizontal trend displays only, although they can
be entered in any display mode.
The note appears on the chart and in the Message Log, preceded by the date, time and current full user
name, as shown in the first example below. If ‘Audit Trail’ is enabled, the note contains audit trail informa-
tion, as shown in the second example below. See section 4.4.2 for details of the Auditor options.
06/04/06 13:51:11 Frederick Bloggs, New Spray nozzles fitted to Line A, Tube 1.
Date and time Full user name Message
06/04/06 13:51:11 Note, Signed:Engineer,Authorized:Engineer,New Spray nozzles fitted to Line A, Tube 1.
Date and time Audit trail information (if enabled) Message
To enter a message:
1. Press the Option key, then the ‘Note’ key
2. If necessary enter Signature and Authorization passwords (Auditor 21CFR11 option only - see section
4.4.2).
3. Touch the note area of the resulting pop-up display (see note below).
4. Enter the required text of up to 120 characters (spaces are also counted as characters). Press Ok
when finished.
5. View the note and
a. press the Ok button to enter the note OR
b. re-touch the text area to edit the note OR
c. press the Cancel key to quit note entry.
Option Menu
Batch
Option
Key
Note Note
Faceplates On/Off
Operator Note
Channel Cycling Off
Operator Notes list.
00:0A:8D:00:20:A0
Appears if note area is touched contin-
Enter
uously for History(approx).
2 seconds AM Shift started
List entries are made in Instrument
AM Shift finished
Configuration (section 4.3.1)
PM Shift started
PM Shift finished
Figure 3.5 Access to Note entry page
Note: Touching the note area continuously for two seconds or more, causes a list of pre-defined
messages to appear. Touching one of these messages selects it as the operator note, which can
then be edited in the normal way (if required) before the OK key is operated. There are a maxi-
mum of 13 pre-defined messages, 12 of which are user editable in the Configuration/instrument
menu (section 4.3.1), the 13th being the non-editable MAC address of the recorder.
User Guide HA028910

4 SETTING UP THE RECORDER

As described in the ‘Access to Configuration’ (section 3.3.1) above, the setting-up of the recorder is di-
vided into the following areas:
Archive Section 4.1 - Allows manual archiving of data to a memory device or to a remote host (FTP
transfer).
Save/restore Section 4.2 - Allows new configurations to be created and saved, and saved configurations
to be ‘restored’. Save/Restore also allows the importing and exporting of User Linearisa-
tion Tables and, if the relevant options are fitted, User Screens and Printer Drivers.
Config Section 4.3 - This is the major channel/alarm option etc. area of configuration.
Security Section 4.4 - Allows passwords to be entered and edited and allows the Engineer-level
password holder to enable/disable areas of configuration to Operator-level password
holders. New users can be added, with their own user names, passwords and access level
permissions.
Network Section 4.5 - This area sets up the IP address/host names etc. used in FTP transfer, Bridge
and SNTP applications.
System Section 4.6 - Allows
a) Time and date to be set (Clock).
b) Language, date/time format, time zone, and daylight saving start and finish dates to
be set (Locale).
c) Software upgrades to be carried out (Upgrade).
d) Input channels to be adjusted for errors in transducer inputs (Input Adjust).
e) Output channels (if fitted) to be adjusted (Output Adjust - see section 9.4).
f) A Master Comms Diagnostics page to be displayed (if Master Comms option fitted
and enabled).
g) A Network diagnostics page to be displayed (Ethernet diagnostics).
h) Configuration items (e.g. input channels) to be copied, to speed up configuration
(Copy).
i) Search criteria to be entered to allow the user to locate trigger sources for a specific
job (Job search).
j) The appearance of the display screens to be customised (Customise).
k) Details of the hardware and software associated with the recorder to be displayed
(About).
Note: In all the following descriptions, if a change is made to a menu item, then the item text
changes to red, until it is ‘applied’
HA028910 User Guide

4.1 ARCHIVE
Notes:
1. The archiving functions described below can also be initiated by job action - see section 4.7.15.
2. Archiving is carried out on a group by group basis, with a message being sent to each group
when its archive is finished. When all the groups have been archived, a pop-up appears to
inform the user that archiving is complete. Because of the sequential nature of this process, the
time given in this pop-up is different from the times which appear in the messages generated
for the individual groups.
3. For floppy disk drives (connected via a USB port), it is not recommended that archiving be ena-
bled for more than one group (see ‘Group’ configuration - section 4.3.2)
4.1.1 Local Archive
CAUTION
Removal of the memory device whilst archiving is in progress causes irreparable damage to the
filing structure on the device, rendering it unusable. For this reason, archiving should be sus-
pended before the device is removed. It is strongly recommended that the ‘Remove Media’ facility
described in section 3.1.4 (Summary menu) be used to ensure that it is safe to remove the memory
device. For recorders fitted with a lockable flap, see also section 2.4.
Archive Save/Restore Config Security Network System
Local Last Archive 13/09/2005 11:02:42

Remote Media mediacard Select Media card or USB port
Bring Archive Up To Date

Section 4.1.2
Archive Last Hour
Archive Last Day
Archive Last 7 Days
Archive Last 31 Days
Archive All
Suspend Archiving
Cancel Archive
Archive Transfer Inactive

Media Full 08/09/2006 00:34:57
Media Size 31954944 Bytes
Free Space 28786688 Bytes
Figure 4.1.1 Local archive configuration
Local archive allows the user to initiate data transfer to the device defined in the ‘Media’ picklist for all
groups with ‘Archive to Media’ enabled (Group configuration - section 4.3.2). Archiving is initiated by
touching the relevant archive period key (e.g. Last Day’). The memory device can be selected as ‘medi-
acard’ (the integral Compact Flash or SD card), or a USB port can be selected if, for example, a memory
stick is to be the destination device. USBfront is located behind the flap below the screen. If the option
is fitted, USB 1 and USB 2 ports are located at the recorder rear panel.
Archiving starts as soon as the selection is made, and cannot be stopped until completed, unless the
Cancel Archive key is operated, in which case the archive will be stopped after a confirmatory message
has been responded to. The Cancel key is active only if ‘Archiving Control’ is enabled in Security/Access
(section 4.4) for the current login.
User Guide HA028910

4.1.1 LOCAL ARCHIVE (Cont.)

BRING ARCHIVE UP TO DATE
This causes the recorder to archive all history files created since the last manual or automatic (section
4.3.5) archive.
ARCHIVE ALL
This causes the recorder to archive all its history files.
If the memory device becomes full before archiving is complete, archiving pauses and a pop-up request
appears, asking for a replacement. If this request is not responded to within 10 minutes of its appear-
ance, archiving is aborted.
Unattended archiving can be paused by the user (e.g. to change media without losing data) by operating
the ‘Suspend Archiving’ / ‘Resume Archiving’ button. Any archiving in progress is allowed to complete
before the ‘Suspend Archiving’ request takes effect. Transfer activity is indicated in the ‘Archive transfer’
window.
Below the selection buttons are a number of status windows relating to the selected memory device.
‘Media Full’ is an estimate, based on the current configuration, of when the memory device will become
full. The meanings of the ‘Media Size’ and ‘Free Space’ values are self evident.
If automatic archiving is active (section 4.3.5), then automatic and manual archives will operate on a first
come-first served basis. Some files will be saved twice in such a circumstance, the later archive’s files
overwriting any earlier archive’s files which have the same name.
ARCHIVING WITH THE LOCKABLE FLAP OPTION

For recorders fitted with the lockable flap (section 2.4) it should be noted that when the flap is opened,
archiving is automatically suspended. It is therefore necessary to press on the ‘Resume Archiving’ key
before any attempt is made to carry out a demand archive.
Before removing the memory device, archiving should be suspended again, using the ‘Suspend Archive’
key. This ensures that the memory device can be safely removed.
HA028910 User Guide

4.1.2 Remote archiving (FTP transfer)

This allows archiving of recorder files, for all groups with ‘Archive via FTP’ enabled, to a remote computer,
connected (using the RJ45 telephone type connector at the rear of the recorder) either directly, or via a
network . ‘Archive via FTP’ is enabled/disabled as part of Group configuration - section 4.3.2.
In order to carry out a successful transfer, details of the remote host must be entered in the Archive sec-
tion of the ‘Config’ menu (section 4.3.5).
Note: An FTP server must be running on the remote host.

Figure 4.1.2 shows the menu for remote archiving. The Archive last hour/day etc. keys allow the user to
determine which files are to be archived. Selection of ‘Bring Archive Up To Date’ causes the recorder to
select whichever of the Last Hour/Last Day etc. categories is appropriate in order to bring the archive up
to date. The ‘Last Archive’ window shows the time and date of the previous archive. The Archive Transfer
window shows archive status as ‘Active’ or ‘Inactive’.
Local Last Archive 08/09/2005 12:00:00

Remote Bring Archive Up To Date
Section 4.1.1
Archive Last Hour
Archive Last Day
Archive Last 7 Days
Archive Last 31 days
Archive All
Cancel Archive
Figure 4.1.2 Remote archive strategy configuration
Additionally, a user on a remote PC has full viewing capabilities, can extract recorder files at any time, and
can access those items of recorder configuration that are associated with the user’s login. For successful
connection, ‘Connect from Remote’ must be enabled and the ‘Remote user name’ and ‘Remote pass-
word’ must be defined in one of the accounts (all in the Security access menu (section 4.4.1)).
Notes:
1. In order to view history files when accessing the instrument remotely, the recorder’s address,
the ‘Remote user name’ and the ‘Remote password’ must be supplied to an FTP client such as
PC Review or Microsoft® Internet Explorer.
2. When accessing files using Microsoft® Internet Explorer, the address (URL) field can be in one
of two forms:
a ftp://<instrument IP address>. This allows the user to log in as the anonymous user (if the
instrument has any account with ‘Remote user name’ set to ‘Anonymous’ and a blank password).
b ftp://<user name>:<password>@<instrument IP address> to log in as a specific user.
3. For IE5 users only: Microsoft® Internet Explorer displays, by default, history files only. To exit
the history folder, either uncheck the Tools/Internet Options/Advanced/Browsing/”Enable
folder view for FTP sites” option, or check the Tools/Internet Options/Advanced/Browsing/”Use
Web based FTP” option.
User Guide HA028910

4.2 SAVE / RESTORE

As shown in figure 4.2a, touching the ‘Save/Restore’ key calls the picklist: Save, Restore, New, Text,
Import/Export Screen, Import/Export User Linearisation, Import Printer Driver. Import/Export Screen
choices appear only if the User screens option is fitted.

Save as 6100A
File Name config Save Configuration Data
Restore Security Data
Save Network Data
New
Screen Data
Text
File Name config Restore
Import Screen
Save As Text Export Screen
File Name
Import User Linearisation
Export User Linearisation
See 'Screen Builder'
description (section 7). Import Printer Driver Configuration Data
Security Data
Network Data
See 'ASCII Printer Out- Screen Data
User Linearisation 1) UserLin1 put option' description
File Name userlin (section 12)
New/Default
Import Export
Figure 4.2a Save/Restore menu
Where a file name is required, then, if the displayed file name is suitable, operation of the ‘Save’, ‘Re-
store’, ‘Import’ or ‘Export’ key will initiate the action. If, instead, a file name has to be entered, this is
carried out as follows:
Touching the filename window causes a pop-up menu to appear, giving a list of ‘Volumes’ in the Flash
memory or on the memory device (if inserted). Figure 4.2b shows an imaginary Volume contents list,
displayed by touching the name ‘user’, then operating the down arrow or ‘open folder’ key. (See section
5, below for more details). Once the correct folder is open, either select an existing file, or enter a new
filename, by touching the FileName window and entering the name using the pop-up keyboard(s) as de-
scribed in section 3.3.1 above. Operation of the Save/Restore key initiates the action.
\user\ Hide
Name Type Date Bytes

cal\ Folder 03/04/05 12:35:08
config\ Folder 01/04/05 10:27:13
Filter1a Config 05/03/05 10:22:23 4445
lib\ Folder 05/03/05 10:23:14
sdb\ Folder 11/02/05 14:01:08
user\ Folder 06/04/05 15:41:30
FileName Filter1b Save Cancel
Figure 4.2b Typical volume contents page
HA028910 User Guide

4.2.1 Save
Touching this item allows the current configuration to be saved in the recorder’s memory. Files saved in
this way are not in a ‘readable’ format and are used only for archive /security purposes or for transfer to
another, similar, recorder.
SAVE AS
This selection box allows a configuration to be saved, if required, in a format suitable for importing into
previous recorder models. The default is always the current instrument.
4.2.2 Restore
Touching this item allows the user to select or type-in a previously saved configuration file name, which
will then be used as the current configuration. Touching the ‘Restore’ key completes the operation.
Check boxes allow one or more of Configuration Data, Security data (note 3), Network data and Screen
data to be chosen for the restore function.
Notes:
1 Screen data restores faceplate status for vertical trend and vertical bargraph modes, and user
screen information (if the option is fitted).
2. If archiving is in progress when a ‘Restore’ is requested, the Restore operation will be delayed
until the archive is complete (maybe several minutes). If required, the ‘Cancel Archive’ key (sec-
tion 4.1 above) can be used to speed up the Restore process, at the cost of losing the archive
data.
3. If ‘Centralised Security’ is active (part of Security/Management configuration - section 4.4.2)
‘Security Data’ is not selectable (either for ‘Restore’ or for ‘New’ (below)).
4. If the file to be restored has been created using ‘C-Edit’ software, each of the characters used
in the file name must lie within the unicode range 0 to 255, or the file name might not be dis-
played correctly.
4.2.3 New
Touching this item causes the factory entered default configuration to be loaded for use, or for editing.
Operation of the New/Default key completes the operation. Tick boxes allow one or more of Configura-
tion Data, Security data (note 3 above) and Network data to be chosen for the restore default function;
only those items which are ticked are replaced by default values.
For recorders with the User Screens option (section 7), a further tick box is displayed - ‘Screen Data’
4.2.4 Text
This is identical to the ‘Save’ function described above, but the configuration is saved in ASCII format, and
can be transferred to a computer and read, printed etc. as required. It is not possible, using this means,
to modify the configuration and then re-load it.
4.2.5 Import screen

This field appears only if the User Screens option (section 7) is fitted, and allows a previously exported
User Screen file to be imported.
4.2.6 Export screen

This field appears only if the User Screens option (section 7) is fitted, and allows a User Screen to be ex-
ported to a removable memory device or to the internal Flash memory. The exported screen can subse-
quently be imported either into this recorder or into a different recorder.
User Guide HA028910

4.2.7 Import User Linearisation

The Import Linearisation feature allows linearisation tables to be imported either from the Compact
Flash/SD card, USB device or if Bridge ‘Full’ software is fitted, directly from the host PC.
Touching the User Linearisation field allows the user to select which of ‘UserLin1’ to ‘UserLin4’ is to con-
tain the imported file.
Touching the File Name field, calls a popup menu similar to that shown in figure 4.2b. This allows the user
to select the table to be imported.
The file must be comma separated ASCII as follows:

n,
X1,Y1
X2.Y2
X3,Y3
.
.
Xn,Yn
where ‘n’ is the total number of XY pairs in the table, and or each pair, X is the input value, and Y is the
linearised value corresponding to X. See section 4.3.9 for full details.
Note: Imported linearisation tables will not become effective until after the next configuration
‘Apply’ operation.
4.2.8 Export User Linearisation

Similar to ‘Import user Linearisation’, above, the Export Linearisation feature allows linearisation tables
created in the recorder to be exported either via the Compact Flash/SD card or if Bridge ‘Full’ software is
fitted, directly to the host PC. See section 4.3.9 for full details.
4.2.9 Import printer driver

Similar to ‘Import user Linearisation’, above, this allows driver (.uhi) files for new printer types to be im-
ported either via the Compact Flash/SD card, or USB memory stick, or if the Bridge ‘Full’ option is fitted,
directly from the host PC. See section 12 for further details.
Note: Imported printer drivers do not become effective until after the next configuration ‘Apply’
operation.
HA028910 User Guide

4.3 CONFIG KEY

Touching this key calls the top level configuration pick list:
Instrument, User Linearisations, Master Comms,

Groups, Batch, Output Channels,
Channels, Maths, Demand Writes,
Views, Totalisers, Emails,
Archive, Counters, Reports,
Events, Timers, EtherNet/IP Server
Event Buttons, Connections, Options
Messages,
Notes:
1. Figure 4.3b gives an overview of the configuration menus.
2. If an option is not fitted, it does not appear in the above list.
When making changes to the configuration the name of each changed parameter is displayed in red
(instead of the normal black) until the ‘Apply/Discard’ key has been operated. For example, in channel
configuration, if a thermocouple were to be changed from Type J to Type K, ‘Lin Type’ would appear in
red, until the Apply key is operated.
Should an attempt be made to leave configuration with unsaved changes, a warning message appears,
allowing the user to apply the changes, to discard the changes or to return to configuration (Cancel).
Config
Data Has Been Modified
Apply Discard Cancel
User Guide HA028910

Group Number 1) Group 1
Archive Save/Restore Config Security Network System Instrument Name Instrument
Trend Units mm/hr
Normal Display 100 %
Descriptor Group 1
Saver Display 50 %
Trend Type Adaptive
Save After 30 Minutes
A/B Switching
HA028910
Instrument Modbus Address 1
(Section 4.3.1) Trend Speed 1,200 mm/hr
Instrument Modbus Security Disabled = Disabled
Trend Interval 1 s
Comms Channel Timeout 0 s
Issue 9 June 11
Groups Circular Settings
Preset Hour 0
12
Grid Type From Point
Channels Preset Minute 0
0
from Channel 3
Disable Warning Dialogs
Views Recording Enable
Show Operator Notes List
Archive Recording Speed 1,200 mm/hr
Apply Discard
4.3 CONFIG KEY (Cont.)
Recording Interval 1 s
Events
Trend History Duration 25.96 Days
Views Groups Archive to Media Enable

See sheets 2 to 4 (Section 4.3.4) (Section 4.3.2) Archive via FTP Enable
for further items Alarm Message
Home Time-out 0 Minutes
Ack Message
Events Home Group 1) Group 1
(Section 4.3.6) Point Type Channel
Scope Group
Group 1) Group 1 Selection 1-3,7,9,11-20
Event Number 1) Event 1 Display Enable
Enable
Source 1 Alarm on Group Home Page Circular Trend
On Group 1) Group 1 Vertical Trend Disable
Source 2 Point Alarm Horizontal Trend
Circular Trend TurbineTempA List of all available points
On Math 12 (input channels, maths chan-
Vertical Bargraph TurbineTempB
Alarm 2 nels, totalisers etc.).
Horizontal Bargraph Etc.
Source 1 Sense Source 1
Numeric Page Channels Apply Discard
Operator And
User Screen 1 (Section 4.3.3)
Source 2 Sense Not Source 2
User Screen 2
Descriptor Event 1
User Screen 3 Channel Number 1) TurbineTempA
Job Number 1 User Screen 4 Value 5.0002 07/04/05 08:46:45
Category No Action User Screen 5 Input Type Thermocouple
Apply Discard Bridge User Screens 0 Lin Type Type K
Range Low 0 C
Apply Discard
Archive Range High 100 C
Remote
(Section 4.3.5) Range Units C
Scaled
Compression Normal
Offset 0 V
Flash Size 9 9 . 2 5 Mb None
Scale Type
Shortest Trend History G r o u p 1 Local Filter None
Duration 1 0 8 . 0 6 Days Break Response None
Compression Normal
Show Remote settings Cold Junction Type Off
Flash Size 9 9 . 2 5 Mb
Archive to Remote None Descriptor TurbineTempA
Shortest Trend History G r o u p 1
Ftp File format Binary A/B Switching

Duration 2 6 . 9 5 Days
Remote path / r e c o r d e r / G r o u p 1 Spanned
Show Local settings
Zone Low 0 %
Primary remote host 0.0.0.0 Media mediacard
Zone High 100 %
Primary login name a n o n y m o u s Archive to Media None
PV Format Numeric
Primary password * * * * * Media file format Binary
Max Decimal Digits 4
Retype password * * * * * On Media Full Overwrite
Colour 26
Secondary remote host 0.0.0.0 Media Size 30.4746094 Mb
Alarm Number 1
Secondary login name a n o n y m o u s Removable Media Capacity 3 3 . 1 8 Days
Enable Off
Secondary password * * * * * Media Full event limit 100 % 1
Job Number
Retype password * * * * * Apply Discard Category No Action
Apply Discard Apply Discard

Figure 4.3b Configuration menu overview sheet 1
Page 59
User Guide

Page 60

User Guide


£

£

¢

£ ¢

¡

¢

¢

¡

Issue 9 June 11
HA028910
0.125 Seconds Archive Save/Restore Config Security Network System
High Priority interval Counter number 1) Counter 1
Medium priority interval 1 Seconds Enable
Low priority interval 2 Seconds Value OFF Units
Counters (option)
Store diagnostics Section 4.3.13 Units Units
HA028910
Counters Preset 0 Units
Slave 1) Remote_1
Enable Timers Preset now
Issue 9 June 11
Online Connections
Descriptor Counter 1
Descriptor Remote_1 A/B Switching
Master Comms
Network Ethernet Master Comms (option) Scale Low 0 Units
IP Address 149.121.30.0 Section 4.3.16 Scale High 1 Units
Modbus address 1 Zone Low 0 %
Zone High 100 %

Detect This Slave
Scale Type None
Colour 0
Profile Third Party
Alarm Number 1
Timeout 250 ms
Section 4.3.15
Enable Off
Retry 3 Job Number 1
Max Block Size 124 Register Category No Action
Connections (option)
Share Socket
Apply Discard
Login Required
Timers
Username Username Section 4.3.14
Password ********
ASCII Input Timer number 1) Timer 1
Apply Discard Detect All Slaves Modbus Slave
Port Serial 1 Enable
Port Serial 1 Remaining 00:00:00
Link Error Count 0
Link Error Count 0 Repeat in 00:00:00
ASCII Printer Reset Error Count
Reset Error Count Reset now These buttons appear
only after 'Apply' has
Port Serial 1 Protocol ASCII (input) been operated
Protocol Modbus Slave Start now
Online Connection EIA232
Connection EIA232
Descriptor Timer 1
Link Error Count 0 Baud Rate 19200 Baud Rate 19200
Self start
Reset Error Count Stop Bits 1
Stop Bits 1 Date Any
Parity None Month Any These fields appear
Protocol ASCII Printer Parity None
Data Bits 8 Hour Midnight only if 'Self start' is
Connection EIA232 enabled.
Apply Discard Timeout 250 ms Minute Any
Baud Rate 9600 First Start Char 0 Second Any
Stop Bits 1 Second Start Char 0 Duration 60 Seconds
Parity Even First End Char 13 Repeat after 0 Seconds
Modbus Master Second End Char 10 Job Number 1
Printer Type Star TSP600
Group 1 Category No Action
Printer Name Star TSP600(1) Port Serial 1
Group 2 Apply Discard
Printer Status Not Responding Link Error Count 0
Group 3
Reset Error Count Group 4
Printer Test
Group 5
Print Messages From 1) Group 1 Protocol Modbus Master
Group 6
Messages To Print Connection EIA232
System Apply Discard
Baud Rate 19200
Alarms Stop Bits 1
Power Up
Parity None
General
Batches Timeout 1000 ms
Logins Enable error code B
Signings Enable Talk Through
Audit Trail
Apply Discard
Apply Discard
Page 61
User Guide
Output Channel Number 1) Output 1
Page 62
Import Table eiptable See sheets 1 to 3 for Enable
Export Table eiptable previous Config items Output channels Master Comms
Output Type
User Guide
Status Online (Section 4.3.17)
Output channels Slave 1) Furn Recorder 2
I/O Table Inputs Server - - > Client
Demand Writes Parameter Comms Channel
Input 1 Channel.1.pv
Input 2 Channel.2.pv EtherNet/IP Scaling High/Low
Emails
Input 3 Channel.3.pv (Section 4.3.21) Scale Low 0
Input 4 Channel.4.pv Reports
Scale High 100
Input 5 Channel.5.pv EtherNet/IP Server Point Type Channel
Input 6 Ch
Options Point Number 1

Input 200
Process Value Medium Priority
Apply Discard Wizard Default Table Show Errors
Descriptor Output 1
Reports (Section 4.3.20) Source 1) Channel 4
Report 1) Report 1 Default 0
Descriptor Report 1 On Error Write Default
Options
(Section 4.3.22) Number of Fields 1
Apply Discard
Field 1 Type Date & Time

Style Normal
Demand Writes
Apply Discard
(Section 4.3.18)
Email (Section 4.3.19) Write number 1) Write 1
Enable
Mail Server mail server name
Demand Type Master Comms
Port Number 25
Sender IP Address of recorder Status OK
Errors To e-mail address to which e-mail failure messages to be sent Demand Write
Retry Time 60 Seconds
Slave 1) Furn 1 Recorder
Recipient List 1) List1 Select List Number
Parameter Alarm setpoint 2
Descriptor List1
Point Type Channel
Rcpt1 e-mail address of 1st Recipient on this list Point Number 1

Rcpt2 e-mail address of 2nd Recipient on this list Descriptor Write 1

Rcpt3 etc. Source Channel 1
Rcpt4 Default 0
Rcpt10 Allow Constant Edits
Email Number 1) Email1 On Error Write Default
Descriptor Email1 Disable Retries
Protocol SMTP (Email) Send On Power Up
(currently 1)
Subject Cold store alarm

Apply Discard
Cold store temp. sensor 1 too hot. Instrument name,
(currently 0) Instrument number, chan 1Alarm1

Text
(currently 0)
Apply Discard Autoconfigure

Include Message
Message 3) {1},{2},{3},{4}
Apply Discard
Issue 9 June 11
HA028910
4.3.1 Instrument configuration
Instrument Name Instrument

Normal Display 100 %
Saver Display 50 %
Save After 3 0 Minutes
Modbus Address 1
Modbus Security Disabled = Disabled
Preset Hour 1
02
Preset Minute 0
0
Disable Warning Dialogs
Show Operator Notes List
MAC Address 00:0A:8D:00:20:A0
These fields appear
Operator Note 1 AM Shift started only if 'Show Operator
Operator Note 12 Notes List' is enabled
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.1 Instrument Configuration menu
INSTRUMENT NAME
Allows the entry of an alphanumeric name for the recorder, up to 20 characters long. See section 3.3.1
for text entry techniques.
NORMAL/SAVER DISPLAY
Allows normal and ‘saver’ display brightnesses to be defined. Defaults are Normal = 100%; Saver = 50%
SAVE AFTER
The number of minutes (between 1 and 99 inclusive), which are to elapse after a screen operation, before
the screen brightness changes from ‘normal’ to ‘saver’. Default is 30 minutes.
MODBUS ADDRESS
Allows a Modbus address between 1 and 247 to be set up, for use when the instrument is acting as a
Modbus slave.
MODBUS SECURITY DISABLED

When using MODBUS, it is possible, by ‘checking’ this field to allow a host computer to access the record-
er without its first having to supply a valid User name and Password. This box must be checked if this unit
is acting as a Modbus slave in order for the unit to be detected. Once communications have been es-
tablished, Modbus security can be enabled, providing that the Slave’s Remote user name and password
have been entered at the Master. See also section 8.2.4.
COMMS CHANNEL TIMEOUT

Allows a number of seconds (between 1 and 999) to be entered. If none of the channels set to ‘Comms’ is
communicated with, within this period, an event source (Comms channel timeout) is set, and remains set
until the next communication. An entry of 0 disables the time out.
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.1 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

PRESET HOUR
Enter an hours number between 0 and 23 for use with Clock Job - Preset clock.
PRESET MINUTE
Enter a minutes number between 0 and 59 for use with Clock Job - Preset clock.
Note: See section 4.7 for a description of recorder jobs, and section 4.5.1 for further details of
time synchronisation.
DISABLE WARNING DIALOGS
Checking this box prevents instrument alarm messages from appearing on the screen.
SHOW OPERATOR NOTES LIST

Enabling this field produces a list of 13 entries which can be used in Operator Notes. The first entry is the
MAC address of the recorder and is not editable. The remaining 12 entries (of up to 60 characters each)
are freely editable.
Any one of these predefined notes can be selected (as described in section 3.5) by touching the Opera-
tor Note area continuously for two seconds, then touching the required note from the picklist which ap-
pears. Once selected the predefined note can be edited before use, like a normal Operator Note. Such
editing does not affect the original note entered here in Instrument Configuration.
User Guide HA028910

4.3.2 Group configuration

Note: Groups 1 to 6 is a standard recorder feature. The supply of groups seven to twelve is an
optional extra.
Group configuration allows the user to define the following:
a Group trend speed/interval
b Group recording speed/interval
c Group descriptor
d Group content
e Circular Trend speed and chart-full operation
f Chart grid divisions
The production of alarm messages and the saving of group data to Flash memory, to removable memory
device and/or to remote computer (FTP transfer) can also be enabled / disabled from this menu.
Group Number 1) Group 1 Select Group

Trend Units mm/hr Select
mm/hr or in/hr
Descriptor Group 1
Trend Type Adaptive Select
Normal or Adaptive
A/B Switching
Trend Speed 1,200 mm/hr Not editable if 'Circular
Trend Interval 1 settings' enabled
s
Circular Settings
Circular Speed 1 week Appear only if 'Circular Set-
Circular Chart Full New Chart tings' enabled.
Start At Monday Grid Type Linear

Grid Type From Point Select None, Linear, Log Grid Divisions - Major 5
or 'From Point'
from Channel 3 Grid Divisions - Minor 1
Recording Enable
Grid Type Log
Recording Speed 1,200 mm/hr
Recording Interval 1 s
Grid Decades 5
Editable only if
Trend History Duration 314.36 Days 'Recording Enable'
is enabled.
Archive to Media Enable
Archive via FTP Enable
Alarm Message = Enabled
Ack Message
Point Type Totaliser
Selection 1-3,5,7,9
Enable
Disable
TurbineTempA List of all available points

TurbineTempB (input channels, maths
channels, totalisers etc.).
Etc.
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.2a Group configuration menu
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.2 GROUP CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

GROUP NUMBER
Allows a particular group to be selected for configuration.
TREND UNITS
Allows mm/hr or inches per hour to be selected for the ‘chart’ speed. Automatically converts the trend
speed field below.
DESCRIPTOR
Allows the group name to be edited. See section 3.3.1 for text entry techniques.
TREND TYPE
This allows the selection of Adaptive Recording for vertical and horizontal trend modes. The purpose
of adaptive recording is to ensure that rapid, short duration spikes (for example), are represented on the
‘chart’ even at low trend speeds. This allows the user to extend the total amount of history stored in the
recorder (by using slow trend speeds) without losing transient data.
The adaptive recording method works by measuring the input signal at the normal 125 msec period,
and saving the maximum and minimum values, continuously, over the period of trend update. When the
trend is updated, both maximum and minimum values are traced on the chart - i.e. two traces are pro-
duced for each channel in the group.
The faceplates and pen positions are still updated every second, as normal.
Notes:
1 During the period between updates, the maximum and minimum values are shown on the
trend as a horizontal line just beneath the pen, where the ends of the line represent the mini-
mum and maximum values so far. This line is removed at trend update time.
2. Adaptive recording takes twice as much memory as normal recording, so to maintain the total
amount of history stored, the trend speed must be reduced to 50% of that which would be
used for non-adaptive recording.
3. In Trend History mode, both minimum and maximum values for the cursor position are shown
on the faceplate. See section 3.4 for a description of trend history.
Figure 4.3.2b shows the difference between normal and adaptive recording, at slow trend rates. Note
that rapid changes in signal, (such as those shown in the circled area of the ‘actual signal’) are largely
filtered out by Normal Tracing, but is displayed by the Adaptive Trace. Figure 4.3.2b is for illustrative
purposes only, as traces such as these could never appear on the chart together.
Max/Min
bar
Actual input signal
Normal trace Adaptive trace
Figure 4.3.2b Adaptive recording compared with Normal tracing
User Guide HA028910

A/B SWITCHING
If enabled, this function allows alternative values for Trend speed/interval and Recording speed/interval
to be entered. ‘A’ values are used during normal operation. ‘B’ values are switched-to by job action, as
described in section 4.7.
TREND SPEED/TREND INTERVAL

Allows the ‘chart’ speed to be selected either as mm or in per hour, or as an interval. Entering a value in
one field automatically converts the value in the other field. A trend interval of N seconds is equivalent to
1200/N mm/hr chart speed; a chart speed of P mm/hr is equivalent to a trend interval of 1200/P seconds.
If A/B switching is enabled, a second Trend Speed /Interval value can be entered. Trend Speed/Interval
‘A’ is used during normal operation. Trend Speed/Interval ‘B’ is switched to by job action, as described
in section 4.7.
Note: Trend speed/interval are not editable fields if ‘Circular Settings’ is enabled.
CIRCULAR SETTINGS
When checked, this checkbox causes the Circular Speed/Chart Full/Start At fields, described below, to
appear. When checked, the Trend Speed and Trend Interval fields described above are disabled (i.e.
they are no longer editable).
Note: If Circular Settings is not enabled, here in Group configuration, but Circular Trend is ena-
bled for the group in Views configuration (section 4.3.4), then, although the circular chart will ap-
pear, it is unlikely that the chart will contain any trends.
CIRCULAR SPEED
This field allows the chart speed to be selected from a pick list, as detailed in table 4.3.2, below. The
table also shows the number of major and minor chart divisions.
CIRCULAR CHART FULL

This allows ‘New Chart’ or ‘Rotate’ to be selected from a picklist. See section 3.4.3 for details. Table 4.3.2
shows the major and minor chart divisions for each chart speed.
START AT
This item, (which appears only if ‘New Chart’ has been selected in ‘Circular Chart Full’, above) allows the
user to select a start time and/or date for the new chart. The exception is for a chart speed of 1 hr/rev,
which always starts on the hour.
Chart spd. Chart divs New Chart Start at

(1 rev per) Major Minor Start at choices Examples/comments
1 hour 12 2 On the hour
2 hours 12 2
4 hours 12 2
4 hours/rev.; Start at 12.
6 hours 12 2 00 to 23 at This chart will start at 1200 hrs and re-start at
8 hours 8 2 00:00 hrs 1600, 2000, 2400, 0400, 0800 hrs etc.
12 hours 12 2
16 hours 8 2
1 day 12 2
2 days 12 2 Day of week at 2 days/rev.; Start Monday.
1 week 7 4 00:00:00 Chart starts Mon. 00:00:00 and restarts Weds, Fri etc,
2 weeks 7 4 At each power-on, the system resets to the first week
Day of week at of the period, with the most recent 'Start at' day of the
4 weeks 4 7
30 days 30 0 00:00:00 week at the top of the chart.
Table 4.3.2 Circular chart speed details
HA028910 User Guide


GRID TYPE
Grid type allows the chart grid type to be defined for the group being configured. This is not necessarily
related to channel scale (section 4.3.3), unless ‘From point’ is selected, when the grid matches the scale
of the selected point.
NONE
No chart grid is traced.
LINEAR
The chart grid is linear, with the major and minor divisions defined by the fields Grid Divisions - Major and
Minor, which appear if ‘Linear’ is selected as grid type. Figure 4.3.2c, below, defines major and minor
divisions.
LOG
The chart grid is logarithmic, with the number of decades being selected in the ‘Grid Decades’ field
which appears if ‘Log’ is selected as Grid Type. Figure 4.3.2c gives an example.
Note: For the small frame recorder, the minor divisions within each decade are shown only for
groups with ‘Number of decades’ ≤ 5.
FROM POINT
This allows the chart grid to be aligned with the scale of a particular ‘point’, selected in the ‘from’ field
which appears if ‘From Point’ is selected as ‘Grid Type’
Five major divisions
Linear scale
Two minor divisions
Nine major divisions
Linear scale
Three minor divisions
Three decades
Log scale
Figure 4.3.2c Typical chart grid definitions

RECORDING ENABLE
This tick box allows the logging of this group’s data to the flash memory to be enabled/disabled. When
disabled:
a The recording speed/interval fields are not editable, and Trend History duration is set to zero.
b Display trends are present on the chart, but are not preserved when changing ‘Views’.
c It is not possible to enter trace history if ‘Recording Enable’ is not selected.
Notes
1 A blue line is drawn across the chart, when recording is re-enabled to indicate a time change in
the trace.
2 If a ‘Recording enable’ job (section 4.7.10) is set to act on a particular group, then the group will
be recorded only whilst the job is active, and only if Recording is enabled for the group.
User Guide HA028910


RECORDING SPEED/RECORDING INTERVAL
If recording is enabled, these fields are as for trend speed/interval but define the rate at which data is
saved to Flash memory. This value also affects how much trace history appears per screen in trend his-
tory mode (section 3.4). If recording is not enabled, these fields are ‘greyed’ and not editable.
If A/B switching is enabled, a second Recording Speed /Interval value can be entered. Recording Speed/
Interval ‘A’ is used during normal operation. Recording Speed/Interval ‘B’ is switched to by job action, as
described in section 4.7.
Note: With large numbers of points configured in one or more groups, the total amount of data
generated per iteration may exceed the amount that can be written to the internal FLASH memory
in the time available. Such a situation may also arise if many messages are being generated. The
recorder responds by reducing the recording speed, and a message ‘Recording failed - internal
overflow. Slowing recording interval of fastest group(s)’ appears, to draw the user’s attention to
the situation.
TREND HISTORY DURATION
Gives an estimated time to fill the group’s trend history area of the Flash memory. The calculation is
based on the archive rate, the compression ratio, the flash size and on the exact nature of the data. (Rap-
idly changing values use more space than static/slowly changing values.) If A/B switching is enabled the
calculation is based on Recording Speed/Interval ‘A’.
Changing the contents of one group may affect the Trend History Duration of other groups. This hap-
pens because the recorder attempts to store, as nearly as possible, the same amount of history for all
groups, regardless of how many points there are in the groups.
For ‘empty’ groups, or if Recording is not enabled for a group, the Trend History Duration is displayed as
‘0’ Days.
ARCHIVE TO MEDIA ENABLE/ARCHIVE VIA FTP ENABLE

If recording is enabled, these tick boxes allow the archiving of this group’s data to removable mass stor-
age media and/or to a remote host (FTP) to be enabled or disabled. If recording is disabled, these fields
cannot be edited.
Note: When recording to floppy disk drives (via a USB port), it is recommended that only one
group be set up with ‘Archive to media’ enabled. This is because history files are typically 400kB
in size and this limits the number of files which can be saved to a 1.4MB floppy disk, to three. If
more than one group is set up to archive, and if ‘Overwrite’ strategy is selected, then it is likely that
all the data for one or more of the groups will be lost. No warning is given.
ALARM MESSAGE
This box allows the printing of alarm on and off messages on the ‘chart’ to be enabled or disabled as re-
quired. Alarm messages appear on the trend display and in PC Review in the form HH:MM:SS Alarm ON
n/m and HH:MM:SS Alarm OFF n/m, where ‘n’ is the relevant channel number and ‘m’ is the alarm number
(1 or 2).
ACK MESSAGE
This tick box allows the printing of alarm acknowledgement messages on the ‘chart’ to be enabled or
disabled as required. Acknowledge messages appear on the trend display and in PC Review in the form
HH:MM:SS.
ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE
Alarms are acknowledged as described in section 3.1.4.
HA028910 User Guide


POINT TYPE/SELECTION
The ‘Point Type’ box, together with the ‘Selection’ box immediately below, offers a quick way of editing
the contents of a group, as follows:
1. Select the type of point (Channel, Maths, Totaliser or Counter) to be edited from the Point Type drop
down menu.
2. Enter the numbers of all the points of the selected type to be added or deleted, in the ‘Selection’
box. See notes below for further details.
3. Click on ‘Enable’ to add the selected points to the group contents, or on ‘Disable’ to remove them.
4. Repeat for other point types, as required.
Notes:
1. The status of all points not included in the selection box, remains unchanged.
2. Point numbers are entered individually, or as one or more ranges, separated by commas (if ap-
plicable). For example, an entry of ‘1-3,6,9-11’ would cause points 1, 2, 3, 6, 9, 10 and 11 to be
added or removed from the group contents. Only numeric characters, commas and hyphens
(minus signs) are accepted. If any other character (including space(s)) is included in the list, the
edit will fail, with a message ‘Invalid Selection’ appearing when the ‘Enable’ or ‘Disable’ key is
operated..
3. Ranges must be complete: ‘1-’ is not acceptable.
4. Each group may contain any or all points, but for vertical and horizontal trend modes, only the
first 36 are displayed, and for circular trend mode, only the first twelve are traced..
5. If a point number is entered which is greater than the number of that point type fitted, then the
selection is ignored. For example, if totalisers 1-60 are selected for deletion, and only 12 are
enabled, then the range will be accepted, and totalisers 1 to 12 deleted from the group’s con-
tents.
Alternatively, a group’s contents can be edited using the tick-boxes, to include the ticked items in, or to
exclude non-ticked items from, the group, as required.
User Guide HA028910

4.3.3 Channel/Alarm configuration

Figure 4.3.3a below, shows a typical configuration menu for an input channel. (For maths channels see
section 4.3.11.) The actual fields that appear depend on what input type is selected, what linearisation
type is selected, and so on.
Channel Number 1) Channel 1 Select channel number
Value 6.6893 14/09/05 15:10:53

Off, T/C, mV,V, mA, RTD, Ohms,
Input Type Thermocouple
Digital, Comms or Test
Lin Type Type K Select Linearisation type
(e.g.Type K)
These fields vary according to Range Low 0 ˚C
Input Type selection
Range High 100 ˚C
Range Units ˚ C Select: Celsius, Fahrenheit, Kelvins or Rankine
Scaled
Scale Low 0 V
These fields appear only if
Scale High 1 V
'Scaled' is selected.
Units V
Offset 0 V
Select: None, Linear or Log
Scale Type Linear (Log available only if 'Scaled' is ticked.)
Scale Divisions - Major 1 0
These fields vary with the type of scale selected
Scale Divisions - Minor 1
Select: None,
Filter None 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,128 or 256 seconds
Break Response None Select: None, High or Low
Cold Junction Type Internal Select: Off, Internal, External, Remote.
Descriptor Channel 1
A/B Switching Allows Span A high/low, Span B high/low, Zone A high/low,
Zone B high/low and Colour A/B values to be entered for use
Spanned by Trend jobs.
Span Low 0 V These fields appear only if
Span High 1 V 'Spanned' is selected.
Zone Low 0 %
Zone High 100 %
Pv Format Numeric Select Numeric or Scientific

Colour 0
Alarm Number 1 Select Alarm number
Enable Unlatched
Type Absolute High

Setpoint Source Constant
Threshold 0 V
These fields vary according to
Hysteresis 0 V Alarm Type selection
Dwell 0 s
Job Number 1 Select Job number
Category Drive Relay
Relay Board 1
These fields vary according
to the selected job category
Relay Number 1
while Active
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.3a Channel/alarm configuration menu (typical)
Notes
1. Numeric values (e.g. ‘input low’) can be up to 10 characters including decimal point
2. Refer to section 3.3.1 for numeric and text entry techniques.
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.3 CHANNEL/ALARM CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

Example: A type J thermocouple is used to measure a temperature range of 100 to 200 degrees Celsius.
This thermocouple output is transmitted to the recorder by a 4 to 20 mA transmitter, for display as an ef-
ficiency value between 0 and 100%. In such a case, the following values would be set up:
Input type = milliamp
Input low = 4.0
Input high = 20.0
Shunt = 250 Ohms
Lin Type = Type J
Range Low = 100
Range High = 200
Range Units = ˚C
Scaled =
Scale low = 0.0
Scale high = 100
Scale units = %
Note: The following description shows all possible fields. The recorder itself edits the list and
shows only those fields appropriate to the setup so far. For example, the ‘Shunt’ field appears only
for mA input type.
CHANNEL NUMBER
The current channel and its descriptor are displayed. Touching the window area allows another channel
to be selected for configuration. Alternatively, the right and left arrow keys at the bottom of the screen
can be used to increment and decrement, respectively, the channel number.
VALUE
Shows the current value of the channel, together with either ‘Unadjusted’ or the date and time of channel
adjustment (section 4.6.4).
INPUT TYPE
According to the options available, one of the following may be selected as input type: thermocouple,
millivolt, Volt, milliamp, RTD, Ohms, Digital (not channel 1, 7 etc.), Modbus Comms Input, Ethernet/IP
Comms Input, Test or Master Comms.
Select Modbus Comms Input if the channel is to be written-to via Modbus. Use Ethernet/IP if the channel
is to be written-to by an Ethernet/IP client. Master Comms must be selected if this channel is to be read
from another instrument.
Note: See section 4.3.16 for details of Master Comms, section 4.3.21 for details of the EtherNet/IP
option and section 4.3.15 for Modbus comms (Connections).
LIN TYPE
The following linearisation tables are available as standard:
Linear, square root, x3/2, x5/2, UserLin1, UserLin2, UserLin3, UserLin4 (see section 4.3.9 for user lin-
earisations)
Thermocouple types B, C, D, E, G2, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U, NiMo/NiCo, Platinel, Ni/NiMo, Pt20%Rh/
Pt40%Rh
Resistance thermometer (RTD) types Cu10, Pt100, Pt100A, JPT100, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni120, Cu53.
For input ranges, accuracies etc. associated with the above thermocouple/RTD tables, see Annex A.
User Guide HA028910


INPUT LOW
Enter the lowest value to be applied to the input terminals (e.g. 4.00).
INPUT HIGH
Enter the highest value to be applied across the input terminals (e.g. 20.00).
SHUNT
Allows a shunt resistor value to be entered for input type = mA. Commonly used values are 100 ohms
and 250 ohms. Note that shunt resistors are connected to the input connector. The recorder cannot
detect whether a shunt is fitted, or if one is, what value it has. Therefore it is the responsibility of the user
to ensure that the ohmic value of any shunt fitted matches the shunt value entered in this field.
RANGE LOW
Enter the lowest value of the required linearisation range (e.g. 100)
RANGE HIGH
Enter the highest value of the required linearisation range (e.g. 200)
RANGE UNITS
Selectable from degrees Celsius, degrees Fahrenheit, Kelvin or Rankine.
SCALED
This box allows the user to select low and high values and units for a scale. This box must be ticked if
logarithmic scales are to be used.
SCALE LOW
Enter the scale value to correspond with input range low (e.g. 0).
SCALE HIGH
Enter the scale value to correspond with input range high (e.g. 100).
SCALE UNITS
Enter up to five characters of unit descriptor (e.g.%).
Note:
User linearisation tables units,
To set user linearisation table units to temperature units (˚C for example), the Range Units selec-
tion box can be used.
To enter custom units, ‘Scaled’ must be selected. Scale low must be set to Range Low; Scale
high must be set to Range High. The required Units string is entered in the Scale units text
entry box.
OFFSET
Allows a fixed value to be added to or subtracted from the process variable. Recorder accuracy figures
no longer apply if an offset is included.
If the TUS option is fitted (section 15), Offset can not be applied to channels used as reference channels
(e.g. channels 6, 12, 18 etc.).
HA028910 User Guide


SCALE TYPE
This field allows ‘None’, ‘Linear’ or ‘Log’ to be selected as scale type. For linear scales, the number of
major/minor scale divisions can be selected. This does not affect the ‘chart’ grid divisions, which is set up
as a part of Group configuration (section 4.3.2). Figures 4.3.3b1 and 4.3.3b2 show various examples.
NONE
Channels with Scale Type selected to ‘None’, appear with no scale information in any display mode.
LINEAR
Channels with Scale Type = Linear, appear with scale information in all display modes (except numeric).
The number of major and minor divisions can be selected from subsequent fields. Examples are shown
in figure 4.3.3b1.
SCALE DIVISIONS - MAJOR
Appears for Linear Scale types only. Setting major divisions to 1, means that the scale consists only of
‘zero’ and full scale. Setting Major divisions to 2, means that the scale has divisions at zero, 50% and full
scale, and so on. Intermediate scale values appear at major divisions if there is sufficient space. Default =
10 for large frame recorders or 5 for small frame units.
SCALE DIVISIONS - MINOR
Appears for Linear Scale types only. With minor divisions set to 1 (default), the scale major divisions are
not divided i.e. no minor division tick marks appear . Setting Minor divisions to 2, means that each major
scale division is divided into two, and so on. See figure 4.3.3b1 for an example showing five minor divi-
sions.
LOG
For some input type selections, this appears only if ‘Scaled’ is ticked.
Channels with Scale Type = Log, appear with logarithmic scales. These scales have major divisions at
each decade boundary, and (space permitting), minor divisions for mantissa values 2 to 9. Examples are
shown in figure 4.3.3b1. Because of the nature of logarithms, neither negative values nor the value 0 can
be used as scale ‘zero’. Linear inputs are traced as exponental curves (figure 4.3.3b2).
LOG/LINEAR
For some input type selections, this appears only if ‘Scaled’ is ticked.
Channels with Scale Type = Log/Linear, appear with logarithmic scales. These scales have major divisions
at each decade boundary, and (space permitting), minor divisions for mantissa values 2 to 9. Examples
are shown in figure 4.3.3b1. Because of the nature of logarithms, neither negative values nor the value 0
can be used as scale ‘zero’. Linear inputs are traced as straight lines (figure 4.3.3b2).
User Guide HA028910

Scale = Linear: Major divisions = 10; Minor divisions = 1

(Standard for 180mm recorders )
Channel 2 388.33V
0.00 1000.00
Scale = Linear: Major divisions = 10; Minor divisions = 5

Intermediate scale values displayed only if room permits.
Channel 2 388.33V
0.00 100.00 200.00 300.00 400.00 500.00 600.00 700.00 800.00 900.00 1000.00
5 minor
divisions
Scale = Log
Number format = Scientific (1.00 x100 to 1.00 x106)
Channel 2 388.33V
1.00E0 1.00E1 1.00E2 1.00E3 1.00E4 1.00E5 1.00E6
Scale = Log
Number format = Numeric (1.00 to 1,000,000.00 )
Channel 2 388.33V
1.00 10.00 100.00 1000.00 10000.00 100000.00 1000000.00
Figure 4.3.3b1 Scale type examples (large frame)
Channel 47 41.6667V
0.0000 10.0000 20.0000 30.0000 40.0000 50.0000 60.0000 70.0000 80.0000 90.0000 100.0000
10:44:18
25/05/06
10:42:58
4 minute triangle 25/05/06
Linear Scale - Log Grid

10:41:38
25/05/06
10:40:18
25/05/06
Channel 47 41.6667V
0.0000 10.0000 20.0000 30.0000 40.0000 50.0000 60.0000 70.0000 80.0000 90.0000 100.0000
10:49:18
25/05/06
10:47:58
4 minute triangle 25/05/06
Linear Scale - Linear Grid

10:46:38
25/05/06
10:45:18
25/05/06
Channel 47 41.4250
V 100.0000
1.0000 10.0000
11:57:21
25/05/06
11:56:00
25/05/06
4 minute triangle
Log Scale - Log Grid 11:54:40
25/05/06
11:53:20
25/05/06
Channel 47 6.4158V
100.0000
1.0000 10.0000
12:13:21
25/05/06
12:12:00
25/05/06
44minute
minutetriangle
triangle
Log/Linear
Log/LinearScale
Scale--Log
LogGrid
Grid 12:10:40
25/05/06
12:09:20
25/05/06
Figure 4.3.3b2 Trace examples for different scale types (large frame)
Note: Grid type is selected in Group configuration. Grid (and chart text) colour is defined in
‘Trend Foreground’ in System/Customisation configuration
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.3 CHANNEL/ALARM CONFIGURATION (Cont.) Input

FILTER
For ‘noisy’ slowly changing signals, damping can be used to filter 95% Recorder
noise so that the underlying trend can be seen more clearly. None, response
2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128 or 256 seconds can be selected. 3x
Damping
It is not recommended that damping be used on quickly changing Effect of damping on step
signals. change in input signal
Figure 4.3.3c Channel filter
BREAK RESPONSE
For thermocouples and other low level inputs (i.e. input voltages less than 150 mV), the recorder can be
made to respond in one of the following ways, if a break in the input circuit is detected.
None trace drifts with the input wiring acting as an aerial.
High trace placed at full scale.
Low trace placed at scale ‘zero’.
COLD JUNCTION COMPENSATION (CJC)

For input type = thermocouple, None, Internal, External or Remote can be selected for cold junction
compensation.
INTERNAL
Internal CJC is by means of an RTD connected across pins 11 and 12 of the input board connector.
EXTERNAL
If the cold junction is maintained (by the user) at a known, fixed Break Response None
temperature, ‘external’ should be selected. An extra numeric Cold Junction Type External
entry box appears to allow the user to enter the temperature at External CJ Temp 0
which the cold junction is maintained. Descriptor Channel 1
REMOTE
‘Remote’ is selected if the cold junction temperature

is to be measured by an external device connected Break Response None
to the instrument. An extra picklist appears which Cold Junction Type Remote
allows the user to select any input or maths channel Remote CJ Temp from Channel 3 ˚C
to act as the cold junction temperature source chan- Descriptor Channel 1
nel. The temperature units displayed here, are those
of the channel being configured, not those of the CJ source channel. The CJ source channel must be
configured appropriately for the external device, and must provide a value which is consistent with the
configured channel’s units.
DESCRIPTOR
Allows a text string of up to 30 characters (including spaces) to be entered for the channel descriptor (e.g.
‘Turbine 2 tempA’).
A/B SWITCHING
If enabled, this function allows alternative Span, Zone and Trace Colour values to be entered. ‘A’ values
are used during normal operation. ‘B’ values are switched to by job action, as described in section 4.7.
User Guide HA028910


SPANNED
This box, when selected, allows span low and high values to be entered. For example, in an input range
of 0 to 600 deg C, it may be that the temperature range between 500 and 600 degrees is of most inter-
est. In such a case, setting span low to 500 and span high to 600 will cause the recorder to display only
that part of the input range, and this will fill the zone width which is selected next, effectively magnifying
the area of interest.
If A/B switching is enabled, a second set of span low and span high values can be entered. ‘A’ values are
used during normal operation. ‘B’ values are switched to by job action, as described in section 4.7.
ZONE
This allows the portion of the chart which the channel occupies to be defined in terms of percent, where
the left edge of the chart is 0% and the right hand edge is 100%. For example, setting a low value of 50
and a high value of 100 causes the channel trace to be confined to the right hand half of the chart.
If A/B switching is enabled, a second set of zone low and zone high values can be entered. ‘A’ values are
used during normal operation. ‘B’ values are switched to by job action, as described in section 4.7.
PV FORMAT
This allows the PV value, alarm setpoints, hysteresis values etc. to be displayed as normal numeric val-
ues (Numeric) or in ‘Scientific’ format (Scientific). When ‘Scientific’ is selected, values are displayed and
entered as a decimal number between 1 and 10† (the mantissa), followed by a multiplier (the exponent).
E.G. to enter a value of 1244.5678, the value entered would be 1.2445678E3, where 3 represents the
number of places that the decimal point has been shifted to the left in order to convert the value to a
number between 1 and 10†. To enter a value of 0.0004196, the entry would be 4.196E-4.
† Notes
1. Strictly this is a number less than 10, as 10 would be 1.0E1.
2. There must be at least one number after the decimal point.
MAXIMUM DECIMAL DIGITS

This defines the number of decimal places in the process value. Settable between zero and nine. Lead-
ing and trailing zeros are not displayed. Values too long for the available displaying width are truncated
as described in section 3.
COLOUR
Allows the trace colour to be selected from a colour chart. Each of the 56 available colours is displayed
with a number, and it is this number which is entered. The background colour to the selection box chang-
es to the selected colour.
If A/B switching is enabled, a second colour selection can be entered. Colour ‘A’ is used during normal
operation. Colour ‘B’ is switched to by job action, as described in section 4.7.
ALARM NUMBER
Allows an alarm to be selected for configuration.
HA028910 User Guide


ENABLE
Allows the alarm to be defined as Off, Unlatched, Latched or Trigger.
Off Alarm is disabled and the remainder of the alarm configuration is hidden.
Unlatched Unlatched alarms become active when the trigger source becomes active and re-
main active until the source returns to a non-active state.
The indicator is on (flashing before acknowledgment - steady after acknowledge-
ment) until the alarm clears.
Alarm messages are printed if enabled in group configuration.
Latched Latched alarms become active when the trigger source becomes active and remain
active until the alarm is acknowledged AND the trigger source has returned to a non-
active state.
The indicator is on (flashing before acknowledgment - steady after acknowledge-
ment) until the alarm has been acknowledged AND the trigger source has returned
to a non-active state.
Alarm messages are printed if enabled in group configuration.
Continuous jobs remain active only whilst the alarm trigger source is active. I.E. the
job finishes when the alarm clears, whether acknowledged or not.
Trigger When triggered all associated jobs are initiated, and continuous jobs remain active
until the alarm clears. There is no alarm indication, and no messages are printed.
TYPE
This field appears only when the alarm Enable is not selected Off. Each alarm can be defined as absolute
high, absolute low, deviation-in, deviation-out, rate-of-change rise or rate-of-change fall.
Absolute High As shown in figure 4.3.3d, an absolute high alarm becomes active when the channel
value exceeds the threshold value. The alarm remains active until the channel value
falls below (Threshold minus hysteresis). If a dwell value is defined, the alarm does
not become effective until this dwell time has been exceeded.
Absolute Low As shown in figure 4.3.3d, an absolute low alarm becomes active when the chan-
nel value falls below the threshold value. The alarm remains active until the channel
value exceeds (Threshold + hysteresis). If a dwell value is defined, the alarm does
not become effective until this dwell time has been exceeded.
Deviation in As shown in figure 4.3.3e, a deviation-in alarm becomes active whenever the chan-
nel value enters the band: Reference ± Deviation. It remains active until the channel
value leaves the band: Reference ± (Deviation+ Hysteresis). If a dwell value is de-
fined, the alarm does not become effective until this dwell time has been exceeded.
Deviation out As shown in figure 4.3.3e, a deviation-out alarm is active whenever the channel value
leaves the band Reference ± Deviation. It remains active until the channel value
enters the band: Reference ± (Deviation - Hysteresis). If a dwell value is defined, the
alarm does not become effective until this dwell time has been exceeded.
Rate of change As shown in figure 4.3.3f, rate of change alarms become active whenever the signal
value changes by more than a specified amount within a specified period. If a dwell
value is defined, the alarm does not become effective until this dwell time has been
exceeded. An averaging period can be set to remove the effects of sudden, but
short-lived changes, such as noise spikes on the signal.
Note: Alarm icons appear at the display, as described in section 3.
SETPOINT SOURCE
Allows the user to choose either a fixed, user-defined value (constant) or the value of another point (input
channel, maths channel, totaliser etc.) to be chosen as the trigger point. In the latter it is possible, for
example, to trigger an alarm, when one channel’s value rises above, falls below etc. the value of a second
channel.
User Guide HA028910


PARAMETERS
Figures 4.3.3d, e and f illustrate the following terms for the different alarm types.
Threshold For Absolute alarms, this defines the value (in engineering units) at which an alarm is
triggered. The alarm also returns to its non-active state at this value (unless a hys-
teresis value has been set). If a dwell value is set, the alarm does not become active
until this dwell time has elapsed.
Hysteresis Defines a ‘deadband’ (in engineering units) to eliminate spurious triggering if the
signal value is hovering around the trigger point. The deadband lies:
Below Absolute High thresholds
Above Absolute Low thresholds
Outside the deviation band for Deviation-in alarms
Inside the deviation band for Deviation-out alarms.
Dwell Allows a dwell period to be entered in seconds. The alarm does not take effect until
this period has expired. If an alarm clears before the dwell period has expired, the
alarm is ignored.
Reference For Deviation alarms, this is the central value of the deviation band.
Deviation For Deviation alarms, this value defines the width of the deviation band, each side of
the reference value. I.E. the total width of the deviation band is 2 x Deviation value.
Amount For Rate-of-change alarms, this value defines the minimum amount by which the
signal value would have to change, within the ‘Change Time’ period (below), in order
for the alarm to become active.
Change Time For Rate-of-change alarms, this selects the time period (Per second, Per minute,
Per hour) within which the change in signal value must exceed the Amount value
(entered in the preceding field) in order for the alarm to become active. See Rate-of-
Change example below for more details.
Average time For rate-of-change alarms, this allows an average period to be entered for signal
smoothing.
HYSTERESIS EXAMPLE
Threshold = 100 units; Hysteresis = 5 units
With the above settings, an absolute high alarm would become active if its input were to rise above 100
and would remain active until its value fell to below 95 units. An absolute low alarm would become active
if its input fell below 100 units, and would remain active until its input rose above 105 units. Deviation
alarms behave in a similar manner.
RATE-OF CHANGE ALARM EXAMPLE

Rate-of-change alarms allow the user to enter an ‘amount’ (say 3 degrees) and a time period (say 1
minute) , and if the process value changes by the specified amount or more, within the specified time
period (more than 3 degrees in a minute in this example), then the alarm becomes active.
The recorder uses its iteration rate of 125 msec (1/8th second) as the time base for it calculations. For our
example, 3 degrees per minute equates to 3/60 degrees per second or 3/(60 x 8) = 0.00625 degrees per
iteration. If a change greater than this is detected, then the alarm becomes active.
In order to reduce sensitivity, an averaging period can be configured. This means that an average of all
the 1/8th second samples is taken over the specified period, and the alarm becomes active only if the
average value exceeds the specified rate of change.
Configuring a dwell time can also reduce ‘jitter’ because, if during the specified dwell time, any one sam-
ple is non active, then the elapsed dwell time is reset to zero. The alarm becomes active only after the
dwell time has elapsed i.e. only if the rate of change has been exceeded for every software cycle through-
out the specified dwell time.
HA028910 User Guide

Absolute high alarm definitions Absolute low alarm definitions

symbol symbol
Input signal
Threshold
Hysteresis Hysteresis
Input signal Threshold
Hysteresis: no Hysteresis: no
Dwell: 0 secs Dwell: 0 secs
D D D D D D D D D D D D
Dwell: D secs Dwell: D secs
Hysteresis: yes Hysteresis: yes

Dwell: 0 Secs Dwell: 0 Secs
Hysteresis: yes D D Hysteresis: yes D D

Dwell: D Secs Dwell: D Secs
= alarm active = alarm active
D is in seconds up to 999999. D is in seconds up to 999999.
Hysteresis is in engineering units Hysteresis is in engineering units
Figure 4.3.3d Absolute alarm definitions
Deviation-out alarm definitions Deviation-in alarm definitions

symbol symbol
Deviation Reference
Reference Deviation
Deviation
Deviation
Input signal Input signal
Dwell: 0 secs Dwell: 0 secs
Hysteresis: no D D D D Hysteresis: no D D D D
Dwell: D secs Dwell: D secs

Dwell: 0 Secs Dwell: 0 Secs

D D D D Dwell: D Secs D D D D
Dwell: D Secs
= alarm active = alarm active
D is in seconds up to 999999. D is in seconds up to 999999.
Hysteresis is in engineering units Hysteresis is in engineering units
Figure 4.3.3e Deviation alarm definitions
Rate-of-change alarm definitions

Rise symbol Fall symbol
Rate-of-change rise active
Amount
Rate-of-change fall active
'Change Time' units Present

(seconds, minutes or hours) time
A rate-of-change alarm is active if the channel value changes by more than 1 amount unit in less than 1 time
unit. Dwell delays the alarm-on time. Averaging removes the effects of spurious 'spikes'.
Figure 4.3.3f Rate-of-change alarm definitions
User Guide HA028910


JOB NUMBER
Select the required job number.
CATEGORY
Select the required job to be carried out when the channel is in alarm (e.g. Drive relay) See section 4.7
for a description of job categories.
WHILE/ON
Allows the action of the alarm job to be chosen as
a. while active, while inactive or while unacknowledged for continuous jobs (e.g. drive relay), or,
b. on going active, on going inactive or on acknowledgement for ‘one-shot’ jobs (e.g. increment coun-
ter).
Figure 4.3.3g, below, shows the various actions graphically. For ‘While unacknowledged’ and ‘on ac-
knowledgement’ settings, two cases are shown, one where the alarm goes inactive before acknowledge-
ment; the other where the alarm is acknowledged whilst the alarm is still active. The coloured (shaded)
areas show the duration for which continuous jobs run; the down arrows show trigger points for ‘one-
shot’ jobs. See section 3.1.4 for details on how to acknowledge alarms.
Active Active
Alarm trigger Alarm trigger
Inactive Inactive
While active On going active
While inactive On going inactive
Acknowledge Acknowledge
On acknowledgement
While unacknowledged (latching alarm)
(latching alarm)
On acknowledgement
While unacknowledged Job goes inactive even if Job triggers even if alarm
(non-latching alarm)
(non-latching alarm) alarm not yet acknowledged not yet acknowledged
Acknowledge Acknowledge
On acknowledgement
While unacknowledged Job goes inactive even if Job triggers even if
(latching alarm) alarm still active
(latching alarm) alarm still active
On acknowledgement
While unacknowledged
Figure 4.3.3g Graphical representation of job actions
ALARM MESSAGES
Alarm on/off and alarm acknowledge message printing on the chart can be enabled/disabled as a part
of ‘Group configuration’ described in section 4.3.2. See section 3.1.4 for details on how to acknowledge
alarms.
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.4 Views Configuration

This part of the recorder’s configuration allows groups to be set up (either individually, or globally) to
include the various display modes described in section 3.4, above, and user screens (if fitted). When ena-
bled, a display mode is added to the Group’s ‘Goto View’ menu and to the up/down arrow scroll list.
Home Group and Home Page picklists allow a group and display mode to be defined for display when
the Home key is pressed in the Root menu.

Home Group 1) Group 1 Select group for
Home display
Scope Group Select Instrument or Group
These fields appear Group 1) Group 1 Select group for
display mode enable
only if Scope = 'Group'
Display Enable
Home Page Circular Trend Select Home
display mode for
Vertical Trend instrument or for
selected group
Horizontal Trend
Circular Trend
= Enabled
Vertical Bargraph
Horizontal Bargraph
Numeric Page
User Screen 1 User screens appear only if the Screen Build-
User Screen 2 er option (Section 7) is fitted.
Bridge user screens are accessible only from
User Screen 3 a remote PC which has Bridge software
User Screen 4 installed and running.
User Screen 23
User Screen 24
Bridge User Screens 0
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.4a Views Configuration menu
HOME TIMEOUT
The recorder returns to the specified home page after the timeout value of minutes has elapsed since the
last touch on the display. Timeout action is inhibited if a configuration is incomplete (there are changes
which have not been ‘Applied’), or if a system-generated message (e.g. ‘Clock Failure’) is on display. User
displays (e.g. Root menu) are timed-out after approximately 50 seconds.
A value of zero disables the time-out function. Valid entries are between 1 and 99 minutes.
HOME GROUP
This picklist allows a particular group to be selected for display when the root menu ‘Home’ key is
pressed.
SCOPE
The remaining items of Views configuration can be selected to act globally (Instrument) or to act on indi-
vidual groups (Group). When ‘Instrument’ is selected, enabled display modes appear in all groups’ up/
down arrow scroll lists and are active in the Root Menu ‘Goto View’ menu (figure 4.3.4b). When ‘Group’
is selected, each group can be set up with individual display mode lists. For the particular group on dis-
play, the up and down arrow keys can be used to scroll through the enabled display modes, or a particu-
lar mode can be selected using the ‘Goto View’ menu.
User Guide HA028910

4.3.4 VIEWS CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

GROUP
This field appears only if ‘Scope’ is set to ‘Group’, and allows each group to be selected for display con-
figuration. For other items of Group configuration, see Section 4.3.2.
DISPLAY ENABLE
This field appears only if ‘Scope’ is set to ‘Group’, and allows the selected group to be enabled or disa-
bled for display. When enabled, the group can be displayed either by using the ‘Root menu/Goto
screens/Group N’ selection (figure 4.3.4b) or can be scrolled-to using the right/left arrow keys. When
disabled, the group is ‘greyed’ in the ‘Root menu/Goto screens/Group N’ selection and is skipped when
using the right/left arrow keys. It is not possible to disable the Home group.
HOME PAGE
Allows a particular display mode to be selected as the default display, either for all groups (Scope = in-
strument) or on a group-by-group basis (Scope = group).
DISPLAY MODE ENABLING

A series of tick boxes allow the various display modes to be added to (or removed from) the up/down
arrow scroll list and to be activated/deactivated in the Root menu ‘Goto View’ menu, either for all groups
(Scope = instrument) or on a group-by-group basis (Scope = group). It is not possible to disable the
selected Home page mode.
Note: If Circular Trend view is enabled here in Views configuration, but the ‘Circular settings’
checkbox is not enabled in Group configuration (section 4.3.2), then, although the circular chart
will appear, it will not contain any trends.
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.4 VIEWS CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

USER SCREENS 1 to N
This field appears only for recorders with the Screen Builder option (fully described in section 7). Up to
24 user screens can be included in the up/down arrow scroll list and to be active in the Root menu ‘Goto
View’ menu (figure 4.3.4b).
In addition to the 24 screens accessible from the recorder display, up to 100 extra screens, which can be
accessed only by using Bridge ‘Full’ software, can be specified. The number selected should be kept to
the minimum necessary, in order to reduce the number of ‘Goto View’ ‘More...’ displays. Once created
a Bridge screen can be copied to one or more recorder screens 1 to 24 if required, making it accessible
from the recorder.
Root Menu
Home Operator
File Remove Media
Goto View Goto Group
Goto View: Group 1 Goto Group
Alarm Summary Message Log Group 2

Group 1
Vertical Trend Horizontal Trend
Group 3
Group 4
Circular Trend Vertical Bargraph
Group 5 Group 6
Horizontal Bargraph Numeric Page
User Screen 1 User Screen 2
User Screen 3 More...
Figure 4.3.4b Goto View and Goto Group submenus
User Guide HA028910

4.3.5 Archive configuration

Notes:
1. For the sake of brevity, the phrase ‘memory device’ is used for whatever mass-storage medium
is fitted to the recorder (integral or via a USB port).
2. CSV format files are not as secure as Packed Binary format files.
This allows an archive strategy to be set up for saving data to a local memory device or to a remote PC.
The local strategy includes archive period, memory device full operation, compression factor and an esti-
mate of the maximum-time-to-next-archive to avoid data being overwritten in memory (Duration).
The recorder uses a dedicated area of its Flash memory as an archive data buffer, which means that data
is written to the memory device or remote PC only when required, rather than continuously.
In order to carry out a successful remote archive, details of the remote host must be entered both in this
Archive section of the ‘Config’ menu, and in Network configuration (section 4.5). Further, the current ac-
cess level must have ‘Connect from remote’ enabled in the Security/Access menu (section 4.4.1).
Compression Normal Select: Normal or High

Duration 1 0 8 . 6 Days
Show Local settings Select Local or Remote settings
Media mediacard Select Media card or USB port

Archive to Media Automatic Select archive frequency
Archiving Hourly Appears only for 'Automatic'
Media file format Binary Select Binary and/or CSV

On Media Full Overwrite Select: Overwrite or Stop
Media Size 30.4746094 Mb

Removable Media Capacity 3 3 . 1 8 Days
Media Full event limit 100 %
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.5a Archive configuration menu (Local settings)
Compression Normal Select: Normal or High

Duration 1 0 8 . 0 6 Days
Show Remote settings
Archive to Remote None Select archive interval
Ftp File format Binary Select Binary and/or CSV
Remote path / r e c o r d e r / G r o u p 1
Primary remote host 0.0.0.0
Primary login name a n o n y m o u s
Primary password * * * * *
Retype password * * * * *
Secondary remote host 0.0.0.0
Secondary login name a n o n y m o u s
Secondary password * * * * *
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.5b Archive configuration menu (Remote settings)
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.5 ARCHIVE CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

COMPRESSION
Select Normal or High compression. ‘Normal’ compresses the data but still provides an exact copy.
‘High’ compresses more, but channel values are saved only to 1 part in 108 resolution. This field does not
appear if ‘CSV’ is selected as file format (see below).
Note: Where very high values are involved (e.g. some totaliser values) ‘High’ compression may
cause the value displayed by the recorder, and held in the history file, to be incorrect. This prob-
lem may be solved by moving the relevant point to a group using ‘Normal’ compression, or by
re-scaling the totaliser to read (for example) TeraWatt hours instead of Megawatt hours.
FLASH SIZE
Allows the size of the internal flash memory to be viewed by the user.
SHORTEST TREND HISTORY / DURATION

This shows which group has the shortest amount of Flash memory allocated to its history record. Provid-
ing the archive period is less than the value displayed in the Duration window, no data will be lost from
any group. If the archive period is greater than this value, then some of the data in one or more groups
will have been overwritten and therefore lost.
If there is more than one group with the same Shortest Trend History Duration, the group with the lowest
number is displayed. (E.G. If groups two and four both have the same duration, ‘Group 2’ will appear in
this window.)
Note: Trend history duration depends on many factors, as described in Group Configuration (sec-
tion 4.3.2) above.
CSV CHECK BOXES, DATE/TIME FORMAT
These appear only if the ‘Media File Format’ or ‘FTP file format’ are set to either ‘CSV’ or ‘Binary and CSV’.
Refer to ‘CSV Files’ at the end of this subsection (4.3.5).
SHOW
This allows the fields which are to appear below ‘Show’ to be applicable to the local memory device (Lo-
cal Settings), or to the setting up of a remote host path for archiving purposes (Remote settings). The
following descriptions contain all the fields which may appear in either menu.
MEDIA
For ‘Local’ setting only
For standard recorders, this allows ‘mediacard or ‘usbfront’’ to be selected as the local archive destina-
tion. If the USB option is fitted, the two rear USB ports (usb1 and usb2) also appear in the pick list. USB
ports may support both floppy disk drives and ‘memory sticks’.
User Guide HA028910


ARCHIVE TO MEDIA
For ‘Local’ setting only:
None Archive must be initiated by the operator (section 4.1)
Hourly Archive occurs on the hour every hour
Daily Archive occurs at 00:00* hrs each day
Weekly Archive occurs at 00:00* hrs every Monday
Monthly Archive occurs at 00:00* hrs on the 1st of each month
Automatic The recorder selects the least frequent archive period (Hourly, Daily, Weekly, Month-
ly), which is guaranteed not to lose data as a result of either the internal Flash, or the
local memory device, running out of space (calculated assuming that the memory
device is initially ‘empty’). When Automatic is selected, a further, non-editable menu
item appears, showing which of the archive frequencies has been selected.
*Note: Archive times are not adjusted for Daylight Saving hour changes. Thus if the archive is set
to ‘daily’, ‘weekly’ or ‘ monthly’ then, during ‘Summer Time’, the archive will occur an hour late (i.e.
at 01:00 hrs. instead of midnight).
MEDIA FILE FORMAT/FTP FILE FORMAT
Allows ‘Binary’ (.uhh) files, ‘CSV’ (.csv) files or ‘Binary and CSV’ to be chosen for FTP transfer. For further
details of CVS archiving, see description at the end of this subsection (4.3.5).
ON MEDIA FULL
For ‘Local’ setting only:
Overwrite Oldest data is replaced with latest data when storage medium is full.
Stop Archiving stops when the storage medium is full.
Note: When in ‘Overwrite’ mode, the recorder will overwrite only those files which it has itself
created. Thus, if a storage medium is inserted which contains history files from another recorder,
these cannot be overwritten. The file names are of the form UUU....UUUIIIIIIFFGGSSSSSS, where
IIIIII represent the lowest three bytes of MAC address of the recorder which created the file (see
section 4.5.1). It is not possible for the user to delete files created by another instrument (i.e. one
with a different MAC address).
MEDIA SIZE
For ‘Local’ setting only, this displays the capacity of the memory device.
REMOVABLE MEDIA CAPACITY

For ‘Local’ setting only, this gives an estimated time to fill the archive medium, based on the archive rate,
the compression ratio, the storage medium size and on the exact nature of the data. (Rapidly changing
values use more space than static/slowly changing values.) When archiving to Floppy disks (via USB port),
this field remains empty until after the first archive has taken place.
MEDIA FULL EVENT LIMIT

For ‘Local’ setting only, this allows the user to specify a percentage-full value for the storage medium,
at which the event source ‘Archive media % full’ is triggered. The event remains active until the storage
medium is replaced, or has data removed from it to make more room available.
HA028910 User Guide


ARCHIVE TO REMOTE
For ‘Remote’ setting only:
None Archive to host is initiated by the operator (section 4.1.2)
Hourly Archive to host occurs on the hour every hour
Daily Archive to host occurs at 00:00* hrs each day
Weekly Archive to host occurs at 00:00* hrs every Monday
Monthly Archive to host occurs at 00:00* hrs on the 1st of each month
Automatic The recorder selects the slowest out of ‘Hourly’, Daily, Weekly or Monthly, which is
guaranteed not to lose data (depends on the size of the Trend History Buffer).
*Note: Archive times are not adjusted for Daylight Saving hour changes. Thus if the archive is set
to ‘daily’, ‘weekly’ or ‘ monthly’ then, during ‘Summer Time’, the archive will occur an hour late (i.e.
at 01:00 hrs. instead of midnight).
REMOTE PATH
For Remote setting only, this specifies the route to a folder or directory on the remote host, set up as a
part of that host’s FTP configuration. The path name may be up to 103 characters in length.
PRIMARY REMOTE HOST

If a Domain Name Server (DNS) is specified in the Network key ‘Name’ page (figure 4.5.2), then the
Primary Remote Host is the server name. If DNS is not selected, then the Primary Remote Host is the IP
address of the remote host, set up in the host’s Control Panel\Network.
PRIMARY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORD

Login name and password of the remote host account assigned either by the Network administrator, or in
the Guest account of the remote host’s FTP Server or User Manager configuration. The password, which
must be of between eight and 20 characters, must be entered twice to ensure integrity.
SECONDARY REMOTE HOST/LOGIN/PASSWORD

As for primary versions, but for a secondary host. The secondary route is used only if the primary route
fails.
User Guide HA028910


CSV FILES
This allows archive files to be transferred in comma-separated-values (CSV) format, to a memory device
or, via FTP, to a remote host computer.
Compression Normal Binary format only
Duration 1 0 8 . 8 6 Days
CSV include Values
CSV include Messages
CSV include Header details
CSV include Column headings
CSV Date/Time format Text
CSV use Tab delimiter
Show Local settings
Archive to Media None
Media file format Binary and CSV
On Media Full Overwrite
Media Size 30.4746094 Mb
Disk Archive Capacity 3 3 . 1 8 Days
Media Full event limit 100 %
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.5c CSV archive menu items

MEDIA FILE FORMAT
For Local Settings only, this allows ‘Binary’, ‘CSV’ or both to be selected for file type when archiving. ‘Bi-
nary’ is the proprietary format used by the instrument and it requires other software (e.g. Review Soft-
ware) to interpret the data, before it can be presented in spreadsheets, shown as if on a chart etc. Binary
files have the extension ‘.uhh’.
CSV format is a standard open-file format for numeric data. A simple ASCII-based format, it is readable
by a wide range of PC applications as well as being suitable for direct import into many commercial data-
bases. CSV files have the extension ‘.csv’.
Note: CSV is ASCII based, and cannot interpret Unicode characters. Some characters available to
the user will therefore be displayed incorrectly in CSV files.
If ‘CSV’ or ‘Binary and CSV’ is selected, a number of extra check boxes appear. Figure 4.3.5c above,
shows a typical menu page. Figure 4.3.5d below, shows the effects of enabling the CSV check boxes,
with the exception of ‘CSV use Tab delimiter’ the use of which is as follows:
CSV USE TAB DELIMITER
Despite its name, CSV does not always use commas as separators.
For example, in some countries, the decimal point is represented by a full stop (period), whilst in other ar-
eas, a comma is used. In order to avoid confusion between the comma as a decimal point and the comma
as a separator, a different separator is used, usually the semicolon.
The instrument automatically chooses a separator suitable for use with the ‘Locale’ selected in System
Configuration (section 4.6.2). ‘CSV Use Tab delimiter’ allows the user to override this choice, and force
the instrument to use tabs as separators. This can be particularly useful when moving the data from one
locale to another.
HA028910 User Guide


CSV DATE/TIME FORMAT
Allows ‘Text’ or Spreadsheet numeric to be selected. Text causes a time/date to appear in the spread-
sheet. Spreadsheet numeric displays the number of days since December 30th 1899. The decimal part
of the value represents the latest 6 hours, so DDD---DDD.25 represents 0600 hrs, DDD---DDD.5 repre-
sents noon etc. Numeric format is more easily interpretable by some spreadsheets than Text format is.
Click/drag separator
to edit field width
A1 = Instrument
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
1 Instrument Name= Distil temp Serial Number 9921 4.0
Software Version Timezone= GMT
2 Mac Address00:AB:8D:80:26:C0 Language= en Country= GB
3 Group Name Tank Temps
4 Tank1 Temp1 Low= 0 High= 40 -C
5 Tank1 Temp2 Low= 0 High= 40 -C Include header
6 Tank1 Temp3 Low= 0 High= 40 Deg C details
7 Tank2 Temp1 Low= 0 High= 40 Deg C
10 Difference Low= -20 High= +20 Deg C
11 Date/Time Tank1 Temp1 Tank1 Temp1 Tank1 Temp1
Tank2 Temp1Tank2 Temp2 Difference
Tank2 Temp3
12 -C -C Deg C Deg C Deg C Deg C Deg C
Include column
headings
13 09.39.0 23.49 23.74 24.01 31.2334 29.7693 30.0983 6.61
14 09.44.0 23.53 23.70 23.88 30.6458 29.0673 29.9083 6.13
15 09.49.0 23.57 23.68 23.91 30.0945 28.8936 29.9083 5.91
Include values
16 09.54.0 23.50 23.69 23.99 31.1437 29.4387 30.0235 6.47
17 09.54.0 08/04/05 14:09:54 Alarm off
18 End of Archive
19
20 Right click, then: Include messages
21 Format cells...
22 Select 'Time' as number category
23 Select time/date 'Type' as required
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Tank Temps~8026C026000002A9
Ready
Figure 4.3.5d CSV data example
FTP FILE FORMAT

The above description for ‘Media file format’ also applies to ‘Remote’ setting.
User Guide HA028910

4.3.6 Event configuration

A number of internal and external (Event input option) triggers are available for use in initiating Events
which will then run job lists. Events can have up to two sources each, but can themselves be used as
sources allowing a large number of inputs to be used. Input sources can be logically combined, and can
be inverted if required.
Event Number 1) Event 1 Select 1 to 96
Source 1 Alarm on Group Select source 1
On Group 1) Group 1 Make source 1 sub selection (if any)
Source 2 Point Alarm Select source 2
On Math 12 Make source 2 sub selection (if any)
Alarm 2 Make sub-sub selection (if any)
Source 1 Sense Source 1 Select source inversion or not

Select logic combination: Only, AND,
Operator And OR, NAND, NOR, XOR.
Source 2 Sense Not Source 2 Select source inversion or not
Descriptor Event 1
Job Number 1 Select job number
Category No Action Select Job Category
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.6 Event configuration menu layout (typical)
EVENT NUMBER
Allows the required event (1 to 96) to be selected for configuration.
SOURCE TYPES
Note: Event sources associated with options appear only if those options are fitted.
Off The event is disabled

Global alarm The event is active whilst any one or more alarms is active.
Global Unack’d alarm The event is active as long as there is an unacknowledged alarm present.
Comms channel timeout
The event is set if no communication has been made with ‘Comms’ channels within
the Comms channel timeout period set in Instrument configuration (section 4.3.1).
The source is reset when the next communication occurs.
Timer active The event is triggered when a specified timer (section 4.3.14) becomes active.
Batch Running* The event is triggered when a batch is started and remains active until the batch
stops. If Scope = ‘Group’ in Batch configuration (section 4.3.10) then a group can
be specified. If Scope = ‘Instrument’, the group select field does not appear. If the
Batch option is not fitted, ‘Batch running’ does not appear in the picklist.
Batch Start* The event is triggered, fleetingly, when a batch is started If Scope = ‘Group’ in Batch
configuration (section 4.3.10) then a group can be specified. If Scope = ‘Instrument’,
the group select field does not appear. If the Batch option is not fitted, ‘Batch run-
ning’ does not appear in the picklist.
Event Allows another event to be specified as a source.
Point alarm Triggered by the specified alarm on the specified point.
Unack’d point alarm Triggered by the specified alarm on the specified point. Remains active until the
alarm is acknowledged (section 3.1.4).
Alarm on Group Triggered if any alarm in the specified group becomes active.
(Continued)
* Batch stop also available - see below.
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.6 EVENT CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

EVENT SOURCES (Cont.)
Unack’d Alarm on Group Triggered if any alarm in the specified group becomes active. The event
remains active until the alarm is acknowledged.
Instrument alarm This source triggers an event if any of the following becomes active:
Any, Input channel failure, Removable media failure, Removable media
full, No removable media fitted, FTP primary server failure, FTP secondary
server failure, Maths channel failure, Clock failure, Unrecognised PCCard,
Recording failure - overflow, Network not found, SNTP server failure, Time
synchronisation failure, Battery backed RAM cleared. See section 3.1.3 for
Instrument alarm details.
The event remains active until the instrument alarm clears.
Power up A transient event is triggered at power up.
Maths channel partial failure For recorders fitted with Maths channels (section 4.3.11), this event is set if,
say, one of the inputs to a group averaging function becomes invalid. In
such a case, the average will be calculated on the remaining input values,
but the result may not be as accurate as expected. Loss of one input can
also be important in functions such as Fvalue, where several sensors may
be distributed within the load and their outputs used in a group minimum
calculation for input into the Fvalue equation.
Battery Low This event is set when the battery is reaching the end of its useful life. The
event remains active until the battery is replaced (see Annex B for details).
Archive media % full Triggered when the archive medium has reached the % fullness defined in
Archive configuration (section 4.3.5).
Invalid Password Entry Transient event at the point of an invalid password entry attempt
User Login Account Disabled Transient event at the point when an account is disabled because the
number of password re-tries has been exceeded (Section 4.4.2). Available
only if the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted.
User Logged In This event becomes active whenever a user with the specified Event Per-
mission logs in. The event remains active until all local and remote users,
with the specified permission, have logged out. See also section 4.4.1 (Ac-
cess levels).
Event Button Allows the operation of an event button (if Screen Builder option fitted -
section 7) to be used as an event source. See section 4.3.7 for Event But-
ton details.
Master Comms Slave Failure If the Master Comms option is fitted, this event source allows either a com-
munications failure with a specifiable remote device, or communications
failure with ‘Any’ connected remote device to be used as an event source.
See section 4.3.16 for more details.
Event input board If one or more Event Input option boards are fitted, this allows a contact
closure or negative going voltage signal to be used as an event source.
The required input is defined by specifying a Board number and an Input
number. Refer to Section 10 for more details. The menu item does not ap-
pear if Event input boards are not fitted.
Email Failure Triggered if an attempt to send an e-mail (section 4.3.19) is unsuccessful.
Batch Stop The event is triggered, fleetingly, when a batch is stopped. If Scope =
‘Group’ in Batch configuration (section 4.3.10) then a group can be speci-
fied. If Scope = ‘Instrument’, the group select field does not appear. If the
Batch option is not fitted, ‘Batch Stop’ does not appear in the picklist.
SOURCE 1 SENSE
Allows source 1 to be used in its normal sense (Select ‘Source 1’) or inverted (Select ‘Not Source 1’).
Example: Source 1 is alarm 1 on channel 3
With Source 1 Sense = Source 1, the event is active whenever channel 3 alarm 1 is active.
With Source 1 Sense = Not Source 1, the event is active whenever the alarm is not active.
User Guide HA028910

4.3.6 EVENT CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

OPERATOR
This allows a logical combination of input sources to be used to trigger an event. The selections and their
definitions are shown in table 4.3.6, below.
Operator Event active when: Event not active when:
Only S1 Active S1 not active
AND S1 and S2 both active S1 and/or S2 not active
OR S1 and/or S2 active S1 and S2 both not active
NAND S1 and/or S2 not active S1 and S2 both active
NOR S1 and S2 both not active S1 and/or S2 both active

S1 and S2 both active or both not
XOR S1 or S2 active
active
S1 = Source 1; S2 = Source 2
Table 4.3.6 Logical operators for event sources
SOURCE 2 SENSE
Allows source 2 to be used in its normal sense (Select ‘Source 2’) or inverted (Select ‘Not Source 2’).
Example: Source 2 is Group 1 Batch Running
With Source 2 Sense = Source 2, the event is active whilst the batch is running.
With Source 2 Sense = Not Source 2, the event is active whilst the batch is not running.
DESCRIPTOR
Allows a text string to be entered as the event title. See section 3.3.1 for text entry techniques.
JOB NUMBER
Select the required job number for this event.
CATEGORY
Select the required job to be carried out when the channel is in alarm (e.g. Drive relay) See section 4.7
for a description of job categories.
WHILE/ON
Allows the action of the alarm job to be chosen as
a. while active, while inactive or while unacknowledged for continuous jobs (e.g. drive relay), or,
b. on going active, on going inactive or on acknowledgement for ‘one-shot’ jobs (e.g. increment counter).
See also figure 4.3.3g and associated text.
EVENT EXAMPLE
An event is to be active whenever Channel 1 Alarm 1 is active whilst Channel 3 alarm 2 is not active.
Source 1 = Point alarm (On = Channel 1; Alarm = 1)
Source 2 = Point alarm (On = Channel 3; Alarm = 2)
Source 1 Sense = Source 1
Operator = And
Source 2 Sense = Not Source 2
It is possible to achieve the same result by inverting both Source senses and using the Nor operator.
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.7 Event Buttons

This configuration item appears only if the Screen Builder Option is fitted (section 7).
The Event Button configuration menu allows a number of ‘Push-Buttons’ to be set up for use as event
sources. Buttons can be defined as ‘Unlatched’ (push = on; release = off) or ‘Latched’ (push once = on;
push again = off etc.).
Note: Unlatched button action occurs when the button is released.

Unlatched types have a single text string associated with them. Latched types have two text strings, one
for the ‘On’ (latched) state; the other for the ‘Off’ state. Figure 4.3.7 shows the configuration menu.
Event buttons are independent of the Security Management option, described in section 4.4.2. This al-
lows individual buttons to be a) entirely open to the user, b) to require signing, or c) to require both sign-
ing and authorization, as required.
Button Number 1) Button 1 Select 1 to 96
Descriptor Button 1
Type Latched Select Latched or Unlatched
Text Off Text Enter button text
Latched Text On Text Enter latched text
(appears only if Type = latched)
Require Signing
Require Authorisation
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.7 Event Button option configuration menu

Button number Allows selection of the button (1 to 96) which is to be configured.
Descriptor Allows a button name, of up to 20 characters, to be entered.
Type Select Latched or Unlatched, as defined above.
Text For unlatched buttons, this allows entry of the legend which is to appear on the but-
ton when displayed. For latched buttons, this is the legend which appears when the
button is in its non-active (off) state.
Latched Text This field appears only if Type = Latched, and allows entry of the legend which is to
appear on the button when in its active (on) state.
Require Signing If this field is enabled, then the button can be used only by those whose ‘Can Sign’
permission is enabled in the ‘Access’ menu described in section 4.4.1. When the but-
ton is operated in the User screen, a ‘signature’ page appears which requires the en-
try of the correct password for the selected user, and of a note which would normally
be used to give the reason for the operation.
Require Authorisation
This field appears only if ‘Require Signing’ is enabled. If Require Authorisation is ena-
bled, then the button can be used only by those whose ‘Can Authorize’ permission
is enabled in the ‘Access’ menu described in section 4.4.1. When button operation is
attempted, a ‘signature’ page (figure 4.4.2b) appears which requires the entry of the
correct password for the selected user, and a note which would normally be used to
give the reason for the change.
Notes:
1 ‘Require Signing’ and ‘Require Authorisation’ appear only if the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted.
2. If the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted, a message appears on the chart after authorization and/
or signing are complete. The example below shows the message when both Signing and Au-
thorisation are enabled.
DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS Button Descriptor,Signed:Engineer,Authorised:Engineer,Note
User Guide HA028910

4.3.8 Messages
This feature allows messages to be sent, by job action (section 4.7), to the display, to a specified group or
to all groups. Messages can also be included in e-mails (section 4.3.19). The messages are of the form:
Date, Time, Message. The message can be just text (up to 80 characters), or it can include up to nine em-
bedded items which are typed into the message as {1} to {9}. The embedded values represented by {1} to
{9} are selected from picklists.
If a Group-destination message contains more characters than can be displayed on the screen (depends
on recorder model), the right-hand part of the message is invisible to the user. The message appears in
full in the message log (section 3.1.4) and when Review Software is used. Display-destination messages
are always fully visible.
MESSAGE ENTRY
The message configuration page is shown below in figure 4.3.8 The page is accessed from the Root
menu/Operator/Config menu.
Select message to be con-

Message Number 1) The value of figured
Message The value of {1} = {2} & {3} = {4}, {5}
Replace {1} with Source Descriptor
Replace {2} with Source Value Select embedding source
Replace {3} with Specified Descriptor
{3} source Totaliser 1
Replace {4} with Specified Value
Select point whose
{4} source Totaliser 1 descriptor, value etc. is
to be inserted
Replace {5} with Config Revision
Replace {6} with Blank
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.8 Message entry configuration page.
CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
Message Number Select the required message from the picklist.
Message Enter the message by using the pop-up keyboards (section 3.3.1)
Replace {n} with A picklist allowing the user to select data to be embedded in the message:
Source Descriptor: The descriptor of the source which triggers the job message.
Source Value: The instantaneous value of the source at trigger time.
Source Alarm Data: Details (see table 4.3.8) of the source alarm at message trigger
time.
Alarm Type Embedded details
Absolute Enable, Type (high or low), Threshold, Status
Deviation Enable, Type (in or out), Reference, Deviation, Status
Rate of change Enable, Type (rise or fall), Amount, Change time, Status
Table 4.3.8 Alarm details versus alarm type
Note: If any of ‘Source Descriptor’, ‘Source Value’ or ‘Source Alarm Data’ are embedded in a mes-
sage which is triggered by a job which cannot be associated with a specific source (e.g. event,
timer), then the embedded value will be: ?????.
(Continued)
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.8 MESSAGES (Cont.)

Replace {n} with (Cont.)
Specified Descriptor, Specified Value, Specified Alarm data: Produces a further field
‘{n} source’, described below.
Batch Status: Causes the status (‘Active’ or ‘Inactive’) of the current batch to be em-
bedded. See Section 4.3.10 for details of the Batch option.
Batch Field data: Allows a selected batch field to be included in the message. If
a batch is not running at the time the message is triggered, the Batch field data is
replaced by ‘?????’. See Section 4.3.10 for details of the Batch option.
Note: Group number must be entered if the batch is configured for Group mode.
Instrument Name: Allows the Instrument Name (as entered in Configuration/Instru-

ment - section 4.3.1) to be included in the message.
Instrument Number: Causes the instrument number (Network/Address - Section
4.5.1) to be embedded.
Config Revision: Embeds the Config File Version number (System/About - section
4.6.11) in the message
Local User: Embeds the currently logged-in user (e.g. ‘Engineer’, ‘JohnW’, etc.)
{n} source This field appears only if the previous field (Replace {n} with) is selected as ‘Specified
Descriptor’, ‘Specified Value’ or ‘Specified alarm data’. The associated picklist(s) allow
a specific point, and a specific alarm (if appropriate) to be selected. It is thus possi-
ble to configure, say alarm 1 on channel 2, to produce a message giving the descrip-
tor and/or value of, say, totaliser 1.
Notes:
1. n = 1 to 9
2. The example below is intended to clarify message entry techniques.
User Guide HA028910

4.3.8 MESSAGES (Cont.)

EXAMPLE
To configure Message 2 to read “The value of Chan two = (Value channel 2) & Tot one = (Value totaliser
1)”
Before configuring the message:

In channel configuration:
Set channel 2 descriptor to: Chan two
Set Channel 2 alarm job to:
Category: Message
Send message(s) to: All Groups
First message: 2) Message 2
Last Message: 2) Message 2
On: Active
In Totaliser configuration:
Set Totaliser 1 descriptor to: Tot one
In Messages configuration:
1. Select Message 2.
2. Access the Symbols keyboard (section 3.3.1) and enter, without spaces, {}={}&{}={}
3. Access the Numeric keyboard and insert 1, 2, 3, 4 within the braces to give: {1}={2}&{3}={4}
4. Access the Alphabet keyboard, and insert text and spaces: The value of {1} = {2} & {3} = {4}
5. Set ‘Replace {1}’ to “Source Descriptor’
6. Set ‘Replace {2}’ to ‘Source Value’
7. Set ‘Replace {3}’ to ‘Specified Descriptor’
8. Set ‘{3} source’ to Tot one
9. Set ‘Replace {4}’ to ‘Specified Value’
10. Set ‘{4} source’ to ‘Tot one’
The result of this is that, should the channel 2 alarm go active, the following message would be sent to all
groups, appear on the ‘chart’ and become part of all groups’ histories:
18/10/01 11:19:58 The value of Chan two = 6.0˚C & Tot one = 3383.8073 Units
Note: On some models, the message may be wider than the screen. If necessary, the message
can be shortened (e.g. use ‘Ch2’ instead of ‘Chan two’), or it can be viewed in full, either in Mes-
sage log, (section 3.1.4) or by using Review Software, if available.
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.9 User Linearisation Tables

The Channel configuration item ‘Lin Type’ includes 12 linearisation tables called, initially, UserLin1 to
UserLin12. This User Linearisation part of the instrument configuration allows the user to enter linearisa-
tion look-up tables of between two and 66 pairs of points.
The pairs of points are entered as X1Y1, X2Y2... ...XnYn,
where ‘n’ is the specified number of points.
X1 to Xn represent the inputs to the function.
Y1 to Yn represent the corresponding outputs from the function.
Notes:
1. Each Y value must be unique - i.e. there cannot be more than one X value with the same Y value
assigned to it.
2. Each X value (other than the first) must be greater than the previous one.
3. Each Y value (other than the first) must be greater than the previous one.
4. To specify units other than temperature units, the channel ‘scaled’ facility must be used. The
scale low/high values should be set to be the same as the range low/high values, and the re-
quired units entered
The import/export Linearisation tables feature described in ‘Save/Restore’ (section 4.2) offers an alterna-
tive way of entering linearisation tables.
Figure 4.3.9a shows the default configuration page. Figure 4.3.9b shows a simple table for relating water
depth to water volume for a cylindrical tank with a conical bottom.
User Linearisation 3) UserLin3

Descriptor UserLin3
Select Numeric
Format Numeric or Scientific
Number of Points 2
X1 0
Y1 0
X2 1
Y2 1
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.9a User linearisation configuration page
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS
User Linearisation Allows a user linearisation table to be selected for configuration.
Descriptor Allows the user to enter a name of up to 20 characters (including spaces) for the table.
Format This allows the point pair values to be entered as normal numeric values (Numeric)
or in ‘Scientific’ format (Scientific). When ‘Scientific’ is selected, values are displayed
and entered as a decimal number between 1 and 10† (the mantissa), followed by
a multiplier (the exponent). E.G. to enter a value of 1244.5678, the value entered
would be 1.2445678E3, where 3 represents the number of places that the decimal
point has been shifted to the left in order to convert the value to a number between
1 and 10†. To enter a value of 0.0004196, the entry would be 4.196E-4. Figure 4.3.9b,
below, gives further examples.
† Notes
User Guide HA028910

4.3.9 USER LINEARISATION TABLES (Cont.)

CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS (Cont.)
Number of points This is used to enter the total number of point pairs in the table. The following XY
fields increase in number up to the entered value. (A scroll bar appears if there are
more points than can be displayed in the available screen height.)
X1 to XN The input values to the table, where N is the ‘Number of Points’ entered above.
Y1 to YN The resulting, corresponding output values from the look-up table.
3 metres
Y Point Numeric Scientific

pair X Y X Y
1 0 0.0 0.0E0 0.0E0
60 2 0.5 0.074 0.5E0 7.4E-2
3 1 0.589 1.0E0 5.89E-1
4 1.5 1.988 1.5E0 1.988E0
5 2 4.712 2.0E0 4.712E0
6.5 metres
6 3 11.771 3.0E0 1.1771E1

50 7 4 18.840 4.0E0 1.8840E1
8 5 25.908 5.0E0 2.5908E1
9 6 32.977 6.0E0 3.2977E1
10 7 40.045 7.0E0 4.0045E1
11 8 47.114 8.0E0 4.7114E1
40 12 8.5 50.648 8.5E0 5.0648E1
Volume (cubic metres)
2 metres
30
20
10
0 X
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Depth (metres)
Figure 4.3.9b Sample User Linearisation table.
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.10 Batch recording option

Batch records form a part of recording history and are included in the normal archiving process to a
removable SD or Compact Flash card or to a remote PC (sections 4.1 and 4.3.5). Batches can be initiated
directly by the operator (if access permission is granted), automatically whenever a specified counter
changes value, by job or remotely via MODBUS/TCP.
Batches can be defined as start/stop, or continuous and can incorporate all channels, or just those associ-
ated with a specified Group. For start/stop batches, the batch record starts when the batch is started,
and continues until it is stopped. For continuous batches, the batch record starts when the batch is
started and continues until the next batch is started, or until batch recording is disabled.
When using ‘PC review’ software the ‘Go to Batch’ feature can be used to select a particular batch record.
If ‘ Name files by Batch’ is enabled a separate history file is created for each batch.
For each batch start, a start message is printed:
DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS Batch start (User Full Name)
Where DD/MM/YY is the date, HH:MM:SS is the time, and User Full name is either the current user name,
the security level (e.g. Engineer) or ‘Automatic’ if the batch has been initiated by job, or ‘Modbus’ if trig-
gered remotely. A similar message is printed at Batch Stop. (There are no stop messages associated
with continuous batch selection).
In addition to the above start/stop messages, up to six lines of text can, if required, be printed on the
‘chart’ at the start of a batch and, if required, at the end of a batch. The messages are in two parts,
which for the sake of this document, are called ‘Headings’ and ‘Values’ The Headings are entered in
Fields 1 to 6 in Batch Configuration. The Values associated with these headings are entered by the op-
erator at initiation.
AUDITOR MESSAGES
If either Auditor option is fitted a Config/Security Revision message appears immediately after the Batch
Start message:
DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS Config Revision:NNNNNN Security Revision:SSSSSS
DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS Batch start (User Full Name)
BATCH SUMMARY
A Batch Summary page can be displayed from the Summary menu described in section 3.1.4, above.
THERMAL UNIFORMITY SURVEY (TUS)

Certain aspects of the batch operation are affected by the TUS option. In particular, the operator can be
made to carry out an input adjust procedure before the batch starts, after it finishes, or both. Full details
are to be found in section 15.
User Guide HA028910

4.3.10 BATCH RECORDING OPTION (Cont.)

CONFIGURATION
Note: See section 15 for

details of the TUS option.
Figure 4.3.10a Batch configuration menu
As depicted in figure 4.3.10a, the following configuration entries can be made:
SCOPE
Allows the user to define all configured channels (instrument) or just those in a particular group, for batch
control. If ‘Group’ is selected, a further picklist appears allowing a specific group to be selected.
SHOW BATCH ENTRY LIST

Enabling this field produces a list of 13 entries which can be used as field entries when starting or storing
a batch (as described in ‘Operator initiation’, below). The first entry is the MAC address of the recorder
and is not editable. The remaining 12 entries (of up to 60 characters each) are freely editable. This is a
different list from that entered (for Operator notes) in Instrument configuration (section 4.3.1).
ENABLE
Allows the batch function to be switched on or off.
BATCH MODE
Allows batch mode to be selected as Continuous or Start/Stop.
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.10 BATCH RECORDING CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

BATCH FIELDS
Allows the number of messages to be printed at batch start/stop to be selected between one and six.
FIELD 1
This field is the first of up to six which can be used as headings for batch information. Headings can be up
to 20 characters long (including spaces). In the example shown in Figure 4.3.10a, Heading 1 (Field 1) has
the entry ‘Batch Number:’. When initiating the batch, the operator has to enter a value to be associated
with this heading (see below), unless ‘Use Counter’ is selected in the following ‘Batch Number’ field.
BATCH NUMBER
This allows the Value entered for Field 1’s heading to be selected as ‘Use Text’ or ‘Use Counter’.
USE TEXT When Text is selected, the value for field 1 is entered by the operator on initiation of
the batch.
USE COUNTER When Counter is selected, a further field appears (‘counter’) allowing a specific coun-
ter to be selected from a picklist. The selected counter initiates a new batch when-
ever it changes value, and the counter value is appended to the text associated with
Field 1 (but see note 2). See section 4.3.13 for details of counters.
Notes:
1. Start batch is initiated on any change in counter value - not just increment.
2. It is recommended that when ‘Use Counter’ is selected, then only counter 1 be used as the
batch initiator. Other counters may be selected, but operation is not guaranteed.
FIELDS 2 TO 6
Fields 2 to 6 are also used as headings for batch information. Values for these headings must be entered
by the operator prior to Batch initiation. See also ‘On new clear’, below. Headings can be up to 20 char-
acters long (including spaces).
ON START LOG
This defines how many of the selected Fields are to be printed at batch start. An entry of ‘1’ means that
only Field 1 will be printed. An entry of ‘2’ means that Fields 1 and 2 will be used, and so on. An entry of
0 means that only the ‘Batch Start’ message will be printed. It is not possible to print only, say, Field 3. If
Field 3 is required, it must be preceded by Fields 1 and 2.
ON STOP LOG
As for On start log, above, but for batch stop. This item appears only if Start/Stop is selected as batch
mode.
ON NEW CLEAR
For ‘Use Text’ Batches only, this allows the user to clear none or more of the batch entries at each batch
start. In the example above, if the user enters a batch number of say 050825.001, with Customer Name:
FishesRus, Operator name: Marvin, Supervisor: Fred, then setting ‘On New Clear’ to ‘1’, causes the batch
number to be cleared, and to have to be re-entered, each time a new batch is started.
In a similar way, setting ‘On New Clear’ to ‘2’ means that the batch number value and the Customer
Name: value to be cleared. A new batch cannot be started without new values first being entered.
User Guide HA028910


NAME FILES BY BATCH
As an aid to identification, if ‘Name Files by Batch’ is selected, the Batch Name, as entered by the opera-
tor, is inserted into the history file name. For example, if a batch name of 060511.001 is amongst the
items archived to disk, then this file will appear in the form:
Group Name~060511.001~YYYYMMDD_HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH,
Where YYYYMMDD is the date (e.g.20060511 = 11th May 2006) and HH----HH is a 16 digit hex code*
used by the recorder and by review software to identify the file. If name files by batch is not selected, the
Batch name is not included, and the file appears as:
Group Name~YYYYMMDD_HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH,
*The HHH--HHH code contains the following information:

PRE CALIBRATION
This item appears only if the TUS option is fitted. When enabled, the user must carry out an input adjust
procedure prior to batch start. If Audit Trail is enabled, messages appear on the chart for each channel
adjusted:
05/10/10 11:22:09 1) Channel 1 Pre cal high 4.998, Post cal high 5.000
05/10/10 11:22:00 1) Channel 1 Pre cal low 0.998, Post cal low 1.000
POST CALIBRATION
As above, for Pre calibration, but when enabled, the adjust procedure must be carried out on batch stop.
HA028910 User Guide


OPERATOR INITIATION
If the TUS options is fitted - see section 15.
This section describes how the operator initiates a new batch. Batches can be initiated from any of the
trend, bargraph or numeric display modes, but the start/stop and other messages appear only on the
Vertical Trend screen, in the trend history display and in Message Log. Batch information and status are
retained whilst power is off.
To initiate a batch, either

1, Operate the Option key, then press ‘Batch’ in the Option Menu* which appears, or
2. Touch the coloured message area at the top of the screen. The batch Status page appears - in this
example - with no batch running.
3. Press ‘New’. A new display page appears (figure 4.3.10b), showing all the headings entered in Field 1
to Field 6 during configuration. If the Batch Fields entry is less than 6, then only the selected number
appear (in our example, 4).
*Notes:
1. The option menu is context sensitive, so its appearance may differ from the example shown.
2. Batches can also be started and stopped from the Batch Summary page as described in sec-
tion 3.1.4.
Option Menu
Batch
Note
Faceplates On/Off
Channel Cycling Off
Enter History
'Group' data appears only if

Group Group 1 Scope = Group (Section 1.2)
Status No batch in progress
New Close
User Guide HA028910


OPERATOR INITIATION (Cont.)
‘Values’ can now be entered for these headings by entering strings of up to 60 characters (including
spaces).
This may be done by touching the empty field and using the resulting pop-up keyboard to type-in the
entry, or by touching the field continuously for two seconds or more and then selecting one of the prede-
fined Batch Entry messages previously entered in the configuration page. In the latter case, the prede-
fined message may be edited in the normal way before being Applied. Such editing has no effect on the
original message.
Once the entries are complete, operation of the Start button initiates batch recording. Operation of the
Store button saves the configuration for later initiation by job, by counter or via MODBUS/TCP.
The Values entry page is replaced by the batch status page (figure 4.3.10c), this time showing details of
the batch in progress. This page allows the batch to be stopped or a new one triggered.
Note: Text may also be entered using a suitable keyboard connected via the USB port behind the
access flap or (if the relevant option is fitted) one of the USB ports at the rear of the instrument
(section 2.2).
Batch - Furnace1 Temps
Batch Number: 060509.015
Customer Name: FishesRus
Operator name: Marvin
Supervisor:
00:0A:8D:00:20:A0
Batch Entry list. FishesRus

Appears if batch entry area is touched Marvin
continuously for 2 seconds (approx).
List entries are made in Batch Config- Arthur
uration. Tricia
Jason
Manky Clothes Ltd.
Rat's Nest Hair Co.
These keys not shown whilst the Batch
Entry list displayed Store Start Close
Figure 4.3.10b Batch values entry page
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.10 BATCH INITIATION (Cont.)
Batch - Group 1
Status Batch in progress

Batch Number: 050822.001
Customer Name: FishesRus
Operator Name: Marvin
Supervisor: Fred
New Stop Close
Figure 4.3.10c Status page (Batch running)
BATCH MESSAGE DISPLAY
The messages are displayed on the Graph Trend display as shown in figure 4.3.10d, below. This figure
uses the example given in the previous sections, and uses only four messages. Further messages would
appear above message 4. The figure also shows that time and date are added to the messages, and that
the currently running batch number is given in the Group name area. Touching this area calls the Batch
status page. In this job-triggered batch, the alarm triggering the job also appears (as shown).
Engineer
Group 1 12:14:17
Batch Number 050822.001 22/08/05
Channel 1 Touching this area calls the 700.87
400.00 480.00 560.00 batch status
640.00 page 720.00 800.00
Batch trigger source
12:13:46
22/08/05 12:14:31 Alarm(s) on 3(1) 22/08/05
22/08/05 12:14:31 Supervisor: Fred
22/08/05
22/08/05
12:14:31
12:14:31
Operator Name: Marvin
Customer name: FishesRus
Operator entries
22/08/05 12:14:31 Batch number: 050822.001
22/08/05 12:14:31 Batch start (Automatic)
Batch start message
Date and time automatically printed 12:11:06

22/08/05
12:08:26
22/08/05
Figure 4.3.10d Typical Batch start messages
User Guide HA028910

4.3.10 BATCH INITIATION (Cont.)

NON OPERATOR INITIATION
Batch start/stop can be initiated by job, by counter or via MODBUS/TCP
JOB INITIATION
As described in section 4.7.9, a job can be set up to initiate a batch whenever the job source becomes
active. If ‘Scope’ is set to ‘Group’ a specific group can be selected (default = Group 1) and the job will act
only on the batch associated with this group. Batch ‘Start’ jobs automatically start the batch using the
entries made during the ‘Store’ function, described above. ‘Display Batch Dialog’ jobs allow the user to
enter the field values manually, before the job starts.
COUNTER INITIATION
If Batch Number is selected as ‘Use Counter’, then a new batch will automatically be started whenever the
selected counter changes value (increment, decrement or preset). The new value of the counter is used
as the value associated with Field 1.
For the other fields to have values printed on the chart, these must have been entered as described
above for Operator initiation, then the ‘Store’ button touched.
The ‘On new clear’ setting is ignored, the stored values being used each new batch.
Batch start messages are of the form:
DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS Batch start (Automatic)
Batch recording cannot be stopped by Counter action.
MODBUS INITIATION
In order to initiate batch recording via MODBUS/TCP, a Batch Start flag has to be set (value = 0001). For
Scope = Group, the flag for the specified group must be set. For Scope = Instrument any group’s Batch
Start flag may be used.
The address of the flag for group 1 is decimal 42364; the address for group N is {42364 + 629(N-1)}
For further details of the Modbus TCP option see section 8.
If Batch mode = Start/Stop, batches can also be stopped via MODBUS. The address for group 1 is 42365;
the address for group N is {42364 + 629(N-1)}. Again the value must be set to 0001.
Modbus start messages are of the form:
DD/MM/YY HH:MM:SS Batch start (Modbus)
Stop messages are similar.
EVENT SOURCES
As described in section 4.3.6 , ‘Batch Start’, ‘Batch Running’ and ‘Batch Stop’ can be selected as event
sources. If ‘Scope’ = ‘Group’ in Configuration (described above), then the user can select which group’s
batch is to be used as the event source.
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.11 Maths
CONFIGURATION
This feature allows a range of mathematical functions to be performed. Figure 4.3.11a shows a typical
configuration page - the selected maths function determines which configuration fields actually appear.
Select maths
Maths Number 1) Fo 1 channel number
Value 32.65 Mins Current value

Reset button appears only
Reset now for resettable functions
Function fValue Select Required maths function
Fvalue of Channel 1 Select Source input
Sterilizing Temp 121.1

Temperature interval 10
Low cut off 75
Units Mins
Descriptor Fo 1
A/B Switching
Scale Low 0 Mins
Scale high 60 Mins
Zone low 0 %
Zone high 100 %
Scale Type None Select None, Linear or Log
PV Format Numeric Select Numeric, Elapsed Time,
Scientific, Time or Date
Colour 26
Select: Off, Unlatched,
Enable Off
Latched orTrigger
Category No Action Select job category
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11a Maths configuration menu (typical - varies from function to function)
MATHS NUMBER
Allows the user to select the required maths channel for configuration. The maximum number of maths
channels is selected in the Virtual channels section of the Configuration/Options display, described in
section 4.3.22 .
VALUE
This field shows the current value of the selected maths channel. If the channel has not yet been config-
ured, the value reads ‘Off’.
RESET NOW
This button appears only after a resettable function has been selected. Operation of the button sets the
maths value to zero.
User Guide HA028910

4.3.11 MATHS CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

Function
This picklist allows the relevant maths function to be selected. In the following description, the word
‘channel’ is used as an umbrella term for input channels, maths channels, totalisers etc.
Off Allows the function to be disabled. Once ‘Apply’ has been actioned, all configura-
tion for this Maths number is lost.
Constant Allows a maths channel to be set to a constant value.
Add Allows any channel or a constant value to be added to any other.
Subtract Allows any channel or a constant value to be subtracted from any other.
Multiply Allows any channel or a constant value to be multiplied by any other.
Divide Allows any channel or a constant value to be divided by any other. Should the value
of the divisor pass through zero, ‘Maths Channel N error’ and ‘Maths Channel Failure’
messages appear.
Group average* The instantaneous value of all the channels in the source group added together and
divided by the number of channels in the group. For example, in a group of four
channels whose instantaneous values are 4, 8, 2 and 6, the group average is (4 + 8
+ 2 + 6) / 4 = 5. The relevant source group is selected by picklist. Should a channel
return a non-valid value, it is excluded from the calculation, and the result of the func-
tion is the average of the remaining channels.
Group minimum* The lowest value of any of the channels in the source group. For example, in a group
of four channels whose instantaneous values are 4, 8, 2 and 6, the group minimum is
2. The required source group is selected by picklist. Should a channel return a non-
valid value, it is excluded from the calculation, and the result of the function is the
minimum of the remaining channels.
Group maximum* The highest value of any of the channels in the source group. For example, in a
group of four channels whose instantaneous values are 4, 8, 2 and 6, the group
maximum is 8. The required source group is selected by picklist. Should a channel
return a non-valid value, it is excluded from the calculation, and the result of the func-
tion is the maximum of the remaining channels.
*Note:
If a maths channel with a Group function is contained within its own source group, then it will
act on itself as well as on the other group contents, thus changing the calculation.
For example, if Group 1 were to contain channel 1, channel 2 and maths channel 1, where
maths channel 1 had the function ‘Group Maximum’ for Group 1, then the Group Maximum
would become a latching function, showing the highest value ever reached by channel 1, chan-
nel 2 or maths channel 1 since the group was configured. In order to trace the instantaneous
highest value, channel 1 and channel 2 would have to be contained in e.g. Group 1, and the
group maximum channel contained in, say, Group 2, but with a source of ‘Group 1’.
Modbus Comms input

Allows Modbus communications to be selected for reading values from slave instru-
ments - see section 4.3.15.
Ethernet/IP Comms Input
Allows Ethernet/IP communications to be selected for reading values from client
instruments - see section 4.3.21.
Stopwatch This causes the value of the maths channel to increment in milliseconds. The value
can be displayed in milliseconds (PV format = numeric), or in HH:MM:SS (PV format =
elapsed time).
The value can be held, using a ‘Disable’ job or set to zero either using a ‘reset’ job or
by the operation of the ‘Reset now’ button in the maths configuration page. See sec-
tion 4.7 for a description of jobs.
The function value is retained during power off.
Note: The scale low and high values are displayed in numeric format for both numeric and
elapsed time display formats
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.11 FUNCTION (Cont.)

Copy Copies the value of a selected point to the maths channel being configured. Allows
extra alarms to be set up for the copied point.
Polynomial Provides a polynomial curve fit for the specified point, using up to 8 orders,
Fvalue This function calculates ‘equivalent time at sterilizing temperature’ for temperatures
above and below the sterilizing temperature. FO (dry) and FH (steam) sterilizing
calculations can be carried out, by entering the correct constant. The value can be
held, using a ‘Disable’ job or set to zero (prior to the next run) using a ‘reset’ job. See
section 4.7 for a description of jobs. The function value is retained during power off.
Switch Allows two channels (‘A’ and ‘B’) to be selected as alternative sources for the selected
maths channel to copy. The maths channel copies source ‘A’, unless a ‘Switch to B’
job is active on the maths channel. See section 4.7 for Job descriptions.
Linear Mass Flow This function calculates mass flow from linear-type transducer outputs.
Root Mass Flow This function calculates mass flow from square root-type transducer outputs.
Rolling Average This takes the average value of a single channel over a specified number of readings
taken at a specified interval. The function value is retained during power off.
MKT Mean Kinetic Temperature. A single calculation to simulate non-isothermal effects of
variations in storage temperature.
10 to the power Output = 10 raised to the power of the selected input value.
Group Latched Minimum
Outputs the minimum value reached by any of the points in a selected source group
since last reset. The function ignores points that are not producing valid PV. A dis-
able job stops the function reading its input. A reset job sets the function to the
current minimum value within the group. Note that for proper operation, the maths
function must be in a group which is not the source group. If this is not the case, it
will always see itself as the lowest valued point in the group, and Reset operations
will have no useful effect.
Group Latched Maximum
As for Group Latched Minimum, above, but outputs the maximum value of the
source group.
Sample and Hold This function is initiated by a trigger job. At trigger time, the selected point value
is sampled, and its value at trigger time is output continuously by this function. On
reset, the PV becomes ‘No data’.
Square Root Outputs the square root of the value of the selected point.
High Select Allows two points to be selected as inputs. The output of the function is the value of
that input point which currently has the higher value.
Low Select Allows two points to be selected as inputs. The output of the function is the value of
that input point which currently has the lower value.
Saturated Steam Mass Flow
Calculates mass flow in kg/s for saturated steam, using either the steam temperature
(Celsius) or pressure (MPa) as appropriate to the process.
Saturated Steam Heat Flow
Calculates the energy flow in kJ/s for saturated steam, using either the steam tem-
perature (Celsius) or pressure (MPa) as appropriate to the process.
Saturated Steam Heat Consumed
Calculates the heat consumed in kJ/s for saturated steam, using the inlet steam tem-
perature (Celsius) or pressure (MPa) (as appropriate to the process), and the return
(condensate) temperature.
Group MKT Calculates Mean Kinetic Temperature of a specified group of channels
User Guide HA028910

Log Base 10 Takes log10 of selected input. (For example: Input = 2 gives maths function value =
0.3010)
Log Base e Takes loge of selected input. (For example: Input = 2 gives maths function value =
0.6931)
e to the power Takes natural antilog of input. (For example: Input = 0.6931 gives maths function
value = 2)
Modulus This function copies the magnitude of the input value, without the sign. For example,
the modulus of value +100 = +100; the modulus of -100 = +100.
Channel Maximum Maths function value is the minimum value the input point has reached since last
reset. When reset, the value is reset to the current input value.
Channel Minimum Maths function value is the minimum value the input point has reached since last
reset. When reset, the value is reset to the current input value.
Channel Average Takes the average value of the selected channel over a specified time period. The
time period must be a multiple of 125 msecs. For example, a period of 0.2 seconds
would be rejected, but a period of 0.25 seconds would be accepted.
Master comms Allows a maths channel to read point values from other instruments on the Modbus
link.
Rate of change Produces a value for the speed at which a signal changes over a specified period.
O2 Correction This function carries out O2 correction of gas measurements for use in Continuous
Emissions Monitoring applications.
Relative Humidity This uses wet and dry bulb temperatures and atmospheric pressure inputs to pro-
duce a percentage Relative Humidity reading.
Zirconia probe Allows oxygen concentration and oxygen potential to be determined by solving the
Nernst oxygen equation.
Timestamp When triggered by an event or alarm job, this causes the current number of millisec-
onds since 00:00 hrs on 1st January 1970 to appear as the function value. If the se-
lected PV format is date or time, the result is displayed as date or time, respectively.
Config Revision Number*
Allows the Configuration Revision number to be used as the input to a maths chan-
nel. When this maths channel is included in a group, the user can determine the
Configuration Revision number obtaining at any time in the history record.
Security Revision Number*
Allows the Security Revision number to be used as the input to a maths channel.
When this maths channel is included in a group, the user can determine the Security
Revision number obtaining at any time in the history record.
*Note: See ‘About’ in section 4.6 for a description of the Configuration and Security Revision num-
bers.
Thermocouple Cal Correction

Defines correction points allowing offsets to be added to channel inputs to compen-
sate (for example) for equipment errors.
SCALE LOW / SCALE HIGH
The ‘zero’ and full scale values for the maths function, as displayed. If A/B switching is enabled, a second
set of scale low and scale high values can be entered. ‘A’ values are used during normal operation. ‘B’
values are switched to by job action, as described in section 4.7.
HA028910 User Guide


PV FORMAT
Numeric Provides a decimal value for the maths channel.
Elapsed time Shows the maths channel value in HH:MM:SS (hours minutes, seconds) format.
Normally used only for time functions. For other functions, elapsed time counts in
milliseconds e.g. a PV of 10000 would be displayed as 00:00:10; a PV of 60000 would
be displayed as 00:01:00
Scientific Values are displayed and entered as a decimal number between 1.0 and 10† (the
mantissa), followed by a multiplier (the exponent). E.G. to enter a value of 1244.5678,
the value entered would be 1.2445678E3, where 3 represents the number of places
that the decimal point must be shifted to the left in order to convert the value to
a number between 1 and 10†. To enter a value of 0.0004196, the entry would be
4.196E-4.
Time/date For timestamp functions, displays the timestamp as time or date as selected, instead
of a number of milliseconds, as would be displayed in numeric format.
† Notes
REMAINING CONFIGURATION ITEMS

The remaining configuration items are identical with the relevant items in Input Channel configuration
(section 4.3.3).
FUNCTION DETAILS
POLYNOMIAL FIT
A polynomial curve fit of up to eight orders:
A0 + A1(X) + A2(X2) + A3(X3) + A4(X4) + A5(X5) + A6(X6) + A7(X7) + A8(X8) where X is the value of the
source channel and A0 to A8 are constants. Figure 4.11.3b shows the configuration items for a third order
fit with channel 2 used as the source (X), and A0 = 1, A1 = 2, A2 = 3 and A3 = 4.
Maths Number 1) Math 1

Value OFF Units
Function Polynomial
Orders 3
Polynomial of Channel 2
A0 1
A1 Math 1
2
A2 0
3
A3 1
4
Figure 4.11.3b Polynomial configuration fields (3rd order)
User Guide HA028910


FVALUE
To calculate the equivalent time at Sterilizing Temperature (for temperatures below, at and above Steriliz-
ing Temperature) both in dry (FH) and steam (FO) sterilizing environments, using the following equation:
ma t −Target temp
Fval t = Fval t−1 + T × 10 Z
Where Fvalt = F value at time t (minutes)

Fvalt-1 = F value last iteration
T = Internal recorder iteration interval (minutes)
mat = Value of temperature measuring channel
Target temp = 121.1˚C for FO; 170˚C for FH
Z = Temperature interval representing a factor-of-10 reduction in killing efficiency
= 10˚C for FO; = 20˚C for FH
User configuration consists of entering the channel which is measuring temperature, the relevant steriliz-
ing temperature and temperature interval (Z-value) and a low cut-off value, if required.
Figure 4.3.11c shows the configuration fields for measuring Fo, using channel 1 as the temperature input
channel, Fo values for target temperature (121.1˚C) and z-value (10˚C), and 75˚C as the low cut-off value,
below which killing credits are not to be counted.

Value OFF
Reset now
Function fValue
F value of Channel 1
Sterilizing Temp 121.1
Low cut off 75
Figure 4.3.11c Fo setup example
APPLICATION NOTE
To ensure that sterilizer loads which contain materials with differing thermal inertias are thoroughly steri-
lized, a typical sterilizer has up to 12 different measuring points within the load. To ensure accuracy, the
temperature sensors should be calibrated, and the channel adjustment facility used to compensate for
any inaccuracies found.
If each of the inputs is used to compute an F value, each of these values can then be used as an input to a
Group Minimum function, with a high absolute alarm set at the correct F value. The alarm output can be
used to sound a warning, or an associated relay can be linked into the autoclave control system to signify
the end of a sterilization cycle.
HA028910 User Guide


LINEAR MASS FLOW
Note: The overall accuracy of a flow measurement installation depends on a number of factors
outside the control of the recorder manufacturer. For this reason, the recorder manufacturer takes
no responsibility for the accuracy of the results obtained using the mass flow equations imple-
mented in the maths pack.
The equations solved is:
K Flow t × AbsPt
QM t = ×
Rg × Z Temp
where, QMt = Mass flow (in kg/sec), at time ‘t’
K = Scaling factor (see below)
Rg = Specific gas constant in J/kg-K (see below)
Z = Compressibility factor (see below)
Flow t = Measured value from the flow meter at time ‘t’
AbsP t = Absolute pressure of the fluid at time ‘t’ in kPa(A)
Temp = Temperature of the fluid in Kelvins
Scaling factor This is determined from an assumed value of Qm at a known Flow, AbsP and Temp.
The value is chosen to give an output within the range low scale to high scale.
Specific gas constant The specific gas constant for any gas is available from published tables. For conven-
ience, the value for a number of common gases is given in table 4.3.11a, below.
RG
Gas
(J/kg-K)
Air 287.1
Ammonia 488.2
Carbon dioxide 188.9
Carbon monoxide 296.8
Ethylene 296.4
Hydrogen 4116.0
Methane 518.4
Nitrogen 296.8
Oxygen 259.8
Propane 188.5
Steam 461.4
Table 4.3.11a Common gas constants
User Guide HA028910


LINEAR MASS FLOW (Cont.)
Commpressibility factor (Z-Factor)
Compressibility factor is a density-related measure of how far a particular gas devi-
ates from a ‘perfect’ gas under any set of temperature and pressure conditions, and
is given by the equation:
P 1
Z= ×
T ρ
where: Z = Compressibility factor
P = Absolute pressure of the gas in kPa(A)
T = Absolute temperature of the gas (Kelvins)
ρ = gas density at pressure P and temperature T (from published tables)
Figure 4.3.11d shows the relevant part of the configuration menu for a maths channel with ‘Linear Mass
Flow’ function selected.

Value 123.4567 Units
Function Linear Mass Flow
Flow Channel 1
Temperature Channel 2
Absolute Pressure Channel 3
Scale o/p 0
Ma 0
Gas Constant 0 J/kg-K
Z 0
Units Units
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11d Linear mass flow menu
Flow Allows the input channel measuring the flowmeter output to be entered
Temperature Allows the input channel measuring the fluid temperature (Kelvins) to be entered
Absolute Pressure Allows the input channel measuring the absolute gas pressure (kPa(A)) to be entered
Scale o/p Full scale output from the flowmeter in flowmeter units (S)
Ma Full scale input range set for ‘Flow’ channel in flowmeter units (mamax)
Gas Constant the relevant gas constant in J/kg-K
Z The compressibility factor described above.
HA028910 User Guide


ROOT MASS FLOW
The equation solved is:
K2 DeltaPt × AbsPt
QM t = ×
Rg × Z Temp
where QMt = Mass flow (in kg/sec), at time ‘t’

K = Scaling factor (see below)
Rg = Specific gas constant in J/kg-K (see below)
Z = Compressibility factor (see below)
DeltaP t = Measured value across the orifice plate at time ‘t’
AbsP t = Absolute pressure of the fluid at the up-stream tapping at time ‘t’ in kPa(A)
Temp = Temperature of the fluid at the up-stream tapping in Kelvins
Scaling factor This is determined from an assumed value of Qm at a known DeltaP, AbsP and Temp.
The value is chosen to give an output within the range low scale to high scale.
Specific gas constant The specific gas constant for any gas is available from published tables. For conven-
ience, the value for a number of common gases is given in table 4.3.11a, above.
Compressibility factor (Z-Factor)
Compressibility factor is a density-related measure of how far a particular gas devi-
ates from a ‘perfect’ gas under any set of temperature and pressure conditions, and
is given by the equation:
P 1
Z= ×
T ρ
where: Z = Compressibility factor
P = Absolute pressure of the gas in kPa(A)
T = Absolute temperature of the gas (Kelvins)
ρ = gas density at pressure P and temperature T (from published tables
User Guide HA028910


ROOT MASS FLOW (Cont.)
Figure 4.3.11e shows the relevant part of the configuration menu for a maths channel with ‘Root Mass
Flow’ function selected.

Function Root Mass Flow
Delta Pressure Channel 1
Absolute Pressure Channel 3
Scale o/p 0
Ma 0
Gas Constant 0 J/kg-K
Z 0
Units Units
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11e Root mass flow menu
Delta Pressure Allows the input channel measuring the differential pressure output from the orifice
plate to be entered
Temperature Allows the input channel measuring the fluid temperature (Kelvins) at the upstream
tapping to be entered
Absolute Pressure Allows the input channel measuring the absolute gas pressure (kPa(A)) to be entered
Scale o/p Full scale output from the flowmeter in flowmeter units (S)
Ma Full scale input range set for ‘Flow’ channel in flowmeter units (mamax)
Gas Constant The relevant gas constant in J/kg-K
Z The compressibility factor described above.
HA028910 User Guide


ROLLING AVERAGE
This calculates the average value of the last R samples of a channel, taken at N second intervals, where R
and N can be defined by the user. At initiation, up to the time of the first sample reading, the displayed
value is the average of the channel sampled every iteration (i.e. at 8 Hz.).
The number of readings over which the average can be taken is limited by the amount of free RAM
instantaneously available, and is thus dependent on the overall configuration of the recorder. An instru-
ment alarm is generated if there is insufficient free RAM available - see section 3.1.3 for details.

Value OFF
Reset now
Function Rolling Average

Average of Channel 1
Number of samples 10
Sample Interval 60 s
Figure 4.3.11f Rolling average menu
MEAN KINETIC TEMPERATURE (MKT)
MKT is defined as ‘the isothermal temperature that corresponds to the kinetic effects of time-tempera-
ture distribution’. The recorder calculates MKT, using the equation below:
−ΔH
Tk = R
 −ΔH −ΔH −ΔH −ΔH 
 e RT 1max + e RT 1min + ... + e RTNmax + e RTNmax 
ln 
 2N 
 
where: Tk = The required mean kinetic temperature in Kelvins
ΔH = The heat of activation
R = The universal gas constant
T1max = The highest temperature reached during the first measurement period (in Kelvins)
T1min = The lowest temperature reached during the first measurement period (in Kelvins)
TNmax = The highest temperature reached during the Nth measurement period (in Kelvins)
TNmin = The lowest temperature reached during the Nth measurement period (in Kelvins)
N = The total number of measurement periods
As described in ‘Configurable items, below, this is simplified for the recorder user , to four entries viz:
The number of the channel measuring temperature, the number of samples to be used, the time between
the samples and the relevant ‘Heat of Activation’.
Note: The input temperature must be in Kelvins. This can be achieved either by setting the rel-
evant channel’s units to Kelvins, or by using a further maths channel to convert the measuring units
to Kelvins.
(K = ˚C + 273.15 or K = 0.555(˚F -32) + 273.15).
User Guide HA028910


MEAN KINETIC TEMPERATURE (Cont.)
CONFIGURABLE ITEMS
Figure 4.3.11g shows the configurable items for the MKT function.

Value 0.0000 Units
Function MKT
Mean Kinetic Temperature of Math 2
Number of samples 52
Sample interval 604800 s
Heat of Activation 83.144 kJ/mole
Units Units
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11g MKT function parameters

Mean Kinetic Temperature of
Select the source from which MKT is to be derived. This may be an input channel,
scaled in Kelvins, or it can be a maths channel used to convert a different tempera-
ture scale into Kelvins (see ‘Note’ on previous page).
Number of Samples Enter the number of samples over which the MKT is to be measured.
Sample interval Enter the time period, in seconds, between samples. At each sample interval, the
maximum and minimum temperatures reached by the input source, since the last
sample, are entered into the equation.
Heat of Activation The default value is an average value based on many common organic reactions. Al-
lows the user to enter an alternative value, if known.
EXAMPLE 1: To Produce a 4-weekly value of MKT, taking samples every day.

Number of samples = 28
Sample interval = No. of seconds in a day = 24 x 60 x 60 = 86,400
EXAMPLE 2: To produce an annual value of MKT, taking samples every week.

Number of sample = 52
Sample interval = No. of seconds in a week = 7 x 24 x 60 x 60 = 604,800
Notes
1 This function produces a ‘rolling’ result. I.E. when the final (Nth) sample has been taken, the
next sample (N + 1)th replaces Sample 1, the (N + 2th) sample replaces Sample 2, and so on.
2 During the first sample, the current minimum and maximum values of temperature are entered
into the equation at the recorder iteration rate (i.e. 8Hz).
3. The number of readings over which the value can be taken is limited by the amount of free RAM
instantaneously available, and is thus dependent on the overall configuration of the recorder.
An instrument alarm is generated if there is insufficient free RAM available - see section 3.1.3
for details.
HA028910 User Guide


SATURATED STEAM MASS FLOW
Flow t
QM t =
VLT + ΔVT ( 100
d
)
where, QMt = Mass flow (in kg/sec), at time ‘t’ (Note 1)
Flow t = Measured flow in m3/sec. at time ‘t’ (Note 1)
VLT = Volume of liquid per kg of steam (m3/kg) at temperature T ˚C
∆VT = V VT - VLT, where V VT is the volume of vapour per kg of steam at temperature T ˚C
d = Dryness factor between 0 (no vapour) and 100 (no liquid)
VLT and ∆V T are available from published tables (note 2), but the recorder user need only enter ‘values’ for
measured flow and either the temperature or the pressure of the steam. These ‘values’ can be constants,
input channels or maths channels. Figure 4.3.11h and accompanying parameter descriptions give full
details.

Function Saturated Steam Mass Flow
Flow Channel 1
Use Temperature
Dryness 0 %
Units Units
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11h Typical Saturated Steam Mass Flow configuration page
PARAMETERS
Flow Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel supplying the measured flow rate. If
‘Constant’ selected, a further ‘box’ allows the value for the constant to be entered.
Use Allows the user to select Temperature (˚C) or Pressure (MPa) for the calculation.
Temperature Appears only if Use = Temperature. Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel
supplying the steam temperature. If ‘Constant’ is selected, a further ‘box’ allows a
value for the constant to be entered.
Pressure Appears only if Use = Pressure. Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel sup-
plying the steam pressure. If ‘Constant’ is selected, a further ‘box’ allows a value for
the constant to be entered.
Table 4.3.11b, below, gives multipliers for converting some common pressure units
to MPa. More details may be found at websites http://www.ex.ac.uk/trol/scol/
ccpress.htm and http://www.onlineconversion.com/pressure.htm, amongst others.
Dryness Enter a value between 0 and 100 to represent the dryness of the steam. 0 = no va-
pour; 100 = no liquid.
Notes:
1 The units of kg/sec and m3/sec are used above for simplicity. In fact any time unit can be used.
For example if the measured flow is in m3/hour, then the Mass flow will be in kg/hour.
2. ASME Steam tables 1999, from IAPWF IF97.
User Guide HA028910


SATURATED STEAM MASS FLOW (Cont.)
PRESSURE UNITS CONVERSION
There is a wide range of pressure measuring units in use throughout the world. The following table
gives a multiplication factor for converting some common units to MPa (MegaPascals), to four significant
figures. Further conversion factors can be found at the websites given on the previous page. (Where the
conversion is to Pascals, not to MegaPascals, the factors given have to be divided by 1,000,000.)
Multiplier for Multiplier for

Pressure units Pressure units
MPa MPa
Atmospheres 0.1013 Newtons/cm2 0.01
Bar 0.1 Newtons/m2 0.000 001
kg/cm2 0.09 807 Pascals 0.000 001
kNewton/m2 0.001 Tonnes/m2 0.009 807
kPa 0.001
Tons(UK)/ft2 0.1 073
mBar 0.0001
Tons(US)/ft2 0.09 576
Lb/ft2 0.00 004 788
Water (feet of) 0.002 989
Lb/in2 (PSI) 0.006 895
Mercury (inches of) 0.003 386 Water (inches of) 0.0 002 491
Mercury (mm of) 0.0 001 333 Water (mm of) 0.000 009 807
Table 4.3.11b Pressure unit conversion
The table above shows multiplying factors to convert common pressure units to MPa. This conversion is
carried out as follows:
Example: A pressure transducer, connected to input channel 3 gives an output in the range 10 to 100 PSI.
The input to a steam equation in maths channel 1 requires the pressure units to be MPa. To convert, set
up a further maths channel (e.g. No. 2) as shown below, then use maths channel 2 as the source channel
for the pressure input to the steam equation.
The suggested scale low/high values are based on the resulting pressure range in MPa - i.e 0.06895 to
0.6895.
Maths Number 2) Steam Pressure

Value 0.0348 Units
Function Multiply
Multiply Channel 3
by Constant
Constant Value 0.006895
Units MPa
Descriptor Steam Pressure
Scale low 0 MPa
Scale high 1 MPa
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11i PSI to MPa conversion example
HA028910 User Guide


SATURATED STEAM HEAT FLOW
 
Flow t
QE t =  (
T ( 100 ) 
 V + ΔV d  LT 100)
 h + ΔhT ( d )
 LT
where, QEt = Heat energy flow (in kJ/sec), at time ‘t’ (Note 1)
Flow t = Measured flow in m3/sec (Note 1)
VLT = Volume of liquid per kg of steam (m3/kg) at temperature T ˚C
∆V T = V VT - VLT, where V VT is the volume of vapour per kg of steam at temperature T ˚C
hLT = Enthalpy of the liquid in kJ/kg at temperature T ˚C
∆hT = hVT - hLT, where hVT is the enthalpy of vapour in kJ/kg vapour at temperature T ˚C
VLT and ∆V T; hLT and ∆hT are available from published tables (note 2), but the recorder user needs only to
enter ‘values’ for measured flow and either the temperature or the pressure of the steam. These ‘values’
can be constants, input channels or maths channels. Figure 4.3.11j and accompanying parameter de-
scriptions give full details.

Function Saturated Steam Heat Flow
Flow Channel 1
Use Pressure
Pressure Channel 2
Dryness 10 %
Units Units
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11j Typical Saturated Steam Heat Flow configuration page
PARAMETERS
Flow Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel supplying the measured flow rate. If
Temperature Appears only if Use = Temperature. Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel
Pressure (note 3) Appears only if Use = Pressure. Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel sup-
Dryness Enter a value between 0 and 100 to represent the dryness of the steam. 0 = no va-
Notes:
3. See ‘Saturated Steam Mass Flow’ above for details of pressure unit conversion
User Guide HA028910


SATURATED STEAM HEAT CONSUMED
Note: The following assumptions are made with regard to this implementation:
1. The condensate return is 100% wet saturated water. No flash steam component is included.
2. The same mass leaves the system as enters it.
 Flow t 
QE t =  (
 h + ΔhT1( 100
d
) − hLT 2 )
T1( 100 ) 
d  LT1
V
 LT1 + ΔV
where, QEt = Heat energy consumed (in kJ/sec), at time ‘t’ (Note 1)
Flow t = Measured flow in m3/sec (Note 1)
VLT1 = Volume of liquid per kg of steam (m3/kg) at temperature T1 ˚C
∆V T1 = V VT1 - VLT1, where V VT1 is the volume of vapour per kg of steam at temperature T1 ˚C
hLT1 = Enthalpy of the liquid in kJ/kg at temperature T1 ˚C
∆hT1 = hVT1 - hLT1, where hVT1 is the enthalpy of vapour in kJ/kg vapour at temperature T1 ˚C
hLT2 = Enthalpy of the condensate liquid in kJ/kg at temperature T2 ˚C
VLT1 and ∆V T1; hLT1, hLT2 and ∆hT1 are available from published tables (note 2), but the recorder user needs
only to enter ‘values’ for measured flow, either the temperature or the pressure of the steam and the tem-
perature of the condensate. These ‘values’ can be constants, input channels or maths channels. Figure
4.3.11l and accompanying parameter descriptions give full details.
Figure 4.3.11k is a simplified sketch of a typical installation, showing where flow rate, pressure and tem-
perature readings are taken.
Steam supply
Inlet
Inlet pressure
flow
or temperature
Heat Heat
exchanger exchanger
Process 1 Process 2
Condensate
temperature
Steam Steam
Trap Trap
Condensate
Figure 4.3.11k Measurement transducer - typical locations
Notes:
HA028910 User Guide


SATURATED STEAM HEAT CONSUMED (Cont.)

Function Saturated Steam Heat Consumed
Inlet Flow Channel 1
Use Pressure
Inlet Pressure Channel 2
Inlet Dryness 23.8 %
Return Temperature Channel 3
Units Units
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11l Typical Saturated Steam Heat Flow configuration page
PARAMETERS
Inlet Flow Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel supplying the measured flow rate. If
Inlet Temperature Appears only if Use = Temperature. Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel
Inlet Pressure Appears only if Use = Pressure. Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel sup-
Inlet Dryness Enter a value between 0 and 100 to represent the dryness of the steam. 0 = no va-
Return Temperature Select ‘Constant’ or the number of the channel supplying the condensate tempera-
ture If ‘Constant’ is selected, a further ‘box’ allows a value for the constant to be
entered.
*Note: See Saturated Steam Mass Flow, above, for details of pressure unit conversion
GROUP MKT
Similar in operation to MKT, described above, except that the MKT is derived from a specified group of
points rather than a single point. For each sample period, the maximum and minimum values reached by
any point(s) within the specified group are saved, and used as inputs to the Equation.

Value 0.0000 Units
Function Group MKT
Source 1) Group 1
Number of samples 3
Sample interval 0.125 s
Heat of Activation 83.144 kJ/mole
Units Units
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11m Group MKT configuration page
User Guide HA028910


RATE-OF-CHANGE

dPV Int − Int−p
= ×R
dt P
Where:
dPV/dt = Rate of change of PV with time
Int = Input value ‘this time’
Int - P = Input value ‘last time’ (i.e. ‘this time’ – P)
P = Sample period (i.e. ‘this time’ – ‘last time’) in seconds. Only periods that are a multiple of
0.125 seconds are accepted.*
R = Scaling factor. Generally, R is the number of seconds in the required ‘per unit time’ value.
For example: if R = 1, the rate is ‘per second’; if R = 60, the rate is ‘per minute’; if R = 3600,
the rate is ‘per hour’.
*Note: For channels being read over Modbus, the ‘priority intervals’ set in the Modbus Master
configuration menu (section 4.3.16) may cause the readings to be inaccurate or to be continuously
zero. For this reason, a minimum sample period of 1 second is recommended.

Value 0.0000 Units
Reset now
Function Rate of change

Rate of change of 1) Channel 1
Sample period 0.125 s
Rate Scalar 0.125
Units Units
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11n Rate of change configuration menu
HA028910 User Guide


OXYGEN (O2) CORRECTION
This function carries out O2 correction of gas measurements for use in Continuous Emissions Monitoring
applications. The equation calculated is:
20.9%− Specified O 2
Correction = × Measured Gas
20.9%− Measured O 2
where,
Specified O2 = specified oxygen entered as a constant 5-digit value (prescribed for the particular proc-
ess).
Measured O2 = measured oxygen, entered as a channel number (gas analyser input) (See application
note, below).
Measured Gas = the measured gas, entered as a channel number (gas analyser input).
APPLICATION NOTE
Some Authorities allow Oxygen correction to be made ONLY if the Measured Oxygen value is above a
limit specified by such Authorities.
For the oxygen correction function to conform with this requirement it is necessary to ‘Filter’ the Meas-
ured Oxygen value using a High Select function, with ‘Measured Oxygen’ and the Specified Limit con-
stant as its inputs. The output from this function (derived channel number) is then used as the ‘Measured
oxygen’ value.
Value 0.0000 Units
Function O2 Correction
Measured O2 Channel 1
Measured Gas Channel 2
Specified O2 0 %
Units Units
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11p Oxygen correction configuration menu
User Guide HA028910


RELATIVE HUMIDITY
This determines the percentage relative humidity from wet and dry temperature and atmospheric pres-
sure inputs.
Standard temperature and pressure at sea level are defined as 1.01325 Bar, and 15˚C. Pressure varies
with height as indicated in table 4.3.11c. The standard psychrometric constant is 0.000666 (6.66 x 10 -4).

A 0 + wA1 + w2 A 2 + w3 A 3 + w4 A4 + w5 A 5 − {p × AbsP(d − w)}
RH =
A 0 + dA 1 + d2 A 2 + d3 A 3 + d4 A 4 + d5 A 5
Where:
RH = Percentage relative humidity Geometric height Pressure
A0 = 6.17204663 x 10 -3 (metres) (Bar)
A1 = 4.28096024 x 10 -4 -250 1.04365
0 1.01325
A 2 = 1.53342964 x 10 -5
250 0.983576
A3 = 2.40833685 x 10 -7 500 0.954612
A4 = 3.04249240 x 10 -9 750 0.926346
1000 0.898762
A5 = 2.65867713 x 10 -11 1500 0.845596
p = Psychrometric constant (0.000666) 2000 0.795014
AbsP = Pressure in Bar (absolute not gauge)
Table 4.3.11c
d = Dry bulb temperature in degrees Celsius Atmospheric pressure versus height
w = Wet bulb temperature in degrees Celsius

Value 0.0000 Units
Function Relative Humidity

Wet bulb temperature Channel 1
Dry bulb temperature Channel 2
Pressure Channel 3
Psychrometric Constant 6.66E-4
Units Units
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11q Relative humidity configuration menu
HA028910 User Guide


ZIRCONIA PROBE
A zirconia (oxygen) probe consists of two platinum electrodes bonded to a pellet or cylinder of zirconia.
At elevated temperatures, such a probe develops an emf across it which is proportional to probe tem-
perature and to the log of the difference in oxygen partial pressure between its two ends.
OXYGEN CONCENTRATION
In order to measure oxygen concentrations, one end of the probe is inserted into the atmosphere to be
measured, whilst the other is subjected to a reference atmosphere. For most applications, air provides a
suitable reference (reference input = 20.95 for air).
The temperature of the probe is normally measured using a type K or type R thermocouple. The tem-
perature effect on the thermocouple is such, that for successful operation, the probe temperature must
be greater than 973K (700˚C).
The equation solved by the maths function is:

P1
P2 = E
10 0.0496×T
where: P2 = Partial pressure of oxygen in the sampled gas (%)
P1 = partial pressure of oxygen in the reference atmosphere (%) (20.95% for air)
E = Electromotive force (emf) across the probe in mV
T = Probe temperature in Kelvins
Figure 4.3.11r shows the configuration menu. Figure 4.3.11s shows oxygen concentration versus probe
emf for various temperatures.

Value 0.0000 Units
Function Zirconia Probe

Probe temperature Channel 1
Probe emf Channel 2
Reference Partial Pressure 20.95
Units Units
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.11r Zirconia probe function configuration menu
To obtain a useful result, it is necessary to scale correctly.
The channel which is measuring the probe output would normally need to be set to: Input Type = mV;
Input low = 0; input high = 100..
A typical temperature-measuring channel might be set up as:
Input Type = Thermocouple; Lin type = Type K; Range low = 273; Range high = 1800, Range units = K.
The maths channel scaling would typically be configured as:
Units = %; Scale Low = 0; Scale High = 5 (for boiler flues) or 10 (for kilns).
User Guide HA028910


ZIRCONIA PROBE (Cont.)
100 1
8
6
10 1
8
6
2
Percent Oxygen
1 1
8
6
15
00
14 ˚C
00
˚C 2
13
00
12
˚C
00
11
˚C
00
10
˚C
1
00
0.1
˚C
90
0˚
8
80
C
0˚C
70
0˚C
6
60
0˚C
500
400
˚C
4
300
˚C
˚C
0.01 1
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Probe EMF (mV)
Figure 4.3.11s Probe emf versus temperature
HA028910 User Guide


OXYGEN POTENTIAL
The oxygen potential of an atmosphere is a measurement of its ability to oxidise or reduce. For any ele-
ment, a value of oxygen potential (free energy of formation) is known. Above this value, the material will
oxidise, below it, no oxidisation will occur. Figure 4.3.11t, below, is a free energy diagram for a number of
oxidising processes.
Oxygen potential is given by the equation
Op = 0.00457 × T × logO p′
Where: Op = Required oxygen potential (in kilocalories)
T = Probe temperature (in Kelvins)
Opʹ = Partial pressure of oxygen in the reference atmosphere (in atmospheres)
It can be shown that, because the oxygen potential of air is essentially constant over the range 870 to
1450 kelvins, the zirconia probe output is proportional to the oxygen potential of an atmosphere, accord-
ing to:
E = (10.84 × T) + 40 mV (in the range 870 to 1450 K)
Thus, it is possible to measure oxygen potential directly from a zirconia probe, using a standard input
channel of the instrument, scaled in units of oxygen potential. A typical configuration might be:
Input Type = mV;
Input low = 40;
Input high = 1124;
Scale low = -100;
Scale high = 0;
Units = kCal.
Such a configuration would be suitable over the temperature range 873 to 1473 K (600 to 1200 ˚C).
User Guide HA028910


Air O3
6F
e2 100
M
2
+O 200
uO O4
2C e3
O2 4F m 6FeO + O2 2Fe3O4 300
u+
2C M
M 2N
iO 400
O i+
O2 M
2Cu 2 2N m 500
-50 + O2
4Cu 2CO 2
T 600
+ O2 O
2CO 2H 2
S2 + 2O 2 2SO 2 Sn
O2
2H 2
+ O2 700
O2
2 CoO S n+ 800
+ O2 2FeO
2Co + O2 900
2Fe M
Oxygen potential (kilocalories)
C + O2 CO2
T 1000
-100 2C m 2T a 2
O5
1100
+O
2 O2
+5
b 2 Zn
O 4Ta 1200
milliVolts
O2
M Zn
+ 1300
2
M m
M r O3
2C 2
T T 1400
O2 O M t m
r +3 2Mn 1500
4C + O2
2Mn
-150 1600
O3
2V 2
O2 1700
+3
4V
SiO 2 M 1800
t Si +
O2
1900
T l O3
TiO 2 2A 2
O2 2000
Ti + 3O 2
l+
4A M 2100
-200
T M 2200
B
M eO
2300
gO 2B
2M O2 2400
T 2B
e+
ZrO 2 O2 Th
O2
g+
+ O2 2M T + O2
2500
Zr Th
2600
-250 2700
2800
2900
0 500 1000 1500 2000

Degrees Celsius
Note:
Colours serve no purpose in the figure above, other than to simplify interpretation.
Change of state Element Oxide

Melting point M m
Boiling point B b
Sublimation point S s
Transition point T t
Figure 4.3.11t Free energy diagram
HA028910 User Guide


GROUP MINIMUM
The following description assumes a group name of ‘Furnace 1’, which contains four channels with de-
scriptors ‘Temp 1’, ‘Temp 2’, ‘Temp 3’ and ‘Temp 4’
The output of the Group Minimum function is the current lowest value of any of the points in the source
group. The required source group is selected by picklist.
Should a point return a non-valid value, it is excluded from the calculation, and the result of the function
is the minimum of the remaining points.
DESCRIPTORS
As a part of the Group Minimum function configuration, it is possible to select one of two types of de-
scriptor: ‘User Defined’ and ‘Minimum Channel’. Figure 4.3.11u, below shows the relevant area of the
configuration page.
Maths Number 1) Furnace 1 min temp Maths Number 1) Group 1 minimum

Value Value Value 234.67
Function Group Minimum Function Group Minimum
Source 1) Furnace 1 Source 1) Furnace 1

Units Units
Descriptor type User defined descriptor Descriptor type Minimum Channel Descriptor
Descriptor Furnace 1 min temp Descriptor Temp 1 Descriptor of channel
User entered
with lowest current value
descriptor
Figure 4.3.11u Group minimum configuration page

User Defined Descriptor.
This allows a descriptor to be entered in the normal way. For example ‘Furnace 1 min
temp’. This descriptor is copied to the Maths Number field at the top of the display
page.
Minimum Channel Descriptor
This selection causes the descriptor of the point with the instantaneous current low-
est value in the group, to become the (non-editable) maths channel descriptor. For
example if the four channels in the group (Temp 1 to Temp 4) have the instantane-
ous values 800, 950, 790 and 873 respectively, then the Descriptor will be ‘Temp 3’ .
Should Temp 3 rise above 800, whilst all the others remain static, then the Descriptor
would become ‘Temp 1’.
The ‘Maths Number’ field which normally copies the maths channel descriptor, con-
tains instead the text: ‘N) Group N minimum’, where ‘Group N’ is the default name of
the source group.
A typical application of the ‘Minimum channel descriptor’ would be to include the
descriptor in a message sent to the chart on a regular basis by a Timer function.
Section 4.3.8 describes the entry of the messages, and section 4.3.14 describes the
setting up of timers.
(Continued)
User Guide HA028910


GROUP MINIMUM (Cont.)
A typical message entry would be:
Message: Lowest temperature is {1} at chan {2}
Replace {1} with: Specified Value
{1} source: Group 1 minimum
Replace {2} with: Specified Descriptor
{2} source: Group 1 Minimum
resulting in a message such as:
22/08/08 14:22:06 Lowest temperature is 790.00 Units at chan Temp 3.
where ‘Units’ is the text entered in the Group Minimum maths channel configuration, not that for the input
channel, although typically, they would be the same.
Note: The Group configuration checkboxes for maths channels with ’Minimum Channel Descrip-
tor’ selected, are ‘greyed’ thus preventing such channels from being used as inputs to their own
source group. See section 4.3.2 for Group configuration details.
HA028910 User Guide


THERMOCOUPLE CAL CORRECTION
This function allows two correction value tables, each of up to 25 points to be entered. For each point,
a correction value can be entered, and the recorder will interpolate between points. The output of this
maths function is the sum of the source channel and the two correction values. The Instrument correc-
tion values are obtained from a recorder calibration carried out by the user or by an agency; the thermo-
couple correction values are obtained from the thermocouple test certificate.
Figure 4.3.11v shows a configuration page with an ‘Inst Calibration’ table of three points, and a ‘T/C cali-
bration‘ table of four points.

Figure 4.3.11v Thermocouple Cal correction configuration page
Thermocouple Select any real or virtual channel, or ‘Constant’ as the source channel.
Serial number Enter an identifier for the thermocouple.
Inst calibration points Enter the number of Instrument calibration points that are to be used (25 max.).
Inst cal temp n The nth calibration point where ‘n’ = 1 to the ‘Inst calibration points’ value.
Inst cal corr n The correction value for the nth calibration point.
T/C calibration points Enter the number of Thermocouple calibration points that are to be used (25 max.).
T/C cal temp n The nth calibration point where ‘n’ = 1 to the ‘T/C calibration points’ value.
T/C cal corr n The correction value for the nth calibration point.
Other parameters are as described in ‘Channel configuration’ (section 4.3.3)

Note: Each ‘cal temp’ value must be higher than the previous one.
User Guide HA028910

4.3.11 MATHS OPTION (Cont.)

MODBUS ADDRESSING
For units fitted with the Modbus TCP comms option, the following table gives hex addresses for maths channel
1. Generally: Maths channel N parameter address = maths channel 1 parameter address + 162 (N-1) (decimal).
For full details of the Modbus TCP implementation, see section 8. A/B switching
B values are not accessible via Mod-
MATHS CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA bus. Span, Zone, Colour etc. are all
setting A
CHANNEL 1
Parameter Description Type Access Start Addr. Register
Name Hex (Dec) Length
Ch1 Span high Upper span value (display full scale) Scaled Read only 2FF1 (12273) 1
Ch1 Span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Scaled Read only 2FF2 (12274) 1
Ch1 Zone high Zone high value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 2FF3 (12275) 1
Ch1 Zone low Zone low value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 2FF4 (12276) 1
Ch1 PV type Input type Enum Read only 2FF5 (12277) 1
1 = Analogue input 3 = Totaliser
2 = Maths 4 = Counter
Ch1 Decimal places Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16 Read only 2FF6 (12278) 1
(used by all scaled parameters except where stated)
Ch1 Colour Channel colour (0 to 55) Enum Read only 2FF7 (12279) 1
(See Annex B for RGB definitions)
Ch1 Units Units string (up to five characters) String_5 Read only 2FF8 (12280) 3
Spare 2FFB (12283) 2
Ch1 Open string Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 2FFD (12285) 4
Spare 3001 (12289) 4
Ch1 Close string Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 3005 (12293) 4
Spare 3009 (12297) 4
Ch1 Descriptor Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters) String_20 Read only 300D (12301) 10
Spare 3017 (12311) 10
Ch1 No of alarms Number of alarms on this channel Uint16 Read only 3021 (12321) 1
Ch1 PV format Enum Read only 3022 (12322) 1
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare 3023 (12323) 60
Ch1 Alarm 1 enable Alarm 1 enable Enum Read only 305F (12383) 1
0 = Off 2 = Latched
1 = Unlatched 3 = Trigger
Ch1 Alarm 1 type Alarm 1 type Enum Read only 3060 (12384) 1
0 = Absolute low 1 = Absolute high
2 = Deviation in 3 = Deviation out
4 = Rate of change rise 5 = Rate of change fall
Ch1 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint (see note) Scaled Read/Write 3061 (12385) 1
Spare 3062 (12386) 10
Ch1 Alarm 2 enable Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 306C (12396) 1
Ch1 Alarm 2 type Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 306D (12397) 1
Ch1 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint (see note) Scaled Read/Write 306E (12398) 1
Spare 306F (12399) 10
Ch1 Alarm 3 enable Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 3079 (12409) 1
Ch1 Alarm 3 type Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 307A (12410) 1
Ch1 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint (see note) Scaled Read/Write 307B (12411) 1
Spare 307C (12412) 10
Ch1 Alarm 4 type Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 3087 (12423) 1
Ch1 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint (see note) Scaled Read/Write 3088 (12424) 1
Spare 3089 (12425) 10
Note: If the setpoint source for an alarm (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’, the
value returned is the previously configured constant value.
HA028910 User Guide


MATHS CHANNEL RUN-TIME DATA
This table show addresses for maths channel 1 run-time data. Generally: channel N address = channel 1
address + 3(N-1) (decimal)
CHANNEL 1
Ch1 value Current process value (PV) Scaled Read/Write A2BA (41658) 1
Ch1 status Channel status Enum Read only A2BB (41659) 1
0 = Good PV 5 = Ranging error
1 = Channel off 6 = Overflow
2 = Over range 7 = Bad PV
3 = Under range 8 = No data
4 = Hardware error
Ch1 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - A2BC (41660) 1
Bit 0:0 = Alarm 1 inactive; 1 = Alarm 1 active Read only
Bit 1: 0 = No alarm 1 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 2: 1 = Acknowledge alarm 1 Read/Write
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 4: 0 = Alarm 2 inactive; 1 = Alarm 2 active Read only
Bit 5: 0 = No Alarm 2 Ack. required; 1 = Ack. required Read only
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare
IEEE 32-BIT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA
The following table shows addresses for the specified 32-bit floating-point values, for Maths channel 1.
Generally, Parameter address for channel N = Parameter address for channel 1 + 36(N-1) (decimal).
CHANNEL 1
Ch1 span high Upper span value (Display full scale) Float Read only DF73 (57203) 2
Ch1 span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Float Read only DF75 (57205) 2
Ch1 Zone high Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only DF77 (57207) 2
Ch1 Zone low Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only DF79 (57209) 2
Ch1 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (see note) Float Read/Write DF7B (57211) 2
Ch1 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (see note) Float Read/Write DF7D (57213) 2
Ch 1 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (see note) Float Read/Write DF7F (57215) 2
Ch 1 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (see note) Float Read/Write DF81 (57217) 2
Spare DF83 (57219) 20
User Guide HA028910


IEEE 32-BIT CHANNEL RUN-TIME DATA
The following table gives addresses for the specified 32-bit floating-point values, for maths channel 1.
Generally, Parameter address for channel N = Parameter address for channel 1 + 4(N-1) (decimal).
CHANNEL 1

Channel 1 value Current process value (PV) Float Read/Write F9EF (63983) 2
Channel 1 status Channel status Enum Read only F9F1 (63985) 1
4 = Hardware error
Channel 1 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - F9F2 (63986) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.12 Totalisers
INTRODUCTION
Each totaliser allows the user to maintain a running total of any input channel, or of any maths channel.
Using the maths functions, it is possible to totalise combinations of input channels, so the value of two
channels added together, or the difference between two channels could be totalised if required. The
totaliser equation is :
ma t
tot t = tot t−1 +
PSF × USF
where tot t = totaliser value this sample*
tot t-1 = totaliser value last sample*
mat = value of totalised channel this sample*
PSF = Period Scaling Factor (See Period scaler description below)
USF = Units Scaling Factor (See Unit scaler description below)
*Note: Time between samples = Recording interval set in Group configuration.

See ‘Update information’ in Annex A for details.
CONFIGURATION
Figure 4.3,12, below, shows a typical (enabled) totaliser configuration page

Totaliser Number Allows any of the available totalisers to be selected from the picklist, for configura-
tion.
Enable Allows the user to enable/disable the totaliser.
Value Shows the (dynamic) current value of the selected totaliser.
Total of Allows an input channel or a maths channel to be selected as the source to be total-
ised.
Low Cutoff The value of the source channel (in engineering units) below which it is not to be
totalised.
High Cutoff The value of the source channel (in engineering units) above which it is not to be
totalised.
Units The totalised units (e.g. m3)
Preset Allows the entry of a 10-character positive, or nine-character negative value from
which the totaliser is to start counting.
Direction of counting is defined by the sign of the Unit scaler viz: + = increment; - =
decrement.
Preset now Operation of this key initiates the totaliser preset.
User Guide HA028910

4.3.12 TOTALISER CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
Totaliser Number 1) Totaliser 1 Select totaliser

number
Enable
Value 123456 Units (totaliser)
Total of Channel 1 Select channel etc. to be totalised
Low cut off 0 ch units Units of channel
being totalised
High cut off 999999 ch units
Units Units
Preset 0 Units (totaliser)
Preset now
Period scaler 1
Unit scaler 1
Descriptor Totaliser 1
A/B Switching
Scale Low 0 Units (totaliser)
Scale High 1 Units (totaliser)
Zone Low 1 %
Zone High 100 %
Scale Type None Select None, Linear or Log
PV format Numeric Select Numeric or Scientific
Colour 0
Select: Off,
Enable Off Unlatched,
Latched,
Job Number 1 Select Job number Trigger
Category No Action Select Job category
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.12 Totaliser configuration menu

Period Scaler The totaliser equation works in seconds. If the totalised channel units are other than
‘per second’ a period scaler other than the default (1) must be entered. For example,
if the input channel is in litres per hour, then the period scaler would have to be the
number of seconds in an hour (3600).
Unit Scaler If, for example, the input channel is in litres per hour, the totalised value will be in
litres, unless the unit scaler is set to a value other than 1. If it is more convenient, the
totalised value can be in thousands of litres by setting the unit scaler to 1000. Set-
ting the unit scaler negative causes the totaliser to decrement rather than increment.
Scale Low/High The ‘zero’ and full scale values for the totaliser, as traced on the screen.
If A/B switching is enabled, a second set of scale low and scale high values can be
entered. ‘A’ values are used during normal operation. ‘B’ values are switched to by
job action, as described in section 4.7.
The remaining configuration items are identical with the relevant items in Input Channel configuration
(section 4.3.3), except that Log/Linear scale type is not available. For job information, see section 4.7.
Note: Selecting ‘High’ compression in Archive configuration may cause very high totaliser values
to be displayed incorrectly by the recorder and held incorrectly in the history file. This problem
may be solved by moving the relevant point to a group using ‘Normal’ compression, or by re-scal-
ing the totaliser to read (for example) TeraWatt hours instead of Megawatt hours.
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.12 (Cont.) TOTALISER MODBUS ADDRESSING

For units fitted with the Modbus TCP comms option, the following table gives addresses for totaliser 1
configuration data
Generally: Totaliser N parameter address = totaliser 1 parameter address + 162 (N-1) (decimal).
For full details of the Modbus TCP implementation, see section 8.
TOTALISER CONFIGURATION DATA
TOTALISER 1
Span high Upper span value (display full scale) Scaled Read only 6F39 (28473) 1
Span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Scaled Read only 6F3A (28474) 1
Zone high Zone high value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 6F3B (28475) 1
Zone low Zone low value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 6F3C (28476) 1
PV type Input type Enum Read only 6F3D (28477) 1
Decimal places Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16 Read only 6F3E (28478) 1
Colour Channel colour (0 to 55) Enum Read only 6F3F (28479) 1
(See Annex B for RGB definitions)
Units Units string (up to five characters) String_5 Read only 6F40 (28480) 3
Spare 6F43 (28483) 2
Open string Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 6F45 (28485) 4
Spare 6F49 (28489) 4
Close string Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 6F4D (28493) 4
Spare 6F51 (28497) 4
Descriptor Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters) String_20 Read only 6F55 (28501) 10
Spare 6F5F (28511) 10
No of alarms Number of alarms on this channel Uint16 Read only 6F69 (28521) 1
PV format Enum Read only 6F6A (28522) 1
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare 6F6B (28523) 60
Alarm 1 enable Alarm 1 enable Enum Read only 6FA7 (28583) 1
0 = Off 2 = Latched
Alarm 1 type Alarm 1 type Enum Read only 6FA8 (28584) 1
Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint (see note) Scaled Read/Write 6FA9 (28585) 1
Spare 6FAA (28586) 10
Alarm 2 enable Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 6FB4 (28596) 1
Alarm 2 type Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 6FB5 (28597) 1
Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint (see note) Scaled Read/Write 6FB6 (28598) 1
Spare 6FB7 (28599) 10
Alarm 3 enable Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 6FC1 (28609) 1
Alarm 3 type Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 6FC2 (28610) 1
Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint (see note) Scaled Read/Write 6FC3 (28611) 1
Spare 6FC4 (28612) 10
Alarm 4 enable Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 6FCE (28622) 1
Alarm 4 type Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 6FCF (28623) 1
Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint (see note) Scaled Read/Write 6FD0 (28624) 1
Spare 6FD1 (28625) 10
User Guide HA028910


RUN-TIME DATA
This table shows addresses for totaliser 1. Generally: totaliser N address = totaliser 1 address + 3(N-1)
(decimal)
TOTALISER 1
Value Current process value (PV) Scaled Read/Write A3E6 (41958) 1
Status Channel status Enum Read only A3E7 (41959) 1
4 = Hardware error
Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - A3E8 (41960) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare
IEEE 32-BIT CONFIGURATION DATA
The following table gives addresses for the specified 32-bit floating-point values, for Totaliser 1. Gener-
ally, Parameter address for totaliser N = Parameter address for totaliser 1 + 36(N-1) (decimal).
TOTALISER 1
Span high Upper span value (Display full scale) Float Read only ED83 (60803) 2
Span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Float Read only ED85 (60805) 2
Zone high Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only ED87 (60807) 2
Zone low Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only ED89 (60809) 2
Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (see note) Float Read/Write ED8B (60811) 2
Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (see note) Float Read/Write ED8D (60813) 2
Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (see note) Float Read/Write ED8F (60815) 2
Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (see note) Float Read/Write ED91 (60817) 2
Spare ED93 (60819) 20
HA028910 User Guide


IEEE AREA TOTALISER RUN-TIME DATA
The following table gives addresses for the specified 32-bit floating-point values, for totaliser 1. Gener-
ally, Parameter address for totaliser N = Parameter address for totaliser 1 + 4(N-1) (decimal).
TOTALISER 1
Totaliser 1 value Current process value (PV) Float Read/Write FB7F (64383) 2
Totaliser 1 status Channel status Enum Read only FB81 (64385) 1
4 = Hardware error
Totaliser 1 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - FB82 (64386) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare
User Guide HA028910

4.3.13 Counters
INTRODUCTION
The virtual channels option introduces a user-configurable number of counters, which can be preset, disa-
bled, incremented or decremented by Job action. If access is permitted, the user can preset the counter to
a selected value, as and when required, from the configuration page. See section 4.7 for Job details and sec-
tion 4.3.22 for a description of virtual channels. If the Batch option is fitted (section 4.3.10), then batches can
be started whenever counter 1 changes value, and if this is done, the current value of counter 1 is appended
to batch field 1. (Other counters can be selected for Batch initiation, but operation is not guaranteed.)
CONFIGURATION
Figure 4.3.13 shows a typical (enabled) counter configuration page. The page is accessed from the Root
menu/Operator/Config menu.
Counter number 1) Counter 1 Select counter

number
Enable
Value OFF Units
Units Units
Preset 0 Units
Preset now
Descriptor Counter 1
A/B Switching
Scale Low 0 Units
Scale High 1 Units
Zone Low 0 %
Zone High 100 %
Scale Type None Select None or Linear
Colour 0
Select: Off,
Latched,
Category No Action Select Job category
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.13 Typical Counter configuration menu
Counter number Allows any of the available counters to be selected for configuration
Enable Allows the user to start/stop counting by enabling/disabling the counter.
Value Shows the current dynamic value of the counter
Units Allows a text string of up to 5 characters to be entered as a units description
Preset Allows a counter value to be entered for manual or job action preset.
Scale low/high The values to appear at the scale end points. If A/B switching is enabled, a second
set of scale low and scale high values can be entered. ‘A’ values are used during
normal operation. ‘B’ values are switched to by job action, as described in section
4.7.
The remaining configuration items are as described for input channels in section 4.3.3, except that Log/
Linear scales are not available.
Note: An absolute high alarm (for example) with a threshold of 10, will not be triggered until the value
exceeds 10 (i.e. counter value = 11). In order to trip the alarm at 10, a threshold lower than 10 must be
entered (e.g. threshold = 9.5). A similar situation exists for absolute low and deviation alarms.
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.13 COUNTERS (Cont.)

COUNTER MODBUS ADDRESSING
For units fitted with the Modbus TCP comms option, the table below gives addresses for counter 1
configuration data. Generally: Counter N parameter address = counter 1 parameter address + 162 (N-1)
(decimal). For full details of the Modbus implementation, see section 8.
COUNTER CONFIGURATION DATA
COUNTER 1
Span high Upper span value (display full scale) Scaled Read only 8EDD (36573) 1
Span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Scaled Read only 8EDE (36574) 1
Zone high Zone high value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 8EDF (36575) 1
Zone low Zone low value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 8EE0 (36576) 1
PV type Input type Enum Read only 8EE1 (36577) 1
Decimal places Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16 Read only 8EE2 (36578) 1
Colour Channel colour (0 to 55) (See Annex B for RGB definitions) Enum Read only 8EE3 (36579) 1
Units Units string (up to five characters) String_5 Read only 8EE4 (36580) 3
Spare 8EE7 (36583) 2
Open string Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 8EE9 (36585) 4
Spare 8EED (36589) 4
Close string Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 8EF1(36593) 4
Spare 8EF5 (36597) 4
Descriptor Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters) String_20 Read only 8EF9 (36601) 10
Spare 8F03 (36611) 10
No of alarms Number of alarms on this channel Uint16 Read only 8F0D (36621) 1
PV format Enum Read only 8F0E (36622) 1
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare 8F0F (36623) 60
Alarm 1 enable Alarm 1 enable Enum Read only 8F4B (36683) 1
0 = Off 2 = Latched
Alarm 1 type Alarm 1 type Enum Read only 8F4C (36684) 1
Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint (see note) Scaled Read/Write 8F4D (36685) 1
Spare 8F4E (36686) 10
Alarm 2 enable Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 8F58 (36696) 1
Alarm 2 type Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 8F59 (36697) 1
Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint (see note) Scaled Read/Write 8F5A (36698) 1
Spare 8F5B (36699) 10
Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint (see note) Scaled Read/Write 8F67 (36711) 1
Spare 8F68 (36712) 10
Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint (see note) Scaled Read/Write 8F74 (36724) 1
Spare 8F75 (36725) 10
User Guide HA028910


RUN-TIME DATA
This table shows addresses for counter 1. Generally: Counter N address = counter 1 address + 3(N-1)
(decimal)
COUNTER 1
Value Current process value (PV) Scaled Read/Write A47C (42108) 1
Status Channel status Enum Read only A47D (42109) 1
4 = Hardware error
Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - A47E (42110) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare
IEEE 32-BIT CONFIGURATION DATA
The following table gives addresses for the specified 32-bit floating-point values, for Counter 1. Gener-
ally, Parameter address for counter N = Parameter address for counter 1 + 36(N-1) (decimal).
COUNTER 1
Span high Upper span value (Display full scale) Float Read only F48B (62603) 2
Span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Float Read only F48D (62605) 2
Zone high Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only F48F (62607) 2
Zone low Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only F491 (62609) 2
Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (see note) Float Read/Write F493 (62611) 2
Spare F49B (62619) 20
HA028910 User Guide


IEEE AREA COUNTER RUN-TIME DATA
The following table gives addresses for the specified 32-bit floating-point values, for counter 1. Gener-
ally, Parameter address for counter N = Parameter address for counter 1 + 4(N-1) (decimal).
COUNTER 1
Counter 1 value Current process value (PV) Float Read/Write FC47 (64583) 2
Counter 1 status Channel status Enum Read only FC49 (64585) 1
4 = Hardware error
Counter 1 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - FC4A (64586) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare
User Guide HA028910

4.3.14 Timers
INTRODUCTION
This feature supplies 12 count-down timers which can be used for general timing purposes. The timers
can be either one-shot or repeating, and can be initiated in the following ways:
1. directly by the operator from the configuration page (if access permission is granted),
2. by job action (see section 4.7),
3. at a predefined time/date,
4. every ‘time period’, where the ‘time period’ can be configured to be anything from 1 second to 1
year. For example, setting seconds to ‘30’ and leaving all other fields ‘Any’, the timer will start every
minute on the half minute. Setting seconds to ‘30’ and minutes to ‘0’ will cause the timer to start at 30
seconds past each hour.
Note: Times are not adjusted for Daylight Saving changes. Thus if the timer is set to trigger on a
daily, weekly, etc, basis, then, during ‘Summer Time’, the trigger will occur an hour late (i.e. at 01:00
hrs. instead of at midnight).
The full range of jobs is described in section 4.7. ‘Timer Active’ is defined as an internal event trigger
(section 4.3.6).
CONFIGURATION
Figure 4.3.14 shows a typical timer configuration display. The page is accessed from the Root menu/Op-
erator/Config menu.
Timer number 1) Timer 1 Select timer

Enable
Remaining 00:00:00
Repeat in 00:00:00
Reset now
Start now
Descriptor Timer 1
Self start
Date Any
Month Any These fields appear
Hour Midnight only if 'Self start' is
enabled.
Minute Any
Second Any
Duration 60 Seconds
Repeat after 0 Seconds
Select Job
Category No Action category
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.14 Typical timer configuration page
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.14 TIMERS (Cont.)

Timer number Allows a specific timer to be selected for configuration

Enable Allows the user to enable/disable the selected timer
Remaining This is a dynamic display showing the time remaining in hours:minutes:seconds for-
mat.
Repeat in For repeat timers, shows the time remaining before the repeat is initiated. Display is
00:00:00 whilst timer is counting down.
Reset now Allows a running timer to be reset to 00:00:00.
Start now Allows the operator to initiate the timer.
Descriptor Allows a descriptor to be entered for the timer.
Self Start If enabled, this causes date and time selection fields to appear as shown in figure
4.3.14 above.
Date: allows a day number to be selected from a picklist of 1 to N and ‘Any’,
where N is the maximum number of days in the selected month.
Month: allows a month number to be entered from a picklist of 1 to 12 and ‘Any’.
Hour: allows an hour number to be selected from a picklist of 1 to 23, ‘Midnight’
and ‘Any’.
Minute: allows a minutes number to be entered from a picklist of 0 to 59 and ‘Any’.
Seconds: allows a seconds value to be entered from a picklist of 0 to 59 and ‘Any’.
Duration Allows the user to enter a count-down time period in seconds.
Repeat after Allows the user to enter a repeat rate. It should be noted that the repeat value
includes the duration time. For example, to time down from 50 seconds, every
minute, a ‘Duration’ value of 50 seconds should be entered, with a ‘Repeat after’
value of 60 seconds (not 10 seconds).
Note: If Month = ‘Any’, and Day = 31, then the timer will not be triggered in February, April, June,
September or November. Similarly, if Day = 30, the timer will not be triggered in February, and so
on.
Job configuration is as described in section 4.7.
SELF-START EXAMPLE
To preset Totaliser number 1 to zero, daily, at midnight:
In totaliser configuration, enter 0 as the Preset value for Totaliser 1.
In timer configuration, select:

1. Timer number Timer 1
2. Enable enabled
3 Self start enabled
4 Date Any
5. Month Any
6. Hour Midnight
7. Minute 0
8. Second 0
9. Duration 0.125
10. Repeat after 0
11. Job number 1
12. Job category Totaliser
13. Action Preset
14. Totaliser Totaliser 1
15. On Active
User Guide HA028910

4.3.15 Connections
INTRODUCTION
ASCII (INPUT)
Note: See Section 12 for details of the ASCII Printer Output option.
This mode allows the recorder to receive simple ASCII messages from, for example, barcode readers,
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs), Global Positioning Systems (GPSs) (NMEA-0183 protocol) etc.
Messages are sent to as many groups as are set up to receive them, and become a part of these groups’
histories, and appear on vertical and horizontal trend displays in the following format:
23/08/05 10:25:06 (Serial), Message of up to 85 characters
Date and time Source Message
MODBUS RTU
This allows the recorder’s serial communications ‘port’ to be used as Modbus master or Modbus slave.
When acting as a master, the unit can communicate with up to 16 slaves. Use of the Serial port is comple-
mentary to the use of Ethernet connections.
Note: When configuring a unit as a Modbus slave, it is recommended that the Instrument and
Point Configurations give easily identifiable instrument and point names (descriptors).
INSTALLATION
If the option is fitted, two 9-way D-type connectors (plugs) are fitted at the rear of the recorder, as shown
in section 2.2.
TERMINATION AND BIASSING (Not EIA232)
If the communications line is left open-ended, the end of the cable acts as a reflector, returning what
can appear to be ‘true’ data signals back down the line. A receiver cannot distinguish between ‘true’ and
reflected data, with the result that the ‘true’ data is corrupted.
In order to avoid this, a termination resistor is fitted across the line at the final instrument. If the value of
this resistor is equal to the characteristic impedance of the cable (e.g. 120 Ohms), then the line appears
to be of infinite length and no reflections occur. Such a value however, does not always give the best
signal-to-noise ratio, so a compromise value (e.g. 220 Ohms) is normally selected to give the optimum
performance in reducing unwanted reflections and in improving the signal-to-noise ratio. The recorder
communications port is terminated as shown in figure 4.3.15a, below, for a single point-to-point applica-
tion.
5 Volts
100kΩ
RxB
TxB
Transmit lines Receiver
220Ω
from sender device
TxA
RxA
100kΩ
0 Volts
Recorder
Figure 4.3.15a Recorder termination (single-drop EIA485 application)
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.15 CONNECTIONS (Cont.)

CONFIGURATION
The default (ASCII) Serial comms configuration menu is as shown in figure 4.3.15b below. Figures 4.3.15c and
4.3.15d show the alternative menus for Modbus slave and Modbus master selections, respectively. If the ASCII
Printer Output option is fitted, a fourth Protocol choice (ASCII Printer) appears - see section 12 for details.
Note: The serial communications hardware is limited to one start bit.
Port Serial 1 Select port
Link Error Count 0

Reset Error Count
Protocol ASCII (input)

Connection EIA232
Baud Rate 19200 Select required Baud rate.
Stop Bits 1 Select 1 or 2
Parity None Select None, Odd or Even
Data Bits 8 Select 7 or 8

Timeout 250 ms Enter required Timeout value
First Start Char 0
Second Start Char 0 Enter decimal ASCII value between 0
and 127. (0 = no character.)
First End Char 13 See User Guide, (section B6) for list.
Second End Char 10
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Select Group(s) to receive messages
Group 4 ( = Receive)
Group 5
Group 6
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.15b Serial Communications configuration menu (ASCII input)
Link Error Count 0

Port Serial 1 Select port Reset Error Count
Link Error Count 0
Protocol Modbus Master
Reset Error Count
Connection EIA232
Protocol Modbus Slave Baud Rate 19200 Select required Baud rate.
Connection EIA232 Stop Bits 1 Select 1 or 2
Baud Rate 19200 Select required Baud rate. Parity None Select None, Odd or Even
Stop Bits 1 Select 1 or 2 Timeout 1000 ms

Parity None Select None, Odd or Even Enable error code B
Enable Talk Through
Apply Discard
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.15c Figure 4.3.15d

Serial Communications configuration menu (Modbus slave) Serial Communications configuration menu (Modbus master)
User Guide HA028910

4.3.15 CONNECTIONS (Cont.)

CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS
SERIAL PORT
Allows the user to select the port to be used for serial communications.
LINK ERROR COUNT
A Link error count is provided for every slave. The count is incremented every time there is a framing
error, a parity error or a Cyclic redundancy check (CRC) error. The ‘Reset Error Count’ key is used to reset
the count to zero.
PROTOCOL
For the Serial communications board option, ASCII (input), Modbus Slave, Modbus Master or ASCII
Printer protocols are available.
CONNECTION
Allows EIA232 or EIA485 to be selected as transmission standard.
BAUD RATE
Allows a Baud rate to be chosen from a picklist of: 300, 600, 1200, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400. This value
must be the same for all devices in the serial link.
STOP BITS
Selectable as 1 or 2. This value must be the same for all devices in the serial link.
PARITY
Allows Parity to be chosen from a pick list of: None, Odd, Even. This value must be the same for all de-
vices in the serial link.
DATA BITS
For ASCII (input) protocol only, selectable as 7 or 8. This value must be the same for all devices in the se-
rial link.
TIMEOUT
For ASCII (input) protocol, this allows a timeout value to be entered of between 50 and 3000 msec inclu-
sive. A value of 0 = no timeout. See also ‘Messaging Information’ below.
For Modbus Master protocol, this allows a timeout to be entered of between 100 and 9,999 msec (inclu-
sive), An error code B is generated (if so configured - see ‘Enable Error Code B’ below). If the master has
not received a reply to a request within the timeout period. For slaves configured with their own timeout
periods, these will override the entry here.
MESSAGE START/END CHARACTERS
For ASCII (input) protocol only, the message can be prefixed by 0, 1 or 2 specific characters and can be
suffixed by 0, 1 or 2 specific characters. The First and Second Start and End characters are entered as
decimal ASCII codes between 0 and 127 as required. 0 = no character, 10 = Line Feed; 13 = Carriage
Return. See Annex B for a list of ASCII codes. If only one start or end character is required, the first char-
acter must be entered, and the second character be entered as zero.
GROUP SELECTION
For ASCII input protocol, this allows groups to be deselected/selected for receipt of the messages. A
checked box indicates that the associated group will receive the messages.
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.15 CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS (Cont.)

ENABLE ERROR CODE B
For Modbus Master only.
If enabled, this causes an error code B to be generated in the event of a timeout or a Cyclic Redundancy
Check (CRC) error.
ENABLE TALK THROUGH
For Modbus Master only.
If disabled, this prevents ‘external’ (Ethernet) masters from accessing the slaves connected to this instru-
ment. (I.E. only this instrument can act as a master to its slaves.)
MESSAGING INFORMATION
Characters are read into a buffer, until the end of message characters are received, or until the time-
since-last-character exceeds the entered Timeout value. Date, Time and ‘(Serial)’ are then prefixed to the
message, which is then sent to the selected groups. The date and time relate to when the first buffered
character was received. If Start-of-message characters are configured, characters will be read into the
buffer only after these characters have been received.
The buffer holds up to 120 characters plus date/time etc. and start/end-of-message characters . Further
characters are discarded until End-of-message is received, or timeout occurs.
Message characters below Hex 20 (decimal 32) will be replaced by question marks (?).
Message characters above Hex 7F (decimal 127) will be treated as Unicode.
MESSAGING RULES
1 If no start-of-message characters are configured, but a timeout value other than 0 has been entered,
the new message starts after the timeout period has elapsed.
2 If no end-of-message characters are configured, but a timeout value other than 0 has been entered,
the new message ends after the timeout period has elapsed.
3 If start-of-message characters are configured, and a timeout value other than 0 has been entered, all
characters prior to the Start-of-message characters are ignored.
4 If start-of-message characters are configured but neither end characters nor timeout have been con-
figured, then this is an invalid configuration.
Should this configuration be a requirement, if the same characters are entered as end-of-message
characters instead, then each message will be sent to the groups when the next message is received.
5 If no start or end-of-message characters are entered and no timeout value is entered, all received
characters are discarded
6 If a received message is deemed to be corrupt, it is discarded and the software will await a further
message.
7 Start and End-of-message characters are removed before the messages are sent to the groups.
MODBUS ADDRESS
When acting as a slave, the recorder will respond both to the address set in Instrument Configuration
(section 4.3.1) and to address 255 (used by some network scanning software).
User Guide HA028910

4.3.16 Master comms

INTRODUCTION
This option allows the unit to be used as a Modbus Master unit, as well as a Modbus Slave. The instru-
ment can communicate using the Ethernet (RJ45) connection, or by means of one of the serial communi-
cations ports (if fitted - see section 4.3.15 for details) or both simultaneously.
Master Configuration consists of entering a Modbus Address, and, for Ethernet connection, an IP ad-
dress or DNS path name for each of the available remote devices which are to be used as slaves. The
configuration also allows three different priority intervals to be entered, and read/write parameters can
be configured to be accessed at one of these three rates.
The unit comes complete with a number of ‘Profiles’ for known instruments. This allows it to ‘recognise’
an instrument as a slave type, and simplifies the read/write process for ‘known’ instruments, by present-
ing commonly used Parameters by name. Other parameters can be accessed by entering the relevant
register’s address. The unit will also communicate with ‘third party’ instruments, but in such a case, the
user has to define the required read/write register addresses derived from data supplied by the manu-
facturer of the instrument.
Once the remote unit has been recognised by the master, the master and slave units can be configured
to carry out the following:
1. By setting a master input channel to: Type = ‘Master Comms’, selected parameters can be read by
the master from a selected slave. This master channel can then be included in display groups, can
have alarm setpoints, run jobs etc., independently of the original channel. In a similar way, maths
functions can be read by setting a master Maths channel to: Function = ‘Master Comms’.
2. The ‘Demand Write’ feature can write values to a selected parameter in a selected slave, as a one-
shot update. Demand Writes can be initiated by operator action, or they can be initiated by job ac-
tion or (if the User Screens option is fitted), by Operator Key action.
3. For slaves whose input and/or maths channels can be set to ‘Modbus Comms Input’, the master’s
‘Output channels’ feature can copy master input or maths channels to a selected slave, as a continu-
ous process.
Notes
1. If reading from or writing to more than one instrument, it is recommended that some thought
be given to instrument and point descriptors, as confusion can easily arise. This is particularly
true if Bridge is connected to a master which has several slaves attached.
2. If ‘Link error’ occurs whilst connected to a Modbus slave, the slave’s delay parameter (if any)
should be enabled. If no such parameter is available, the slave’s manufacturer should be con-
tacted for advice.
An example configuration is given later in this section showing how to set up a master unit to read inputs
from two slaves, and to re-write one of these channels to a third slave.
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.16 MASTER COMMS (Cont.)

MASTER COMMS CONFIGURATION MENU
A typical master comms configuration page is shown in figure 4.3.16a, below.
Note: For the sake of completeness, the figure below shows all possible fields, even though some
are actually mutually exclusive (e.g. ‘Login Required’ does not appear for ‘Profile = Third party’).
High Priority interval 0.125 Seconds

Medium priority interval 1 Seconds
Low priority interval 2 Seconds
Store diagnostics
Slave 1) Remote_1
Enable
Online
Descriptor Remote_1
Network Ethernet Select 'Ethernet' or Serial port
IP Address 149.121.30.0
Modbus address 1 IP Address field appears
only if 'Ethernet' selected
Detect This Slave as Network type.
Profile Third Party

Timeout 250 ms
Retry 3
Max Block Size 124 Register
Share Socket
Login Required Appears only if Profile slave type supports login security
Username Username Appear only if 'Login Required'
Password ******** is selected
Apply Discard Detect All Slaves
Figure 4.3.16a Master Comms configuration menu.
Priority intervals This allows three levels of update rate to be entered. These rates are used in point
configuration, to define how often a value is read. In order to optimise the perform-
ance of the serial link, it is recommended that the slowest rate consistent with re-
quirements be selected. The interval is entered in multiples of 1/8th second (0.125
seconds).
In some cases, two update rates can be defined. For example, when reading a Proc-
ess Value (PV) channel from a slave, it is possible to set the reading frequency of the
PV to the highest rate available, but other, less frequently changing, values (scale
low/high for example) can be read at a slower rate.
Store Diagnostics If enabled, diagnostics information is kept in non-volatile memory, and is thus re-
tained during power cycling.
Slave A picklist of slaves, initially called ‘Remote Device N’. When the device is detected,
this name changes to the detected Instrument’s Descriptor (if any) or a default tag.
The slave name can be edited in the ‘Descriptor’ entry field below.
User Guide HA028910


CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS (Cont.)
Enable If this window is not selected, none of the following fields appears, and the Remote
Device cannot be accessed.
Online If enabled, normal communications with the slave are carried out. When disabled,
the connection with the slave is terminated.
Descriptor Allows a new name for the slave device to be entered. (This name is used only within
the master - it does not overwrite the Instrument Descriptor in the slave itself).
Network Select Ethernet or a Serial port. All the slaves on the link must have the same com-
munications parameter values (e.g. Baud Rate) as are set for the master. See Section
4.3.15 for Serial Communications Configuration details.
Note: Serial ports appear in the selection list only if ‘Protocol’ has been set to ‘Modbus Master’ in
the Serial Comms Configuration (section 4.3.15).
IP Address This field appears only if Network = Ethernet. This must match the IP address or DNS
name of the slave. For this unit, this information is to be found in Network/Address
and Network/Name respectively. For other instruments, refer to the documentation
supplied with those instruments.
Modbus Address For Ethernet links, Modbus addresses are associated with the IP address. This
means that, for any IP address, the range of Modbus addresses used for slaves can (if
required) be the same as the range used by a unit with a different IP address.
For Serial communications, each unit (including the master) must have a unique Mod-
bus address.
For the unit described by this manual, the Modbus address is accessed in ‘Instru-
ment’ configuration (section 4.3.1). For other instrument the documentation sup-
plied with those instruments should be referred to.
Profile A pick list of supported instrument types. Third party is used as a default, and for
non-listed instrument types. This field is updated automatically if the slave is Detect-
ed.
Timeout Allows a timeout period to be set for the read/write process. See ‘Retry’ below, and
‘Disable Retries’ in section 4.3.17.
Retry Allows entry of the number of times the master attempts to get a response from the
slave, before aborting. If not successful, an error message appears.
Max Block size Always 124 for supported instruments, this field is editable for ‘Third party’ instru-
ments. The maximum block length supported by a particular instrument is found
from that instrument’s documentation.
Share Socket This item appears only for slaves with Network = Ethernet.
When enabled, allows a reduction in the number of links between a master and
multiple slaves. See ‘Share Socket’, below for more details. Generally, it is recom-
mended that this item is left at the default for the particular slave being configured.
Login Required Some slaves require a user name and password to be entered before access can be
gained. The user name and password set here in the master Comms configuration
must match those of the slave.
For this type of instrument, the user name is the ‘Remote user name’ and the pass-
word is the ‘Remote password’ set up in the Security/Access configuration (section
4.4.1). Password is necessary only when Modbus security disabled is not selected in
‘Instrument’ configuration (section 4.3.1). For other types of instrument, refer to the
documentation supplied with that instrument.
Username/Password See Login Required, immediately above
DETECT THIS SLAVE

This button causes the master to search for the slave set up on this configuration page. If the search is
successful, the Remote Device name changes to the instrument name or default tag.
HA028910 User Guide


DETECT ALL SLAVES
Network Ethernet
Overwrite existing slaves
Timeout 500
From Node 149.121.130.200
For 50 Node(s)
Modbus Address 1
To 2
Abort Start Discard Apply Re-Scan
Figure 4.3.16b Detect all slaves set-up menu
The ‘Detect All Slaves’ key is used to detect any slaves connected to the system, within certain search
parameters.
Operation of the button calls a display page (figure 4.3.16b) which allows the entry of a start IP address,
a range of IP addresses, and a range of Modbus addresses. In the above example, the search is carried
out for all devices with Modbus addresses in the range 1 to 2 inclusive, associated with instruments which
have IP addresses between 149.121.130.200 and 149.121.130.249 inclusive.
PARAMETERS AND KEYS

Network Allows the user to select a network to search over.
Overwrite existing slaves
The Auto Detect results page (see below) lists all the instruments found within the
search parameters, along with a ‘tick box’ for each one. Each instrument whose tick
box is enabled is assigned to the ‘Remote Device’ list in the Master Comms configu-
ration page. If ‘Overwrite existing slaves’ is enabled, then newly found instruments
will temporarily over write instruments previously configured there. The list becomes
permanent when the Modbus configuration page ‘Apply’ key is operated, but any of
the slaves can be edited, if required, prior to this.
Timeout The search for a slave is aborted if it does not respond within this time, and the
search moves on to the next slave.
From Node The start address for the search
For (nodes) The number of contiguous addresses to be searched starting with the ‘From Node’
address.
Modbus Address The lowest Modbus address for the search. The search will seek all slaves whose
Modbus Address lies between the value entered here, and the value entered in the
‘To’ field, below, inclusive.
To The highest Modbus address to be included in the search.
Abort This key allows the user to quit the search
Start Once the search information has been entered, operation of the Start key causes the
unit to search for any instruments which respond to the search criteria.
Discard Returns to the Modbus configuration page, without saving.
Apply Saves the details of the detected slaves to the Modbus configuration page. The
changes to the configuration page are temporary
Re-scan Allows the user to repeat the scan, with the same or edited search criteria.
User Guide HA028910


AUTO DETECT PAGE
The ‘Autodetect’ page displays the progress of the search. Once the search is complete, the results are
displayed as shown in figure 4.3.16c, below. For example, the top two lines show that devices with Mod-
bus addresses 1 and 2 were detected at IP address 149.121.130.211.
For instrument types similar to those described in this manual, the Instrument Descriptor is displayed in
the list. For other instruments, if the type is recognised, then the instrument type ID (e.g. model number)
appears. As can be seen from the figure, the instrument descriptors for the first two detected instru-
ments have been edited (section 4.3.1); the second two have the default descriptor (Instrument), and the
final one is a model 2747.
Note: The model number ‘2747’ is used for illustrative purposes only. If such an instrument type
exists, it should not be assumed from the above that it will be recognised by the auto detect sys-
tem.
Auto Detect If 'Overwrite existing slaves' is not enabled, AND the

number of detected slaves is greater than the number
Please select required slave devices of free slots, then this text reads 'Please select a
maximum of N slave devices', where N is the differ-
ence between the number of slaves detected and the
number of free slots.
Furnace temps 1 at 149.121.130.211/1
If the user selects more than N devices, only the first
Furnace Temps 2 at 149.121.130.211/2 N selected devices are used.
Instrument at 149.121.130.232/1
Instrument at 149.121.130.236/1
2747 at 149.121.130.237/1
Abort Start Discard Apply Re-Scan
Figure 4.3.16c Auto detect results page
As can be seen from the figure above, each instrument has a tick box associated with it. The user enables
those instruments which are to be included in the Slave List, by touching the relevant boxes. Operation
of ‘Apply’ then causes the selected instruments to be incorporated into the Slave list in the Modbus Mas-
ter configuration page.
If ‘Overwrite existing slaves’ is enabled, existing slaves are overwritten starting with slave 1 in the list.
If ‘Overwrite existing slaves’ is not enabled, then new slaves selected from the Auto detect page will be
inserted into the free slots in the slave list.
Note: A ‘free slot’ is either an empty slot, or a slot containing a slave which has not yet been ena-
bled.
HA028910 User Guide


SHARE SOCKET
This advanced configuration feature is used to improve communications performance, to take advantage
of the higher speed of Ethernet links compared with ‘Serial’ links. It is recommended that the default
value (enabled or disabled according to type) be left as despatched from the factory, unless there is
good reason to change it.
A socket is the name given to a logical connection between two Ethernet nodes. The establishment and
maintenance of sockets is controlled by the recorder, and the user has no control other than to enable
or disable the ‘Share sockets’ facility. The share socket feature is available only for slaves configured as
Ethernet devices (i.e. Network = Ethernet).
The upper illustration in figure 4.3.16d, shows master 1 communicating with slaves 1 to n via an Ethernet-
to-Serial converter, called a Modbus Gateway. In such a case, it is more efficient to allow all the slaves to
communicate over one link between master 1 and master 2, than to establish individual links between
master 1 and each of the slaves. In this example, ‘Share sockets’ should be enabled.
The lower illustration show a similar situation, except that master 2 is not just a gateway, but is a meas-
uring device in its own right. In such a case, Socket 1 is used for high speed communications between
master 1 and master 2, and Socket 2 is used to link master 1 to the slaves individually. In this case ‘Share
Sockets’ should be disabled for master 2, and enabled for all other devices.
IP address:
123.123.1.2
Modbus address: 10
Ethernet Master 2 Serial link (RS485)

Master 1
Socket 1 (TCP-Gateway)
Socket 1 communicates with IP Address

123.123.1.2, Modbus addresses 1 to n
IP:123.123.1.2 IP:123.123.1.2 IP:123.123.1.2 IP:123.123.1.2 IP:123.123.1.2
Slave 1 Slave 2 Slave 3 Slave n-1 Slave n
Modbus Address 1 Modbus Address 2 Modbus Address 3 Modbus Addr. n-1 Modbus Address n
IP address:
123.123.1.2
Modbus address: 10
Socket 1
Master 2 Serial link (RS485)
Master 1 Ethernet (Instrument)
Socket 2
Socket 1 Communicates with IP address

123. 123.1.2, Modbus address 10. IP:123.123.1.2 IP:123.123.1.2 IP:123.123.1.2 IP:123.123.1.2 IP:123.123.1.2
Slave 1 Slave 2 Slave 3 Slave n-1 Slave n
Socket 2 communicates with IP Address Modbus Address 1 Modbus Address 2 Modbus Address 3 Modbus Addr. n-1 Modbus Address n
123.123.1.2, Modbus addresses 1 to n
Notes:
1. The IP address '123.123.1.2' is for demonstration purposes only
2. Modbus address can be any number between 1 and 247, but must be
unique per IP address.
3. Modbus addresses need not be consecutive
Figure 4.3.16d Share socket examples
User Guide HA028910


MASTER COMMS CHANNEL CONFIGURATION
This display page, shown below, is called from the Operator/Config/Channels as described in section
4.3.3. A similar page appears in the Operator/Config/Maths configuration described in section 4.3.11.
The actual picklists which appear, depend entirely on the type or model of instrument being read from. It
is assumed that the user knows which parameters are to be accessed.
The following sections describe

a. a typical input channel configuration page with ‘Master Comms’ selected as Input Type, and a re-
corder or data acquisition unit as slave.
b. a typical input channel configuration page with ‘Master Comms’ selected as Input Type for a slave
controller.
c. the situation where ‘User Defined’ has been selected as Parameter. In such a case, the user must
determine the required register number from the documentation supplied with the slave.
Note: For completeness, figures 4.3.16e, 4.3.16f and 4,3,16g show all possible configuration fields.
The fields that actually appear are slave-model, and parameter dependent.
Channel Number 1) Read 1 Copies descriptor entry

Value -0.4670 Unadjusted
Input Type Master Comms
Slave 1) Furn 1 Recorder Select required slave
Digital
Parameter Process Value Select required slave parameter type
Scaling None Appears only for some slave types
Point Type Channel Select Required Slave parameter point
Point Number 1 Select iteration rate for
Process Value Medium Priority parameter update
PV Format Numeric
Span Low 0 Units
Span High 1 Units
Zone Low 0 %
Zone High 100 %
Colour 0
Units Units
Descriptor Read 1
Alarm Number 1
Enable Trigger
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.16e Channel configuration page - Typical Recorder
HA028910 User Guide


RECORDER/DAQ CONFIGURABLE PARAMETERS
TYPICAL RECORDER PARAMETERS
The following parameters may be accessible from a recorder or data acquisition unit, depending on
model number. Figure 4.3.16e, above, refers
Notes:
1. Items such as Scale, Zone and descriptor may be editable (white background) or not (grey back-
ground), depending on model.
2 This description includes only those items which are unique to input channels with Input Type =
Master Comms. For other items please see section 4.3.3.
Channel Number Allows the user to select the number of the channel to be configured. As soon as
Modbus master is selected as input type, the display changes from ‘Channel 1’ (for
example) to ‘Read 1’. This legend stays as ‘Read 1’ ‘until a descriptor is entered (be-
low), which immediately overwrites it.
Slave Allows the user to select (from a picklist), the slave from which data is to be retrieved.
The picklist contains all the Remote Devices configured as slaves in the Master
Comms Configuration described above.
Digital Allows data to be read into a digital input.
Parameter Allows the user to select Alarm setpoints, Process Value, Batch status (model de-
pendent) or ‘User defined’ to be selected. ‘User defined’ allows a (decimal) register
address to be entered
Scaling For some slaves, scale zero (scale low) is returned as value 0 and full scale (scale high)
as value 65,535 (Hex FFFF) with intermediate values having proportionate values.
For example the value 15, would be represented as 32,767 (7FFF) for a channel scale
0 to 30, as would a value of 50 for a channel scaled 0 to 100, and a value of 45 for a
channel scaled 30 to 60. In order to convert this reading to an understandable value,
a scaling factor must be entered. If the low and high scale entries match the slave
channel’s scale, the master reading will be the same as the slave’s reading.
Selecting ‘High/Low’ allows Scale low and Scale high values to be entered for the
selected parameter. If ‘None’ is selected, the process value is displayed as a propor-
tion of 64k.
Point type This item appears for Alarm setpoints and Process Value parameters only. Point type
allows the relevant point type (i.e. input channel, maths channel, totaliser etc.) in the
slave to be selected.
Point number This item appears for Alarm setpoints and Process Value parameters only. Point
number allows the relevant point number in the slave to be selected.
Group Number This item appears for Parameter = ‘Batch Status’ only. Group number allows that
group, the status of which is to be read, to be defined.
Process Value Allows one of three rates to be set for reading the Process Value. The three rates
(Low, Medium and High) have the values set in the Master Comms configuration.
Span Where the input value is scaled (see above), this ‘Span’ setting sets the Zero and Full
Scale values for the channel. This is different from the situation obtaining in input
channels, where span and scale have different meanings.
Remaining items are as described in Channel Configuration in section 4.3.3.
User Guide HA028910


TYPICAL CONTROLLER PARAMETERS
The following parameters may be accessible from a controller, depending on type.
Note: Figure 4.3.16f is a typical page and may show more or fewer items than appear on the actual
screen for a particular controller
Channel Number 1) Read 1 Reflects descriptor entry

Value -0.4670 Unadjusted
Slave 1) Furn 1 Control Select Required slave
Digital
Parameter Working Setpoint Select Required slave
Loop Number 1 Select required loop parameter
Process Value Medium Priority Select iteration rate for
PV Format Numeric parameter update
Span Low 0 Units

Span High 1 Units
Zone Low 0 %
Zone High 100 %
Colour 0
Units Units
Descriptor Read 1
Alarm Number 1
Enable Trigger
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.16f Typical Controller parameter page
HA028910 User Guide


TYPICAL CONTROLLER PARAMETERS (Cont.)
Channel Number Allows the user to select the number of the channel to be configured. As soon as
Modbus Master is selected as input type, this changes from ‘Channel 1’ (for example)
to ‘Read 1’. Once communication with the slave is established, this will change to the
descriptor of the remote channel (unless the controller type does not support this
item, in which case a suitable descriptor can be entered later in the configuration).
Slave Allows the user to select (from a picklist), the slave from which data is to be retrieved.
The picklist contains all the Remote Devices configured as slaves in the Master
Comms Configuration described above.
Digital Allows data to be read into a digital input.
Parameter Allows the user to select a specific parameter (table 4.3.16a shows a typical set) or
‘User defined’ to be selected. ‘User defined’ allows a (decimal) register address to
be entered (see ‘User defined’, below).
Loop number Allows the user to enter a Loop Number for the parameter read.
Process Value Allows one of three rates to be set for reading the Process Value. The three rates
(Low, Medium and High) have the values set in the Master Comms configuration.
Span This ‘Span’ setting allows the Zero and Full Scale values for the parameter to be en-
tered.
Zone etc. The remaining items are as described in Channel Configuration in section 4.3.3.
Alarm status
Auto/Manual
Process value
Read alarm active status
Read alarm unacknowledged status
Working output power
Working setpoint
Table 4.3.16a Typical Controller read parameters
User Guide HA028910


USER DEFINED REGISTERS
As previously mentioned, ‘User Defined’ can be selected for all slaves and for some slave types it is the
only way of accessing some or all parameters.
The number of the register holding the required parameter is to be found in the user documentation sup-
plied with the slave. For instance, if the unit to which this manual refers, were to be a slave, then the list
of registers is to be found in section 8. For example, for this instrument, to determine what type of alarm,
alarm 1 on channel 2 is, register 396 would be used, and the expected value would be 0 for Absolute
low, 1 for absolute high, 2 for Deviation in, 3 for Deviation out, 4 for Rate-of-change high or 5 for Rate-of-
Change low.
Channel Number 1) Read 1 Reflects descriptor, once the

Value 0.0400 Unadjusted Apply key has been operated.
Slave 1) Furn1 Recorder2 Select required slave
Digital
Parameter User Defined Select required slave parameter
Function Code Read holding registers (3) Select Function Code
Register 396 Enter required register number (decimal)
Data Type UInteger (16 Bit) Select Data Type
Scaling Decimal Places Select 'None' or 'Decimal Places'
Decimal Places 2 Enter No. of decimal point shifts
Process Value Medium Priority Select iteration rate for
PV Format continuous parameters
Numeric
Span Low 0 Units
Span High 1 Units
Zone Low 0 %
Zone High 100 %
Decimal digits 4
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.16g Configuration page for user defined parameters
HA028910 User Guide


This section defines those parameters which are unique to user defined registers.
Value Shows the value returned from the selected register, as modified by the scaling fac-
tor (if any).
Function Code Allows Modbus function code 03 or 04 to be selected. In some implementations,
the functions of the two codes are identical. In others, the codes have different func-
tions. See the documentation supplied with the slave for a list of supported Modbus
codes. For this instrument see section 8.2.1.
Register A decimal number representing the required parameter’s location in the slave’s
Modbus Register map. This information must be determined from the documenta-
tion supplied with the slave. For this instrument, section 8.4 contains listings for a
number of instrument, groups, and input channels. For details of maths, totalisers
etc., refer to the relevant option description.
Data Type Select a suitable data type for the selected parameter (again from the slave docu-
mentation). For this instrument, a list of relevant data types is given in section 8.4.
Scaling Whether Scaling appears or not is Model and Parameter dependent. If scaling is re-
quired, the choice may be ‘Decimal Places, or High/Low, again according to Model.
Decimal Places
Allows a dividing factor to be entered. An entry of 1, divides the returned value by
10. An entry of 2, divides by 100 etc. for successful implementation, there must be
a sufficient number of decimal places defined in the ‘Max Decimal Digits’ configura-
tion field for the value to be displayed with the required precision. ‘None’ leaves the
returned value unchanged.
For some slaves, scale zero (scale low) is returned as value 0 and full scale (scale high)
selected parameter.
If ‘None’ is selected, the process value is displayed as a proportion of 65,535.
User Guide HA028910


READING DIGITAL VALUES
Digital values can either be the open/closed status of a discrete input, or it can be a status string show-
ing, for example Instrument Status, if ‘User Defined’ is selected as Parameter Type,
OPEN/CLOSED STRINGS
The text strings for the open and closed statuses of a digital input channel can be read by ‘Enabling’ the
Digital checkbox for the relevant slave and Channel number. The strings returned will be those entered
in the slave channel’s configuration.
The default values are representations of an open switch (for Open) and a closed switch (for Closed). Fig-
ure 4.3.16h shows these two states.
Open String
Closed String
Figure 4.3.16h Default Open/Closed depictions
STATUS BITS
This allows the user to view the value of a bit in a status word such as Instrument Status, Channels in
Group etc. The relevant Register is accessed by entering its decimal number into the Register field which
appears when ‘User Defined’ is selected as Parameter.
Example
Figure 4.3.16i, below shows a master channel configuration page which causes a message* to be sent to
allgroups if the memory device inserted in a slave recorder is full. Open / closed strings are also entered
as Disk OK and DiskFull respectively, so that if this channel is included in a group, then whichever of these
legends is appropriate will be displayed in the channel faceplate.
* Note: The message string is entered as a part of Message Configuration as described in section
4.3.8.
From the recorder’s documentation, Instrument Status is held at register number 22. As can be seen
from table 4.3.16b, disk full status is reported by bit 4.
Bit Item being tested Status Value

0 Not used Always zero 1
3 Card/Disk. 0 = Inserted 1 = Missing 8
4 Card/Disk 0 = Not full 1 = Full 16
7 Channel status. 0 = No failures 1 = Channel failure 128
Table 4.3.16b Instrument status (Register 22)
HA028910 User Guide


READING DIGITAL VALUES EXAMPLE (Cont.)
Channel Number 1) Card in?

Value Card in
Slave 1) Recorder
Digital
Parameter User Defined
Function Code Read input reg (4)
Register 22
Data Type Bit (from register)
Bit Position 3
Zone Low 75 %
Zone High 100 %
Colour 0
Open String Card in
Closed String Card out
Descriptor Card in?
Alarm Number 1
Enable Trigger
Type Digital
Active when Card out
Dwell 0 s
Job Number 1
Category Message
Send Message(s) to All Groups
First Message 1) Card missing
Last Message 1) Card missing
On Active
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.16i Example configuration page
User Guide HA028910


MASTER COMMS CHANNEL CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE
This example describes a recorder (Furn1 Master) acting as a master to two other recorders (Furn1
Record and Furn2 Record) and a controller (Furn1 Control). This example shows only the configuration
pages necessary to set up the master input/output channels and the slave Comms channel. It is assumed
that:
a. the master comms configuration has been completed with Remote devices 1, 2 and 3 set up as Furn1
Control, Furn1 Record and Furn2 control, respectively.
b. all recorders are of the type described in this manual. Other types of slave may need more inputs, or
different inputs to be entered.
EXAMPLE (see figure 4.3.16j)
to:
Read Loop1 PV from Controller 1 to Channel 1 of Recorder 1 (the master)
Read Channel 1 from Recorder 2 to Channel 2 of the master
Write Channel 2 of the Master to Channel 1 of Recorder 3.
Controller 1
(Slave 1)
Furn1 Control
Furn1 PV1 Channel 1
Recorder 2 Recorder 1 Recorder 3

(Slave 2) (Master) (Slave 3)
Furn1 Record Furn1Master Furn2 Record
Channel 1
Furn1 Temp1 Channel 2 Channel 2
Figure 4.3.16j Required setup
HA028910 User Guide


MASTER CHANNEL 1 SETUP
Master channel 1 setup, to read the Loop1 PV from ‘Furn1 Control’ into channel 1, is shown in figure
4.3.16k, below. Note that, for this example that a Span High of 100 and Descriptor ‘Furn1 PV1’ have been
entered. The span zero and span high values should match those of the PV being read.
Channel Number 1) Furn1 PV1

Value 33.2453 Unadjusted
Slave 1) Furn1 Control
Digital
Parameter Process Value
Loop Number 1
PV Format Numeric
Span Low 0 Units
Span High 100 Units
Zone Low 0 %
Zone High 100 %
Colour 0
Units Units
Descriptor Furn1 PV1
Configuration Data Low Priority
Alarm Number 1
Enable Trigger
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.16k Master Channel 1 setup example
User Guide HA028910


MASTER CHANNEL 2 SETUP
Master channel 2 setup, to read the Channel 1 PV from ‘Furn1 record into channel 2’, is shown in figure
4.3.16l, below.
Channel Number 2) Furn1 Temp1

Slave 2) Furn1 Record
Digital
Parameter Process Value
Point Type Channel
Point Number 1
PV Format Numeric
Span Low 0 Units
Span High 1000 Units
Zone Low 0 %
Zone High 100 %
Colour 1
Units Units
Descriptor Furn1 Temp 1
Configuration Data Low Priority
Alarm Number 1
Enable Trigger
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.16l Master Channel 2 setup example
HA028910 User Guide


MASTER OUTPUT 1 SETUP
This shows the setup required in order to output the master’s channel 2 (Furn1 Temp1) to Furn2 Record
channel 1. The Descriptor Furn1 Temp1 has been entered as the Output Name. This happens to be the
same as the channel descriptor, but could be any required text string.
Output Channel Number 1) Furn1 Temp 1

Enable
Output Type Master Comms
Slave 3) Furn2 Record
Parameter Comms Channel
Point Type Channel
Point Number 1
Descriptor Furn1 PV1
Source 2) Furn1 Temp1
Default 0
On Error Write Default
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.16m Master Output 1 setup example
SLAVE INPUT CHANNEL 1 SETUP
Figure 4.3.16n shows how to set up a slave channel to read an input from a master. Note that the scaling
of this channel must match the scaling of the source channel.
Channel Number 1) Furn1 Temp1

Input Type Slave Comms
Scale Low 0 Deg C
Scale High 1000 Deg C
Units Deg C
Scale Type Linear
Scale Divisions - Major 10
Scale Divisions Minor 1
Descriptor Furn1 Temp 1
A/B Switching
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.16n Slave channel setup
User Guide HA028910


MASTER COMMS DIAGNOSTICS
Master Comms Diagnostics appears as an additional item on the System Menu. For details of the other
items see section 4.6.
Most items are self-evident.
The Total requests and Bad requests totals both exclude retries. The numbers in parentheses are excep-
tion code numbers as described in table 8.2.1b.
The Initiate Comms Test is a loop-back test that sends a message to the selected slave and waits for it to
be returned. If the test is successful, the ‘Successful Comms Test’ is incremented. If not successful, one
(or more) of the error box values is incremented.
Figure 4.3.16p shows a typical page.
Clock
Locale
Slave 1) Furn recorder 1 Upgrade
Actual High Priority 2 Seconds
Input Adjust
Actual Medium Priority 1 Seconds
Actual Low Priority 0.125 Seconds Output Adjust
Modbus Address 1
Master Comms Diagnostics
Slave Status Online
Last Transaction Status OK Ethernet diagnosticcs
Total Requests 1308
Bad requests 10
Good requests 1298
Illegal function codes (01) 0
Illegal addresses (02) 0
Illegal Values (03) 0
Slave Failures (04) 0
No Gateway path (10) 0
Gateway Target Fail (11) 0
Timed out requests 10
Master Rejects 0
Retried requests 4
Serial Link Error Count 0
Successful Comms Tests 1
Initiate Comms Test
Reset Diagnostics
Figure 4.3.16p Master Comms diagnostic page
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.17 Output channels

‘Output Channels’ appears as a configuration item only if either or both of the Master Comms or Ana-
logue outputs options is fitted.
MASTER COMMS
For Master Comms, this feature allows a Master Unit to write one (or more) of its points to one (or more)
slaves’ channels. Figure 4.3.17a shows a typical configuration page.

Enable
Select 'Off'', 'Master
Output Type Master Comms
Comms', 'mA' or 'V'
Slave 1) Furn Recorder 2
Parameter Comms Channel
Scaling High/Low
Scaling items appear only
Scale Low 0 for some slave types
Scale High 100
Point Type Channel
Select destination point
Point Number 1
Process Value Medium Priority Select iteration rate
Descriptor Output 1
Source 1) Channel 4 Select source point
Default 0
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.17a Typical output channel configuration page
Output Channel Number
Allows the user to select the Output to be configured.
Enable Allows the output channel to be enabled or disabled.
Output Type Select Master Comms
Slave Select the slave to be written-to.
Parameter Select required parameter from picklist (varies according to slave type/model)
Scaling If this field appears (depends on slave type), the Low and High scaling should match
that of the slave Channel being written to.
Point Type Allows a point type to be chosen from a picklist. (Picklist items vary according to
slave type/model)
Point Number For recorders, allows a point number to be entered. This point must be configured
as ‘Comms’ or ‘Slave Comms’ etc. (depending on slave type or model) at the slave.
Loop Number For Controllers, allows a loop number to be selected from a picklist.
Process Value Allows the selection of High, Medium or Low priority interval, as defined in the Mas-
ter Comms configuration page in section 4.3.16.
Descriptor Allows a descriptor of up to 20 characters to be entered for the output channel
name.
Source This allows the user to select the source point to be written to the slave destination
point.
Default This is the value written, if the source is in ‘Error’, and the ‘On error Write Default’
item (below) has been enabled.
If this item is enabled, the default value is written instead of the selected Source, if
the Source is in ‘Error’.
User Guide HA028910

4.3.17 OUTPUT CHANNELS (Cont.)

ANALOGUE OUTPUTS (RETRANSMISSION)
For Analogue outputs, this feature allows the user to direct any recorder point to a pair of rear panel
terminals (figure 2.2.1d), either as a voltage signal or as a current signal, as required. Figure 4.3.17 shows
a typical configuration page. See section 9 for Output Adjust details.

Enable Select 'Off', 'Master
Output Type V Comms', 'mA' or 'V'.
Descriptor Output 1
Range Low 0
Range High 10
Offset 0
Source span low 0
Source span high 10
Data Source Channel 1 Select source point
On Error Drive Off Select 'Drive Off', 'Drive
High' or 'Drive Low'.
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.17b Typical analogue output configuration page
Allows the user to select the Output to be configured.
Enable Allows the output channel to be enabled or disabled.
Output Type Select V or mA
Descriptor Allows a descriptor of up to 20 characters to be entered for the output channel
name.
Range Low The output which is to appear at the terminals when the source signal is at ‘Source
span low’.
Range High The output which is to appear at the terminals when the source signal is at ‘Source
span high’.
Offset Allows a fixed value to be entered to the value of the source signal before conversion
to the output range.
Source span low Allows the value of the source signal which is to result in ‘Range Low’ appearing at
the output terminals to be set.
Source span high Allows the value of the source signal which is to result in ‘Range High’ appearing at
the output terminals to be set.
Data Source This allows the user to select a point, or a constant to act as the source. If ‘Constant’
is selected, a further field (not shown in figure 4.3.17b) appears allowing the constant
value to be entered.
On Error Drive Off: the output signal is switched off (0 Volts or 0 mA).
Drive High: the output signal is set to Range High + 15%.
Drive Low: the output signal is set to Range Low - 15%.
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.18 Demand Writes

DEMAND WRITE CONFIGURATION
Demand writes allow slave values to be written from the master by operator action (from the configura-
tion page), by job action, or (if the Screen Builder option is fitted - section 7) by operation of a suitably
configured Operator key. Figure 4.3.18a shows a typical configuration page. Modbus codes 6 and 16 can
be selected for this purpose - see section 8.2.1 for code definitions.
Figure 4.3.18a shows a typical configuration page for writing to a recorder. Figure 4.3.18b shows the Edit
Constant page. Figure 4.3.18c shows a configuration page for the case where the destination is defined
as a register location.
WRITING TO A KNOWN DEVICE
Figure 4.3.18a shows the configuration page for writing a value from the master unit to a ‘known’ slave
unit.
Write number 1) Write_1 Select the Write num-

ber to be configured
Enable
Select 'Master
Demand Type Master Comms Comms' or 'Off'
Status OK
Demand Write
Select destination
Slave 1) Furn 1 Recorder slave
Select parameter
Parameter Alarm setpoint 2 to be written-to
Point Type Channel Select destination
Point Number 1
Descriptor Write 1
Source Constant
Default 0 Enter default value
Allows user to edit the constant prior
Allow Constant Edits to write (if Source = 'constant')
If enabled, the default value is written, should
On Error Write Default the selected source be in an 'Error' state.
Disable Retries If enabled, the write is attempted only once.
Send On Power Up Write is triggered when the unit powers up.
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.18a Typical Demand write configuration page
User Guide HA028910

4.3.18 DEMAND WRITES (Cont.)

CONFIGURABLE ITEMS
Write number Allows the user to select the Demand Write number to be configured
Enable Allows the user to enable/disable the write.
Demand Type Select ‘Master Comms’ or ‘Off’
Status Shows the status of the transaction. The meaning of most status strings are self-evi-
dent, the remaining ones have the following definitions:
OK: Transaction was carried out and a satisfactory response has been received
Idle: Appears only before the first Write following a power cycle, or if the Write
has not previously been configured.
Pending: Appears if the Write is waiting to happen, or a response is being waited for.
Can appear, for example, if the Write is queued.
Timeout: Appears if the slave fails to respond within the timeout set in the Master
Comms configuration page.
Transaction Disabled:
Appears, for example, if the Write has been disabled, but a job is still trying
to trigger it.
Slave Allows the user to select the Slave to be written-to, from a picklist containing all the
configured devices in the Master Comms configuration page.
Parameter Select parameter to be written to (picklist varies according to slave type/model)
Point type/Loop Number/Group Number
Allows a point, loop or group number to be entered for the selected parameter.
Descriptor Allows a descriptor to be entered for the Write.
Source Allows the source of the Write to be chosen, from a picklist containing ‘Constant’
plus all points in the recorder.
Default Allows a value to be entered for use as a default to be written to the destination
point. Appears if ‘Source’ = ‘Constant’, or for any other source, if the ‘On Error Write
Default’ checkbox (see below) is enabled.
Allow Constant edits If this is enabled, the user may change the default value before it is sent. Applies
only to user-triggered writes. See ‘Demand Write Button’, below.
Appears for all sources other than ‘Constant’. If this function is enabled, then the
default value is written, instead of the source value, should the source be in an Error
state. When enabled, the ‘Default’ entry box appears, if it was previously hidden.
Disable Retries If enabled, this function causes the recorder to attempt the Write only once, instead of
retrying according to the number of retries set in the Master Comms Configuration Page.
Send On Power Up If enabled, this causes the default value to be Written at Power-Up.
DEMAND WRITE BUTTON
When operated, this pushbutton causes the Write to be initiated. If the source is ‘Constant’ and the ‘Al-
low Constant Edits’ item is enabled, an ‘Edit’ page appears (figure 4.3.18b) allowing the user to change
the constant value from its default value, before the Write is carried out. Otherwise, the Write is carried
out without any further action being required.
Write 1
Status OK
Constant 0
Write now
Close
Figure 4.3.18b Constant Edit page
HA028910 User Guide


WRITING TO A SPECIFIC REGISTER
When ‘User Defined’ is selected , or if the slave device is ‘Unknown’, then a register can be defined which
can be written-to directly. The register addresses must be found from the documentation supplied with
the slave device.
Write number 1) Write 1 Select the Write to

be configured
Enable
Select 'Master
Demand Type Master Comms Comms' or 'Off'
Status Idle
Demand Write
Select destination
Slave 1) Furn 1 Recorder slave
Parameter User Defined
Function Code Preset Multiple reg (16)
Register 248
Data Type Float (32 Bit)
Descriptor Write 1
Source Constant
Default 0 Enter default value
Allows user to edit the constant prior
Allow Constant Edits to write (if Source = 'constant')
Disable Retries If enabled, the write is attempted only once.
Send On Power Up Write is triggered when the unit powers up.
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.18c Demand Writes to specific register
This contains details of parameters unique to Demand Writes to specific registers. Other parameters are
as described above.
Function Code Allows the Modbus function code 6 or 16 to be selected. See the documentation
supplied with the slave for a list of supported Modbus codes (for this instrument see
section 8.2.1). Demand writes of a single 8 or 16-bit register can use either code, but
code 6 is more efficient. Writing two or more registers requires the use of code 16.
Register A decimal number representing the required parameter’s location in the slave’s
Modbus Register map. This information must be determined from the documenta-
tion supplied with the slave. For this instrument, section 8.4 contains listings for a
number of instrument, groups, and input channels. For details of maths, totalisers
etc., refer to the relevant option description.
Data Type Select a suitable data type for the selected parameter (again from the slave docu-
mentation). For this instrument, a list of relevant data types is given in section 8.4.
User Guide HA028910


WRITING TO A SPECIFIC REGISTER (Cont.)

Scaling
Whether Scaling appears or not is Model and Parameter dependent. If scaling is re-
quired, the choice may be ‘Decimal Places, or High/Low, again according to Model.
‘Decimal Places’ allows a dividing factor to be entered. An entry of 1, divides the
returned value by 10. An entry of 2, divides by 100 etc. for successful implementa-
tion, there must be a sufficient number of decimal places defined in the ‘Max Deci-
mal Digits’ configuration field for the value to be displayed with the required preci-
sion.. ‘None’ leaves the returned value unchanged. ‘None’ leaves the returned value
unchanged.
For some slaves, scale zero (scale low) is returned as value 0 and full scale (scale high)
selected parameter. If ‘None’ is selected, the process value is displayed as a propor-
tion of 65,535.
DEMAND WRITES WITH AUDIT TRAIL

Normal Audit Trail messages include both the new value and the previous value, for example
09/08/08 11:27:58 1) Temp1 Alarm Number 1 Enable Latched was Off
With Demand Writes, the recorder has no way of determining what the value, of the parameter being
written to, was prior to the Write. For this reason no ‘was’ value is included in the message. A typical
Demand Write audit trail message would be:
09/08/08 11:35:10 Write_1 wrote 255.75
Please see section 4.4.2 for more details of Audit Trail.
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.19 E-mails
E-mails can be sent by the instrument to one or more recipients. The user can enter 10 recipient e-mail
addresses in each of five mailing lists, giving a maximum of 50 addresses, 10 of which can be sent to at
any one time. A Recipient can appear in as many lists as required.
Up to 24 e-mails can be configured, but which of these e-mails is sent, is defined during Job or Event But-
ton configuration. Any function capable of triggering a job, can cause any of the available e-mails to be
sent.
As well as a ‘Subject’, and the body text, each e-mail can include one of the messages set up in ‘Message
Configuration’, and can thus include embedded values, alarm status, batch status etc., as described in
section 4.3.8.
E-MAIL CONFIGURATION
The figure below shows the e-mail configuration page (using fictitious names for email server/address
information).
Mail Server mail server name

Port Number 25
Sender IP Address of Recorder
Errors To e-mail address to which e-mail failure messages to be sent
Retry Time 60 Seconds
Recipient List 1) List1 Select List Number
Descriptor List1
Rcpt1 e-mail address of 1st Recipient on this list
Rcpt2 e-mail address of 2nd Recipient on this list
Rcpt3 etc.
Rcpt4
Rcpt5
Rcpt6
Rcpt7
Rcpt8
Rcpt9
Rcpt10
Email Number 1) Email1 Select SMTP,
Descriptor Email1 SMS (Subject Only) or
Protocol SMTP (Email) SMS (Body only)
Subject Cold store alarm

Cold store temp. sensor 1 too hot. Instrument name,
Instrument number, chan 1Alarm1
Text
Include Message
Message 3) {1},{2},{3},{4} Select Message Number
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.19a E-mail configuration (SMTP Protocol)
User Guide HA028910

4.3.19 EMAILS (Cont.)

This subsection contains details of the parameters that appear in the E-mail configuration page (figure
4.3.19a above). Figure 4.3.19b (below) may also be referred-to for further explanation.
Mail Server Enter the name (note 1) of the mail server or IP address here. This is the destination
to which e-mails are sent, for subsequent delivery.
Port Number This is the port number used for SMTP by the servers. Most servers use port 25 for
this function, and this value should be changed from the default only by experienced
personnel.
Sender For DNS operation, this is a combination of the Local Host and Domain entries set up
in the ‘Network/Name’ area of configuration described in section 4.5 .
If Fixed I.P. Address is selected, the I.P. Address appears instead.
The unit accesses the ‘Sender’ information automatically, and it cannot be edited
here. The ‘Sender’ is placed in the ‘From:’ part of the e-mail header.
Errors To An e-mail address to which any error messages can be sent for display etc. The
instrument itself cannot receive e-mails and so is unable to display (for example ‘un-
deliverable’) messages itself. An entry in this field must be made. The same address
may be used for any number of instruments.
Retry time The product tries repeatedly (until successful) to dispatch the e-mail until the ‘Retry
time’ has expired. If the e-mail has not been sent within this period, it is deleted, and
a ‘General’ message is generated.
Recipient List Allows a list to be chosen for entry of recipient e-mail addresses
Descriptor Allows a name to be entered for the selected list.
Rcpt1 to Rcpt10 These fields allow 10 recipients’ e-mail addresses to be entered for the selected list.
The first valid address appears in the ‘To:’ part of the e-mail header; subsequent valid
addresses appear in the ‘Cc:’ part of the e-mail header (note 2).
Email Number Allows an e-mail to be selected for configuration.
Descriptor Allows a descriptor to be entered for the e-mail. This appears in the list of e-mails
when setting up a job, and also in the message log.
Protocol Choose one of ‘SMPT (Email)’, ‘SMS (Subject Only)’ and ‘SMS (Body Only)’. ‘Opera-
tion’ (below) gives some details of the application of the SMS protocol in this instru-
ment.
SMPT (Email).
Selecting this protocol allows both a Subject and Body text to be entered.
SMS (Subject Only).
Selecting this protocol allows a subject to be entered, but the entry field for
the body text is not presented for use. Any text previously entered here, whilst
another protocol was selected, is lost.
SMS (Body Only)
Selecting this protocol allows Body text to be entered, but the Subject field is
not displayed. Any text previously entered as a Subject, whilst another protocol
was selected, is lost.
Subject Allows the entry of up to 100 characters to appear in the ‘Subject:’ part of the e-mail
header. The field does not appear if ‘SMS Body Only’ is selected as the Protocol.
Text Allows the entry of up to 240 characters to appear as the body of the e-mail. The
field does not appear if ‘SMS Subject Only’ is selected as the Protocol. Also referred
to as ‘Body Text’.
Include message If this checkbox in enabled, one of the messages in the ‘Message Configuration’ area
can be selected to appear below the body text in the e-mail.
Notes:
1. Domain Name Service (DNS) must be enabled in the recorder network configuration (section
4.5.2) if a mail server name is to be used.
2. A ‘general’ message is generated if there are any invalid recipients in any list (who would not
receive e-mails). Such messages may be viewed in ‘Message Log’ (section 3.1.4).
HA028910 User Guide


E-MAIL DETAILS
Figure 4.3.19b depicts an e-mail using fictitious entries.
Instrument's Local Host address

(or IP address, if fixed)
First valid recipient address

Header
Further valid recipients
'Subject' entry
'Text' entry
(body text)
Body
Message
(if 'Include message' checked)
Figure 4.3.19b E-mail appearance
The figure above shows that the e-mail is in two distinct parts, the header (grey area) and the body (white
area).
THE HEADER AREA
The header contains details of the sender, the recipient(s), the subject and the time and date.
Note: The time and date may be local to the generating instrument, or local to the recipient, de-
pending on the recipient’s mail host configuration
The header is important in the prevention of ‘spamming’. The instrument adheres to the RFC2822 stand-
ard with respect to e-mail headers. Some servers are stricter than others, and it is not guaranteed that an
e-mail generated by the instrument will not be interpreted as a spam message by the receiving server.
From: This contains either the ‘Local Host’ name (as defined in Network/Name Setup) and
mailserver address, or the IP address if a fixed IP address is selected in Network/Ad-
dress settings. See section 4.5 for details of the Network key.
To: The first valid recipient address in the selected list.
CC: The remaining valid addresses in the recipient list
Subject: Contains the subject text entered during configuration. Empty if ‘SMS Body’ select-
ed as Protocol
User Guide HA028910


THE BODY AREA
This contains the body text, along with any appended messages. In the example above the message has
the embedded values of Instrument name, Instrument number, channel 1 alarm 1 status, as implied by
the body text.
OPERATION
1. E-mails are generated either by job or by operation of an Event Button from a User screen (if the
Screen builder option is fitted).
2. Every time the sending of an e-mail is requested, a ‘General’ note is generated and appears in the
message log for all groups. The format is: Date, Time Sent <e-mail descriptor> to List N, where <e-
mail descriptor> represents the descriptor entered in the configuration page for the e-mail, and ‘List
N’ is the recipient list to whom the e-mail was sent.
3. Access to e-mails is restricted to users with ‘Full Configuration’ permission.
4. Signing/Authorizing restrictions can be applied only to e-mails generated by Event button opera-
tion, as part of the Event button’s configuration (section 4.3.7).
5. The instrument implements the Simple Message Transfer Protocol (SMTP), incorporating Multipur-
pose Internet Mail extensions.
6. The instrument does not implement the Short Message Service (SMS) protocol, though it is able
to send SMS messages to a mobile phone via an appropriate server or gateway. As some servers/
gateways use the ‘subject’ as the SMS message, and others use the body text, these alternatives are
provided for in the Protocol pick list in the Configuration page described above.
7. A new event source ‘Email fail’ can be used to trigger a job list should an e-mail send failure occur.
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.20 Reports configuration

This allows the user to configure up to 10 ‘reports’ for output to the chart or for printing by an ASCII
printer (option) as a result of job action. Figure 4.3.20a shows a typical configuration page, accessed
from the CONFIG button ‘Reports’ item.
Report 1) Report 1
Descriptor Report 1
Number of Fields 6
Style Normal
Field 2 Type Text
Text
Style Bold
Field 3 Type Process Value
Point Channel 1
Style Emphasised
Field 4 Type Batch Field 1
Style Banner
Field 5 Type 1) Message
Style Normal
Field 6 Type Line Feed
Line Feed 1
Apply Discard
Figure 4.3.20a Reports Configuration

REPORT Allows the user to select the required report number for configuration.
DESCRIPTOR A name for the Report can be entered here.
NUMBER OF FIELDS Select 0 to 10 for the number of items to be included in the report.
FIELD N TYPE N = 1 to the number of fields selected in the previous item.
Date & Time Causes the time and date of report generation to be included in the
report
Text Allows the user to enter a text message of up to 60 characters.
Process value Allows a specified point’s process value (including descriptor and
units) to be included in the report
Batch Field 1 Batch field 1 can be included in the report. See section 4.3.10 for
Batch details.
Message A message can be selected for inclusion in the report. See section
4.3.8 for details of message configuration.
Line Feed Allows one or more blank lines to be left. This can be useful at the
end of a report.
User Guide HA028910

4.3.20 REPORTS CONFIGURATION (Cont.)
Note: The Style, Point and Line feed settings described below apply only to printed outputs and
have no effect when presented on the ‘chart’ or in the message log.
STYLE See figure 4.3.20b for examples of ‘Normal’, ‘Bold’, ‘Emphasised’ and ‘Banner’ print
styles. For all styles, if the text is too long to fit on one line it ‘wraps round’ as shown
(for normal style) in the figure.
Figure 4.3.20b Printer text style examples

POINT Allows a point to be chosen when ‘Process value’ has been selected as Field Type.
The point is selected from a pick-list containing all the input channels, derived chan-
nels, totalisers etc. in the instrument.
LINE FEED Appears only when ‘Line Feed’ has been chosen as Field Type. Allows the user to
enter the required number of blank lines (up to 10) which are to be inserted. Line
feeds appear only on printed outputs - not on the ‘chart’ or in the message log.
Note: See section 12 for printer configuration details
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.21 Ethernet/IP™ Option

Note: Full details of Ethernet/IP protocol are available from the ODVA web site http://www.odva.
org
EtherNet/IP (Ethernet/Industrial Protocol) is a ‘producer-consumer’ communication system used to allow

industrial devices to exchange time-critical control data. Such devices range from simple I/O devices
such as sensors/actuators, to complex control devices such as robots and PLCs. The producer-consumer
model allows the exchange of information between a single sending device (producer) and a large
number of receiving devices (consumers) without having to send data multiple times to multiple destina-
tions.
EtherNet/IP makes use of the CIP (Control & Information Protocol), common network, transport and
application layers currently implemented by DeviceNet and ControlNet. Standard Ethernet and TCP/IP
technology is used to transport CIP communications packets. The result is a common, open application
layer on top of Ethernet and TCP/IP protocols.
In order to record and trend data that has been written by the client, the relevant channel or maths
channel must be configured with ‘Input Type’ set to ‘Ethernet/IP Comms Input’ and the channel must be
included in a Recording-enabled group. See sections, 4.3.2 (Group configuration), 4.3.3 (Channel con-
figuration) and 4.3.11 (maths configuration) as necessary.
MESSAGING
Ethernet/IP uses two forms of messaging:
UNCONNECTED MESSAGING
This is used in the connection establishment process and for infrequent, low-priority messages. The
unconnected resources in a device are called the ‘Unconnected Message Manager’ (UCMM).
CONNECTED MESSAGING
This uses resources within each node that are dedicated, in advance, to a particular purpose, such as fre-
quent explicit message transactions or real-time I/O data transfers. Connection resources are reserved
and configured using communications services available via the UCMM.
The process of opening a connection is called ‘Connection Origination’. The node that initiates the con-
nection establishment request is called the ‘Connection Originator’ (or ‘Originator’) and the node that
responds to the establishment request is called a ‘Connection Target’ (or ‘Target’). Ethernet/IP has two
types of messaging connections:
EXPLICIT MESSAGING CONNECTIONS

These are point-to-point relationships that are established to facilitate request-response transaction
between two nodes. These connections are general purpose in nature and can be used to reach any
network-accessible items within a device. Explicit messaging connections use TCP/IP services to move
messages across Ethernet.
IMPLICIT (I/O DATA) CONNECTIONS

These are established to move application-specific I/O data at regular intervals. These connections are
typically set up as one-to-many relationships in order to take full advantage of the producer-consumer
multicast model. Implicit messaging uses UDP/IP resources to establish multicast data.
User Guide HA028910

4.3.21 ETHERNET/IP OPTION (Cont.)

CONFIGURATION
Figure 4.3.21a shows the configuration page.
Import Table eiptable

Export Table eiptable
Status Online
Input 6 Ch
Input 200
Figure 4.3.21a Ethernet/IP option configuration (large frame unit)

Import Table Touching this field opens the file window, allowing the user to select a .uht file for
import. This file may be a file previously exported using the ‘Export table’ field, in
which case it will be found in the \user\ folder, or it may be located on a USB stick or
other memory device, in which case it will appear in a separate folder.
Export Table This allows the user to export the current table to the instrument’s flash memory or
to a memory stick or other memory device. Exported tables may be imported into
other suitable instruments, or into a pc to be used as a ‘template’ for creating other
tables.
Status Initialising: Initial status at start-up. Switches to ‘Online’ when the Ethernet/IP con-
figuration has been read successfully and the server has completed its
configuration.
Online: All cyclic inputs and outputs are updated continuously
Offline: The server ignores all transactions and tables are not updated.
I/O Table Select ‘Inputs’ (Server -->Client) or ‘Outputs’ (Client --> Server) for the displayed
table.
Input (output) 1 Shows the first selected input (output) parameter which is to be read or written. Input
tables can be completed by importing a suitable previously configured table, by
entering individual parameters into each field, by using the Wizard key or by using
the Default table and editing it as necessary. See ‘Table entry’, ‘Wizard key’ and/or
‘Default table’, below for further details. Output tables cannot be edited
Input (output) 2 to 200
As for input (output) 1, above, but for the remaining table entries.
Apply key Touch this to save the table configuration. An error message is generated if the
channel number is out of range, or if the syntax is incorrect. See ‘Table entry’, below.
Discard key Touching this key causes all changes made since the previous ‘Apply’ to be discard-
ed.
Wizard key This provides a mechanism for the rapid entry of input and output table parameters.
See ‘WIZARD’ below for a fuller explanation.
Default Table key Fills the displayed input or output table with channel and math PV parameters. This
can then be edited either on an entry by entry basis, or by exporting the table so that
it may be edited in a pc. Described in more detail later.
Show Errors key Shows any errors in the current configuration. For each parameter without error, the
parameter’s Modbus address is displayed instead.
HA028910 User Guide


TABLE ENTRY
The normal text entry techniques can be used to enter parameters into the Input table. The following
syntax must be used, or an error message will be generated when ‘Apply’ is operated and the configura-
tion will remain unchanged:
Notes:
1. The syntax is not case sensitive; for example, it may be ‘Channel’, or ‘channel’ or ‘CHANNEL’.
2. Channels 1 to 18 (small frame) and 1 to 48 (large frame), may be configured as measuring chan-
nels or as Ethernet/IP comms input channels. The remaining channels, up to 100, must be con-
figured as Ethernet/IP Comms input channels. For channels 76 to 100, only ‘pv’ is supported.
Channel.n.pv Channel ‘n’ process value where ‘n’ = 1 to 100 - see note 2 above.
Channel.n.status Channel ‘n’ status, where ‘n’ = 1 to 75 - see note 2 above.
Channel.n.spanhi The Span High value for channel ‘n’, where ‘n’ = 1 to 75 - see note 2 above.
Channel.n.spanlo The Span Low value for channel ‘n’, where ‘n’ = 1 to 75 - see note 2 above.
Channel.n.dp Number of decimal places for channel ‘n’, where ‘n’ = 1 to 75 - see note 2 above.
Math.n.pv Maths channel ‘n’ process value where ‘n’ = 1 to 100.

Math.n.status Maths channel ‘n’ status, where ‘n’ = 1 to 100.
Math.n.spanhi The Span High value for maths channel ‘n’, where ‘n’ = 1 to 100.
Math.n.spanlo The Span Low value for maths channel ‘n’, where ‘n’ = 1 to 100.
Math.n.dp Number of decimal places for maths channel ‘n’, where ‘n’ = 1 to 100.
ERROR MESSAGES
If an error is made during editing, a brief description of the error can be viewed by operating the ‘Show
Errors’ key:
?Out of Range this means that the channel or maths number is greater than the maximum given in
the description above (e.g. channel 101)
?Syntax Error There is an error in capitalisation, or commas have been used instead of full stops
(periods) or some other text error has been made.
?Unsupported Data A suffix implying a data type which is not supported by this implementation of Ether-
Net/IP has been appended. (Example: Channel.4.alm).
If the ‘Apply’ key is operated whilst there are uncorrected errors, a message appears showing the
number of first input in which a fault has been found. The user must correct the fault and operate ‘Apply’
again in order to save the configuration. If there are further errors, the message reappears showing in
which input the next error lies (Input two in the figure below).
Config
EtherNet/IP:Invalid Item (2)
Ok
Figure 4.3.21b Error message
Note: The ‘Show Errors’ key allows the user to view all current configuration errors at the same
time. In this display, each valid parameter displays its associated Modbus address, but any error
channels display an error message instead.
User Guide HA028910


UHT FILE RULES
1. Table configuration files must have the extension ‘.uht’
2. The first line must be: HEADER,ETHERNET_IP_SERVER,1
3 Subsequent lines may be comments (preceded with a # character and terminated with a Carriage return)
or a configuration item in the <point type>.<point number>.<suffix> as described in ‘Table Entry’ above.
WIZARD
The wizard offers a quick and easy way of loading the Input Table by touching the required point param-
eters and then entering start and end values for the range of points to be included. For current software,
the Output table is not editable, so any changes made in the Wizard are ignored.
EtherNet/IP Input Table Wizard
Point Type Channel

Process Value
Point Status
Touch (tick) items to include
Span High
them in the Input Table
Span Low
Decimal Places
Tick (default) to replace current list.
Start New table to append items to existing list.
From Point 1
Enter point range
To point 1
Configure Cancel
Figure 4.3.21c Input table wizard

Point Type Select ‘Channel’ or ‘Math’ for configuration. The ‘Configure’ key must be operated
before changing from ‘Channel’ to ‘Math’ or vice-versa, as only the configuration for
the currently displayed Point Type (i.e. Channel or Math) is saved to the Input table.
Process Value Select to include Process Value
Point Status Select to include Point Status (not supported for channels 76 to 100)
Span High Select to include Span High (not supported for channels 76 to 100)
Span Low Select to include Span Low (not supported for channels 76 to 100)
Decimal Places Select to include the points’ decimal places values (not supported for channels. 76 to
100)
Start New Table If ticked (default), the existing list is deleted and replaced by the Wizard items when
‘configure’ is operated. If not ticked, the selected items are appended to the existing
table, using any empty spaces. If there are no spaces, the new entries are ignored.
If there are insufficient spaces, the available spaces are filled using lowest channel
numbers first, and any overflow is lost.
From point Enter the number of the first point of the required point range. This value must be
lower than the ‘To point’ value.
To point Enter the number of the final point of the required point range This value must be
higher than the ‘From point’ value..
Notes:
1. The point range is the same for all parameters selected, and the points are contiguous. In
order to select non-contiguous points, or to enter different ranges for different point types, it
is necessary to configure each required range separately and operate the ‘Configure’ key after
each range, ensuring that the ‘Start New Table’ selection is not ticked.
2. If any parameter other than ‘Process Value’ is selected for any channel in the range 76 to 100,
the selection will be accepted, but the values returned will be meaningless.
HA028910 User Guide


DEFAULT TABLE KEY
Clicking on this key causes the relevant table to be populated with a default set of parameters.
For input tables, these parameters are: Channel.1.pv to Channel.100.pv followed by Math.1.pv to
Math.100.pv.
The output table parameters are: Channel.1.pv to Channel.100.pv followed by Math.1.pv to Math.100.pv.
SHOW ERRORS KEY
Clicking on this key causes the parameter addresses to appear after the parameter names in the input
and output tables. If a syntax or other error has been made in loading the input table, a description of
the error type appears in this view (see ‘ERROR MESSAGES’, above).
OUTPUT TABLE PARAMETER MODBUS ADDRESSES
In all cases, the addresses for the output parameters can be viewed by operating the ‘Show errors’ key. The ad-
dresses for channels 1 to 75 and maths 1 to 100 can be found as described in Section 8.4.3 (Channel Runtime
data), and section 4.3.11 (Maths channel Run-time data). Addresses for channels 76 to 100, are given below:
Channel.76.pv Channel 76 process value Scaled Read only FCBF (64703) 1
Channel.77.pv Channel 77 process value Scaled Read only FCC2 (64706) 1
Channel.80.pv Channel 80 process value Scaled Read only FCCB (64715) 1
Channel.81.pv Channel 81 process value Scaled Read only FCCE (64718) 1
Channel.82.pv Channel 82 process value Scaled Read only FCD1 (64721) 1
Channel.85.pv Channel 65 process value Scaled Read only FCDA (64730) 1
Channel.86.pv Channel 66 process value Scaled Read only FCDD (64733) 1
Channel.87.pv Channel 67 process value Scaled Read only FCE0 (64736) 1
Channel.91.pv Channel 71 process value Scaled Read only FCEC (64748) 1
Channel.92.pv Channel 72 process value Scaled Read only FCEF (64751) 1
Channel.93.pv Channel 73 process value Scaled Read only FCF2 (64754) 1
Channel.96.pv Channel 76 process value Scaled Read only FCFB (64763) 1
Channel.97.pv Channel 77 process value Scaled Read only FCFE (64766) 1
Channel.98.pv Channel 78 process value Scaled Read only FD01 (64769) 1
Table 4.3.21 Parameter addresses for channels 76 to 100
CONFIGURING A PLC
The following instructions describe how to configure a PLC to communicate with a Paperless graphic
recorder. Although a specific PLC was used in generating these instructions, the detail should be general
enough to allow any other PLC to be used.
User Guide HA028910


INSTALLATION
1. Install the PLC software according to the instructions supplied with the PLC. For this particular PLC,
once installation is complete, the ‘RSLinx Classic’ and ‘RSLogix 5000’ software items (AMONGST
OTHERS) must be present. RSLinx classic is used to provide a link between the PLC network and
Windows, and RSLogix 5000 is configuration and programming software for the PLC.
2. Use a cross-over type serial cable to connect one of the pc ports to the serial port (typically a 9-way
D-Type connector) of the PLC
3. Connect an Ethernet cable between the Ethernet port on the PLC (typically an RJ45 socket) and
the recorder. If a direct connection is used, the cable must be a cross-over type; if connecting via a
switch, then non cross-over cable must be used.
4. Power up the PLC and the Recorder. Switch the PLC to ‘Programmer’ mode.
SETTING UP THE LINK BETWEEN WINDOWS AND THE PLC NETWORK
1. Click on Start/All Programs/Rockwell

software/RSLinx/RSLinx Classic. The
‘RSLinx Classic’ window opens.
2. Click on ‘Communications’ and

select ‘Configure Drivers’. When the
‘Configure Drivers’ window opens,
select ‘RS232 DF1 devices’ in the
‘Available Drive Types’ pull down
menu (figure 4.3.21d).
3. Click on ‘Add New’ and enter a
suitable Driver Name in the pop-up
window that then appears. Click on
‘OK’. The ‘Configure RS-232 DF1 de-
vices’ window opens (figure 4.3.21e).
4. In the ‘Device:’ field pull-down menu, Figure 4.3.21d Configure drivers.

select the relevant device name. Select the
PC COM port, and the relevant Baud Rate,
Parity etc. (normally the defaults are accept-
able). Click on ‘Auto-Configure’.
5. When the Auto-Configure process is com-

plete, click on ‘OK’, to close the ‘Configure
Drivers’ window, and then minimise the
‘RSLinx Classic window.
6. Start the RSLogix 5000 program (from

‘Start/All programs/... /RSLogix 5000).
When the ‘Quick Start’ window opens, close
it.
7. At the top of the RSLogix 5000 window,

click on the ‘Who active’ icon or click on
‘Who Active’ in the ‘Communications’ drop
down menu. The ‘Who Active’ window Figure 4.3.21e Configure RS-232 DF1 Devices
opens.
HA028910 User Guide


UPDATING FIRMWARE
CAUTION
Power must be maintained during the Update process (which may take some tens of minutes).
Loss of power during update may render the PLC inoperative.
1. Select the relevant instru-

ment (figure 4.3.21f) and
click on ‘Update Firmware’.
In the ‘Choose Firmware
Revision’ window, select
the latest version. Click on
‘Update’.
2. Click on ‘Yes’ or ‘OK’ as ap-
propriate to accept all the
warnings and notes, and
wait for the process to com-
plete and to be validated.
3. When the update process
is complete, close the ‘Who
Active’ window.
Figure 4.3.21f Who active window
COMPLETING THE LINK
1. In the ‘File’ menu select ‘New’, or click on the ‘New Tool’ icon . The ‘New Controller’ window
opens (figure 4.3.21g).
2. Select the relevant PLC from the drop-down menu. Enter a name, if required and click on ‘OK’ After
some seconds, the selected controller’s window opens.
3. Open the ‘Who active’ window, and select the relevant instrument from the hierarchy. Click on
‘Download’.
4. When the download is complete, right click on the relevant Ethernet port in the left pane ‘tree’, and
select ‘Properties’ (figure 4.3.21h).
Figure 4.3.21g New Controller window Figure 4.3.21h Ethernet port location
User Guide HA028910

5. The Module Properties window opens. Select the ‘Port Configuration’ tab. For fixed IP Address ap-
plications, ‘uncheck’ the ‘Enable BootP’ check box, and enter an appropriate IP address and Subnet
mask for the PLC.
6. Click on ‘Set’, and click on ‘OK’ on the warnings and notes displays.
7. Click on ‘OK’ to close the Properties window.
8. Left click on the ‘Program’ icon (figure 4.3.21j) and select ‘Go OffLine’ from the menu which appears.
Figure 4.3.21i Module Properties Figure 4.3.21j Click on ‘Program’ icon
9. Download, either from ‘Who Active’ or from the Program icon.

10. Connect the PLC to the Ethernet port (RJ45) of the PC.
11. Restore the RSLinx window. In the communications menu Configure Drivers window, select ‘Ether-
Net/IP Driver’. Click on ‘Add New’ and enter a name for the driver.
12. Select ‘Browse local subnet’ if this is not already selected.
13. Click on the relevant Network Card and Click on ‘OK’.
14. Minimise the RSLinx window.
Figure 4.3.21k Configure EtherNet/IP driver
HA028910 User Guide


CREATING A NETWORK SCANNER
1. In the left pane tree-view of the RSLogix 5000 window, right click on the EtherNet symbol and select
‘New Module...’ from the menu (figure 4.3.21l).
2. Expand the communications list (click on the + symbol) (figure 4.3.21m)
Figure 4.3.21l Right click on the EtherNet Figure 4.3.21m The communications list
symbol (unexpanded)
3. Using the scroll bar as necessary, click on the ‘Generic EtherNet Module’ item (figure 4.3.21n) and
click on ‘OK’ (or double click on the selected item).
4. In the Parameters page that appears (figure 4.3.21p), enter a name for the module, and set the follow-
ing values:
Comm Format: Data - INT
Address/Host name: The IP address of the recorder (from Operator/Network/Address menu)
Input: 100; size: 200
Output: 112; size: 200
Configuration: 1; size 0
5. Tick (click on) the ‘Open Module Properties’ checkbox if it is not already ticked.
6. Click on ‘OK”
Figure 4.3.21n ‘Select Generic EtherNet Module’ Figure 4.3.21p Enter parameters
User Guide HA028910


CREATING A NETWORK SCANNER (Cont.)
7. In the Module properties page (Figure 4.3.21q), set RPI to 1000 and click ‘OK’.
Figure 4.3.21q Module properties page
RECORDER CONFIGURATION
1. At the recorder. log in (section 3.3.1).
2. In the Operator/Config menu, touch the ‘Options’ item (at the bottom of the list). Check that ‘Ether-
Net/IP’ is enabled. If not, the software needs to be upgraded as described in section 4.6.3 and an
‘Autoconfigure’ carried out.
3. In the Operator/Config/Channels area (section 4.3.3), configure the channels as appropriate. Those
channels which are to receive data from the PLC should have their ‘Input Type’’ set to ‘EtherNet/IP
Comms Input’. The System/Copy facility (section 4.6.8) can be used to speed up the process. Maths
channels are set up is a similar way (section 4.3.11).
4. Set scale, units etc. to appropriate values.
Note... For the EtherNet/IP application, the number of decimal places is set to zero by default.
Editing this value may lead to loss of resolution in the values displayed.
5. Configure the EtherNet/IP input table as required (described earlier in this section).
7. Ensure that the PLC is connected to the recorder either directly using a cross-over EtherNet cable or
via a switch using non cross-over cable.
RUN MODE
1. Set the PLC into either ‘Remote’ or ‘Run’ mode.
2. Set the PLC online
STATUS INDICATORS
The status indicators at the top left corner of the RSLogix 5000 Page (Figure 4.3.21s) show the status of
the link between the pc and the PLC.
Status indicators PLC Mode indicator
Figure 4.3.21s Status displays
It is possible to check that the PLC is communicating with the recorder using the ‘Tags’ display to write
values to the recorder and to receive values from it. Once it is proved that the link is working, the pc may
be disconnected from the PLC if required.
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.22 Options

(currently 1)

(currently 0)

(currently 0)
Figure 4.3.22 Options menu layout
Touching this key calls a display showing the current recorder hardware/software setup, for example the
number of input channels fitted, the number of output relay boards fitted, and how many relays are fitted
per card. Subsequently, should further options be fitted (relay board two and Analogue output board 1 in
the above example), this page shows the difference between the hardware actually fitted and the hard-
ware the recorder software is configured for (currently ...). Whenever there is a difference, the ‘Autocon-
figure’ key can be pressed to alert the recorder to the fact that extra options have been added (or taken
away).
If no changes have occurred since last switch-on, then the ‘(currently ...)’ fields and the ‘Autoconfigure’ key
do not appear.
User Guide HA028910

4.3.22 OPTIONS (Cont.)

TRIAL MODE
Enabling ‘Trial Mode’ allows the user to enable, temporarily, the various software options that are availa-
ble. Once the user has made the required choices, the ‘Set Trial Options’ key at the bottom of the screen,
must be operated, followed by an ‘Autoconfigure’ procedure.
Initially, the trial mode is set to expire 30 days after enabling (whether the recorder is powered or not).
Any change in configuration results in a pop-up message stating how much of the 30 days period re-
mains. Once Trial mode is disabled by the user, the remaining Trial Time Remaining’ value is retained
until Trial Mode is re-enabled.
Notes:
1. Trial mode enables/disables all options or features (except ‘Simulation’ and ‘History Mainte-
nance’) which are not fitted or enabled in the recorder. The number and distribution of virtual
channels reverts to that configured before Trial mode was invoked.
2. When disabling Trial mode, all configuration for the trial features is lost. Should the user decide
to purchase a trial feature, then it is recommended that the trial configuration be saved (see
section 4.2) so that it may be restored once the purchased trial feature is fitted and enabled
(keycodes cannot be entered in Trial Mode).
3. Trial mode can be enabled only by users with ‘Perform upgrades’ permission (section 4.4.1).
VIRTUAL CHANNELS
Virtual channels are Maths channels, Totalisers and Counters. The total number of virtual channels is as
specified at time of order. The user can select whatever combination of maths channels, totalisers and
counters is required, so long as the total does not exceed the number of virtual channels available. If it
does, a warning is given when the ‘Apply’ button is operated, and the edit is ignored.
Note: If more than 100 maths channels are configured, then the Modbus register addresses of
totalisers and counters are affected. If for example there were 105 maths channels, then the value
of totaliser 1 would be found at the address normally associated with totaliser 6, and the value of
counter 1 would be found at the address normally associated with counter 6.
HA028910 User Guide

4.3.22 OPTIONS (Cont.)

SIMULATION OPTION
This option consists of a number of additional jobs, as described below. This option is not enabled in
‘Trial mode’.
TREND FREEZE
When this ‘Trend’ category job (section 4.7.11) is initiated, the displays are held at their values at the time
of initiation. When the recorder is ‘unfrozen’ the displays switch to their current values, and the clock re-
starts from where it stopped. No blue line is drawn across the trace to indicate time discontinuity (Time
change records - section 3.4).
Note: If ‘SNTP client enable’ is enabled (Network Address area - section 4.5), then the recorder
time is synchronised at power-up only. I.E. the normal checks of recorder time compared with
server time are not carried out with the Simulator option enabled.
If ‘SNTP server enable’ is enabled, then the recorder will supply recorder time.
CLEAR
This ‘Trend’ category job (section 4.7.11) clears the display. Used in conjunction with ‘Erase all History
(below), this is known, in some applications, as Recall Mode.
ERASE ALL HISTORY
This ‘Recording’ category job (section 4.7.10) erases all the history files in the recorder. Used in conjunc-
tion with ‘Clear’ (above), this is known, in some applications, as Recall Mode.
Note: If the 21CFR11 option is enabled, Erase All History jobs can be triggered, but are ignored,
leaving the recording history unaffected.
SCREEN SAVER
This ‘Trend’ category job (section 4.7.11) switches the display brightness to the value set up in ‘Saver
Display’ (Instrument Configuration - section 4.3.1) for the duration of the job. The job overrides the ‘Save
after’ time value also set up in Instrument Configuration.
User Guide HA028910

4.4 SECURITY
Touching this key allows the operator to select ‘Login’ (described in section 3.3.1), ‘Access’, ‘Manage-
ment’ or ‘Add/Remove User’ for configuration. Selecting ‘Access’ displays the current user level. Touch-
ing this area allows the user to select ‘Logged out’, ‘Operator’, ‘Engineer’ or any of the added users. The
user may also go directly to logged out mode by operating the ‘Logout’ key.
For users with Security Manager option enabled, ‘Change Password’ and ‘Clear Password Cache’ may
also appear in this menu depending on the user’s access level.
Archive Save/Restore Config Security Network System Select the required access level and enter the
password if required
User Engineer
Login (Section 3.3.1) Password expires in 29 Days
Login
Access Logout
Management
Access
Add User Access when Engineer
(Section 4.4.1)
Remove User Domain name
Change Password Section 4.4.5 New Password ***
Clear Password Cache Section 4.4.6 Retype Password ***
Management option
Connect from remote
(Section 4.4.2)
Login Disabled
Record Logins Edit Own Password
Login Timeout 1 Minutes Change Alarm Setpoints
with unapplied changes Ignore timeout Acknowledge Alarms
Password Retries 3 times Edit Maths Constant
Passwords Expire 30 Days Reset maths
Minimum Password Length 3 Preset Totalisers
Require Signing Preset Counters
Require Authorization Start/reset Timers
Enable Audit Trail Set Clock
Password Change on Expiry
Adjust I/O
Centralised Security
Remove User Archiving Control
Login By User List
(Section 4.4.4) Save/Restore
Apply Discard Paste/Delete Files
User User Full Name Full Configuration
Remove Full Security
Batch Control
Apply Discard Can Sign
Can Authorize
Perform Upgrades
Add User (Section 4.4.3) Event Permission 1
New User ID Event Permission 2
New Full User Name Event Permission 3
Event Permission 4
New Domain Name
Event Permission 5
New Password Edit Output Channel Default
Retype Password Action Demand Writes
Based On Operator Force Change Of Password
Enter Batch Data
Add
Allow web server
Figure 4.4 Security configuration menus
HA028910 User Guide

4.4.1 Access levels

There are essentially three levels of security associated with the recorder viz: Engineer, Operator and
Logged out. (The fourth level - Service - is available only to service engineers). When logged-in at engi-
neer level, the user can set access permissions for other levels, and can enter or edit passwords for Op-
erator and Engineer levels. The default password for Engineer level access is ‘100’. The default password
for ‘Operator’ level access is ‘blank’ (i.e. no password is required), unless the Auditor 21CFR11 option is
fitted in which case the default is also 100.
Note: To allow free access to the recorder configuration, the password can be set to ‘blank’. This
allows subsequent access without a password having to be entered (not for recorders with either
Auditor option fitted).
Users with Full Security permission can Add (and Delete) users (sections 4.4.3, 4.4.4) and assign them
individual passwords and access permissions.
Access when Frederick Bloggs

SETTING PERMISSIONS Domain
Security Manager option is fitted
Once logged in at Engineer level, operate the New Password ** Password functions do not appear
for 'Logged-out' level of access or
Security key and select Access. A page similar Retype Password ** if Domain is not left blank.
to that shown in figure 4.4.1 appears, allow- Connect from remote
ing the permissions to be set for the various Remote user name Fred Remote user fields appear
access levels and for individual users. The list Remote password only if 'Connect from
remote' is enabled
of parameters is the same for all access levels Retype remote password
except for ‘Logged out’, for which the pass- Login Disabled
Edit own Password Password functions do not
word parameters and ‘login disabled’ items do appear for 'Logged-out'
not appear. Change Alarm Setpoints level of access.
Acknowledge Alarms
Note: If the Security management option is Edit Maths Constant
fitted, and ‘Centralised Security’ is enabled Reset Maths
These fields appear only if
in the Security/Management system (sec- Preset Totalisers the relevant options are
tion 4.4.2), permissions are ‘Read Only’ (i.e., Preset Counters fitted
not editable) at the recorder. Start/Reset Timers
In such a case permissions can be changed Set Clock
only by using the Security Management Adjust I/O
software. Archiving Control
Save/Restore = Enabled
Paste/Delete Files
Full Configuration
Full Security
Batch Control
Can Sign
Can Authorize These fields appear only
if the Auditor 21CFR11
Perform Upgrades option is enabled.
Event Permission 1
Event Permission 2
Event Permission 3
Event Permission 4
Event Permission 5
Edit Output Channel Default Action Demand Writes appears
Action Demand Writes only if the Master Comms
option is fitted.
Force Change of Password
Enter Batch Data
Allow web server
Apply Discard
Figure 4.4.1 Access permissions menu
User Guide HA028910

4.4.1 ACCESS LEVELS (Cont.)

ACCESS WHEN
Allows an access level or an individual Full User Name to be selected from a pick list.
DOMAIN NAME
For units fitted with Security Manager option only, this allows a security domain name of up to 60 charac-
ters to be entered, for the user selected in the ‘Access when’ field. If the default (blank) is not edited, then
the user can gain access using password setup in the ‘New password’ field described below. If a new
domain name is entered here, or if one already appears, the ‘New Password’ and ‘Retype Password’ fields
are not displayed, and the user must use his or her network login password, as allocated by the user’s IT
department or Network administrator.
Details of the Active Directory Server are entered in Network/Address configuration (section 4.5.1). Pass-
words can be edited as described in ‘Change Password’ (section 4.4.5)
If ‘Centralised security’ is enabled in the Security/Management menu (section 4.4.2) then the Domain
name can be configured only using Security Manager software.
Note: An IP address must not be used as the domain name because to do so will disable the
user’s ability to log in using Active Directory, even if there is a valid account on the server.
NEW PASSWORD/RETYPE PASSWORD

These fields do not appear if ‘Access when’ = ‘Logged Out’, or if the ‘Domain Name’ is anything other
than left blank.
These fields allow a new password to be entered for the selected access level or User. The password
must also be entered in the ‘Re-type Password’ field. If the two differ, a warning message (Passwords did
not match) appears when the APPLY key is operated, and password entry must be repeated. If the pass-
word does not comply with the minimum length requirements in Security Management (if fitted) (section
4.4.2), a warning message (Invalid Password) appears when the ‘Apply’ key is operated, and password
entry must be repeated.
CONNECT FROM REMOTE

Enabling this field, causes two further entry boxes: ‘Remote user name’ and ‘Remote password’ to ap-
pear. These items are used in establishing connection between a host computer and the recorder. The
Remote user name is, by default, the Access Level (e.g. ‘Engineer’) or the User ID.
To make use of the Web server facility (Annex C), ‘Allow web server’ (below) must also be enabled.
REMOTE USER NAME/REMOTE PASSWORD

These two entry boxes allow user name and password to be entered for use by the remote host operator.
The remote user will be able to access the recorder configuration according to the other access permis-
sions enabled in this page. The password must be entered twice to ensure integrity.
To allow unrestricted view-only to the host, ‘Logged out’ permission level should be selected and then a
user name of ‘anonymous’ entered, and the password field left blank.
Notes:
1. Remote login will be refused if the user account is disabled for any reason.
2. For maximum security, it is recommended that the remote password and the ‘local’ password
are non-identical.
3. Attempts to establish a Bridge connection will fail if the relevant Remote User Name contains
characters with ASCII codes greater than 127 (such as é, è, a., ü etc.). Section B6 (Annex B)
shows codes 0 to 127.
HA028910 User Guide


LOGIN DISABLED
For all levels except Logged Out, This allows any one or more of the access levels to be removed from the
‘Access when’ picklist.
Note: This feature should be used with discretion, or the situation might arise in which the record-
er cannot be logged onto, either at a particular access level or at all. It is recommended that at
least one user with Engineer-level access is retained with login enabled, or it may become neces-
sary to return the recorder to the manufacturer, or to arrange for a service visit.
Auditor option notes:

1. If the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted, and the number of Password Retries is exceeded then
the relevant login is disabled. A user with Engineer level access can re-enable the login.
2. If the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted, and the Password Expire time has been exceeded, all
logins are disabled. In order to reconfigure the recorder, it is necessary to use the Service pass-
word - please contact the recorder supplier or the nearest service centre for advice.
EDIT OWN PASSWORD
Allows each user, with this permission enabled, to edit his/her password.
CHANGE ALARM SETPOINTS

Allows each user with this permission enabled, to edit alarm parameters under Configuration/Channel
ACKNOWLEDGE ALARMS
Allows each user with this permission enabled to acknowledge alarms (section 3.1.4)
EDIT MATHS CONSTANT

For recorders fitted with the Maths option only. If one or more maths channels are configured with func-
tion ‘Constant’, then with this permission set, the user may edit the constant value(s).
RESET MATHS
Allows the user to reset applicable maths functions. See section 4.3.11 for further details of maths func-
tions.
PRESET TOTALISERS
Allows the user to preset totaliser values (if the option is fitted). See section 4.3.12 for further details of
totalisers.
PRESET COUNTERS
Allows the user to preset counter values (if the option is fitted). See section 4.3.13 for further details of
Counters.
START/RESET TIMERS
Allows the user to start and reset the timer value. See section 4.3.14 for further details of timers.
SET CLOCK
Allows each user with this permission enabled, to set the recorder time and date functions under System/
Clock
ADJUST I/O
Allows the user to adjust recorder inputs and outputs as described in section 4.6.4, and section 9 below.
User Guide HA028910


ARCHIVING CONTROL
Allows each user with this permission enabled full access to archive control. For units fitted with the
lockable flap option, the flap may be unlocked only by users who have this Archiving Control permission
enabled.
SAVE/RESTORE
Allows each user with this permission enabled, full access to saving and restoring functions as described
in section 4.2, above. Without this permission, the SAVE/RESTORE key does not appear.
PASTE/DELETE FILES
Allows each user with this permission enabled, to Paste and Delete files as described in section 5.
FULL CONFIGURATION
Allows each user with this permission enabled, full access the recorder configuration.
FULL SECURITY
Allows each user with this permission enabled, full access to all recorder security functions.
BATCH CONTROL
This field appears only if the Batch Option (section 4.3.10) is fitted. Allows the user to enter batch data
and to start, stop and create new batches. If this access permission is set, ‘Enter Batch Data’ below, is
automatically enabled and cannot be disabled.
CAN SIGN
This appears only if the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted. If the field is enabled it allows the user to change
the configuration of the recorder (according to the other permissions set for the login), providing the se-
curity management system ‘Require Authorization’ is not enabled. If it is, changes can be made only if the
correct password for a user with ‘Can Authorize’ permission is entered. See section 4.4.2 for details
CAN AUTHORIZE
This appears only if the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted. If the field is enabled it allows the user to
change the configuration of the recorder according to the permissions set for the login. See section 4.4.2
for details of the Auditor options.
PERFORM UPGRADES
‘Upgrade’ appears in the system menu only for access levels in which this box is ticked. Section 4.6.3
contains further details. Trial mode (section 4.3.22 ) can be enabled/disabled only by users with Perform
Upgrades permission.
EVENT PERMISSION 1
If this is enabled, then this login will trigger an event source which remains active for as long as the login
is active. See section 4.3.6 (Event Sources: User Logged In) for further details.
EVENT PERMISSION 2 TO 5
As for Event permission 1, above.
EDIT OUTPUT CHANNEL DEFAULT

Appears only if the Master Comms and/or Analogue output option is fitted.
When enabled, this allows a user with this login to edit the default value of any output channel. Normally
the defaults are used only when the source channel is ‘In Error’.
HA028910 User Guide


ACTION DEMAND WRITES
Appears only if the Master Comms option is fitted. See section 4.3.16 and section 4.3.18 for further de-
tails.
When enabled, this allows a user with this login to write values manually over master comms either di-
rectly, by job action or (if the option is fitted), by using the User Screens ‘Operator’ key. Where Demand
Writes are initiated by Job action, the job will be carried out whether or not this login has permission to
action Demand Writes.
Note:
When Audit trail is enabled, only the newly written value appears in the audit trail messages.
This is because the instrument has no way of determining what the value of the parameter was
before the write occurred.
The messages are of the form:
23/08/05 10:14:30 Auto Mode wrote 19.37
23/08/05 10:14:29 Demand write Auto Mode, Signed Engineer, No Auth. Reqd., Note
where ‘Auto Mode’ is the descriptor associated with the demand write, and ‘19.37’ is the value written.
FORCE CHANGE OF PASSWORD
When this checkbox is enabled for a user, it means that the user will have to change password at his/her
next login. At next log in, a pop-up dialogue box requests that a new password be entered. If a new
password is not entered, login is denied.
Entering the new password clears the checkbox, so this is a ‘one-shot’ operation, until the checkbox is
enabled again by a user with ‘Engineer’ level access.
Change Password
New Password
Retype Password
Apply Logout
ENTER BATCH DATA

If ‘Batch Control’ is enabled, then this field is automatically enabled, and is ‘greyed out’ so that it cannot
be edited.
If ‘Batch Control’ is not enabled, then enabling this item allows the user to enter batch data, but not to
start, stop or create new batches.
ALLOW WEB SERVER

Any user with this permission and ‘Connect from remote’ permission will be able to view the recorder
from a remote PC, using the Remote user name and Remote password described above.
Note: See Annex C for details of the Web server facility.
User Guide HA028910

4.4.2 Management (option)

Note: Where users are controlled by a domain on the recorder, Security Manager will not manage
or reconcile disabled accounts, password changes or password expiry on these recorders.
This menu selection appears only if the Audit Trail option, 21CFR11 option and/or Security Management
option is fitted. Which configuration fields appear depends on the option(s) fitted. Figure 4.4.2a, below,
shows the configuration menus for the various combinations.
The 21CFR11 option allows the recorder to be set up so that all changes to configuration (with the ex-
ceptions listed below) are added to the history files and also allows certain constraints to be placed on
the recorder passwords. Once these items of configuration are set up, they apply to all groups. Figure
4.4.2a, below, shows the configuration menu.
Record Logins
Login Timeout 1 Minutes
This field appearsonly if Login
timeout is non-zero with unapplied changes Ignore timeout
Password Attempts 3 times
Passwords Expire 30 Days
Minimum Password Length 3
Require Signing
This field appears only if
'Require Signing' is enabled Require Authorization
Enable Audit Trail
Password Change on Expiry This item appears only if the Securiy Management
option is fitted. If enabled, all other security fields can
Centralised Security be edited only via Security Management software.
Login By User List
This item appears only if one or more of Security
Apply Discard Management, Audit trail or 21CFR11 options is
fitted.
21CFR11 + Security Manager
Record Logins
Enable Audit Trail
This item appears only if the Centralised Security
Centralised Security Security Management option
Login By user List
is fitted. Login By user List
Audit Trail + Security Manager Security Manager only
Figure 4.4.2a Management menu structure
CHANGES NOT RECORDED

Changes to configuration made via MODBUS/TCP are not recorded. It is up to the user to write the iden-
tity, time/date, reason for change etc. as text messages, which when sent via MODBUS/TCP, become part
of the relevant history file.
Notes:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, the following parameters appear only if the Auditor 21CFR11 op-
tion is fitted.
2. If Centralised Security is enabled, none of the other parameters in this menu can be edited at
the recorder. Changes can be made only using Security Management software.
HA028910 User Guide

4.4.2 MANAGEMENT (Cont.)
Record logins For either Auditor option, if this field is enabled, then each time a new login occurs a
message appears, giving the date, time and login name. E.G.
23/08/08 15:32:20 Login by Frederick Bloggs
Logouts are recorded in a similar way - e.g.
23/08/08 15:49:43 Logout by Frederick Bloggs
If the login or logout is via a ‘Bridge’ session (section 6), the IP address of that viewer
appears in the login/logout message - e.g.
23/08/05 15:58:03 Login by (149.121.130.126)Engineer
Login Timout When set to zero, the login remains valid until changed. For any other value, the user
is logged out after the number of minutes entered here has elapsed since the last
time the screen was touched.
with unapplied changes
This field does not appear if the Login Timeout has been set to zero. For non-zero
time-out values, this allows the user to choose whether
a any unapplied changes are lost when the Login Timeout period has elapsed, or
b the login timeout is ignored if there are any unapplied configuration changes.
Password Attempts For Active Directory users, this parameter is configured at the Active Directory and
the value set at the instrument is ignored.
For other users, this allows the user to limit to three, the number of attempt that can
be made to enter a password. The choices are ‘3 times’ and ‘unlimited’. When set to
3 times, the user login is disabled after three incorrect attempts to enter the pass-
word have been made. A ‘System Message’ appears on the screen and is also sent
to the ‘chart’:
23/08/08 13:20:42 User Frederick Bloggs, login disabled, invalid password
In order to re-enable the login, a user with Engineer access level must deselect
‘Login Disabled’ in the ‘Access’ menu described in section 4.4.1, above.
Passwords expire For Active Directory users, this parameter is configured at the Active Directory and
For other users, this field allows the user to set an expiry period of up to 999 days
which applies to all passwords. The number of days remaining to expiry is shown in
the login page. If set to zero, then the expiry period does not apply.
Note: All required passwords MUST be changed within this number of days or all logins will be
disabled In this situation, the configuration of the recorder will be available only to those with
Service Level access and in most cases, a call will have to be made to the recorder supplier or serv-
ice agency. (But see ‘Password Change on Expiry’, below)
Minimum Password Length

For Active Directory users, this parameter is configured at the Active Directory and
For other users, this allows a minimum length of password to be entered (default =
0; minimum = 3). If an attempt is made to enter a new password with fewer charac-
ters than the minimum, a warning message appears on the screen (Invalid Password
Length) and the new password is ignored. For Active Directory users, the password
must comply with both the minimum length specified here and that specified in Ac-
tive Directory.
Require Signing If this field is enabled, then changes to the recorder operation, configuration (or any
other item included in the history file) can be made only by those users whose ‘Can
Sign’ permission is enabled in the ‘Access’ menu described in section 4.4.1 above.
When ‘Apply’ is attempted, a ‘signature’ page appears which requires the entry of
the correct password for the selected user, and of a note which would normally be
used to give the reason for the change.
User Guide HA028910


Require Authorization
This field appears only if ‘Require Signing’ is enabled. If Require Authorization is
enabled, then changes to the recorder operation, configuration (or any other item
included in the history file) can be made only by those users whose ‘Can Authorize’
permission is enabled in the ‘Access’ menu described in section 4.4.1 above. When
‘Apply’ is attempted, a ‘signature’ page (figure 4.4.2b) appears which requires the
entry of the correct password for the selected user, and a note which would normally
be used to give the reason for the change.
Note: If neither ‘Require Signing’ nor ‘Require Authorization’ is enabled, then any user can make
changes to the recorder operation, configuration etc. and the ‘signature’ page does not appear.
Config
Authorised Engineer
Appears only if 'Requires Authorising' enabled
Password ***
Signed Frederick Bloggs

Appears only if 'Requires Signing' enabled
Password ******
Operator Note
Note cannot be empty.
Ok
Pop-up appears only if 'Ok' is

operated without an operator
note having been entered.
Ok Cancel
Figure 4.4.2b Signature page

Enable Audit trail For either Auditor option, if this field is enabled, then all changes to configuration are
displayed on the ‘chart’ and become part of the history file for each enabled group.
The following is an example of how these changes would appear on the screen for
an imaginary set up for channel 8. ‘New T/C type chan 8’ is the note entered in the
Signature page, and ‘Kiln8 temp’ is the channel descriptor.
03/08/05 11:53:01 Configuration Revision 486,144 was 486,143

03/08/05 11:52:57 Kiln8 temp Alarm Number 1, Job Number 1 Drive Relay 1 on board 7
while Unacknowledged was No action
03/08/05 11:52:57 Kiln8 temp Alarm Number 1 Threshold 530.0 ˚C was 500
03/08/05 11:52:57 Kiln8 temp Alarm Number 1 Type Absolute Low was Absolute High
03/08/05 11:52:57 Kiln8 temp Cold Junction Type Internal was External
03/08/05 11:52:57 Kiln8 temp Scale High 1000.0˚C was 900.0
03/08/05 11:52:57 Kiln8 temp Scale Low 450.0˚C was 300.0
03/08/05 11:52:57 Kiln8 temp Lin Type Type K was Type J
03/08/05 11:52:57 Config,Signed:Engineer,Authorized:Engineer,New T/C type chan 8
(Please see notes below)
HA028910 User Guide


Notes:
1. The Configuration Revision (and for changes in the Security menus - the Security Revision) are
incremented every time the recorder configuration (security configuration) is changed. The
current values can be viewed in the System/About menu (section 4.6.11).
2. All configuration and security changes must be made either at the recorder operator interface,
or from a host pc using Bridge ‘Full’ software. Use of the configuration editor is not permitted if
traceability is to be maintained.
3. If fitted, Event buttons (section 4.3.7) are not included in the Require Signing/Require Authori-
zation regime described above. Instead, each individual button can be configured to require
signing or to require both signing and authorization.
4. If a large number of configuration changes are made with Audit trail enabled, then the number
of messages produced may result in the total amount of data generated exceeding the amount
that can be written to the internal FLASH memory in the time available, particularly if there are
a large number of points configured. The recorder responds by reducing the recording speed,
and a message ‘Recording failed - internal overflow. Slowing recording interval of fastest
group(s)’ appears, to draw the user’s attention to the situation.
5. If the TUS option is enabled, then enabling Audit trail can causes pre calibration and post
calibration values to be printed for each adjusted channel, before a batch initiation and/or after
a batch stop according to the configuration of the ‘Pre calibration’ and ‘Post calibration’ tick
boxes in the Batch Configuration menu.
Password Change on Expiry

If this check box is enabled, then the first time a user tries to login, after his or her
password has expired, a dialogue box appears asking the user to enter a new pass-
word. Only when this new password has been entered and confirmed, will the user
be able to access the recorder configuration.
Security Management Option. The new password is not written to the Security
Manager until the next ‘deploy’, after which the expiry period configured for the user
(within Security Management), is restored. The interim expiry period is set to 24
hours, and the ‘deploy’ must be carried out within this period, or password expiry
will recur.
Change Password
New Password
Retype Password
Apply Logout
Centralised Security This checkbox occurs only if the Security Management option is fitted.
If this checkbox is enabled, none of the other parameters in the Management menu
can be edited at the recorder (i.e. they become ‘Read Only’). Changes can be made
only by means of Security Management software. At the recorder, the menu items
below also become ‘read only’, or do not appear as menu items or are not selectable,
even if the checkbox appears:
Access level permissions (section 4.1.1) (Read Only)
Add User/ Remove User (section 4.4.3/4) (Do not appear as menu items)
Restore configuration/Security data (section 4.2.2) (Not selectable)
New configuration/Security data (section 4.2.3) (Not selectable)
(Continued...)
User Guide HA028910


Centralised security (cont.)
The Security Revision (previously Security Version) is initially set to -1 when Central-
ised Security is enabled. It will remain at this value until a successful download has
been performed via Security Manager Software. The Security Revision will then
take the downloaded value (e.g. 139). Any local security revision changes (e.g. max.
number of logins exceeded) cause the value to have a ‘local change count’, start-
ing at 001 appended to it (e.g. 139.001, 139.002 and so on). The local change count
is reset to 000 (and no longer displayed) when the next download occurs (e.g. 140).
Downloads can occur automatically when the Security Manager detects that a local
change has occurred, or manually, as and when required.
If Centralised Security is enabled, the Domain name can be edited only using the Security Manager soft-
ware.
Login by User List This checkbox appears if either of the Auditor options and/or the Security manage-
ment option is fitted.
When enabled, the normal login window appears, with a pull down list of users.
Once a user has been selected the correct password for that user must be entered in
order to log in.
When disabled, the user must enter a user name and associated password in order
to log in.
Select the required access level and enter the Type in your user ID and a password if
password if required required
User ID Logged out

User ID
Logged out
Logout
Operator
Engineer
Service
‘Login by user list’ enabled ‘Login by user list’ not enabled
HA028910 User Guide

4.4.3 Add user

Figure 4.4.3 shows that the selecting of ‘Add User’ from the SECURITY picklist allows new user IDs to be
entered, together with passwords, and a chosen set of access permissions, which can subsequently be
edited under Security/Access. The ADD key and the APPLY key must both be used to write the change
to the recorder data base. The user must have Full Security access in order to add a new user. If either
Auditor option is fitted, the new user’s access permission list is printed on the chart.
Adding a new user clears the recorder’s password cache, as described in section 4.4.6, below.
New User ID
New Full User Name
New Domain Name
New Password
Retype Password
Based On Operator
Add
Apply Discard
Figure 4.4.3 Add User display page
NEW USER ID
This field allows a User ID of up to 20 characters to be entered for a new user. This ID is used when logging in us-
ing ID/password entry technique (that is, when ‘Login by user list’ is disabled, as described in section 4.4.2 above).
NEW FULL USER NAME

This field allows a User name of up to 25 characters to be entered. This name appears in the ‘current ac-
cess level’ pushbutton at the top left corner of the display screen, in operator notes and so on.
NEW DOMAIN NAME

For units fitted with Security Manager only, this allows the entry of a Security Domain name (up to 60
characters in length). If such an entry is made, the Password fields described below do not appear, and
the user must use a network login assigned by the IT department or by the network administrator. The
domain name appears in the ‘Access’ menu and can be edited there if required, once the ‘Add User’ pro-
cedure is complete.
If ‘Centralised Security’ (section 4.4.2) is enabled this Domain name can be edited only using Security
Manager software.
Note: An IP address must not be used as the domain name because to do so will disable the
user’s ability to log in using Active Directory, even if there is a valid account on the server.
NEW PASSWORD/RETYPE PASSWORD

For units fitted with the Security Manager option, if the New Domain Name (above) is anything other than
the default (left blank), these Password fields do not appear, as any user with a domain configured must
use the password allocated by the Network administrator.
For other users, these fields allow a password to be entered and confirmed. If the password does not com-
ply with the minimum length requirements in Security Management (if fitted) (section 4.4.2), a warning mes-
sage (Invalid Password) appears when the ‘Apply’ key is operated, and password entry must be repeated.
BASED ON
This picklist allows another user or access level to be used as a permissions template, to simplify the con-
figuration if several operators are to have identical permissions.
User Guide HA028910

4.4.4 Remove user

Selecting ‘Remove User’ from the SECURITY picklist allows users to be removed from the user list. The
‘Remove’ key and the ‘Apply’ key must both be used to write the change to the recorder data base. Figure
4.4.4 depicts the display page. The User Full Name appears in this page.
User Steven Eric Andrew Bass

Remove
Apply Discard
Figure 4.4.4 Remove User display page

For Active Directory users:
1. Removing a user clears the recorder’s password cache, as described in section 4.4.6, below.
2. Removing a user from the Active Directory Domain does not automatically remove that user from the
recorder. A ‘Remove user’ procedure must also be carried out.
4.4.5 Change Password

For units fitted with the Security Manager option, this allows the entry of a new password for the currently
logged-in user, providing that the user has ‘Edit own password’ enabled in the ‘Access when’ list and is
Active Directory authenticated.
Notes:
1. This feature should be used with discretion, as it affects Network logins which would normally
be under the control of the user’s IT department or Network Administrator. Changing the pass-
word may cause conflicts within the network thus preventing its efficient operation.
2. If ‘Active Directory security’ is set to ‘None’ (section 4.5.1: Network/Address menu), any at-
tempted changes to the password will be rejected. That is, only passwords on a Transport
Layer Security (TLS) secured connection are accepted.
3. The old password remains valid for up to an hour (default) after the change, and during this pe-
riod, both passwords are valid. The default period can be edited by the Network administrator.
Change Password
Change Password
Old Password
New Password
Retype Password
Apply Cancel
Figure 4.4.5 Change password
TROUBLE SHOOTING
If the change password procedure fails:
1. Check that the Active Directory server instrument alarm is inactive (section3.1.3)
2. Check that the connection with the Active Directory server has TLS security enabled (section 4.5.1)
3. Check that the new password’s length, complexity, history and minimum password age match the
criteria laid down in the Active Directory password policy configuration. Password length must also
comply with the minimum password length configured in the security menu (section 4.4.2)
HA028910 User Guide

4.4.6 Clear Password Cache

This menu item appears only for units fitted with the Security Manager option and only for users with ‘Full
Security’ access (section 4.4.1).
USER PASSWORD AUTHENTICATION

If the user has a domain configured, then when an attempt is made to log in, the password entered by the
user is authenticated by the Active Directory server (see Network/Address menu description). In other
words, the recorder attempts to do an LDAP* bind with the configured Active Directory server, and if the
‘bind’ is successful, the user is logged in.
* Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
PASSWORD CACHE
Once a password has been authenticated, it is added to a list of up to 100 valid passwords (the Password
cache) held in the recorder. This means that if the Active Directory server is unavailable the next time the
user attempts to log in, then if the password is in the cache, the login will proceed without further authen-
tication.
CLEAR PASSWORD CACHE

If necessary the password cache can be cleared by using the Clear Password Cache button (confirmation
required). The cache is also cleared:
1. whenever a new user is added to the user list (section 4.4.3),
2. the login for an existing user is removed (section 4.4.4).
3. if the ‘Password Cache expiry’ value has been exceeded (section 4.5.1).
4.4.7 Active Directory server setup

For users with Security Manager option only.
It is assumed that the person responsible for operating the Active Directory server is familiar with the ba-
sics of setting up a suitable server. The details given below explain the file structure necessary in order
that the Security Manager software may communicate with the server. Briefly, a ‘User’ must be a member
of a ‘Group’, which must be part of an ‘Organizational unit’ (figure 4.4.7a).
Organizational
Unit
Group 1 Group 2 Group r
User 1-1 User 2-1 User r-1
User 2-2 User r-2
User 2-n User r-n
Figure 4.4.7a Structure overview
User Guide HA028910

4.4.7 ACTIVE DIRECTORY SERVER SETUP (Cont.)

1. In the ‘Domain Controller (Active Directory)’ area of the ‘Manage your Server’ screen, click on ‘Man-
age users and computers in Active Directory’.
Figure 4.4.7b Manage users....
2. Right click on the relevant Domain name (symbol = ) and select ‘New’ then ‘Organizational Unit’.
Enter a name for the Unit and click OK.
Figure 4.4.7c Create new Organizational Unit
(Continued)
HA028910 User Guide

4.4.7 ACTIVE DIRECTORY SERVER SETUP (Cont.)

3. Similarly, create a new Group, then a new User, entering the user name and login details (figure
4.4.7d). In the password page, ensure that the various tick boxes are enabled/disabled as required.
Figure 4.4.7d User details screens

4 Once the new user has been created, right click anywhere in the screen and select Properties (or dou-
ble click on the user). When the Properties page opens, click on the ‘Member Of’ tab (figure 4.4.7e).
5. Click on the ‘Add’ key and enter the new group name Click OK.
6. The user is now part of the group, and should be able to log in using the login and password details
entered in step 3.
Figure 4.4.7e ‘Member of’ screen
User Guide HA028910

4.5 NETWORK KEY

Note: This manual does not describe network setup in detail, as each network is different. In most
cases, the help of the network administrator or supervisor will be required, for example, in the al-
location of valid addresses and passwords.
Touching the Network key calls a selection box to the display, allowing ‘Address’ or ‘Name’ to be selected
for configuration.
4.5.1 Address
Figure 4.5.1 shows the address menu fields.
Instrument number 240

Address MAC address 08:00:48:80:00:F0 Select 'specify an IP address',
'Get from BootP Server' or
Name IP address lookup Get from BootP Server 'Get from DHCP Server'
BootP timeout 28 s Appears only for 'Get from BootP Server'
Fig 4.5.2 IP address 192.168.111.222

Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Default gateway 0.0.0.0
SNTP server enable
SNTP client enable
SNTP server 149.121.128.179
EuroPRP server enable
Active Directory server 123.456.234.1
Appear only if Security Manager
option enabled. Active Directory security TLS (port 636)
Password Cache expiry 0 Days
Apply Discard
Figure 4.5.1 Network addressing
INSTRUMENT NUMBER/MAC ADDRESS

Unique numbers set up during manufacture to identify the recorder to a remote host, or to the recorder
manufacturer/distributor, in case of query.
IP ADDRESS LOOKUP
This field allows an address to be entered for the recorder. This can be done either by manually entering
an address (IP address field - below), or a network service BootP or DHCP can be used to assign an IP
address to the recorder.
BOOTP TIMEOUT
This 28 second period is the maximum time the recorder will wait, at power-up, for a response from the
BootP server. If no response is received within this time, the IP address, Subnet mask and Default gate-
way are all set to, or remain at 0.0.0.0
HA028910 User Guide

4.5.1 NETWORK ADDRESS (Cont.)

IP ADDRESS
Allows manual entry of the recorder’s internet protocol (IP) address only if ‘Specify an IP address’ is se-
lected in the ‘IP address lookup’ picklist above.
Notes:
1. DHCP attempts to connect to the network continuously, until successful. Only when successful
will the network settings be updated and appear at the address page. This can take up to 13
seconds after power up.
2. It takes 2 to 3 minutes for a DHCP failure to be reported, so an instrument alarm would not be
generated for 2 to 3 minutes after power up, should the connection fail to be established.
SUBNET MASK
This field is editable only if ‘Specify an IP address’ is selected in the ‘IP address lookup’ picklist above.
The subnet mask is the network address plus the bits in the host address reserved for sub-network identi-
fication. By convention, all the network address bits are set to 1. The subnet mask is used to identify the
subnet to which an IP address belongs by performing a bitwise AND on the mask and the IP address.
DEFAULT GATEWAY
To deliver traffic from one subnet to another, devices called ‘routers’ or ‘gateways’ are placed between
segments. The default gateway address informs each network device where to send data if the target
station does not reside on the same subnet as the source.
SNTP SERVER ENABLE

This tick box allows the recorder to act as an SNTP time server.
SNTP CLIENT ENABLE

This tickbox allows time synchronisation from a Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) server to be ena-
bled and disabled. When enabled, the instrument time is updated every 15 minutes.
SNTP SERVER
If ‘Obtain from BootP server’ or ‘Obtain from DHCP server’ is selected as the IP address look-up (see
above), then this address appears automatically. Otherwise this area allows an IP address to be entered
for the SNTP server.
Notes:
1 SNTP is a protocol that allows clients on a TCP/IP network to set their times to that of a server
- port number 123. The recorder can act both as a client and as a server; when acting as a
server, the resolution is 1 msec.
2. SNTP time is based on elapsed seconds since 00:00 hrs on 1st January 1900. The time is not
affected by time zones or daylight saving adjustments.
3. If the instrument time differs from the SNTP time by less than 2 seconds, the instrument time is
updated gradually (1 msec 8 times a second) to prevent time change events being recorded. If
the difference is greater than 2 seconds, this is defined as a ‘time change event’, the results of
which are that the recorder time is immediately updated, and a green line is drawn across the
chart (vertical/horizontal trend modes only) to indicate the time change.
4. If more than 5 time change events occur within 24 hours, a ‘Time Synchronisation failure’ instru-
ment alarm is set 24 hours after the first event. Once synchronisation is re-established, the
alarm self-clears within 24 hours.
5. An ‘SNTP server failure’ instrument alarm is flagged if the configured server cannot be ac-
cessed, or if the year received from the server is less than 2001 or more than 2035.
(Continued)
User Guide HA028910

4.5.1 NETWORK ADDRESS (Cont.)

SNTP SERVER NOTES (Cont.)
6. When the instrument is acting as a server and a “Clock Failure’ instrument alarm is active, the
server time is set to 1/1/1900 which is ignored by clients.
7. Servers such as Microsoft ‘TimeServ’ cannot be used with this series of instruments because
they are not SNTP servers.
8. If the Simulation option is enabled and ‘SNTP client enable’ is enabled, then the recorder syn-
chronises only on power up. If ‘SNTP server enable’ is enabled, the server output will follow the
recorder time.
EUROPRP SERVER ENABLE
Enabling this item causes the instrument to ‘declare itself’ (i.e. to become visible to a network scanning
tool running on a PC), thus allowing the pc user to identify all such instruments on a network.
ACTIVE DIRECTORY SERVER

This item appears only if the Security Manager option is enabled. It allows an Active Directory server IP
address to be entered for use with this application. The IP address would normally be obtained from the
user’s IT department or Network administrator. Once entered, assuming the recorder is connected to
the same network as the server, users with a domain configured will be able to login using their normal
network login password.
If ‘Domain name Service’ is enabled (section 4.5.2), then a domain name may be entered here instead of
an IP address,
ACTIVE DIRECTORY SECURITY
This item appears only if the Security Manager option is enabled. If set to None (default), then any at-
tempt to change a password will be rejected because it has not been encrypted. One of the alternative
TLS ports must be used if passwords are to be changed at the recorder.
When TLS (port 636) is selected all access to the server is secured using TLS on port 636 using the LDAP_
SERVER_START_TLS_OID method. TLS (port 389) is similar but uses TLS on port 389.
PASSWORD CACHE EXPIRY

This applies only if the Active Directory is not available.
Starting from when the server becomes unavailable, once the configured number of days has expired
since the last successful log in (by any user), the Password cache is cleared the next time any user at-
tempts to log in. The user’s password is ‘Invalid’ and a pop-up message (Active Directory Password
Cache has expired) appears. This means that no Domain users can log in until the Active Directory server
becomes available again.
Values of 0 (default) to 30 days can be entered, where a value of 0 disables Cache expiry (i.e. it never
expires).
HA028910 User Guide

4.5.2 Name
Figure 4.5.2 shows the ‘Name’ fields
Address Local Host Andy136-4

Name Domain FishesRus.co.uk
Domain Name Service
Primary DNS Server 149.121.164.11
Secondary DNS Server 149.121.165.14
Apply Discard
Figure 4.5.2 network name fields
LOCAL HOST
English language name for the recorder. Non-editable - assigned to the IP Address
DOMAIN
The name of the Group or area of networked units which contains the recorder. Non editable.
DOMAIN NAME SERVICE (DNS)
Enables the mapping of host names to IP addresses and vice-versa.
PRIMARY/SECONDARY DNS SERVER

IP addresses supplied by IT department or the Domain manager or Supervisor.
Notes:
1. Any one or more of the above items may be overwritten if ‘IP address lookup’ is set to ‘Obtain
from BootP Server’ or ‘Obtain from DHCP server’ as described under ‘Address’ above.
2. If Domain Name Server is enabled, but either no DNS server is connected to the network or
neither the DNS Primary nor secondary server can be ‘found’, it can take up to four minutes for
the system to timeout. During this period, the recorder’s user interface (touchscreen) will not
respond.
User Guide HA028910

Clock Archive Save/Restore Config Security Network System
Current date DD/ MM/ Y Y Y Y Section 4.6.1
Clock
HA028910
Current time HH: MM: S S
Locale
4.6 SYSTEM
Issue 9 June 11
Upgrade
Apply Discard
Input Adjust
Locale
Section 4.6.2 See Section 9 Output Adjust
Input adjust
Section 4.6.4
See Section 4.3.16 Master Comms Diagnostics
Language English
Country United Kingdom Ethernet Diagnostics
First Channel 1 Select first channel for adjust
Time Zone GMT
Last Channel 6 Select final channel for adjust
Use Summertime (DST) See figure 4.6b for
Start at 01:00:00 Select Channels further items
on the Last
Sunday Adjust Channels Initiate adjust-
ment procedure
in March Ethernet Diagnostics
Remove Adjust Remove previ- Section 4.6.7
End at 01:00:00 ous adjustments
on the Last Host 149.121.131.78
Fast Settle
Sunday Ping Status Host Reachable
in October 1) Channel 1 5.0001 29/07/08 12:11:55
Ping Now
Long Date Format 2) Channel 2 5.0001 29/07/08 12:11:55
3) Channel 3 5.0001 29/07/08 12:11:55 Local Modbus Client 1 127.0.0.1
Apply Discard
4) Channel 4 5.0001 29/07/08 12:11:55 Local Modbus Client 2 Offline
Unadjusted Remote Modbus Client 1 149.121.130.242
Upgrade 6) Channel 6 4.998
Section 4.6.3 Remote Modbus Client 2 Offline
Remote Modbus Client 3 Offline
Instrument Number 8203 Remote Modbus Client 4 192.168.189.89
Add new options Key Code WC8N-9F5E-1D41
Key Code File EtherNet/IP Clients:
Unconnected Message Manager (UCMM) Offline

Implicit I/O Messaging Offline
Source Files From Remote FTP Site
Upgrade Explicit Messaging (TCP 1) 149.121.129.141
Upgrade software Explicit Messaging (TCP 2) Offline
Explicit Messaging (TCP 3) Offline
Apply Discard Explicit Messaging (TCP 4) Offline
Figure 4.6a System configuration menu layout (sheet 1)
Page 217
User Guide
Page 218
Copy
User Guide
Section 4.6.8
Copy
Source Type Channel
Job Search
Copy From 1) Furnace Temp 1 Section 4.6.9
4.6 SYSTEM (Cont.)
Job Search
Customise
Copy To 2) Channel 2
Section All Sections
Ð 5) Channel 5 About
Job Category Totaliser
Include alarm data See figure 4.6a for other items
Job Action Preset
Include job data
Search Now
Copy Now About
Section 4.6.11
Instrument Variant: 6100A

Customise Config Revision: 310908
Section 4.6.10 Last Updated: 06 October 2010 15:52:56
At Version: 5.1
Desktop 54
Created On: 6100A
Data Entry Background 55
Security Revision: 178008
Selection 27
Comprising
Fixed Text 47
Bridge Version: 5.1
Active Text 6
Product Software Version: 5.1
Disabled Text 49
History File Version: 2.0
Title Bar Background 41
BootRom Version: 1.7
Trend Foreground 48
Board Version 3
Trend Background 55
Fitted Memory
History Foreground 52
History: 96MB
History Background 48
SRAM: 256kB
Font set Auto DRAM: 64MB
Default
Support File
Apply Discard
Figure 4.6b System configuration menu layout (sheet 2)
Issue 9 June 11
HA028910
4.6 SYSTEM (Cont.)

Touching the System key calls the pick list: Clock, Locale, Upgrade, Input adjust, Master Comms Diagnos-
tics (if option fitted), Ethernet diagnostics, Copy, Job search, About.
Figures 4.6a and 4.6b above, give an overview of the System Menus.
4.6.1 Clock
Selecting ‘clock’ causes the recorder’s date and time to be displayed. To edit the date, touch the current
date area, to call the keyboard and enter the new numbers. The date is edited in a similar way. The set-
tings apply as soon as the ‘Apply settings’ button is touched. See also SNTP details in section 4.5.1.
4.6.2 Locale
This allows the setting of the following items:
Language Choose the required language from the picklist
Country Displays a pick list of countries associated with the selected language
Time zone* Select required time zone from picklist.
Use Summertime (DST)*
Select box if daylight saving is to be used, If ‘Use Summertime (DST)’ is selected, the
times and dates for the start and end of summertime can be entered using picklists -
see figure 4.6a.
Notes
1 Date format DD/MM/YY or MM/DD/YY is defined by the language and country selected. Time
format (e.g. 12/24 hr. clock) is defined by the country selected.
2. When using Bridge software, the host PC’s locale information and the recorder locale informa-
tion should match, or the displayed time will not be correct.
*Note: For more information, see B7 Annex B and/or http://www.timeanddate.com
LONG DATE FORMAT

Table 4.6.2 shows some examples of the Standard and Long Format date layouts which are available ac-
cording to Language and Country selections.
Country Date display

(Language) Standard Long Format
Argentina 01/05/06 01/05/2006
Australia 1/05/06 1/05/2006
Bolivia 01-05-06 01-05-2006
Canada (Eng) 01/05/06 1-May-06
Canada (Fra) 06-05-01 06-05-01
France 01/05/06 1 mai 06
Germany 01.05.06 01.05.2006
Holland 1-5-06 1-mei-06
Italy 01/05/06 1-Mag-06
Portugal 01-05-2006 1/Mai/06
South Africa 06/05/01 2006/05/01
Spain 1/05/06 01-may-06
Switzerland (Fra) 01.05.06 1 mai 06
Switzerland (Ger) 01.05.06 01.05.2006
Switzerland (Ita) 01.05.06 1-mag-06
United Kingdom 01/05/06 01-May-06
United States 5/1/06 01-May-06
Uruguay 01/05/06 01/05/2006
Table 4.6.2 Date format examples
HA028910 User Guide

4.6.3 Upgrade
This allows
1. New options to be enabled (by the entering of a ‘Key Code’) and/or
2. The recorder operating software to be upgraded by reading a file from Compact Flash, SD card or
other local or remote source.
Instrument Number 8203

Add new options Key Code WC8N-9F5E-1D41
Key Code File
Source Files From Remote FTP Site

Upgrade
Upgrade software
Apply Discard
Figure 4.6.3a Upgrade menu

Instrument Number This number must be quoted when ordering upgrades. It is unique to the instrument
and is not user editable.
Key Code If the relevant key code is known, it can be entered manually using this field
Key Code File If Key Code File is selected, the first line of the file must be the Key Code. To select
the file for reading, the Key Code File field is touched, to display the file list - if neces-
sary, refer to section 5, below, for more details.
Source Files From Allows the user to select ‘Remote FTP site’ or ‘Local Media’.
Upgrade Initiates upgrade once the upgrade source has been defined (see figures below).
Host Address/Name
FTP Username
Pccard
FTP Password
Source
Source Path name to upgrade file
Ok Cancel
Ok Cancel
Figure 4.6.3b Remote upgrade details Figure 4.6.3c Local upgrade details
CAUTION
Power to the recorder must be maintained during the upgrade process or the recorder might not power
up. If such a situation arises, the manufacturer’s local service centre should be contacted for advice.
Notes:
1. Recording is suspended and the user interface (touchscreen) is disabled whilst the upgrade is
in progress. During the subsequent, automatic power cycle, any alarm relays will go into their
alarm states until the recorder has re-initialised.
2. When upgrading from another instrument, using ‘Remote Upgrade’, the I.P. address (or net-
work name) of the source instrument should be typed into the Host Address/Name field, and
‘mediacard’ (or usbfront etc. as appropriate) should be entered in the ‘Source’ field.
3. If ‘Audit trail’ is enabled (see ‘Management’ - section 4.4.2), then system messages are gener-
ated, containing date, time, source and status details of the upgrade.
4. ‘Upgrade’ appears in the System menu only for access levels which have ‘Perform Upgrades’
enabled in Security/Access configuration (section 4.4.1).
5. ‘Signing/Authorizing’ apply to upgrades, if the relevant boxes are ticked in Security/Manage-
ment configuration. See ‘Management’ - section 4.4.2 for further details.
User Guide HA028910

4.6.4 Input adjust
Notes
1. Input adjust cannot be applied to input channels with input type of ‘Digital’, ‘Test’ or ‘comms’.
2. Input adjustments can be carried out only by users with ‘Adjust I/O’ permission (see section 4.4.1).
3. The instrument must be powered for a sufficient time (e.g. 30 mins) for it to reach thermal equi-
librium before an input adjust is performed.
This facility allows the user to compensate for tolerance errors etc. The technique used is to select those
channels to which adjust is to be applied, then for each channel to:
a apply a known low level signal (at or close to the low input range value) to the relevant input. When
the recorder reading is steady, press ‘Apply’.
b. apply a known high level signal (at, or close to, the high input range value) to the relevant input.
When the recorder reading is steady, press ‘Apply’.
Figure 4.6.4a shows the initial display which appears when ‘Input adjust’ is first selected from the SYSTEM
menu. Channels 1 to 6 are selected by default.
Last Channel 6 Select final channel for adjust Channels to be included

Select Channels 1) Channel 1
2) Channel 2
Add/Remove
Adjust Channels Initiate adjust- individual 3) Channel 3
ment procedure channels from
adjustment list4)Channel 4
Remove Adjust Remove previ-
ous adjustments 5) Channel 5
6) Channel 6
Fast Settle
1) Channel 1 5.0001 29/07/08 12:11:55

2) Channel 2 5.0001 29/07/08 12:11:55
3) Channel 3 5.0001 29/07/08 12:11:55
4) Channel 4 5.0001 29/07/08 12:11:55
6) Channel 6 4.998 Unadjusted
Figure 4.6.4a Input adjust status page

First channel Allows the user to select the lowest channel number of all the channels to be adjust-
ed.
Last channel Allows the user to select the highest channel number of all the channels to be ad-
justed.
Select Channels Presents a list of all the channels from the First channel to the Last channel inclusive,
each of which can be removed from the adjustment list by ‘unticking’ its check box.
The channels displayed in the status page reflect this selection.
Adjust channels Initiates the adjustment procedure to all the channels from the First channel to the
Last channel inclusive, unless the effectivity is modified using the Select Channels
key.
Remove Adjust Returns the selected channels to factory calibration
Fast Settle Switches off the input filter for 1 second,to allow quicker response. Adjust Channels’
values displayed as ‘RANGING’ for the 1 second duration.
1) Channel 1 etc. A list of channels required to be susceptible to the adjustment procedure, together
with their current values and their adjustment status (i.e. Unadjusted or, the time/date
of the previous adjustment (if any)).
HA028910 User Guide

4.6.4 INPUT ADJUST (Cont.)

ADJUST PROCEDURE
Operation of the Adjust Channels key calls the low-end adjust page, as shown in figure 4.6.4b.
Fast settle
Specify the sensor low point and connect the
corresponding input.
Low Point 0
When the values below have settled select

Apply.
1) Channel 1 -0.0026 Unadjusted
Apply Discard
Figure 4.6.4b Typical low-end input adjust page

Fast Settle Reduces the time taken for the readings to stabilise.
Low Point Usually 0, but a different value can be entered here, if required.
Apply the Low point value to the relevant input channels, and wait for the recorder readings to become
stable. When the readings are stable, press the Apply key, to call the High-end page depicted in figure
4.6.4c, below.
Fast settle
Specify the sensor high point and connect the
corresponding input.
High Point 5
When the values below have settled select

Apply.
Apply Discard
Figure 4.6.4c Typical high-end input adjust page

High Point Default value displayed, but a different value can be entered here, if required.
Apply the High point value to the relevant input channels, and wait some minutes for the recorder read-
ings to become stable. When the readings are stable, press the Apply key, to return to the status page.
Note: Adjusting a channel invalidates the accuracy values given in the specification in Annex A for
that channel.
User Guide HA028910

4.6.5 Output Adjust

Applies only to units with Analogue output option boards fitted. See section 9 for details.
4.6.6 Master Comms Diagnostics

This menu item is concerned only with Master comms diagnostics, and is fully described in Section 4.3.16.
4.6.7 Ethernet Diagnostics

This screen (figure 4.6.7) allows the user to test the status of the connection with a host computer, and if
the relevant option is enabled, the connections with local and remote Modbus or EtherNet/IP slaves. The
page is available to any access level with ‘Full Configuration’ enabled in Security/Access configuration
(section 4.4.1).
Host 149.121.131.78
Ping Status Host Reachable
Ping Now
Local Modbus Client 1 127.0.0.1

Local Modbus Client 2 Offline
Remote Modbus Client 1 149.121.130.242 Appear only if Master
Remote Modbus Client 2 Offline comms option enabled
Remote Modbus Client 3 Offline
Remote Modbus Client 4 192.168.189.89 IP address remains for five
seconds after message
activity ceases, after which
EtherNet/IP Clients:
appears instead.
Unconnected Message Manager (UCMM) Offline
Implicit I/O Messaging Offline
Appear only if EtherNet/IP
Explicit Messaging (TCP 1) 149.121.129.141
comms option enabled
Figure 4.6.7 Ethernet Diagnostics display

Host Allows the IP address, or DNS Name of the host to be ‘Pinged’.
Ping Status Indicates the latest status returned - see table 4.6.7, below, for details.
Displayed Status Interpretation
Waiting The default status displayed on power up.
In Progress Displayed whilst waiting for a response from the host
Host Reachable A device was found at the specified address.
Ping (Error in value) Host refused to allow socket connection on the defined Ping Port.
Request Timed Out Unable to reach a host at the specified network address.
Host Unreachable Unable to reach a host at the specified network address.
Unknown error An unknown internal error has occurred.
Table 4.6.7 Ping Status

Ping Now Operating this button causes an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) command
to be sent to the host. If the host receives the message, it returns a message to the
sender within a few seconds.
Local Modbus Client Appears only if the Master Comms option is enabled. Indicates that the local Mod-
bus Master is connected.
Remote Modbus Client
Appears only if the Master Comms option is enabled. Displays the IP address of con-
nected Modbus TCP/IP clients. Otherwise ‘Offline’ is displayed.
HA028910 User Guide

4.6.7 ETHERNET DIAGNOSTICS (Cont.)
EtherNet/IP Clients Appears only if the EtherNet/IP comms option is enabled.

Unconnected Message Manager (UCMM)
Displays the IP address of any client requesting an ‘unconnected’ message (see sec-
tion 4.3.21).
Implicit I/O Messaging
Displays the IP address of the client currently carrying out implicit messaging. Once
activity ceases, the address remains on display for five seconds, after which ‘Offline’
appears instead.
Explicit Messaging (TCPn)
Displays the IP address of each client currently carrying out explicit messaging.
Once activity ceases, the address remains on display for five seconds, after which
‘Offline’ appears instead.
4.6.8 Copy
This facility allows the user to copy a point or group configuration from one point, group etc. to one or
more others. The user may choose whether or not to include alarm and (if applicable) job data when
copying point configurations. Descriptors and colour selections are not copied.
Figure 4.6.8 shows a typical configuration page for copying the configuration of channel 1 (Furnace
Temp1) to channels 2 to 5 inclusive.
Source Type Channel
Copy From 1) Furnace Temp 1
Copy To 2) Channel 2
– 5) Channel 5
Include alarm data
Include job data
Copy Now
Figure 4.6.8 Copy configuration page (typical)
When ‘Copy Now’ is operated, a confirmatory dialogue box opens, to allow the user to check the source
and destination entries.
Copying
From: 1) Furnace Temp 1
To: 2) Channel 2
– 5) Channel 5
OK Cancel
User Guide HA028910

4.6.8 COPY (Cont.)

Source Type Picklist allows selection of Group, Channel, Event, Message, Maths Channel, Total-
iser, Counter, Timer, Output or Demand Write, as the type of source to be copied.
Copy From Allows the user to select a specific point, group etc. to be copied
Copy To Allows the first destination point to be selected, for the source to be copied to.
– Allows the final destination point to be selected for the source to be copied to.
Include alarm data This field appears only for source types which support alarms. If this box is ‘selected’,
then alarm data is included in the copy process.
Include job data This field appears only for source types which support jobs. If this box is ‘selected’,
then jobs data is included in the copy. For source types that support both alarms and
jobs, it is not possible to include job data, without including alarm data as well.
Once the copy is complete, the user should enter the configuration area of the items that have been cop-
ied, and edit/apply the changes etc.
COPY RULES
1. The first channel on any input card may not be a digital input type.
2. If a destination channel was a digital input, AND the source channel is an analogue input AND ‘in-
clude alarm data’ is not selected, the destination channel alarm settings will be set as:
Enable = Off; Type = Absolute high; Threshold = 0.0; Dwell = 0.0.
3. If a destination channel was an analogue input, AND the source channel is a digital input AND ‘in-
clude alarm data’ is not selected, the destination channel alarm settings will be set as:
Enable = Off; Type = Digital; Threshold = Closed; Dwell = 0.0.
4. Descriptors and Colours are never copied.
HA028910 User Guide

4.6.9 Job search

With multiple job sources, it can sometimes be difficult to discover what the trigger for a particular job is,
particularly if the recorder has been configured by more than one operator. The ‘Job Search’ facility al-
lows the user to define a job type, and the recorder then produces a list of relevant triggers. Figure 4.6.9
shows a typical search page, which will produce a list of all triggers for Preset Totaliser jobs.
Section All Sections
Job Category Totaliser
Job Action Preset
Search Now
Figure 4.6.9a Job search

Section Allows the user to select a point type for the search. For example, selecting ‘Maths’,
causes the search to be restricted to Maths channels. ‘All Sections’ causes all ena-
bled point types to be included in the search.
Job Category Allows a job category (e.g. ‘Totaliser’) to be selected for the search.
Job Action This depends on the job category. For example, for ‘Totalisers’, ‘Preset’, ‘Disable’,
Preset Group’ or ‘Disable Group’ to be selected. Section 4.7 gives details of all job
types and their associated actions.
Search Now Operation of this button initiates the search, after confirmation.
SEARCH RESULTS
The search results in one of two displays, one ‘No Match was found’ if no jobs are found which match the
search criteria, or a list of triggers is produced. A typical example is given in figure 4.6.9b.
Search Results
Channels (1), Alarm (1), Job (3)
Maths (1), Alarm (2), Job (3)
Ok
Figure 4.6.9b Search results (typical)
User Guide HA028910

4.6.10 Customise
‘Customise’ allows:
1. the background and foreground colours for various screen items to be selected
2. the size of the text font to be varied.
Figure 4.6.10a shows the display page with the settings used for most of the screen drawings in this
manual.
Desktop 54
Data Entry Background 55
Selection 27
Fixed Text 47
Active Text 6
Disabled Text 49
Trend Foreground 48
Trend Background 55
Font set Auto
Default
Apply Discard
Figure 4.6.10a Customise menu

Desktop This defines the background colour for the display screens, including keytops.
Data Entry Background
This is the background colour for drop-down menus and text entry areas.
Selection The colour that keytops and menu items adopt when selected.
Fixed Text This defines the colour of all fixed text items including key top text, menu text, scale
data, title bar legends etc.
Active Text The colour of all non-fixed text, such as selectable menu items.
Disabled Text This allows the user to choose a colour for the text associated with disabled items.
For example: key top legends on the Goto Group menu, for groups that are not dis-
play enabled.
Title Bar background The colour of the title bar block at the top of the display screen. Note that the text
colour for the title block is that defined in ‘Fixed Text’, above.
Trend Foreground The colour of the grid lines, timestamps and messages on the real-time trend dis-
play.
Trend Background The colour of the ‘chart’ in the real-time trend display.
History Foreground The colour of the grid lines, timestamps and messages on the trend history display.
History Background The colour of the ‘chart’ in the trend history display.
Font set Allows the user to select a size for the display font. This affects the size of the ‘con-
taining item’ i.e. push button keys etc. also change size. See ‘FONT SIZE EXAM-
PLES’, below.
Default Allows the user to return to the factory default settings.
HA028910 User Guide

4.6.10 CUSTOMISE (Cont.)

FONT SIZE EXAMPLES
The following figures give examples, drawn to the same scale, for all of the different font sizes available,
except ‘Auto’ which picks a font size considered appropriate for the size of screen.
Archive Save/Restore Config Security Network System Very small
Archive Save/Restore Config Security Network System Small
Archive Save/Restore Config Security Network System Large
Archive Save/Restore Config Security Network System Very Large
Figure 4.6.10b Font sizes
User Guide HA028910

4.6.11 About
Selecting ‘About’ from the System key menu gives details of the version numbers of different aspects of
the recorder, and details of the amount of memory fitted. Figure 4.6.11 shows a typical ‘About’ display
page.

Appears only when
viewing via

Bridge software

Figure 4.6.11 About display (typical).
INSTRUMENT VARIANT
Displays the instrument type.
CONFIG REVISION
Whenever a change to the Configuration of the recorder is applied the ‘Config Revision’ is incremented.
For these purposes, Configuration is defined as including all items within the menu structures of the
Config and Network keys, and includes User Screens. It does not include those items associated with the
Security key. Config Revision is printed on the ‘chart’ at power up, and if either Auditor option or if the
Batch option is fitted, Config Revision is included in the messages associated with these options.
Notes:
1. Config Revision can be used as an input to one or more maths channels. If such a maths chan-
nel is included in one or more groups, the revision number can be determined for any time/
date, when Trend History mode is invoked for the group(s) in question. See section 4.3.11 for
maths function details.
2. Config Revision can be embedded in one or more messages, as described in section 4.3.8.
LAST UPDATED
The time and date at which the configuration was last edited.
AT VERSION
The version number at the time of the last configuration update.
CREATED ON
Shows the type of instrument that the configuration was created on. Normally, this will be the same as
‘Instrument Variant’, and will be different only if the configuration has been downloaded from a different
instrument model.
HA028910 User Guide

4.6.11 ABOUT (Cont.)

SECURITY REVISION
Whenever a change is made to an item within the Security menus, the Security revision is incremented.
Security Revision is printed on the ‘chart’ at power up, and if either of the Auditor options or if the Batch
option is fitted, Security Revision is included in the messages associated with these options. See notes 1
and 2, below.
Notes:
1 Security Revision can be used as an input to one or more maths channels. If such a maths chan-
nel is included in one or more groups, the revision number can be determined for any time/
date, when Trend History mode is invoked for the group(s) in question. See section 4.3.11 for
maths option details.
2. If ‘Centralised Security’ is enabled, the Security Revision is in a different format (e.g. 15.001) see
section 4.4.2.
SUPPORT FILE
If the unit is not performing as it should (e.g. it resets itself unexpectedly), the Support File key allows the
user to save ‘critical system files’ into a single file (SupportInfo.uhq*), for despatch to the manufacturer
for analysis. This file may be saved to the instrument’s Compact Flash or SD card or, using Bridge ‘Full’
software, to a remote PC. For security reasons, this file cannot be viewed by anyone other than the manu-
facturer or his agents.
Once the save operation is complete, a ‘Support’ message appears on the screen giving details of where
to send the file. More information is held in the file ‘SupportInfo.txt’ which is also saved to the disk. This
file can be opened, and the information within it read, by inserting the disk into a PC, clicking on the
floppy disk icon (A drive) in ‘My Computer’ and then double clicking on the file icon when it appears.
* ‘SupportInfo’ is the default name. This name may be edited by the user before saving to disk or pc. The
.uhq suffix is automatically appended to the new name.
User Guide HA028910

4.7 JOBS
A number of sources (e.g. channel, event, totaliser) can be set up to trigger one or more jobs. The follow-
ing description includes all possible job categories, but which jobs are available on any particular record-
er depends on the options fitted to that recorder. Many job categories require the relevant access level
permission to be set, as described in section 4.4.1, above.
The type of action (continuous or ‘single-shot’), available for selection, depends on the type of trigger
source. Continuous actions are selected from: While active, While inactive or While unacknowledged.
The available single-shot actions are: On becoming active, On becoming inactive, On acknowledgement.
4.7.1 No Action
This means that no job action is configured for the trigger source.
4.7.2 Drive relay category

Allows a specific relay to be set up to change state whilst the trigger source is active, inactive or whilst it
remains unacknowledged. Relays are normally energised i.e. ‘common’ (c) is shorted to ‘normally open’
(no). When in alarm, the relay is de-energised i.e. ‘common’ (c) is shorted to ‘normally closed’ (nc). Thus,
if power is removed from the recorder, all relays automatically ‘fail safe’ to their alarm conditions. See
section 2.2.1 for details of relay output board connector location(s) and pinout.
Job Number 1
Category Drive Relay
Relay Board 1
Select Relay
Relay Number 1
While Active Select 'Active', 'Inactive'
or 'Unacknowledged'
Figure 4.7.2 Relay job menu layout
4.7.3 Totaliser category

If the Totaliser option is fitted (section 4.3.12), the following jobs become available:
Preset Loads the selected totaliser with the value set up in ‘Preset’ in the totaliser’s configu-
ration menu.
Preset Group Loads all the totalisers in the specified group with their ‘Preset’ values.
Disable Stops the specified totaliser accumulating.
Disable Group Stops all totalisers in the specified group.
Note: If more than one job is set up to disable a particular totaliser, then any of these jobs going
active will disable the totaliser.
Job Number 1 Select 'Preset', 'Disable',

Category Totaliser 'Preset Group' or 'Disable Group'
Action Preset Group Select Required Group
Group 1) Group 1
Select 'Active', 'Inactive'
On Acknowledgement or 'Acknowledgement'
Figure 4.7.3 Totaliser job menu layout (group action)
HA028910 User Guide

4.7.4 Message category

One or more messages (section 4.3.8) can be directed to the display, to ‘All groups’ or to a ‘Specified
Group’. The messages must be contiguous - e.g. messages 2, 3 and 4 may be sent, but messages 1, 3
and 4 cannot be sent, without message 2 as well.
Job Number 1
Category Message Select 'Display', 'All Groups', or 'Specified Group'
Send Message(s) to Specified Group
Group Select Required Group
1) Group 1
(only if 'Specified Group' previously selected)
First Message 1) Message 1
Select range of messages to be output.
Last Message 1) Message 1
On Active Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or 'Acknowledgement'
Figure 4.7.4 Message job menu layout
4.7.5 Maths category

If Maths channels (section 4.3.11) are enabled, the following jobs become available to applicable func-
tions:
Reset Sets the selected maths channel value to zero.
Disable Stops historical functions such as Fvalue, Stopwatch and Rolling Average from accu-
mulating further values. When the function is subsequently re-enabled, the function
re-starts from its pre-disabled value. ‘Disable’ has no effect on other functions.
Switch to B Causes the relevant maths channel to copy source B instead of its normal source A -
see section 4.3.11 for further details.
Trigger Used to initiate a ‘Sample and hold’ function - see section 4.3.11 for further details.
Job Number 1 Select 'Reset', 'Disable'

Category Math 'Switch to B' or 'Trigger'
Action Reset
Math Math 1 Select Required Maths channel
On Active Select 'Active', 'Inactive',
or 'Acknowledgement'
Figure 4.7.5 Maths job menu layout
User Guide HA028910

4.7.6 Clock category

This job causes the System Clock to be Preset to the value entered in Instrument Configuration (Preset
Hour, Preset Minute) (Section 4.3.1). This job can be used to synchronise a number of recorders as fol-
lows:
a. For each recorder, set up one input channel as
Input Type Digital
Closed String Synch (for example)
Enable Trigger
Active when Synch
Job 1 category Clock
Job 1 action Preset
Job 1 On Active
b. For each recorder, set the same preset hour and minute in Instrument Configuration.
c. For each recorder provide a simultaneous pulse or contact closure to the digital input previously set up.
The recorders will all be automatically set to the preset time on receipt of the input.
An alternative way of synchronising recorders is via an SNTP time server as described in section 4.5.1.
Job Number 1
Category Clock
Action Preset
On Active
Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or
'Acknowledgement'
Figure 4.7.6 Clock job menu layout
Notes
1 Whenever a time change occurs, a green line is drawn across the chart in vertical trend mode.
2 The clock presets to the ‘Preset Hour’ value set in Config/Instrument menu. If, however, ‘Use
Summertime (DST)’ is enabled in System/Locale configuration, then an hour is added whilst
daylight saving time is in operation.
4.7.7 Counter category

If Counters (section 4.3.13) are enabled, the following jobs become available:
Preset counter Loads the selected counter with the preset value set in the configuration for that counter.
Disable counter Stops the selected counter.
Increment Adds 1 to the selected counter’s value.
Decrement Subtracts 1 from the selected counter’s value.
Preset group Loads all the counters in the specified group with their ‘Preset’ values.
Disable group Stops all counters in the specified group.
Job Number 1 Select 'Preset', 'Disable', 'Increment',

Category Counter 'Decrement','Preset group', 'Disable Group'.
Action Preset Group
Select Required Group
Group 1) Group 1
On Acknowledgement or 'Acknowledgement'
Figure 4.7.7 Counter job menu layout (group action)
HA028910 User Guide

4.7.8 Timer category

The following jobs are available:
1. Reset timer - sets the timer to zero
2. Start timer - causes the timer to start.
3. Disable timer - stops the timer.
Job Number 1
Category Timer
Action Reset Select 'Reset', 'Start' or 'Disable'
Timer Timer 1 Select Required Timer
Figure 4.7.8 Timer job menu layout
4.7.9 Batch category

If the Batch option (section 4.3.10) is fitted, a previously ‘Stored’ batch can be started by job action or by
a Batch Start command sent via MODBUS/TCP (section 8). If a batch is already running, it will be restart-
ed. In Batch configuration, if Scope = Group, then a specific group can be selected for the batch job to
act on; if Scope = Instrument, the Group selection field does not appear.
Job Number 1
Category Batch Select 'Start' or 'Stop'
Action Start
Select Required Group
Group 1) Group 1
(only if Scope = Group in Batch Configuration)
On Active
or 'Acknowledgement'
Figure 4.7.9 Batch job menu layout
User Guide HA028910

4.7.10 Recording category

The following ‘Recording jobs’ are available:
Enable This enables recording to the group’s history file, ‘while active’, ‘while inactive’ or
‘while unacknowledged’. This allows, for example, recording to be enabled (job 2)
only whilst a Trend Freeze job (job 1) is inactive (i.e recording is disabled for the dura-
tion of a Trend Freeze job). Trend freeze is described in section 4.7.11, below.
Speed/Interval B Recording speed/interval B is selected for use, for the duration of the job. See
‘Group configuration for A/B switching details.
Erase all History All recorder history is erased (only if Simulation option - section 4.3.22 - is enabled),
but see also note 4.
Notes:
1 The group in question will be recorded only if Recording Enable selected in group Configura-
tion (section 4.3.2) and the job is active.
2. If Audit Trail (section 4.4.2) is enabled, then in order to preserve the audit trail, messages will be
saved in the group’s history files even when recording is not enabled by job.
3. A blue line is drawn across the ‘chart’ whenever a recording job is used to disable/enable re-
cording.
4. If the 21CFR11 option is enabled, ‘Erase All History’ jobs can be triggered, but are ignored,
leaving the recording history unaffected.
Job Number 1
Category Recording
Recording Enable Select required action
Group 1) Group 1 Select required Group if appropriate
While Active Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or 'Unacknowledged'
Figure 4.7.10 Recording job menu layout
HA028910 User Guide

4.7.11 Trend category

Trend jobs allow the following actions to occur:
Span B Switches the point being configured to span B and zone B, for as long as the job is
active.
Span B Group Switches all the points in the selected group to their individual spans and zones B, for
as long as the job is active.
Colour B Switches the point being configured to colour B, for as long as the job is active.
Colour B Group Switches all the points in the selected group to their individual colours B, for as long
as the job is active.
Speed/Interval B Switches Trend Speed/Interval for the selected group to Speed/Interval B, for as
long as the job is active.
Note: If a ‘B’ value has not been set, the default ‘A’ value will be used instead
If the Simulation option (section 4.3.22) is enabled the following additional Trend jobs become available:
Freeze Freezes process variables and trend displays, stops the recorder clock and stops
data further writing of history files (but see note). When the job deactivates, process
values/trends are updated to their current values, the clock restarts from its frozen
value and writing to history files is resumed. No blue line is drawn across the chart.
Clear Clears the trend displays from the screen.
Saver Display Sets the recorder display brightness to the value set up in ‘Saver display’ in Instru-
ment configuration (section 4.3.1) . Overrides the ‘Save after’ value.
Job Number 1
Category Trend
Action Speed/Interval B Select required action
Group 1) Group 1 Select Required Group or Point (according to action)
While Active Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or 'Unacknowledged'
Figure 4.7.11 Trend job menu layout
Note: in order to ensure that no further data is written to the recorder’s history files, recording
must be disabled by setting a second, ‘Recording’, job to be initiated by the same trigger as initi-
ates the Freeze job. This Recording job should be set to ‘Enable’, ‘while Inactive’. Recording jobs
are described in section 4.7.10, above.
User Guide HA028910

4.7.12 Output category

Applies only to recorders with Modbus master comms option fitted. As described in section 4.3.16, when
Modbus Master is enabled, a number of ‘Output channels’ become available for configuration. This fea-
ture allows any specified recorder point to be copied to a destination instrument’s input channel, if this is
set to Input Type = Slave comms.
An output job allows a specific output channel write to be disabled when the recorder is acting as a mod-
bus master.
Job Number 1
Category Output
Action Disable Write
Output 1) Output 1 Select required output
Figure 4.7.12 Output Job menu layout
4.7.13 Demand Writes category

Applies only to recorders with Modbus master comms option fitted.
Demand Writes jobs allow the user to set up the recorder so that, when the job is triggered, it initiates the
selected Demand Write. The write action is performed to the remote device as defined in Demand Write
Configuration described in section 4.3.18.
Job Number 1
Category Demand writes
Action Write
Acyclic 1) Write 1 Select Required Write number
Figure 4.7.13 Demand write jobs menu layout
HA028910 User Guide

4.7.14 Alarm category

This allows the user to set up a job to acknowledge or disable point alarms as follows:
Acknowledge All Alarms Acknowledges all alarms
Acknowledge Alarms on Group Acknowledges all alarms
in the specified group
Acknowledge Alarms on Point Acknowledges all alarms associated with the specified point
Acknowledge Alarm Acknowledges specific alarm
Disable All Alarms Disables all alarms
Disable Alarms on Group Disables all alarms in the specified group
Disable Alarms on Point Disables all alarms associated with the specified point
Disable Alarm Disables a specific alarm
Further selection boxes allow a group or point, respectively, to be defined.
Job Number 1
Select required Acknowledge
Category Alarm
or Disable function
Action Acknowledge Alarms on Group
Group 1) Group Select Required Group (or point)
1
On Acknowledgement Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or 'Acknowledgement'
Figure 4.7.14 Alarm job menu layout
4.7.15 Archive category

Archive jobs allow a job to be used to trigger an archive to the instrument’s mass storage medium or to a
host computer using FTP transfer. The following jobs are available:
Archive Last Hour, Last Day, Last 7 Days or Last 31 days to FTP
Bring FTP archive up to date
Cancel Archive to FTP
Archive Last Hour, Last Day, Last 7 Days or Last 31 days to Local device
Bring Media Archive up to date
Suspend Archive to Media
Cancel Archive to Media
These jobs copy the archiving functions available from the ‘Archive’ key described in section 4.1 of this
document. For ‘FTP’ items see ‘Remote archiving’; for ‘Media’ see ‘Local Archive’.
Job Number 1
Category Archive
Action Bring Media Archive Up to Date Select required Archive function
On Acknowledgement Select 'Active', 'Inactive' or 'Acknowledgement'
Figure 4.7.15 Archive jobs menu layout
User Guide HA028910

4.7.16 Email category

Allows the user to send a specified e-mail to the recipients set up in e-mail configuration (see section
4.3.19). A system message is generated, and displayed in all recording groups whenever an e-mail is
sent.
4.7.17 Report category
Category Report
Send Report to Group Select 'Group' or printer (if fitted)
If destination = 'Group',
Group 3) Furnace 3 select destination group.
Report 2) Current temps Select the report to be sent
Select 'Active', Inactive or

On Active 'Acknowledgement'.
Figure 4.7.17 Report category job menu
SEND REPORT TO
Allows the user to select ‘Group’ or an ASCII printer (if fitted - requires Serial Comms. option) as the
report destination. If ‘Group’ is selected (as in the figure above), a further field appears allowing the user
to specify the group to which the report is to be sent (Group 3 in the figure above). If a printer is selected,
the report is sent to the printer.
GROUP
This field appears only if ‘Group’ has been selected as the report destination, and allows the destination
group to be defined. If a group descriptor has been entered (‘Furnace 3’ in the figure above), then this
descriptor appears in the field.
REPORT
This defines which of the reports is to be sent when the job is triggered. If a Report descriptor has been
entered, then this appears in the field (‘Current temps’ in the figure above).
HA028910 User Guide

5 FILE
Figure 5, below, gives an overview of the File Menus. The area is entered by touching the ‘File’ key of the
root menu, and can be used to display the contents of directories stored both in the user area of flash
memory and on any bulk storage device inserted or connected.
The first display page shows the ‘volume’ or ‘device’ names associated with the various areas of memory
available to the user. If one of these volume names is selected (touched), and the ‘open-folder’ key* op-
erated, the contents of the selected volume is displayed. This would typically consist of a list of folders.
Similarly, if a folder name is selected and the ‘open folder’ key* is touched, the contents of the folder is
displayed and so on.
To return to higher levels, the ‘close-folder’ key* is used.
The path name of the current window is shown at the top of the window.
*Note: The open-folder and close-folder key functions are the same as the down arrow and up arrow key
functions respectively.
5.1 FILER OPTION MENU KEYS

These keys appear in a pop-up menu when the option key is pressed. This menu appears only when an
actual file has been selected (i.e. it does not appear if a directory (folder) or volume is selected.) Cut and
paste functions are available only to users with the relevant access permissions (section 4.4).
Cut Removes a file from the list, ready for ‘pasting’ to another destination.
Copy Copies a file from the list, ready for ‘pasting’ to another destination.
Delete Removes a file from the memory.
New Allows a new directory (folder) to be created
Paste Places a ‘cut’ or ‘copy’ file into the new destination.
Refresh Refreshes the display.
A key’s legend is hidden* if at any time its function is not applicable.
* i.e. displayed in the colour selected for ‘Disabled Text’ in the System key ’Customise’ menu.
5.2 THE HIDE KEY

The Hide key at the top right corner of the display screen is used to hide (show) Type, Date and Bytes
information, allowing the full filename text string to appear.
User Guide HA028910

5 FILE (Cont.)
Root Open
Key 2 Folder
Engineer 13:35:29
Root Menu No batch In Progress 06/10/05
Home Operator \ Hide
Name Type Size (Bytes) Free (Bytes)

File Remove Media
1 \mediacard\ Remov.. 125894656 124715008
Goto View Goto Group Select volume \user\ Flash 1390592 1361920
Engineer 13:35:49
No batch In Progress 4 06/10/05
\mediacard\ Hide
3 Name Type Date Bytes

Select folder history\ Folder 07/09/05 09:25:46
Engineer 13:35:59
\mediacard\history Hide

Select folder group1\ Folder 12/09/05 11:40:56
Engineer 13:36:09
\mediacard\history\group1\ Hide

7
Select folder 002088260000.. Folder 28/09/05 15:39:18
002088260000.. Folder 12/09/05 11:40:54
002088260000.. Folder 07/09/05 09:26:32
Engineer 13:36:49
No Batch In Progress 06/10/05
\mediacard\history\group1\000 Hide

Select file Group-1-20050.. History 28/09/05 15:39:10 3931
Group-1-20050.. History 20/09/05 17:17:30 351401
Group-1-20050.. History 12/09/05 11:40:50 1555
Operate
10 Options key
Filer Options
Note: New Delete
The down arrow navigation key
can be used as an alternative Cut Copy
to the 'Open Folder' key. Paste Refresh
Figure 5 File system overview
HA028910 User Guide

5.3 FILE STRUCTURE

The file structure on the archive medium, is as depicted below in figure 5.3 for a six-group instrument.
Each subdirectory contains a maximum of 32 files, there being sufficient subdirectories created, to con-
tain all the group’s history files.
The subfolder names are the numerical part of the first history file that they contain.
For example if the first file name is Furnace1 Temp~20080912 80155F2601000120.uhh, then the subdirec-
tory name will be 20080912 80155F2601000120.
If there are more than 32 files, the next subdirectory name is 20080912 80155F2601000140 (assuming the
file names are contiguous).
SD or
Flash card
history\
group 6 group 5 group 4 group 3 group 2 group 1
Only group 1 structure

shown, for clarity. sub- sub- sub-
directory n directory 2 directory 1
Remaining Second 32 First 32
Each group contains group 1 group 1 group 1
subdirectories, each history history history
containing up to 32 files. files files files
(max = 32)
Figure 5.3 File structure (archive)
User Guide HA028910

6 BRIDGE (REMOTE VIEWER)
6.1 INTRODUCTION
This feature comes in two levels, called ‘Full’ (option) and ‘Lite’ (supplied as standard).
The ‘Full’ option allows full operation and configuration of the recorder, simultaneously, from up to ten
PCs which meet or exceed the minimum requirements listed below. When a change is being made to the
configuration of the recorder by one Bridge user (‘client’), the message:
Feature Locked
Another client (IP ADDRESS) has locked this feature.
Wait for lock to be released and try again
appears on the screen of any other user who attempts to change the configuration. When changes are
complete, the message:
Feature changed
Synchronising data
appears on the screens of all clients (except that of the one making the change).
Bridge ‘Lite’ allows the user to view recorder standard screens, dynamically, on-line, from up to 10 PCs
which meet or exceed the minimum requirements listed below.
The software is supplied on a CD ROM, which also includes PC Review, PC Configuration and Acrobat
reader software and various manuals relevant to the recorder.
The Bridge software is suitable for any physical hardware configurations, some common examples being:
1. A single PC connected directly to a recorder.
2. Multiple PCs connected via a network to one or more recorders. (Each recorder can be accessed, si-
multaneously, by a maximum of 10 PCs, but one PC can look at only ‘N’ recorders where ‘N’ depends
on how much memory is available at the PC. For example, a minimum specification computer (sec-
tion 6.1.1) running Windows NT can ‘look at’ up to three recorders simultaneously.
3. A single PC connected via a telephone line to a remote recorder.
This manual does not describe network setup in detail, as each network is different. In most cases, the
help of the network administrator or supervisor will be required, for example, in the allocation of valid
addresses and passwords.
Notes:
1 When logging in via ‘Bridge’, only users with ‘Connect from Remote’ enabled appear in the user
list. See section 4.4.1 for details.
2 Full Bridge requires some small amount of space on the PC disk. The message ‘There appears
to be no free disk space on the client. Create some space and run again.’ appears if there is
insufficient space.
3. If an attempt is made to establish more than one Full Bridge connection between a PC and an
instrument, the message “You are already running a Full Bridge session with this instrument.
The new session will run as Bridge Lite.” appears.
4. If an attempt is made to establish a Full Bridge connection using the ‘anonymous’ user name,
the following message appears:
‘You are authenticating Full Bridge using the “anonymous” user name. This provides guest read
only access. To establish Full Bridge connection you must use a different user name. Please
change and try again.’
5. The maximum number of Bridge sessions that can be run simultaneously on one recorder is 10.
HA028910 User Guide

6.1.1 Minimum PC requirements
1. P90 running Windows NT/2000/XP Home/XP Pro/Server 2003.

2. 32MB RAM
3. 50MB free hard disk space
4. Graphics drive capable of displaying > 256 colours (recommended)
5. Sound card required for audible alarms feature (section 6.5)
SUPPORTED PDA CONFIGURATION

PDA not supported this issue of software
User Guide HA028910

6.2 CONNECTION DETAILS

The connection to the recorder is terminated at the RJ45 connector located as shown in figures 2.2.1a,
2.2.1b). The other end of the cable may be terminated, for example, at a hub, a dial-up router or a PC,
and it is up to the user to obtain a suitable cable (normally available from a computer supplier or elec-
tronic component distributor.)
Note: For direct connection between a PC and the recorder, a crossover cable is required. For all
other connections, a ‘straight-through’ connection is required.
6.2.1 Direct PC connection

The RJ45 connector at the rear of the recorder is connected via a crossover cable to the PC network card
connector.
6.2.2 PC To remote recorder

As shown in figure 6.2.2, one or more recorders’ Ethernet connector can be connected to a Dial Up
Router, plugged into a telephone socket The PC must similarly be connected to a telephone socket via a
modem (shown externally in the figure, but often built-in with modern computers.)
The dial-up router (available from computer suppliers etc.) has an associated telephone number, and can
also have a security password system. Both the telephone number and any password(s) must be known
to the PC user before any attempt at communication is made.
The PC can be set up to dial the number automatically, or the number may be dialled manually. Reference
should be made to the computer documentation or help pages if necessary.
Once communication has been established, the software can be run.
Recorder
'phone
socket
Dial-up
Recorder router
'phone
socket
Host
computer Modem
Figure 6.2.2 Remote connection example
6.2.3 Networked systems

For PCs and recorders connected into an internal network, it is necessary only to obtain an IP address
(or name) and the required passwords in order to establish connections between the PC(s) and the
recorder(s).
For PCs remote from a networked system which is permanently connected to the internet, it is necessary
to obtain an IP address (or name) and the required passwords in order to establish connections between
the PC and the recorder(s). In many cases it is also necessary that the internal network and ‘firewall’ (if
such exists) be configured to allow access.
For PCs remote from a networked system which is not connected to the internet, a system similar to that
shown in figure 6.2.2 is needed.
HA028910 User Guide

6.3 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

Please refer to the CD box insert for details of software installation.
6.4 RECORDER CONFIGURATION

The recorder configuration is in three areas: Network, Options and Access,
6.4.1 Network
The Network key fields are fully described in Section 4.5.
6.4.2 Options
In order to make the ‘Full’ option accessible, it must first be correctly entered in the Options Menu. If the
Bridge level displayed does not match the ‘currently’ value (if displayed), operation of the ‘Autoconfigure’
key will add the option to the database.
If all options are correctly entered, the ‘Currently’ fields and the Autoconfigure key do not appear.

(currently 1)

(currently 0)

(currently 0)
Figure 6.4.2 Options menu
User Guide HA028910

6.4.3 Access
Each of the access levels and user IDs can have ‘Connect from Remote’ access enabled. When this box
is checked, password entry fields appear as shown in figure 6.4.3. Initially, the Remote User Name is the
same as the login name or access level. Enter the required User name and password, then re-type the
password to ensure it was entered correctly. This name and password are required when establishing
connection with the host computer.
Notes:
1. If the Auditor 21CFR11 option is fitted, the minimum password length is that set in the Secu-
rity/Management menu described in section 4.4.2. For all recorders, the maximum password
length is 20 characters.
2. For maximum security, it is recommended that the remote password and the local password be
non-identical.
Access when Fred

New Password **
Retype Password **
Connect from remote
Remote user name Fred
Remote password
Retype remote password
Login Disabled
Edit own Password
Change Alarm Setpoints
Figure 6.4.3 Remote user access fields
HA028910 User Guide

6.5 RUNNING THE PROGRAM

Initiate the program using the START button in the normal way.
Once the program starts, a Host name and User name will be requested as depicted in figure 6.5a.
Enter the Local host name (e.g. Andy136-4) found in the recorder Network/Name area, followed by a dot
(full stop, period) followed by the domain name (e.g. FishesRus.co.uk) (also in the Network/Name area).
These examples would result in an entry of Andy136-4.FishesRus.co.uk
Notes
1 If frequent use is to be made of this option, it is recommended that a ‘short-cut’ be created, and
placed on the computer desktop. To create a new Bridge link: right click on the desktop, left
click ‘New’ in the pop up menu which appears, then left click on the Bridge icon. When naming
Bridge files, the extension .uhv must be used.
2 If there is no DNS server associated with the system, the IP address (found in the recorder Net-
work/Address area) should be used instead.
3. The PC locale setting (e.g. Daylight Saving Time) must match that set in the recorder (System/
Locale) or the displayed time will be incorrect.
4. If an attempt is made to start the program whilst another user is configuring the recorder, a
‘Feature Locked’ message appears: ‘Another client (instrument) has locked this feature. Retry-
ing until successful’ appears. As soon as the other client ‘Saves’ the new recorder configura-
tion, this message disappears and the program continues its startup.
Enter the user name as entered in the recorder’s Security/Access/Remote user name field (section 6.4.3).
If password entry is not required, disable the tick box (goes blank), then press ‘Start’ to start running the
program
If a password entry is required, ensure that the password required tick box is enabled (tick visible). Press
‘Start’, then enter the password (as entered in the Security/Access/Remote User Name/Remote password
field), followed by carriage return to start running the program.
Clicking ‘Start as Lite’, allows the user to select the ‘View only’ version of Bridge. This has the advantage
of faster operation.
Bridge Configuration
Host name 149.121.130.232
User name Engineer
Car Alarm
None
Password required Start as Lite Channel Alarm Sound Police Siren
START
Figure 6.5a Profile (uhv file)
Filename.uhv
Figure 6.5b Bridge icon (approximation)
User Guide HA028910

6.5 RUNNING THE PROGRAM (Cont.)

CHANNEL ALARM SOUND
If the host PC is fitted with a sound card (enabled), bridge can cause sounds to be played on point alarm
(not system alarms). The sound is selected on a connection-by-connection basis via the profile (uhv) file
(see figure 6.5a). This allows each user to choose a sound (including none) suited to the local environ-
ment.
The sound runs for as long as any point alarm is active and unacknowledged.
Bridge software supplies a range of sounds as listed below. In addition, eight-bit, mono, µLaw-format
.AU sound files can be imported to “<install location>\Series6000\startup\sounds”. Once a sound has
been imported, create or edit the profile (UHV) file. The new file should appear in the list. Select it and
start.
The default sounds are:

1. Buzzer
2. Car Alarm
3. None
4. Police Siren
5. Siren, Fast
6. Siren, Slow
7. Something wrong
8. Train bell
HA028910 User Guide

6.6 OPERATION
6.6.1 Display Modes

When the program starts, the Home page, as set up in Configuration\Views (section 4.3.4) is displayed on
the computer screen. By click-dragging on the bottom right hand corner of the display, the page size can
be edited as required. It is thus possible for the computer to log on to, say four, different recorders and
to display their values simultaneously in different parts of the screen.
The up/down arrow keys allow the enabled display modes to be cycled through and the root menu ‘Goto
View’ menu allows a specific display mode to be chosen for the current group. The Home display page
can be returned-to at any time, by operating the Root Menu key followed by the Home key.
Note: Any changes to the recorder’s group configuration are reflected immediately at the
Host PC’s screen.
6.6.2 Alarm acknowledgement

The alarm acknowledgement/read messages functions are as described in section 3.1.4.
6.6.3 Status line

The status line at the top of the screen reflects the status of the instrument to which the recorder is con-
nected - e.g. system messages, global alarm, FTP, clock etc.
User Guide HA028910

6.6.4 Error messages

A number of error conditions may occur to prevent Bridge from ‘viewing’ the recorder. Such conditions
result in the appearance of one of the pop-up messages listed below:
NETWORK CONNECTION HAS TIMED OUT

This message appears when no connection can be established between the host pc and the instrument.
This might be caused by, for example, cable failure, the instrument’s not being powered, network hard-
ware failure etc.
UNABLE TO CONNECT TO HOST ...

Similar to the timeout message above, but with the additional cause: incorrect host address.
UNABLE TO RESOLVE HOSTNAME

Caused by an incorrect host address, or network failure.
FAILED TO AUTHENTICATE THE USER NAME ...

Caused by incorrect user name or password.
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF BRIDGE SESSIONS ALREADY RUNNING ON ...

An attempt is being made to establish more than the maximum number of Bridge sessions to the speci-
fied instrument.
THERE APPEARS TO BE NO FREE DISK SPACE ON ...

Appears if there is insufficient space on the PC hard disk.
YOU ARE ALREADY RUNNING A FULL BRIDGE SESSION ...

Appears if the pc is already connected to the recorder and running a Full Bridge session.
YOU ARE AUTHENTICATING FULL BRIDGE ...

Only Bridge ‘Lite’ is accessible to users using ‘Anonymous’.
HA028910 User Guide

7 SCREEN BUILDER
7.1 INTRODUCTION
This option allows the user to create screen layouts using recorder data, simple drawing tools, text and/
or imported image files.
24 user screens are editable directly from the operator interface. A further 100 extra screens (25 to 124)
which can be created/edited etc. only via Bridge software are also available. Once created, such screens
can be copied or moved to one or more of screens 1 to 24, thus becoming accessible at the instrument’s
operator interface.
Each enabled user screen appears as a selection key in the ‘Goto View’ menu. It is therefore recom-
mended that the number of ‘Bridge Screens’ is set to the number actually needed, in order to reduce the
number of ‘More...’ operations.
Notes:
1. User screens are not supported from a PDA.
2. As a result of the way in which the screen is refreshed, unexpected results may be obtained if
any component is superimposed upon an active component, such as a bargraph or trend dis-
play.
3. The hash (#) key may not be used in text strings.
User Guide HA028910

7.1.1 Display Access

As shown in figure 7.1.1, the user screens can be included in the display modes, described in section 3.4,
and a User screen can be selected as the ‘Home page’.
Note: Circular Trend option displays are not supported in User screens with this release of software.

Home Group 1) Group 1 Select group for
Home display
Scope Group Select Instrument or Group
These fields appear Group 1) Group 1 Select group for
display mode enable
only if Scope = 'Group'
Display Enable
Home Page Circular Trend Select Home
display mode for
Vertical Trend instrument or for
selected group
Horizontal Trend
Circular Trend
= Enabled
Vertical Bargraph
Horizontal Bargraph
Numeric Page
Bridge User Screens are accessible only from
User Screen 1 a remote PC which has Bridge software
User Screen 2 installed and running.
User Screen 3
User Screen 4
User Screen 23
User Screen 24
Bridge User Screens 0
Apply Discard
Figure 7.1 .1 Views configuration menu
7.1.2 Importing/Exporting screens

The Save/Restore screen (figure 7.1.2) includes the categories ‘Import screen’ and ‘Export screen’.
Save
Restore
See section 4.2 for
New
descriptions of other
Save/Restore functions. Text
Import Screen User Screen User Screen 1

Export Screen File Name screen
Import
Import Printer Driver
Figure 7.1.2 Save/Restore menu (Import screen)
HA028910 User Guide

7.1.2 IMPORTING/EXPORTING SCREENS (Cont.)

IMPORTING SCREENS
Touching the filename area, allows a previously created user screen to be selected either from the Flash
memory or from disk to be imported. The User Screen picklist allows the user to define which User
screen is to be ‘replaced’ by the imported file.
EXPORTING SCREENS
Allows user screens to be exported to Flash memory, or disk, The operator can assign a suitable filena-
me before exporting.
7.2 DISPLAY CREATION

The following description is an attempt to show how to create a simple screen layout. The technique
used is to define an object, then to specify its size, and where its top left corner is to be located on the
screen.
The option offers two levels of sophistication - basic and advanced. The basic system defines size, posi-
tion, fill colour etc. for components (section 7.3.1). Advanced parameters allow a more sophisticated fine-
tuning of the appearance of the components
Note: X is horizontal, increasing rightwards. Y is vertical, increasing downwards. (Top left corner is
0,0)
As implied in figure 7.2.3a, screen component position and dimensions can be specified as percentage,
absolute pixels or relative pixels. Percentage is ‘percentage of screen size’. Absolute pixels allow posi-
tion and/or dimensions to be defined as an absolute number of pixels. Relative pixels are the same as
absolute pixels, except that if the display is rescaled on, say, a pc screen, the absolute pixel object will
remain unchanged, whereas the relative pixel object will scale appropriately. Similarly, for transfer from
an XGA screen recorder to a 1/4VGA recorder or vice-versa.
7.2.1 Before starting

Before starting to lay the screen out:
1. The user must have ‘full configuration’ access permission.
2. One or more user screens must be enabled in Views Configuration (section 7.1.1)
3. A layout plan is produced, with all the required screen’s components listed with their top left corner
co-ordinates, their widths and heights, and where appropriate background and foreground colours.
User Guide HA028910

7.2.2 Screen components

Table 7.2.2 shows the selectable screen components, their default top-left corner positions, widths/
heights and draw order. All these components are described in section 7.4 below.
Draw
Component X Y Width Height
Order
Arc 0 0 10 10 10
Channel data 0 0 10 10 20
Channel horizontal bargraph 0 0 50 30 20
Channel numeric 0 0 50 20 20
Channel vertical bargraph 0 0 10 40 20
Dialogue action 0 0 10 10 10
Event Button 0 0 10 10 10
Group horizontal bargraph 0 0 50 50 30
Group horizontal trend 0 0 50 50 30
Group numeric 0 0 50 50 30
Group vertical bargraph 0 0 50 50 30
Group vertical trend 0 0 50 50 30
Image 0 0 10 10 10
Line 0 0 10 10 10
Main 0 0 100 100 1
Navigation action 0 0 10 10 10
Operator Button 0 0 10 10 10
Oval 0 0 10 10 10
Polygon 0 0 N/A N/A 10
Polyline 0 0 N/A N/A 10
Rectangle 0 0 10 10 10
Round rectangle 0 0 10 10 10
Text 0 0 0 0 20
Table 7.2.2 User screen selectable item default values
HA028910 User Guide

7.2.3 The properties page

1. Ensure that one or more user screens is enabled in views Configuration (section 7.1.1). If necessary,
call the required User screen to the display using the Root menu ‘Goto View’ menu.
2. Press the Option key to call the Option Menu.
3. Press ‘Edit Screen’ to call the ‘Component Property Editor’ page to the display. This display contains
the basic properties of the ‘Main’ (background) screen onto which the required components are to
be overlaid.
Note: This may take some seconds, according to the complexity of the configuration
4. A further press of the Option key calls the user screen Options display page.
5 Use the Option key again to return to the Component Properties display
Option Menu
Batch
Note
Edit Screen
Component Property Editor - Screen 1

Add Del Copy Paste main_1.1
Component picklist field
Identifier main_1.1
Component Add/Delete etc. Last Error
keys Page Title
X Position 0 %
Component properties Y Position 0 %

(Fields vary according to Width 100 %
component type)
Height 100 %
Background Colour -1
Draw Order -1 Dimension picklist.
Component Type Main
Select %, absolute pixels,
or relative pixels.
Goto Canvas Save Close More...
Usr Screen Options

Edit level Basic
Component info on screen
Quick entry to edit
Use Last Properties
Positioning Grid
Positioning Tip
Figure 7.2.3a Component properties and User screen options pages
KEY DESCRIPTIONS (UPPER KEYS)

Add Calls the Component selection list
Del Deletes (after confirmation) the component in the Identifier field (except the Main pane which can-
not be deleted).
Copy Used to copy the current component to the pasteboard. ‘Greyed’ for ‘Main’ as this cannot be Cop-
ied.
Paste Used to ‘paste’ the copied component to the screen. The copied item is placed 1% to the right of,
and 1% below, the source component. ‘Greyed’ until a component Copy action has taken place.
User Guide HA028910

7.2.3 THE PROPERTIES PAGE (Cont.)

KEY DESCRIPTIONS (LOWER KEYS)
Which keys appear at the bottom of the properties page depends on whether the user screen is being
viewed at the recorder’s user interface, or via Bridge software. Figure 7.2.3b show the recorder key ar-
rangement; figure 7.2.3c the Bridge keys. The key descriptions below are in alphabetical order, rather
than in left-right appearance order.
Goto Canvas Save Close More... Revert Discard New More... Copy Screen Move Screen More...
Figure 7.2.3b Recorder key arrangement
Goto Canvas Save Deploy Revert Discard Close More...
New Dispose Copy Screen Move Screen Import Export More...
Figure 7.2.3c Key arrangement via Bridge
Close Causes the screen to quit edit mode. If there are unsaved changes the user is asked for con-
firmation.
Copy Screen Copies the contents of the current screen to another specified screen, leaving the current
screen unchanged. If the destination screen is already in use, confirmation is required before
the screen is overwritten.
Discard Causes all changes made since the last ‘Save’ to be ‘undone’
Dispose This key appears only for users accessing user pages using Bridge software. When operated,
it deletes the local version of the screen, so that the display reverts to the deployed version.
Deploy This key appears only for users accessing user pages using Bridge software. It causes the
screen to be saved to the PC database, and sent to the recorder.
Export This key appears only for users accessing user pages using Bridge software. Calls a browser
screen, allowing the user to select a path name to which to Export the current screen.
Goto Canvas The Component Property Editor page disappears, and the screen is shown with the cur-
rent component highlighted. Click and Drag techniques on the highlight ‘handles’ allow the
component to be re-sized and its aspect ratio to be edited. Clicking and dragging within the
highlighted area allows the component to be moved to any position on the screen.
Selecting a component and touching the option key ‘Goto Editor’ key returns the user to the
Component Property Editor with the selected component as the current component. (Using
the Goto editor key without first highlighting a component re-opens the Component Prop-
erty Editor with ‘Main’ as the current component.)
When editing via Bridge, double clicking on a component returns to the Component Prop-
erty Editor with that component as the current component.
Import This key appears only for users accessing user pages using Bridge software. Calls a browser
screen, allowing the user to select a User Screen for import.
More... Calls next keyset.
Move Screen Moves the contents of the current screen to another specified screen, leaving the current
screen empty. If the destination screen is already in use, confirmation is required before the
screen is overwritten.
New Allows the creation of a new (blank) screen. Current screen components are deleted (after
confirmation) leaving a blank screen. Items can be retrieved using the Revert key (above)
prior to the next ‘Save’, ‘Deploy’ or ‘Goto canvas’.
Revert Causes all changes made since the last ‘Goto canvas’ operation to be ‘undone’.
Save Causes the current screen to be saved to flash or, for Bridge operation, to the PC database.
HA028910 User Guide

7.2.3 THE PROPERTIES PAGE (Cont.)

OPTIONS PAGE ITEMS
Edit level Allows Basic or Advanced edit level to be selected for further use.
Component info on screen
Enabling this box causes a component description to appear at the top left corner
of each component. This description is in the form: Identifier(X,Y)+[∂X,∂Y], where X
and Y defines the top left corner position in pixels, and ∂X and ∂Y are the width and
height of the component in pixels. The identifier is the component name as appears
in the Identifier field of the Component Property Editor page.
Quick entry to edit If selected, this function allows direct entry from the user screen being edited to the
Component Property editor page, without the options menu first appearing offering
the choice of ‘Batch’ or ‘Edit Screen’.
If Quick entry is selected, the option menu does not appear when the option key is
touched. The Batch status page can be called by touching the ‘Page Name’ area at
the top of the screen, as an alternative to the option menu. Quick entry has no effect
on screens other than user screens.
Use Last properties If selected, then all the common attributes (e.g. position, size, colours etc.) of the
most recently edited object are applied to the next component to be added.
Positioning Grid Causes a grid to appear on the ‘Goto canvas’ screen to help in component layout
Positioning tip If enabled, then hovering over the highlighted item in a ‘goto Canvas’ screen causes
the coordinates of the top left corner of the component to appear, in whatever units
(%, pixels etc.) are selected for the component. The first number gives the ‘X’ (left-
right) co-ordinate; the second gives the ‘Y’ (up-down) position.
Clicking the left mouse key within a component causes the coordinates of the top left
corner of the component to appear, in whatever units (%, pixels etc.) are selected for
the component.
Clicking the left mouse key outside a component, shows the co-ordinates of the
mouse cursor tip. To see these co-ordinates within a component, the mouse must be
click-dragged from outside the component.
User Guide HA028910

7.2.4 Screen creation example

To produce a new display screen with channels one to four inclusive each displayed as an independ-
ent bar graph across the width of the screen, with Group 1 vertical trend display below. To achieve the
above, the following items will be required:
1. Bar1: Horizontal bargraph with X = 0, Y = 0, Width = 100, Height = 10, channel = Channel 1
5. Group 1: Vertical trend group with X = 25, Y = 48, Width = 50, Height = 50. Group name to appear
above display.
PROCEDURE List of component types

Group Vertical Trend (gr_vtrend)
Group Horizontal Trend (gr_htrend)
1. Operate the ‘Add’ key to call the Compo- Group Vertical Bargraph (gr_ver_bar)
nent selection list. Group Horizontal Bargraph (gr_hor_bar)
Group Numeric (gr_num)
Channel Vertical Bargraph (ch_ver_bar)
2. Touch Channel Horizontal Bargraph to high-
Channel Horizontal Bargraph (ch_hor_bar)
light it, then press ‘Add’.
Channel Numeric (ch_num)
Channel Data (ch_data)
3. Repeat step 2 three times then Dialog Action

Navigation Action
Operator Button
4. Touch ‘Group Vertical Trend’, then ‘Add’, Add Close
then ‘Close’
5. The Component property editor page reap- Add Del Copy Paste gr_vtrend_6.1
pears with the default values for the most
Identifier gr_vtrend_6.1
recently added component displayed.
Last Error
Group Number 0) Current display group
Show Title Bar Yes
X Position 0 %
Y Position 0 %
Width 50 %
Height 50 %
Draw Order 30
6. Touch the Identifier field, then enter the Component Type Group Vertical Trend (gr_vtrend)
name ‘Group 1’ ‘Ok’ using the pop-up key- Goto Canvas Save Close More...
board which appears.

7. In Group Number, select: 1) Group 1 Add Del Copy Paste gr_vtrend_6.1
Identifier Group 1
8. Title bar is selected on (yes), as required Last Error
Group Number 1) Group 1
Show Title Bar Yes

9 Enter the X (25%) and Y (48%) co-ordinates, X Position 0 %
using the same technique as was used for Y Position 0 %
the Identifier field in step 6. The default Width 50 %
dimensions (50 x 50%) are as required. Height 50 %
Draw order 30
10 The Draw order is as required. Component Type Group Vertical Trend (gr_vtrend)
11. Press ‘Save’ Goto Canvas Save Close More...
HA028910 User Guide

7.2.4 SCREEN CREATION EXAMPLE (Cont.)
12 Touch the component picklist field, and Component Property Editor - Screen 1
highlight the topmost ch_hor_bar... field. Add Del Copy Paste ch_hor_bar_2.2
13. In the Identifier field, enter the name ‘Bar Identifier Bar 1
1’ using the pop-up keyboard. (To enter Last Error
Channel 1) Channel 1
numbers, touch the ‘Numeric’ tab under the
X Position 0 %
keyboard, then touch the required number.)
Y Position 0 %
14. The channel number is as required Width 100 %
15. Touch the width field and enter a value
Figure of Complete user screen
7.2.3d Height 10 %
100. Background Colour -1

Foreground Colour -1
16. Touch the height field and enter ‘10’ Draw Order 20
17. Press ‘Save’ Component Type Channel Horizontal Bargraph (ch_hor_bar)
18. Touch the component picklist field and se-

lect another bargraph.
19. In a similar way to that described for Bar 1 Component Property Editor - Screen 1
a) enter the identifier ‘Bar 2’ Add Del Copy Paste ch_hor_bar_4.2
b) select Channel 2 from the picklist Identifier Bar 2

Last Error
c) enter a Y value of 12 Channel 2) Channel 2
d) enter width = 100%; height = 10%. X Position 0 %
Y Position 12 %
Width 100 %
20. Similarly configure Bar 3 and Bar 4, using
Height 10 %
the appropriate Y values (24 and 36) and Background Colour -1
Channel selection (3 and 4). Forground Colour -1
Draw Order -1
Component Type Channel Horizontal Bargraph (ch_hor_bar)
21 Finally, press ‘Save’, then ‘Close’, to reveal Goto Canvas Save Close More...
the display page.
Group 1 . User Screen 1 14:01:24

Engineer 22/08/05
Batch Number:050822.010
Channel 1 0.4187 ˚C
0.0000 1.0000
0.0000 1.0000
0.0000 1.0000
0.0000 1.0000
Group 1
Channel 1 0.4187˚C
0.0000 0.2000 0.4000 0.6000 0.8000 1.0000
13:59:02
22/08/05
User Guide HA028910

7.2.4 SCREEN CREATION PROCEDURE (Cont.)

In order to provide a degree of contrast, the background colour of the ‘Main’ page can be changed to
a darker colour as shown for colour 22 in figure 7.2.3e, below. Figure 7.2.3f on the next page, shows the
relevant component property pages.
Group 1 . User Screen 1 14:01:25

Engineer 22/08/05
0.0000 1.0000
0.0000 1.0000
0.0000 1.0000
0.0000 1.0000
Group 1
Channel 1 0.4187˚C
0.0000 0.2000 0.4000 0.6000 0.8000 1.0000
13:59:02
22/08/05
Figure 7.2.3e User screen example with coloured background
HA028910 User Guide

7.2.4 SCREEN CREATION PROCEDURE (Cont.)

Add Del Copy Paste main_1.2
Identifier main_1.2
Last Error
Page Title
X Position 0 %
Y Position 0 %
Width 100 %
Height 100 %
Background Colour -1 Touch background
Draw Order 1 colour field
Component Type Main
22
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
Colour list
Figure 7.2.3f background colour selection pages
User Guide HA028910

7.3 PARAMETER DEFINITIONS

The following parameters are associated with the components listed in table 7.2.2, above. The list is
divided into basic and advanced.
7.3.1 Basic parameters

Notes:
1 Not all components have all the following parameters associated with them. The component
definitions in section 7.4 define each component’s parameters.
2 The generic term ‘solid objects’ as used in this description includes rectangles, lines, arcs,
rounded rectangles, ovals, polygons and polylines. Lines and arcs do not have a background
colour as they cannot be filled.
3. Default parameter units are in ‘percentage of screen width/height’. The picklist next to each
dimension field allows pixels to be used instead.
Parameter Description
Arc Angle For Arcs only, the number of degrees of arc drawn anti-clockwise (counter-clockwise) from
the Start Angle. Negative angles draw clockwise. See figure7.4.20a for definitions.
Arc Height For Rounded Rectangles only, this is double the vertical distance from the corner of the
(unrounded) rectangle at which the curve is to start. To draw ‘circular’ corners, this value
must be 3/2 times the Arc Width. The Arc height value must be less than half the Rectan-
gle height. Percent units are relative to the rectangle height, not the screen height.
Arc Width For Rounded Rectangles only, this is double the horizontal distance from the corner of the
(unrounded) rectangle at which the curve is to start. To draw ‘circular’ corners, this value
must be 2/3 the Arc Height. The Arc width value must be less than half the Rectangle
width. Percent units are relative to the rectangle width, not the screen width.
Background colour The fill colour of solid objects; the background colour for the main page, trend charts, text
messages etc. For Bargraphs, the colour ‘behind’ the bar.
Button Text For operator buttons, Dialogue Action and Navigation Action. Allows button text to be
entered. Event button text is defined in Event Button Configuration, described in section
4.3.7.
Channel Allows a channel to be selected for bargraph, numeric, value etc. display.
Draw edge If set to ‘Yes’, this causes the outline shape of a solid object to be drawn in the foreground
colour. If set to ‘No’, the object’s outline is not drawn.
Draw Order Allows a layer scheme to be introduced. Items with higher draw order values are overlaid
on components with lower draw order values. The Draw Order feature is included spe-
cifically to allow a dynamic element (such as a bargraph) to be placed ‘on top of’ a back-
ground, static image. A dynamic element is always drawn on top all other elements at
update time. When one or more dynamic elements are placed on top of one another, the
results are unpredictable.
Edit Parameter For operator buttons, allows the user to select the parameter type (e.g Channel N Alarm 1)
to be edited when the button is operated. The parameter number (N) is entered in the ‘N
value’ field.
Event Button For Event buttons, this allows the user to assign an Event button to the User Screen Button
to be displayed.
Feature For ‘Channel data’ only, allows the type of data to be displayed (e.g. Current value), to be
selected from a pick-list.
Fill Area If set to ‘Yes’, this causes a solid object to be filled with the background colour. If set to
‘No’, the inside of the object is transparent. If ‘draw edge’ is also set to ‘No’, the object is
invisible.
Table 7.3.1 Basic level parameters (sheet 1 of 2)
HA028910 User Guide

7.3.1 BASIC PARAMETERS (Cont.)
Parameter Description
Foreground Colour The line colour of solid objects. The bar colour of bargraphs (default = normal point col-
our). The colour of Text and of numeric values. Where applicable, this overrides channel
colour.
Group number Allows a group to be selected for group trend, bargraph and numeric displays, and for
Dialogue action buttons. Select specific group, or ‘0’ to follow current display group.
Height Height of a component, measured downwards from the component’s ‘Y position’. Nega-
tive values measure upwards.
Identifier Component name. Initially as in the Add Component list, but editable by the user.
Image File Allows a file name to be entered when importing GIF or JPG images.
Last error A text message describing the last error to occur for this component. The component
must be re-edited in order to clear the problem.
N Value See ‘Edit parameter’ above.
Page Title Allows a name for the current user screen to be entered in ‘Main’. This name appears at the
top of the screen, and in the Screen number picklist for navigation action buttons.
Screen Number For navigation action buttons, allows a screen to be selected. When the button is oper-
ated, the instrument will switch to the selected display screen.
Show Title Bar When set to ‘Yes’, group displays (e.g. Group Vertical Trend) display a title bar across the
top of the component, giving the selected group’s descriptor. Selecting ‘Show Title Bar’ to
‘No’, removes the title bar from the display
Start Angle For Arcs only, defines a start point for ‘Arc Angle’ above. See figure2.4.20a for definitions.
Text Allows a text string to be entered for display at the screen. The hash (#) key may not be
used in text messages.
Width The width of a component measured rightwards from the component’s “X position’. Nega-
tive values measure leftwards.
X points Defines the X co-ordinates for polylines and polygons. Must match the number of Y-points
for correct interpretation
X position Distance between the left edge of the screen and the left edge of the component.
Y points Defines the Y co-ordinates for polylines and polygons. Must match the number of X-points
for correct interpretation
Y position Distance between the top edge of the screen and the top edge of the component.
Table 7.3.1 Basic level parameters (sheet 2 of 2)
User Guide HA028910

7.3.2 Advanced parameters

The selection of the Advanced properties set, is carried out from the Properties Options page as de-
scribed in section 7.2.3, above. Advanced properties are in addition to the basic properties described
above, not a replacement for them.
Parameter Pick list content Description

3D effect Enable/Disable For Channel numeric display only, adds an embossed boxed sur-
round to the display. Applies only if ‘Custom’ selected as Face-
plate style.
Alarm marks colour None Allows a colour to be selected for alarm marks on trend scales.
Default is colour 0 (red).
Bargraph style Single Line... For horizontal bargraphs only. ‘Plain’ produces a bargraph with
descriptor to the left of the bar, digital value to the right of the bar,
and alarm indication to the right of the decimal value. ‘With units’
adds units after the digital value. ‘3D’ adds an embossed boxed
surround. ‘Scale’ adds a scale below the bar, with end-point values
and tick points. Scale style (described below) may be used to
modify the appearance of the scale.
Faceplate below bar Produces coloured bar above channel descriptor, digital value and
alarm indication. No scale is printed
Just bar Produces a colour bar with no textual information, or just the low
and high scale values, according to component.
Bar and scale Produces a colour bar with a scale, but no digital value or alarm
indication
Default Produces a colour bar with scale, with descriptor, digital value and
alarm indication above.
Default Vertical Bargraph Producesacolourbarwithascale
System Vertical Bargraph Produces a colour bar with a scale
Horizontal Bargraph Produces a colour bar with scale, with descriptor, digital value and
alarm indication above.
Best Fit Font Enabled/Disabled For Channel numeric only. Applies only if ‘Custom’ selected as
Faceplate style. If enabled, the display fonts for descriptor, value
and units are selected by the instrument to suit the screen scale.
The fonts will thus vary in size according to the size of the Chan-
nel Numeric display. Overridden by any settings for Value Font,
Descriptor Font or Units Font other than ‘Default’.
Channel cycle time 10 For group trend displays, allows a time period, in seconds, to be
entered for channel scroll rate. 0 = no scroll.
Colour Alarms None Used only when Colour style = ‘Channel alarms’. A semicolon-
separated list of (Colour channel) alarms, used to change the
colour of the component being configured according to alarm
status. Colours are defined in ‘Colour Backgrounds’ and ‘Colour
Foregrounds’, described below.
Colour Backgrounds None Used only if Colour style = ‘Channel Alarms’ or ‘Channel thresh-
olds’. A semicolon-separated list of background colours for the
component being configured. The number of colours entered
must match the number of alarms or threshold values as appro-
priate. Overrides any entry in ‘Background Colour’. Colours are
entered by touching each required selection in turn. The semico-
lon separators are entered automatically, in front of each selection
(apart from the first).
Table 7.3.2 Advanced edit level parameters (sheet 1 of 6)
HA028910 User Guide

7.3.2 ADVANCED PARAMETERS (Cont.)

Colour channel All channels Allows a channel to be defined to be used in percentile or quartile
filling or as a source of channel thresholds or channel alarms, as
selected in ‘Colour style’, below.
Colour foregrounds None Used only if Colour style = ‘Channel Alarms’ or ‘Channel thresh-
olds’. A semicolon-separated list of foreground colours for the
component being configured. The number of colours entered
must match the number of alarms or threshold values as appro-
priate. Overrides any entry in ‘Foreground Colour’. Colours are
entered by touching each required selection in turn. The semico-
lon separators are entered automatically, in front of each selection
(apart from the first).
Colour style Channel thresholds Allows a number of semicolon-separated values to be entered,
to act as colour change triggers for the component being con-
figured. The values are those of the source channel selected
in ‘Colour Channel’ described above. The number of threshold
values entered must match the number of colour values entered in
Colour Foregrounds and Colour Backgrounds.
Channel Alarms Allows a number of semicolon-separated values (1 to 4) to be
entered, to act as colour change triggers for the component
being configured. These values represent alarms 1 to 4 of the
source channel selected in ‘Colour Channel’ described above.
The number of alarms entered must match the number of colour
values entered in Colour Foregrounds and Colour Backgrounds.
Point is displayed in the colour of the latest active alarm. For
example: Alarms configured 1,2. Foreground colours configured
3;0 (amber and red). When alarm 1 goes active, the component
goes amber. When alarm 2 goes active the component goes red.
When alarm two clears, component reverts to Amber and so on.
Background quartile Background colour represents the value of the colour channel.
Colour 0 appears for values below 25%, colour 1 for values be-
tween 25 and 50 %, colour 3 for values between 50 and 75% and
colour 4 for values above 75 %. Foreground colour is default (-1).
Foreground quartile As background quartile but for the foreground colour. Back-
ground colour is default (-1).
Background decimal Background colour represents the value of the colour channel.
Colour 0 appears for values below 10%, colour 1 for values be-
tween 10 and 20 %, colour 2 for values between 20 and 30% and
so on up to colour 9. Foreground colour is default (-1).
Foreground decimal As background decimal but for the foreground colour. Back-
ground colour is default (-1).
Colour Thresholds None Used only when Colour style = ‘Channel thresholds’. A semicolon-
separated list of (Colour channel) values, used to change the col-
our of the component being configured according to the process
value of the point selected in ‘Colour Channel’ described above.
The number of threshold values entered must match the number
of colours defined in ‘Colour Backgrounds’ and ‘Colour Fore-
grounds’, described above.
Decimal places Default Number of decimal places in Channel data display.
User Guide HA028910


Descriptor Font Default For Channel Numeric displays only, if Faceplate Style is set to ‘Cus-
tom’, then Descriptor Font allows the Channel Descriptor font to
be selected from a picklist.
Display Alarms Enable/Disable For Channel Numeric displays only, if Faceplate Style is set to ‘Cus-
tom’, this selection determines whether or not alarm symbols are
displayed in the top right hand corner of the display.
Display Bargraph None If selected, a vertical bargraph is drawn at the right hand edge of
Horizontal Trend displays.
Display Descriptor Enable/Disable For Channel Numeric displays only, if Faceplate Style is set to
‘Custom’, this selection determines whether or not the channel
descriptor appears at the top of the display.
Display messages Enable/Disable If selected, displays a message bar for Horizontal Trend displays.
Display Pens Enable/Disable If selected, pen representations appear at the top or right edge of
a trend chart.
Display Units Enable/Disable For Channel Numeric displays only, if Faceplate Style is set to ‘Cus-
tom’, this selection determines whether or not the channel’s units
appear at the right edge of the display.
Faceplate Style Default Produces a channel display with the descriptor and alarm indica-
tors on the top line and with the digital value, and units on the bot-
tom line.
Just value Shows only the channel value
No alarms As default, but without alarm display
Value and Units Produces a larger digital display of the channel value, with units.
Single line Faceplate As default, but all on a single line.
Custom The ‘Display Descriptor’, ‘Display units’ and ‘Display Alarms’
checkbox settings, and the font selections for Value, Units and
Descriptor become active only if ‘Custom’ is selected as Faceplate
style.
Faceplates Location Dynamic, N, S, E, W (Not available for group horizontal bargraph displays.) Allows the
position of the faceplates to be ‘dynamic’ (appears at best position
for the number of channels), or to be located above (North), below
(South), to the right (East) or to the left (West) of the bargraphs.
Also allows faceplates to be turned off altogether. For group
trend displays, these faceplates are in addition to the current-
channel faceplate, which always appears above the ‘chart’ across
the full width of the display, unless turned off using Horizontal
Faceplate disable.
Font style List of fonts Picklist holds a number of sizes, plain, bold and underlined bold.
Grid Line colour Default Allows a colour to be selected for trend chart gridlines
Horizontal Alignment Left/centred/right Allows text to be justified relative to its width setting
Horizontal Faceplate Enable/Disable For vertical trend displays, allows the current-channel faceplate to
be selected on or off.
Horizontal Grid total Default Number of vertical divisions of a trend chart. If left at default uses
the value entered in Group Configuration (section 4.3.2). Any
other setting overrides Group Configuration entry.
HA028910 User Guide


Horizontal Minor Divs Default Allows the user to enter a number of minor grid divisions. If left
at default uses the value entered in Group Configuration (section
4.3.2). Any other setting overrides Group Configuration entry
Line thickness 1 Allows a pixel value to be entered for the line thickness of some
components. It should be noted that the nature of the screen
and of the drawing method means that curved lines of multi-pixel
thickness can suffer from Moiré fringe, or interference effects.
Message Colour Default Allows a colour to be selected for messages on a trend chart
Minimum Height Default For individual channels within a group horizontal bargraph display
Minimum Width Default For individual channels within a group vertical bargraph display
Minor grid line colour Default Allows a colour to be se-
lected for trend chart minor gridlines
Nominal height None 653 (503) = height of large frame (small frame) display area in pix-
els
Nominal width None 1024 (934) = width of large frame (small frame) display area in pix-
els
Notes None Allows a note to be entered for the users convenience.
Number of Columns None Lays out group displays (other than trend) in the specified number
of columns.
Number of Rows None Lays out group displays in the specified number of rows.
Numeric width None Number of characters in channel data display including decimal
point.
On visibility change Paint Background Repaint the area of the component, including any text, in its back-
ground colour. If no background colour has been defined, the
default (silver/grey)colour is used.
Paint All Repaints the component area in the screen background colour
thus rendering the component invisible.
PV Error Colour Background
Default Allows a colour to be selected for background use when the rel-
evant PV is in an error state. Overrides other selections.
PV Error Colour Foreground
Default Allows a colour to be selected for foreground use when the rel-
evant PV is in an error state. Overrides other selections
Reversed colour None Allows text to be displayed in the background colour against a
background of foreground colour.
Scale Digits None For Horizontal trend displays. Allows the chart area to be maxim-
ised, by reducing the width of the vertical bar to the right of the
chart. Scales will be presented in scientific format, or in ‘N.?’, ‘N?’
format etc. depending on the number of digits specified. The
number of digits is in addition to the decimal point.
Scale Divisions - Major None For channel bargraphs, allows the number of major scale divisions
to be specified for the channel. Overwrites the Scale Divisions-
Major setting in the Channel’s configuration.
User Guide HA028910


Scale Divisions - Minor None For channel bargraphs, allows the number of minor scale divisions
to be specified for the channel. Overwrites the Scale Divisions-
Minor setting in the Channel’s configuration.
Scale style Scale on bar.--- See the figure below for clarification. For vertical bargraphs only.
No Text Produces scale tick marks, but without values
Decimal scale For bargraphs, produces scale with 9 divisions (0, 10, 20, 30, 40,
50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100% of scale width). Zero and full scale values
printed. For Horizontal bargraphs, each scale division has 4 minor
divisions (0, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100 % of major division).
Default Uses scale information from each point’s scale configuration
Horizontal Bargraph As default for horizontal bargraphs
Horizontal Faceplate Produces faceplate display with scale end points, descriptor, dig-
ital value and alarm indicator
Vertical bargraph As default for vertical bargraphs.
The examples below are alternatives - only one style can be chosen for each group bargraph display.
800.00 800.00 100 100 100 800.00 800.00

760.00 767.00 90 90 90
733.00
720.00 80 80 80
700.00
680.00 70 70 70
667.00
640.00 633.00 60 60 60
600.00 600.00 50 50 50
560.00 567.00 40 40 40
520.00 533.00 30 30 30
500.00
480.00 20 20 20
467.00
440.00 433.00 10 10 10
400.00 400.00 0 0 0 400.00 400.00
Scale on bar Scale on bar Left Centre Right Decimal scale Vertical
Value 10 Value 12 Scale on bar Percent Bargraph
Show Alarm Marks Yes/No Allows channel scale alarm marks to be displayed (yes) or not (no).
Alarm Marks Colour, described above, allows the user to select a
colour for the alarm marks.
Time Marker colour Default Allows a colour to be selected for time/date printing on a trend
chart
Time Marker interval Default Number of horizontal grid lines between successive time markers.
Trend Padding Default For group trend only. Normal trends are 1 pixel wide. Setting a
padding value of N, adds N pixels on each side of the central pixel.
For example, a padding value of 2 would produce traces 5 pixels
wide. Applies to all channels in the group.
Units Font List of fonts For Channel Numeric displays only, if Faceplate Style is set to ‘Cus-
tom’, then Units Font allows the Channel Units font to be selected
from a picklist.
Update when Value changes Action is taken when the value associated with the component changes
Always The component is redrawn, continuously, at the display update rate.
Vertical alignment Centred/bottom/top Allows text to be positioned relative to its height setting
Value Font List of fonts For Channel Numeric displays only, if Faceplate Style is set to ‘Cus-
tom’, then Value Font allows the Channel Value font to be selected
from a picklist.
HA028910 User Guide


Vertical Grid Total Default Number of vertical divisions for trend chart. If left at default uses
the value entered in Group Configuration (section 4.3.2). Any
other setting overrides Group Configuration entry
Vertical Minor Divs Default Allows the user to enter a number of minor grid divisions. If left at
default, the value entered in Group Configuration (section 4.3.2) is
used. Any other setting overrides Group Configuration entry
Visible Alarm Default For ‘When Visible’ (below) is selected as ‘In alarm or error’ or ‘not
in alarm or error’. ‘Visible Alarm’ allows an alarm number to be
entered, for use in determining whether a component be visibile
or invisible.
Visible Channel All points For use ‘When Visible’ (below) is selected as ‘Channel Value’, ‘In
alarm or error’ or ‘not in alarm or error’. ‘Visible Channel’ allows
a point number to be selected from a pick list. See also Visible
Operator, and Visible Value, below.
Visible Operator List of operators For ‘When Visible’ (below) is selected as ‘Channel Value’. ‘Visible
Operator’ allows a comparison operator to be selected from a
picklist. The picklist contains the following items:
Greater than, Less than, Greater than or equal to, Less than or
equal to, Equal to, Not equal to. The comparison is made be-
tween the instantaneous value of the point selected in ‘Visible
Channel’ and the value entered in ‘Visible Value’ (below). For
example, when using the ‘Greater than’ operator, the component
is visible whenever the Visible Channel’s value is greater than the
Visible Value.
Visible Value Default For ‘When Visible’ (below) is selected as ‘Channel Value’. ‘Visible
Value’ allows a value to be entered to be used in the ‘Visible Op-
erator’ comparison described above.
When visible Always Component is always visible
Never Component is never visible
Channel value Component is visible or not, depending on the relationship
between the current value of a selected channel and a specified
constant value. See ‘Visible channel’, above, for details.
In alarm or error Component is visible if a specified alarm on a specified point is ac-
tive, or if the point is in an ‘Error’ state. See ‘Visible Alarm’, above,
for details.
Not in alarm or error Component is visible if a specified alarm on a specified point is
not active, or the point is not in an ‘Error’ state. See ‘Visible Alarm’,
above, for details.
User Guide HA028910

7.4 COMPONENT DEFINITIONS

This section defines all the available components listed in table 7.2.2 in terms of their parameters. The
components occur in the order in which they appear in the list.
7.4.1 Group Vertical/Horizontal Trend

This produces a display which mimics a recorder chart, for a selected group. All the functions (e.g. trend
history) described in, section 3.4. The following unique parameters (fully described in table 7.3.2) are
available for configuration:
Background colour Allows the ‘chart’ to be drawn in the selected colour.
Message Colour The colour of messages printed on the ‘Chart’.
Time Marker Colour The colour of time/date printed on the ‘Chart’.
Grid Line Colour The colour of the ‘Chart’ grid lines.
Faceplates location Allows ‘group’ faceplates to be enabled/disabled, and when enabled allows the posi-
tion of the faceplates to be defined. These ‘group’ faceplates are additional to the
current-channel faceplate which always appears above the chart, unless it has been
disabled under ‘Horizontal faceplate’ (below).
Time Marker Interval Selects the number of horizontal chart lines between successive time markers
Vertical Grid Total Total number of vertical chart divisions.
Horizontal Grid Total Total number of horizontal chart divisions.
Trend Padding Sets thickness of traces.
Channel cycle time Allows a number to be entered for the scrolling period between channels. 0 = Chan-
nel hold.
Display Messages Allows message printing to be enabled/disabled.
Display Bargraph For Horizontal trending only, allows the vertical bargraph display to be switched on
and off.
Display Pens Allows the pen icons at the edge of the chart to be switched on and off.
Horizontal Faceplate Allows the current-channel faceplate to be switched on and off.
7.4.2 Group vertical bargraph

Produces a vertical bargraph for a selected group in a format defined by ‘Bargraph Style’ and ‘Scale
style’ described in table 7.3.2. The number of rows of bars can also be defined by the user, according to
the overall size of the display, number of channels etc. The default value of zero means that the recorder
will display what it ‘believes’ to be the most ergonomic number of rows.
The recorder attempts to fit as many channel bars as possible into the width of the display. The default
minimum width of a column is 6 mm. If there are more channels than can be fitted into the display, a
scroll bar device appears at the bottom edge to allow ‘hidden’ bars to be accessed.
The recorder attempts to fit as many faceplates as possible into the height of the display. If there are
more faceplates than can be fitted into the display, a scroll bar device appears to allow ‘hidden’ face-
plates to be accessed.
7.4.3 Group horizontal bargraph

Produces a group horizontal bargraph, for a selected group, in a format defined by ‘Bargraph Style’ and
‘Scale style’ described in table 7.3.2. The number of columns can also be defined by the user, according
to the overall size of the display, minimum width, number of channels etc.
The recorder attempts to fit as many channels as possible into the height of the display, according to the
specified minimum height (default = 12mm). If there are more channels than can be fitted into the display,
a scroll bar appears at the right edge to allow ‘hidden’ channels to be accessed.
HA028910 User Guide

7.4.4 Group numeric display

This produces a display of a selected group’s numeric values, in one of a number of formats, as de-
scribed in ‘Faceplate Style’ in table 7.3.2 above. The number of columns can also be defined by the user,
according to the overall size of the display, number of channels etc. The default value of zero means that
the recorder will display what it ‘believes’ to be the most ergonomic number of columns.
The recorder attempts to fit as many channels as possible into the height of the display, according to the
specified minimum height (default = 12mm.). If there are more channels than can be fitted into the dis-
play, a scroll bar appears at the right edge to allow ‘hidden’ channels to be accessed.
7.4.5 Channel vertical/horizontal bargraph

For a specified channel, this produces a dynamic horizontal or vertical bargraph display of channel value,
in a format defined by ‘Bargraph Style’ and ‘Scale style’ described in table 7.3.2
7.4.6 Channel Numeric

For a specified channel, allows the channel faceplate to be displayed in one of a number of formats, as
described in ‘Faceplate Style’ in table 7.3.2 above.
7.4.7 Channel data

For a specified channel, allows one of : Current value, Descriptor, Units, Span low or Span high to be
selected for display.
7.4.8 Dialogue Action

This displays a pushbutton which can have one of three actions assigned to it:
1. Call the Login page.
2. Call the Batch Status page
3. Call the Operator Note dialogue box.
For Batch and Operator Note use, a Group number can be selected.
7.4.9 Navigation Action

This displays a pushbutton, the purpose of which is to call a different display screen. A Group and a
screen can both be specified, so this button provides a shortcut version of the ‘Goto group’ and ‘Goto
View’ keys of the root menu.
User Guide HA028910

7.4.10 Operator button

This displays a user pushbutton. The legend on the pushbutton, and the task it is to carry out, are de-
fined in the button configuration. If the text is too long for the width of the button, the text is truncated
(e.g. Reset Ave...). Possible tasks are as follows (assuming that the relevant options are fitted):
1 Edit the threshold (setpoint) setting for alarms 1 to 4 for point N
2 Reset Maths channel N
3 Edit Maths constant N
4 Preset Totaliser N Reset Average
5 Preset Counter N
6 Start/Stop Timer N Figure 7.4.10
Typical operator button
7 Initiate Demand Write N
8 Set output channel N to default values.
In all the above, N represents any number between 1 and the maximum number available for the relevant
type of point. (Point is an umbrella term for an input channel, a maths channel, a totaliser, etc.)
When the button is operated a ‘confirmation’ page appears allowing, for example, the value of a con-
stant to be edited before operating the ‘Apply’ button.
Notes:
1 If the point being accessed is not suitably configured, the ‘confirmation’ page is blank. For
example, if the Operator button is configured to change, say, the threshold (SP) of Alarm 2 on
Channel 6, and either Channel 6 is Configured ‘Off’, or alarm 2 is ‘Off’, then the Confirmation
page will not have a configurable area allowing the user to enter the required new value.
2. Any signing or authorizing that normally applies to the item being edited, also applies when
changes are being made by means of the Operator button.
7.4.11 Event Button

This displays a pushbutton, to be used as a source for an event. The button name, its action (latching or
unlatching), and whether or not the operation of the button needs signing or authorizing are set up in
Event Button configuration, described in section 4.3.7. The actions taken when the button is operated
are set up in Event configuration, described in section 4.3.6. Signing and Authorizing are as described in
section 4.4.2 (Management).
Ack Alarms
Figure 7.4.11 Typical Event Button
7.4.12 Image
This allows a GIF (Gif87a format only) or JPG image file to be loaded from (e.g.) an SD or Flash card. Once
this has been done, bargraphs, text messages etc. can be superimposed on the image.
Notes:
1 Only user screens 1 to 6, may have images embedded in them, and the size of each image may
not exceed 250kB (see also note 3). Does not apply to Bridge-only screens (25 to 124).
2. It is recommended that ‘abs_pxl’ be selected as width and height units, before an image is
loaded. The use of any other units significantly increases the time taken for the loading process
to complete.
3. For user screens 1 to 6, the physical size of the image may not exceed 1024 pixels wide or 768
high. Any attempt to load am image larger than this results in a ‘User Screen Image Error’ mes-
sage asking that the image size be reduced. The size constraint does not apply to Bridge-only
screens (25 to 124).
HA028910 User Guide

7.4.13 Text
If width and height are left with the default values of zero, the text will start at the specified start point
and fit in the space between there and the right edge of the screen, in a single line (left justified (ranged)
as a default). If the text string is too long, it is truncated. The text appears in the specified foreground
colour, superimposed on a ‘box’ of background colour which is the same width of the text string.
If width and height are defined, then the text will fill the defined width and any remaining text is truncat-
ed. The text appears in the foreground colour (default black), over a field of background colour (default
grey).
Advanced properties allow the text to be set to range left, range right or be centred, at the top, bottom
or centre of the field, and for the foreground and background colours to be swapped.
7.4.14 Round rectangle

Similar to a rectangle described in section 7.4.15, but offers the user the opportunity to draw rectangles
with curved corners. The horizontal and vertical curve angles are specified separately, and the aspect
ratio of the screen should be taken into account when working in percentage units.
Note: The rounded rectangle will draw incorrectly if either of the arc height/width settings are
greater than half the rectangle height/width settings.
X Position 1/2 Arc width
Y Position 1/2 Arc

height
Height
Width
Figure 7.4.14 Round rectangle definitions
7.4.15 Rectangle
This draws a rectangle on the display page. If the height and width of the rectangle are defined in the
default ‘percentage units’, then entering equal values for height and width will result in a rectangle with
the same aspect ratio as that of the screen, not a square as might be expected. Because the screen
height is approximately 2/3 the width, the rectangle height should be 3/2 the rectangle width to pro-
duce a square. (The actual height/width ratio is 535/800 = 0.669 for large frame units or 214/320 = 0.669
for small frame units).
Using pixels as the measuring units obviates this problem as pixels are square.
User Guide HA028910

7.4.16 Polyline- series of points

Similar to closed polygons, described in section 7.4.17 below, but the first and last points are not auto-
matically joined, and the drawn item cannot be filled and the line width cannot be specified - it is always
one pixel.
Note: When working in percentage units, it should be remembered that vertical percentage units are only
2/3 the size of horizontal percentage units - this affecting the appearance of the drawn item.
Example: To draw an (old fashioned) electronic resistor icon (Units = Absolute pixels)
X position = 400, Y position = 236,
Foreground colour = 0
X points = 0,10,15,25,35,45,55,65,75,85,90,100
Y points = 0,0,-10,10,-10,10,-10,10,-10,10,0,0
Press ‘Apply’, then ‘Close’ to produce a red ‘sawtooth’ outline, as depicted in figure 7.4.16 below.
Engineer Group 1 • User Screen 1 14:20:50

Batch Number:050822.010 22/08/05
Point1 Point 12
X=0; y=0 X=100; y=0
Figure 7.4.16 Polyline example
HA028910 User Guide

7.4.17 Polygon - closed area

This allows a number of pairs of points to be entered, which, if valid, will then be joined by straight lines.
The first and last points are automatically joined, by the recorder. The shape, drawn in the specified fore-
ground colour, with the specified line width, can be filled with the specified background colour.
Note: When working in percentage units, it should be remembered that vertical percentage units
are only 2/3 the size of horizontal percentage units - this affecting the appearance of the drawn item
Example: To draw a left pointing solid arrow, positioned with its point at the centre of the screen.
Access the component page as described in section 7.2.3, select ‘polygon - closed area’ and press Ok. In
the properties page, carry out the following configuration (units = %):
X position = 50, Y position = 50,
Background colour = 22, Foreground colour = 30
Draw edge = Yes, Fill area = Yes
X points = 0,10,10,30,30,10,10
Y points = 0, -15, -5, -5, 5, 5, 15
Press Apply, then Close to produce a dark green arrow, with pale green outline, as depicted in figure
7.4.17 below.
Group 1 • User Screen 1 14:22:15

Engineer 22/08/05
Point 2
X=10; y=-15
Point 3
X=10; y=-5 Point 4
X=30; y=-5
Point 1
X= 0; y= 0
Point 5
Point 6 X=30; y= 5
X=10; y= 5
Point 7
X=10; y= 15
Figure 7.4.17 Polygon example
User Guide HA028910

7.4.18 Oval
Similar to an arc (section 7.4.20) with an arc angle of 360 degrees, but arcs cannot be filled,
If the height and width of the oval are defined in the default ‘percentage units’, then entering equal values
for height and width will result in an oval with the same aspect ratio as that of the screen, not a circle as
might be expected. Because the screen height is approximately 2/3 the width, the oval height should
be 3/2 its width to produce a circle. (The actual height/width ratio = 0.669).
7.4.19 Line
This causes a straight line of user-definable thickness to be drawn between the points (X position; Y posi-
tion) and (X position + width; Y position + height)
Notes:
1 Y increases downwards; X increases rightwards
2 Height = 2/3 width if measuring in percent
X position;
Y position
Height
Width
X position + width;
Y position + height
Figure 7.4.19a Line definitions
EXAMPLE
To draw an approximation to a St.Andrew’s cross (saltire):
Access the component property editor page as described in section 7.2.3:
Select Advanced Edit level, then in the component property editor page
1. touch the ‘Add’ key at the top of the screen. In the ‘List of Component types’ page, press ‘Line’, ‘Add’,
‘Line’, ‘Add’, then ‘Close’
2. In ‘main_1.2’ - set background colour to 6
4. In ‘line_2.3’ Set Width to 100, Height to 100. Set Foreground colour to 55 and Line thickness to 35
5. In ‘line_3.4’ - Set X position to 100, Width to -100, Height to 100. Set Foreground colour to 55 and
Line thickness to 35
6. Press ‘Save’, then ‘Close’.
Note: because of the thickness of the lines takes the corners beyond the display area, an error
message may appear in the ‘Last error’ field for the lines : position maybe out of bounds. This
should not prevent the screen being drawn correctly.
Figure 7.4.19b Example
HA028910 User Guide

7.4.20 Arc
This causes a curved line of user-definable thickness to be drawn anti-clockwise between start angle
and (start angle + arc angle). The origin (‘centre’) of the arc is (X position + 1/2 Width) ; (Y position + 1/2
Height). Arcs cannot be filled.
Notes:
1 Angle increases anticlockwise
2 Height = 2/3 width if measuring in percent
3 Arcs cannot be filled - the shading in the figure is included for clarity only
X/Y Position
Arc end point
1/2 Height
Arc Start point
= Start angle
= Arc angle
1/2 Width
Figure 7.4.20a Arc dimension definitions
EXAMPLE
An arc definition of:
X position = 50%, Y position = 50%, Width = 50%, Height = 50%, Start angle = 0; Arc angle 270 would
produce the curve depicted in figure 7.4.20b, below.
Group 1 • User Screen 1 14:24:31
Engineer 22/08/05
X position;
y position Width
Height
Start of arc
End of arc
Figure 7.4.20b Sample arc
User Guide HA028910

7.5 MEASURING UNIT COMPARISONS

Note: All the following figures are approximate.
7.5.1 XGA screen

The physical display screen area available for user screens is approximately 245 mm across and 164 mm
high. This area can be divided into a 100 x 100 array for percentage measurement or into a pixel array,
1024 across by 700 vertically.
Thus, horizontally,
10 mm = 4% = 42 pixels
or 1% = 2.45 mm = 10.24 pixels
or 10 pixels = 2.45 mm
and Vertically,
10 mm = 6% = 43 pixels
or 1% = 1.64 mm = 7 pixels
Centre of screen is given by X = 50%; Y = 50% or by X = 512 pixels; Y = 350 pixels
7.5.2 QVGA screen

The physical display screen area available for user screens is approximately 100 mm across and 72 mm
high. This area can be divided into a 100 x 100 array for percentage measurement or into a pixel array,
320 across by 210 vertically.
Thus, horizontally,
10 mm = 10% = 32 pixels
or 1% = 1 mm = 3.2 pixels
and Vertically,
10 mm = 13% = 29 pixels
or 1% = 0.72 mm = 2.4 pixels
Centre of screen is given by X = 50%; Y = 50% or by X = 160 pixels; Y = 105 pixels
7.6 ERROR CODES

Error codes 1 to F may appear at the top left corner of the screen. The following codes are currently
implemented, and if more than one occurs at the same time, the code numbers are added. For example,
Error code 6 would mean that codes 4 and 2 had both occurred.
1 Component error e.g. image does not exist.
2 Error loading the Property.uhr file
4 Error loading the Style.uhr file
8 Error loading the usrscrn.uhu file
HA028910 User Guide

8 MODBUS TCP SLAVE COMMS
8.1 INSTALLATION
The installation of the Modbus link consists of connecting a standard Ethernet cable between the RJ45
connector at the rear of the recorder either:
1. Directly to a host computer, using a crossover cable
2. To a host computer via a network, using a ‘straight through’ cable.
8.2 INTRODUCTION
MODBUS TCP allows one or more recorders to act as ‘slave’ devices to one or more host computers con-
nected via the RJ45 connector at the rear of the recorder. Each recorder must have a unique Internet
Protocol (IP) address, set up as described in Section 4.5.
MODBUS TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is a variant of the MODBUS family of communications
protocols intended for supervision and control of automated equipment specifically covering the use of
MODBUS messaging in an intranet or internet environment, using TCP/IP protocols. Much of the MOD-
BUS detail in this manual is derived from the document openmbus.doc, available at http://www.modbus.
org/default.htm The above mentioned document also includes implementation guidelines for users.
Note: The Modbus protocol allows a maximum of 255 data bytes to be read from or written to in
one transaction. For this reason, the maximum number of standard (16 bit) registers that can be
accessed in one transaction is 255/2 = 127 and the maximum number of IEEE (32-bit) registers is
127/2 = 63.
8.2.1 Function Codes

MODBUS function codes 3, 4, 6, 8 and 16, defined in table 8.2.1a below, are supported and are fully de-
scribed in section 8.5, below.
Code MODBUS definition Description

Reads the binary contents of holding registers.
03 Read holding registers
In this implementation, code 03 is identical with code 04.
Reads the binary contents of input registers. In this
04 Read input registers implementation, code 04 is identical with code 03.
06 Pre-set single register Writes a single value to a single register.
08 Diagnostics Obtains communications diagnostics information
16 Pre-set multiple Registers Writes values to multiple holding registers
Table 8.2.1a MODBUS Function code definition
DIAGNOSTIC CODES
Function code 08, subfunction 00 (Return query data) echoes the query (Loop back).
User Guide HA028910

8.2.1 FUNCTION CODES (Cont.)

EXCEPTION CODES
MODBUS TCP provides reserved codes used for exceptions. These codes provide error information
relating to failed requests. Exceptions are signalled by hex 80 being added to the function code of the
request, followed by one of the codes listed in table 8.2.1b, below.
Code
Dec Hex MODBUS definition Description (see Modbus specification for full details)
01 01 Illegal Function An invalid function code was received

02 02 Illegal Data Address An invalid data address was received
03 03 Illegal Data Value An invalid data value was received
04 04 Slave Device Failure An unrecoverable error occurred in the recorder
09 09 Illegal Sub Function An invalid sub function was received.
10 0A Gateway path unavailable Gateway misconfigured or overloaded.

Gateway target device
11 0B Device not present on the network
failed to respond
Table 8.2.1b Exception codes
8.2.2 Data types

The following data types are supported:
1 2’s complement signed 16-bit analogue values with implied decimal point. The decimal point posi-
tion must be configured in both the recorder and the host computer.
2 2’s complement, 16, 32 and 64 bit signed integers.
3 16-bit unsigned integer values.
4 32 bit IEEE Floating point values.
5 Strings of limited size, can be transferred across Modbus TCP in ASCII format using a single non-mul-
tiplexed set of consecutive registers.
DATA ENCODING
MODBUS uses what is called a ‘Big endian’ representation for addresses and data items. This means that when
a numerical quantity larger than a single byte is transmitted, the most significant byte is sent first. For example
a 32-bit hex value of 12345678 would be transmitted as 12, followed by 34, followed by 56 and finally 78.
8.2.3 Invalid multiple register writes

When a recorder receives a multi-register write request, it is possible that one or more requests will be re-
jected. Under such a circumstance, the recorder will accept all valid write requests and ignore any invalid
writes. No error response is produced.
8.2.4 Security
The recorder has a local file in which are stored all users’ login information, as set up in Security/Access
configuration (section 4.4) it must then supply the correct Username and Password. Should a host fail to
login after three attempts, the recorder will terminate the connection.
This MODBUS security function can be enabled/disabled in the Operator/Config/Instrument menu (sec-
tion 4.3.1).
Note: Modbus Security must be disabled in order for Modbus communications to be established.
Once the Master is communicating with the Slave, Modbus security can be re-enabled, providing
that the master has the correct remote user name and password data for the relevant slave. If this
information is missing, all read/write requests will be ignored by the slave.
HA028910 User Guide

8.2.4 SECURITY (Cont.)

The following C++ code is intended for use in creating a suitable 16-bit encrypted register using an IP ad-
dress and password:
/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------
FUNCTION : MB_Driver::encrypt
DESCRIPTION : Create an encrypted value from a password string
ARGUMENTS : pswd : Pointer to password from network file
eKey : Pointer to eKey, usually I.P. address (must be 4 bytes)
RETURN : result : A 16 bit value representing the encryption result
NOTES : None
---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
Ushort MB_Driver::encrypt(cchar *pswd, cchar *ipAddr)
{
Uchar key1;
Uchar key2;
Ushort dataLen;
Uchar ibyte;
Ushort byteResult = 0;
Uchar *encryptedData = NULL;
Uchar eKeys[4];
Ulong ipAddress;
/* Convert ip address to an unsigned long value so that we can manipulate
each of the 4 bytes, to be used as our private keys */
ipAddress = inet_addr(ipAddr);
// Now split the bytes up by copying the IP address into a byte array
memcpy(eKeys, &ipAddress, sizeof(Ulong));
// From the 4 bytes of the IP address create two exclusive keys
key1 = eKeys[0] ^ eKeys[3];
key2 = eKeys[1] ^ eKeys[2];
// Calculate the length of the string to be encrypted
dataLen = strlen(pswd);
// Create some memory to store the new encrypted password
encryptedData = (Uchar*) malloc(sizeof(Uchar)*dataLen);
/* Copy the unencrypted password into a byte array, so we can use the
character code as each byte value */
memcpy(encryptedData, pswd, dataLen);
/* Perform EXOR comparison between keys and raw data.
Perform the operation on each byte using alternate key values
starting at byte 1 with key 1 */
for(ibyte=0; ibyte < dataLen;)
{
// EXOR with the key1
encryptedData[ibyte++] ^= key1;
(Continued)
User Guide HA028910


// Compare the next byte with key2
if(ibyte < dataLen)
{
encryptedData[ibyte++] ^= key2;
}
}
/* Now EXOR each byte to the next byte until no more are available
if all goes well the last byte in the array should never change */
for(ibyte=0; ibyte < (dataLen-1); ibyte++)
{
encryptedData[ibyte] = (encryptedData[ibyte] ^ encryptedData[ibyte+1]);
}
// Now add all the bytes together to get a 16 bit value result
for(ibyte=0; ibyte < dataLen; ibyte++)
{
byteResult += encryptedData[ibyte];
}
// Return the encrypted string as a 16 bit value
return(byteResult);
}
Notes:
1. If login is accepted, a standard response is sent to the master
2 If three invalid logins are sent, by the master, then an ‘illegal address’ exception code (2) is sent
to the master.
HA028910 User Guide


TO SEND A LOGIN REQUEST
Request
Figure 8.2.4a shows data transmission sequence for sending a login request to a recorder with Modbus
address 1, using the Ethernet network connection. Figure 8.2.4b is the same message for use with serial
communications.
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11
00 00 00 00 00 13 01 10 CC 30 00 06
Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder MODBUS Start Start No. of regis- No. of reg-
identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol- Modbus function address address low ters high isters low
lowing (hex) address code (hex) high
0C 45 6E 67 69 6E 65 65 72 00 HH HH
Byte count ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII Null Password Password
E (Hex) n (Hex) g (Hex) i (Hex) n (Hex) e (Hex) e (Hex) r (Hex) High Low
Byte Byte
User name (as configured in instrument. Must be followed by null character (Hex 00)
Byte 24
00 Null character inserted only, if
otherwise, the Byte count in
Null
Byte 12 would be Odd.
Figure 8.2.4a Login request via Ethernet (Modbus TCP)
00 10 CC 30 00 06 0C 45 6E 67 69 6E
Slave MODBUS Start Start No. of regis- No. of reg- Byte count ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII
identifier function address address low ters high isters low (excluding E (Hex) n (Hex) g (Hex) i (Hex) n (Hex)
high CRC)
code (hex)
Byte 12 Byte 13 Byte 14 Byte 15 Byte 16 Byte 17 Byte 18 Byte 19 Byte 20

65 65 72 00 HH HH 00 HH HH
ASCII ASCII ASCII Null Password Password Null CRC low CRC high
e (Hex) e (Hex) r (Hex) High Low Byte Byte
Byte Byte
Null character inserted only if

without it, the Byte count in
Byte 6 would be Odd.
Figure 8.2.4b Login Request using a serial transmission line.
Notes:
1 The high and low password bytes are entered using the result of the encryption program
above. If the password is blank, both High and Low Bytes must be 00 (null).
2 For successful login, the ‘Connect from remote’ item must be enabled (ref. ‘Access levels in sec-
tion 4.4.1).
User Guide HA028910


TO SEND A LOGIN REQUEST (Cont.)
Response
Figures 8.2.4c and 8.2.4d show response messages for successful and non-successful login attempts.
00 00 00 00 00 06 01 10 CC 30 00 05
Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder Modbus Start Start No. of regis-No. of regis-
identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol- Modbus function Address Address ters high ters low
lowing (hex) address code (hex) high low
Figure 8.2.4c Response to a successful login attempt
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8

00 00 00 00 00 04 01 90 02
Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder Modbus Exception
identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol- Modbus function code
lowing (hex) address code+ MSB
set (hex)
Figure 8.2.4d Response after an unsuccessful login attempt
Note: MSB = Most Significant Bit
HA028910 User Guide

8.2.5 Text messages

In order to increase efficiency, it is possible to set the system to transmit screen messages (e.g. alarm on/
off) only when a new message occurs. This is done by continuously polling the ‘Text Length’ parameter
(in group data - section 8.4.4) to see if its value is non-zero. (This parameter contains the character count
of the latest message to occur since the last poll.)
If ‘text length’ is non-zero, the host must access the parameter ‘Read Text’ (also in group data) to read the
message, and it must also reset the ‘Text Length’ parameter to zero. This causes the recorder to look for
any further messages in the queue, and if there are, it will load the latest message into the area accessed
by ‘Read Data’, and then set ‘Text Length’ to the length of the new message. If the host fails to set Text
Length to zero after reading a message, no new messages will be read.
If ‘Text Length’ is zero, no new messages have been generated since the last poll.
LONG MESSAGES
All messages are terminated with a null character.
Messages of up to 60 characters (including the time and date and the terminating ‘null’) can be read by
the master device in a single transaction.
If the message contains more than 60 characters, one or more continuation messages of up to 60 char-
acters each are placed in ‘Read Text’, as soon as the previous message has been confirmed as ‘read’. The
master can continue to read all these messages, until it detects a ‘null’ character. Intelligent masters can
then re-assemble the characters into a single message. Non-intelligent masters can treat the continua-
tion messages as separate messages sent at the same time as the first message.
Notes:
1. If any of the messages is of less than 60 characters, the unused part of message is filled with
‘null’ characters (example 1). Thus, by reading character 60, the master can determine either
that this is the last message (character 60 = ‘null’), or that there is at least one message to follow
(character 60 is not ‘null’).
2. Continuation messages cannot contain only null characters. For this reason, if the message it-
self (i.e. excluding final ‘null’ characters) is exactly 60 characters long (or a multiple of 60 charac-
ters long) then the final extension message contains a space, followed by 59 ‘nulls’ (Example 2).
3. Time and date appear only in the main message, not the continuation message(s).
Example 1
Message of less than 60 characters

Character no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
English message 04/ 04/ 02 16: 31: 05 Bat c h s t opp e d be c a us e of be l t f ai l ur e

ASCII (Hex) 30 34 2F 30 34 2F 30 32 20 31 36 3A 33 31 3A 30 35 20 42 61 74 63 68 20 73 74 6F 70 70 65 64 20 62 65 63 61 75 73 65 20 6F 66 20 62 65 6C 74 20 66 61 69 6C 75 72 65 00 00 00 00 00
Example 2
Message of exactly 60 characters

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Message 04/ 04/ 02 16: 31: 05 Bat ch s t opp e d be c a us e of be l t f ai l ur e BT 01

30 34 2F 30 34 2F 30 32 20 31 36 3A 33 31 3A 30 35 20 42 61 74 63 68 20 73 74 6F 70 70 65 64 20 62 65 63 61 75 73 65 20 6F 66 20 62 65 6C 74 20 66 61 69 6C 75 72 65 20 42 54 30 31
Space = hex 20; Null = 00

Extension 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
message
(Space + 59 null
characters) 20 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
User Guide HA028910

8.2.5 TEXT MESSAGES (Cont.)

Example 3
Message of more than 60 but less than 120 characters
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Message 04/ 04/ 02 16: 31: 05 Bat c h s t opp e d be c a us e of be l t f ai l ur e on l

30 34 2F 30 34 2F 30 32 20 31 36 3A 33 31 3A 30 35 20 42 61 74 63 68 20 73 74 6F 70 70 65 64 20 62 65 63 61 75 73 65 20 6F 66 20 62 65 6C 74 20 66 61 69 6C 75 72 65 20 6F 6E 20 6C
Space = hex 20; Null = 00

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Extension i ne 3 s e c t i on 1 7
message
69 6E 65 20 33 20 73 65 63 74 69 6F 6E 20 31 37 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
HA028910 User Guide

8.3 ADDRESS MAP

Figure 8.3 shows the range of addresses allocated to various recorder functions. Each of these functions
is described in detail in later sections.
Addresses FCBF to FD07:

FFFF
EtherNet/IP
Addresses FFF5 to FFFF: Not used / IP
FFF5 et Input channels 76 to 100
16
FFF4
Addresses FFF0 to FFF4: Permanent ID table e rN io n run-time data
FFF0 h t
FFEF
Addresses FD08 to FFEF: Spare Et Op
FD08
FD07
Addresses FC47 to FCBE: Counters
FCBF
Addresses FCBF to FD07: EtherNet/IP Addresses FB7F to FC46: Totalisers
FCBE Addresses F8C3 to FCBE: Run-time data 32-bit
F8C3 IEEE Region (32-bit data access area) run-time Addresses F9EF to FB7E: Maths
F8C2
data
Addresses F8C3 to F9EE:
Addresses D4E7 to F8C2: Point configuration data Input channels
IEEE Region (32-bit data access area)
Addresses F48B to F8C2: Counters
D4E7
D4E6
32-bit
D0E6 Addresses D0E6 to D4E6: R/W Indirection table config. Addresses ED83 to F48A: Totalisers
D0E5
CCE5 Addresses CCE5 to D0E5: R/O Indirection table data
CCE4
CC26 Addresses CC26 to CCE4: Feature ID table
CC25
Addresses DF73 to ED82: Maths
Addresses A4D6 to CC25:
Group data Addresses D4E7 to DF72:

Input channels
A4D6
A4D5
A1D9 Addresses A1D9 to A4D5: Point run-time data Addresses A47C to A4D5: Counters
A1D8
Point
run-time Addresses A3E6 to A47B: Totalisers
data
Addresses A2BA to A3E5: Maths
Addresses A1D9 to A2B9:

Input channels
Addresses 007B to A1D8: Point configuration data

Addresses 8EDD to A1D8: Counters
Input channels = points 1 to 75
Math channels = points 76 to 175
Point
Totalisers = points 176 to 225
config.
Counters = points 226 to 255 Addresses 6F39 to 8EDC: Totalisers
data
Addresses 2FF1 to 6F38: Maths
007B Addresses 007B to 2FF0:

007A
Addresses 0001 to 007A: Instrument data Input channels
0001
0000
Address 0000: Not used
Figure 8.3 Address map representation
Notes:
1 All addresses in hexadecimal
2 Areas represent relative sizes, but are not to scale
User Guide HA028910

8.3 ADDRESS MAP (Cont.)

The contents of each group can be determined by reading the relevant register number, as shown in sec-
tion 8.4.4, below. The table below is a decoder for the results.
For example, if a group has channels 1 to 6, maths channel 1 and totaliser three fitted, the results would be:
Register 1 = 63 (32 + 16 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1) (channels 1 to 6)
Register 5 = 2048 (maths channel 1)
Register 12 = 2 (Totaliser 1)
All other register values = 0
Value if
16384
32768
1024
2048
4096
8192
128
256
512
bit set
16
32
64
1
8
Bit number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
2 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
3 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
4 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
5 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5
6 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21
Register Number
11 M86 M87 M88 M89 M90 M91 M92 M93 M94 M95 M96 M97 M98 M99 M100 T1
12 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16 T17
15 T50 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15
16 C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 C23 C24 C25 C26 C27 C28 C29 C30
Table 8.3 ‘Channels in group’ interpretation
HA028910 User Guide

8.4 ADDRESS ALLOCATION

This section consists of a number of tables showing how the address space within the memory map is allo-
cated. For full details of configuration parameters, refer to section 4. For convenience, the word ‘channel’ is
used as an umbrella term for measuring points in general (i.e. input channels, maths channels, totalisers etc.).
The following ‘types’ are used in the tables.

1 Uint16 16 bit unsigned integer.
4 Scaled Double precision floating point value scaled to represent single precision 16-bit integer
between – 32,767 and + 32,767.
5 Boolean Represented as a single 16 bit integer.
6 Enum Enumeration value - represented by a single 16 bit character.
7 16, 32 and 64-bit 2’s complement signed integers.
Note: When reading a Process Variable (PV) values, as ‘scaled’ integers the position of the decimal
point is set by the ‘Max. Decimal Digits’ parameter in the relevant Channel’s Configuration. Only if
the resulting value can be represented within 16 bit resolution (±32767), will the value be transmit-
ted accurately. For example, a value of 12.3456 needs more than 16-bit resolution, and the trans-
mitted value would be the maximum value of 32767 (over range). Reducing the number of decimal
places to three, for example (12.345) allows the value to be encoded as a 16-bit value which can be
transmitted accurately.
8.4.1 Instrument data

Instrument type Instrument type number Uint16 Read only 0001 (1) 1
Instrument descriptor Instrument descriptor (up to 20 characters) String_20 Read only 0002 (2) 10
Reserved Not used 000C (12) 10
Instrument status Uint16 Read only 0016 (22) 1
Bit 0: Not used (value always 0) Read only
Bit 3: 0 = SD/Flash card inserted, 1 = Missing Read only
Bit 4: 0 = SD/Flash card not full, 1 = Full Read only
Bit 6 Not used (value always 0) Read only
Bit 7 Not used (value always 0) Read only
Bit 9: 0 = No channel failures, 1 = channel failure Read only
Bits 10 to 15: Not used (value always 0) Read only
Config counter Counts configuration changes. Powers up at zero, Uint16 Read only 0017 (23) 1
and is reset to zero at brown-out
Time Current instrument time (UTC format) Double Read only 0018 (24) 4
Date Current instrument date Double Read only 001C (28) 4
Global alarm acknowledge ‘1’ acknowledges all alarms. Other values: no effect Uint16 Write only 0020 (32) 1
Spare Not used 0021 (33) 74
Product version Product version. Returns value HHHH (CNOMO*) Uint 16 Read only 006B (107) 1
(HHHH = version number in hex. E.G. 0401 = version 4.01)
Serial number Returns ‘Instrument Number’ (see Section 4.5) in decimal. Uint32 Read only 006C (108) 2
Not used 006E (110) 11
Company ID Company ID. Returns value hex 0500 (CNOMO*) Uint 16 Read only 0079 (121) 1
Product ID Product ID. Returns model number in hex (CNOMO*) Uint 16 Read only 007A (122) 1
* CNOMO = Comité de normalisation des moyens de production.
User Guide HA028910

Note: A/B Switching:

8.4.2 Channel configuration data B values are not accessible via modbus
for this software version. Span, Zone,
The following tables give hex addresses for channels 1 to 12, inclusive. Colour etc. are therefore all setting A
Generally: channel N parameter address = channel 1 parameter address + 162 (N-1) (decimal).
CHANNEL 1
Ch1 Span high Upper span value (display full scale) Scaled Read only 007B (123) 1
Ch1 Span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Scaled Read only 007C (124) 1
Ch1 Zone high Zone high value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 007D (125) 1
Ch1 Zone low Zone low value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 007E (126) 1
Ch1 PV type Input type Enum Read only 007F (127) 1
Ch1 Decimal places Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16 Read only 0080 (128) 1
Ch1 Colour Channel colour (0 to 55) (See Annex B for RGB definitions) Enum Read only 0081 (129) 1
Ch1 Units Units string (up to five characters) String_5 Read only 0082 (130) 3
Spare 0085 (133) 2
Ch1 Open string Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 0087 (135) 4
Spare 008B (139) 4
Ch1 Close string Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 008F (143) 4
Spare 0093 (147) 4
Ch1 Descriptor Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters) String_20 Read only 0097 (151) 10
Spare 00A1 (161) 10
Ch1 No of alarms Number of alarms on this channel Uint16 Read only 00AB (171) 1
Ch1 PV format Enum Read only 00AC (172) 1
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare 00AD (173) 60
Ch1 Alarm 1 enable Alarm 1 enable Enum Read only 00E9 (233) 1
0 = Off 2 = Latched
Ch1 Alarm 1 type Alarm 1 type Enum Read only 00EA (234) 1
Ch1 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 00EB (235) 1
Spare 00EC (236) 10
Ch1 Alarm 2 enable Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 00F6 (246) 1
Ch1 Alarm 2 type Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 00F7 (247) 1
Ch1 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 00F8 (248) 1
Spare 00F9 (249) 10
Ch1 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 0105 (261) 1
Spare 0106 (262) 10
Spare 0113 (275) 10
Notes
1. For maths, totalisers and counters, see the relevant option description.
2. If an alarm’s Setpoint Source (section 4.3.3) is set to anything other than ‘Constant’ the value
returned will be the previously configured constant value.
HA028910 User Guide

8.4.2 CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA (Cont.)

CHANNEL 2

Ch2 Span high Upper span value (display full scale) Scaled Read only 011D (285) 1
Ch2 Span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Scaled Read only 011E (286) 1
Ch2 Zone high Zone high value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 011F (287) 1
Ch2 Zone low Zone low value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 0120 (288) 1
Ch2 PV type Input type Enum Read only 0121 (289) 1
Spare 0127 (295) 2
Spare 012D (301) 4
Spare 0135 (309) 4
Spare 0143 (323) 10
Ch2 No of alarms Number of alarms on this channel (0 to 2) Uint16 Read only 014D (333) 1
Ch2 PV format Enum Read only 014E (334) 1
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare 014F (335) 60
Ch2 Alarm 1 enable Alarm 1 enable Enum Read only 018B (395) 1
0 = Off 2 = Latched
Ch2 Alarm 1 type Alarm 1 type Enum Read only 018C (396) 1
Ch2 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 018D (397) 1
Spare 018E (398) 10
Ch2 Alarm 2 enable Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable, above) Enum Read only 0198 (408) 1
Ch2 Alarm 2 type Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type, above) Enum Read only 0199 (409) 1
Ch2 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 019A (410) 1
Spare 019B (411) 10
Ch2 Alarm 3 enable Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 01A5 (421) 1
Ch2 Alarm 3 type Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 01A6 (422) 1
Ch2 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 01A7 (423) 1
Spare 01A8 (424) 10
Ch2 Alarm 4 enable Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 01B2 (434) 1
Ch2 Alarm 4 type Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 01B3 (435) 1
Ch2 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 01B4 (436) 1
Spare 01B5 (437) 10
Notes
User Guide HA028910


CHANNEL 3

Ch3 Span high Upper span value (display full scale) Scaled Read only 01BF (447) 1
Ch3 Span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Scaled Read only 01C0 (448) 1
Ch3 Zone high Zone high value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 01C1 (449) 1
Ch3 Zone low Zone low value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 01C2 (450) 1
Ch3 PV type Input type Enum Read only 01C3 (451) 1
Ch3 Decimal places Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16 Read only 01C4 (452) 1
Ch3 Colour Channel colour (0 to 55) (See Annex B for RGB definitions) Enum Read only 01C5 (453) 1
Ch3 Units Units string (up to five characters) String_5 Read only 01C6 (454) 3
Spare 01C9 (457) 2
Ch3 Open string Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 01CB (459) 4
Spare 01CF (463) 4
Ch3 Close string Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 01D3 (467) 4
Spare 01D7 (471) 4
Ch3 Descriptor Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters) String_20 Read only 01DB (475) 10
Spare 01E5 (485) 10
Ch3 No of alarms Number of alarms on this channel (0 to 2) Uint16 Read only 01EF (495) 1
Ch3 PV format Enum Read only 01F0 (496) 1
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare 01F1 (497) 60
Ch3 Alarm 1 enable Alarm 1 enable Enum Read only 022D (557) 1
0 = Off 2 = Latched
Ch3 Alarm 1 type Alarm 1 type Enum Read only 022E (558) 1
Ch3 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 022F (559) 1
Spare 0230 (560) 10
Ch3 Alarm 2 enable Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable, above) Enum Read only 023A (570) 1
Ch3 Alarm 2 type Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type, above) Enum Read only 023B (571) 1
Ch3 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 023C (572) 1
Spare 023D (573) 10
Spare 024A (586) 10
Spare 0257 (599) 10
Notes
HA028910 User Guide


CHANNEL 4

Ch4 Span high Upper span value (display full scale) Scaled Read only 0261 (609) 1
Ch4 Span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Scaled Read only 0262 (610) 1
Ch4 Zone high Zone high value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 0263 (611) 1
Spare 026B (619) 2
Ch4 Open string Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 026D (621) 4
Spare 0271 (625) 4
Spare 0279 (633) 4
Spare 0287 (647) 10
Ch4 No of alarms Number of alarms on this channel (0 to 2) Uint16 Read only 0291 (657) 1
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare 0293 (659) 60
Ch4 Alarm 1 enable Alarm 1 enable Enum Read only 02CF (719) 1
0 = Off 2 = Latched
Ch4 Alarm 1 type Alarm 1 type Enum Read only 02DO (720) 1
Ch4 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 02D1 (721) 1
Spare 02D2 (722) 10
Ch4 Alarm 2 enable Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable, above) Enum Read only 02DC (732) 1
Ch4 Alarm 2 type Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type, above) Enum Read only 02DD (733) 1
Ch4 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 02DE (734) 1
Spare 02DF (735) 10
Ch4 Alarm 3 enable Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 02E9 (745) 1
Ch4 Alarm 3 type Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 02EA (746) 1
Spare 02EC (748) 10
Spare 02F9 (761) 10
Notes
User Guide HA028910


CHANNEL 5

Ch5 Units Units string (up to five characters) String_5 Read only 030A (778) 3
Spare 030D (781) 2
Ch5 Open string Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 030F (783) 4
Spare 0313 (787) 4
Spare 031B (795) 4
Ch5 Descriptor Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters) String_20 Read only 031F (799) 10
Spare 0329 (809) 10
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare 0335 (821) 60
Ch5 Alarm 1 enable Alarm 1 enable Enum Read only 0371 (881) 1
0 = Off 2 = Latched
Spare 0374 (884) 10
Ch5 Alarm 2 enable Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable, above) Enum Read only 037E (894) 1
Ch5 Alarm 2 type Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type, above) Enum Read only 037F (895) 1
Spare 0381 (897) 10
Ch5 Alarm 3 enable Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 02E9 (907) 1
Ch5 Alarm 3 type Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 02EA (908) 1
Spare 02EC (910) 10
Spare 02F9 (923) 10
Notes
HA028910 User Guide


CHANNEL 6

Ch6 Span high Upper span value (display full scale) Scaled Read only 03A5 (933) 1
Ch6 Span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Scaled Read only 03A6 (934) 1
Ch6 Zone high Zone high value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 03A7 (935) 1
Ch6 Zone low Zone low value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 03A8 (936) 1
Ch6 PV type Input type Enum Read only 03A9 (937) 1
Ch6 Decimal places Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16 Read only 03AA (938) 1
Ch6 Colour Channel colour (0 to 55) (See Annex B for RGB definitions) Enum Read only 03AB (939) 1
Ch6 Units Units string (up to five characters) String_5 Read only 03AC (940) 3
Spare 03AF (943) 2
Ch6 Open string Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 03B1 (945) 4
Spare 03B5 (949) 4
Ch6 Close string Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 03B9 (953) 4
Spare 03BD (957) 4
Ch6 Descriptor Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters) String_20 Read only 03C1 (961) 10
Spare 03CB (971) 10
Ch6 No of alarms Number of alarms on this channel (0 to 2) Uint16 Read only 03D5 (981) 1
Ch6 PV format Enum Read only 03D6 (982) 1
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare 03D7 (983) 60
0 = Off 2 = Latched
Spare 0416 (1046) 10
Spare 0423 (1059) 10
Ch6 Alarm 3 enable Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 042D (1069) 1
Ch6 Alarm 3 type Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 042E (1070) 1
Spare 0430 (1072) 10
Ch6 Alarm 4 enable Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 043A (1082) 1
Ch6 Alarm 4 type Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 043B (1083) 1
Spare 043D (1085) 10
Notes
User Guide HA028910


CHANNEL 7

Ch7 Zone low Zone low value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 044A (1098) 1
Ch7 PV type Input type Enum Read only 044B (1099) 1
Ch7 Decimal places Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16 Read only 044C (1100) 1
Ch7 Colour Channel colour (0 to 55) (See Annex B for RGB definitions) Enum Read only 044D (1101) 1
Ch7 Units Units string (up to five characters) String_5 Read only 044E (1102) 3
Spare 0451 (1105) 2
Spare 0457 (1111) 4
Ch7 Close string Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 045B (1115) 4
Spare 045F (1119) 4
Spare 046D (1133) 10
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare 0479 (1145) 60
Ch7 Alarm 1 enable Alarm 1 enable Enum Read only 04B5 (1205) 1
0 = Off 2 = Latched
Ch7 Alarm 1 type Alarm 1 type Enum Read only 04B6 (1206) 1
Spare 04B8 (1208) 10
Ch7 Alarm 2 enable Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable, above) Enum Read only 04C2 (1218) 1
Ch7 Alarm 2 type Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type, above) Enum Read only 04C3 (1219) 1
Ch7 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 04C4 (1220) 1
Spare 04C5 (1221) 10
Ch7 Alarm 3 enable Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 04CF (1231) 1
Ch7 Alarm 3 type Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 04D0 (1232) 1
Ch7 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 04D1 (1233) 1
Spare 04D2 (1234) 10
Ch7 Alarm 4 enable Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 04DC (1244) 1
Ch7 Alarm 4 type Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 04DD (1245) 1
Ch7 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 04DE (1246) 1
Spare 04DF (1247) 10
Notes
HA028910 User Guide


CHANNEL 8

Ch8 Span high Upper span value (display full scale) Scaled Read only 04E9 (1257) 1
Ch8 Span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Scaled Read only 04EA (1258) 1
Ch8 Zone high Zone high value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 04EB (1259) 1
Ch8 Zone low Zone low value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 04EC (1260) 1
Ch8 PV type Input type Enum Read only 04ED (1261) 1
Ch8 Decimal places Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16 Read only 04EE (1262) 1
Ch8 Colour Channel colour (0 to 55) (See Annex B for RGB definitions) Enum Read only 04EF (1263) 1
Ch8 Units Units string (up to five characters) String_5 Read only 04F0 (1264) 3
Spare 04F3 (1267) 2
Ch8 Open string Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 04F5 (1269) 4
Spare 04F9 (1273) 4
Ch8 Close string Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 04FD (1277) 4
Spare 0501 (1281) 4
Spare 050F (1295) 10
Ch8 PV format Enum Read only 051A (1306) 1
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare 051B (1307) 60
0 = Off 2 = Latched
Spare 055A (1370) 10
Spare 0567 (1383) 10
Ch8 Alarm 3 enable Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 0571(1393) 1
Spare 0574 (1396) 10
Ch8 Alarm 4 enable Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 057E (1406) 1
Ch8 Alarm 4 type Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 057F (1407) 1
Spare 0581 (1409) 10
Notes
User Guide HA028910


CHANNEL 9

Ch9 Span high Upper span value (display full scale) Scaled Read only 058B (1419) 1
Ch9 Span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Scaled Read only 058C (1420) 1
Ch9 Zone high Zone high value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 058D (1421) 1
Ch9 Zone low Zone low value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 058E (1422) 1
Ch9 PV type Input type Enum Read only 058F (1423) 1
Spare 0595 (1429) 2
Spare 059B (1435) 4
Ch9 Close string Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 059F (1439) 4
Spare 05A3 (1443) 4
Ch9 Descriptor Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters) String_20 Read only 05A7 (1447) 10
Spare 05B1 (1457) 10
Ch9 No of alarms Number of alarms on this channel (0 to 2) Uint16 Read only 05BB (1467) 1
Ch9 PV format Enum Read only 05BC (1468) 1
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare 05BD (1469) 60
Ch9 Alarm 1 enable Alarm 1 enable Enum Read only 05F9 (1529) 1
0 = Off 2 = Latched
Ch9 Alarm 1 type Alarm 1 type Enum Read only 05FA (1530) 1
Ch9 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 05FB (1531) 1
Spare 05FC (1532) 10
Spare 0609 (1545) 10
Spare 0616 (1558) 10
Spare 0623 (1571) 10
Notes
HA028910 User Guide


CHANNEL 10

Ch10 Span high Upper span value (display full scale) Scaled Read only 062D (1581) 1
Ch10 Span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Scaled Read only 062E (1582) 1
Ch10 Zone high Zone high value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 062F (1583) 1
Spare 0637 (1591) 2
Spare 063D (1597) 4
Spare 0645 (1605) 4
Spare 0653 (1619) 10
Ch10 No of alarms Number of alarms on this channel (0 to 2) Uint16 Read only 065D (1629) 1
Ch10 PV format Enum Read only 065E (1630) 1
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare 065F (1631) 60
Ch10 Alarm 1 enable Alarm 1 enable Enum Read only 069B (1691) 1
0 = Off 2 = Latched
Ch10 Alarm 1 type Alarm 1 type Enum Read only 069C (1692) 1
Ch10 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 069D (1693) 1
Spare 069E (1694) 10
Ch10 Alarm 2 enable Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable, above) Enum Read only 06A8 (1704) 1
Ch10 Alarm 2 type Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type, above) Enum Read only 06A9 (1705) 1
Ch10 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 06AA (1706) 1
Spare 06AB (1707) 10
Ch10 Alarm 3 enable Alarm 3 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 06B5(1717) 1
Ch10 Alarm 3 type Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 06B6(1718) 1
Spare 06B8 (1720) 10
Ch10 Alarm 4 enable Alarm 4 enable (As alarm 1 enable above) Enum Read only 06C2 (1730) 1
Ch10 Alarm 4 type Alarm 4 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 06C3 (1731) 1
Ch10 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 06C4 (1732) 1
Spare 06C5 (1733) 10
Notes
User Guide HA028910


CHANNEL 11

Ch11 Span high Upper span value (display full scale) Scaled Read only 06CF (1743) 1
Ch11 Span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Scaled Read only 06D0 (1744) 1
Ch11 Zone high Zone high value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 06D1 (1745) 1
Ch11 Zone low Zone low value (two decimal places) Scaled Read only 06D2 (1746) 1
Ch11 PV type Input type Enum Read only 06D3 (1747) 1
Ch11 Decimal places Number of decimal places (0 to 9) Uint16 Read only 06D4 (1748) 1
Ch11 Colour Channel colour (0 to 55) (See Annex B for RGB definitions) Enum Read only 06D5 (1749) 1
Ch11 Units Units string (up to five characters) String_5 Read only 06D6 (1750) 3
Spare 06D9 (1753) 2
Ch11 Open string Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 06DB (1755) 4
Spare 06DF (1759) 4
Ch11 Close string Closed Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 06E3 (1763) 4
Spare 06E7 (1767) 4
Ch11 Descriptor Channel descriptor (up to 20 characters) String_20 Read only 06EB (1771) 10
Spare 06F5 (1781) 10
Ch11 No of alarms Number of alarms on this channel (0 to 2) Uint16 Read only 06FF (1791) 1
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare 0701 (1793) 60
Ch11 Alarm 1 enable Alarm 1 enable Enum Read only 073D (1853) 1
0 = Off 2 = Latched
Ch11 Alarm 1 type Alarm 1 type Enum Read only 073E (1854) 1
Spare 0740 (1856) 10
Ch11 Alarm 2 enable Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable, above) Enum Read only 074A (1866) 1
Ch11 Alarm 2 type Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type, above) Enum Read only 074B (1867) 1
Spare 074D (1869) 10
Spare 075A (1882) 10
Spare 0767 (1895) 10
Notes
HA028910 User Guide


CHANNEL 12

Spare 077B (1915) 2
Ch12 Open string Open Digital Input string (up to eight characters) String_8 Read only 077D (1917) 4
Spare 0781 (1921) 4
Spare 0789 (1929) 4
Spare 0797 (1943) 10
Ch12 No of alarms Number of alarms on this channel (0 to 2) Uint16 Read only 07A1 (1953) 1
Ch12 PV format Enum Read only 07A2 (1954) 1
0 = Numeric
1 = Digital strings
Spare 07A3 (1955) 60
Ch12 Alarm 1 enable Alarm 1 enable Enum Read only 07DF (2015) 1
0 = Off 2 = Latched
Ch12 Alarm 1 type Alarm 1 type Enum Read only 07E0 (2016) 1
Ch12 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 07E1 (2017) 1
Spare 07E2 (2018) 10
Ch12 Alarm 2 enable Alarm 2 enable (As alarm 1 enable, above) Enum Read only 07EC (2028) 1
Ch12 Alarm 2 type Alarm 2 type (As alarm 1 type, above) Enum Read only 07ED (2029) 1
Ch12 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 07EE (2030) 1
Spare 07EF (2031) 10
Ch12 Alarm 3 type Alarm 3 type (As alarm 1 type above) Enum Read only 07FA (2042) 1
Ch12 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) Scaled Read/Write 07FB (2043) 1
Spare 07FC (2044) 10
Spare 0809 (2057) 10
Notes
User Guide HA028910

8.4.3 Channel Run-Time data

These tables show addresses for channel input values for channels 1 to 12 inclusive.
Generally: channel N address = channel 1 address + 3(N-1) (decimal). For channels 75 to 100 (Ethernet/IP
option only), see table 4.3.21.
CHANNEL 1
Ch1 value Current process value (PV) Scaled See note 1 A1D9 (41433) 1
Ch1 status Channel status Enum Read only A1DA (41434) 1
4 = Hardware error
Ch1 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - A1DB (41435) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare

CHANNEL 2
Ch2 value Current process value (PV) Scaled See note 1 A1DC (41436) 1
Ch2 status Channel status Enum Read only A1DD (41437) 1
4 = Hardware error
Ch2 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - A1DE (41438) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare

Note: PV access is Read/Write for any point configured with ‘Slave Comms’ as its Type or Function.
Otherwise PV access is Read only.
HA028910 User Guide

8.4.3 CHANNEL RUN TIME DATA (Cont.)

CHANNEL 3
Ch3 value Current process value (PV) Scaled See note 1 A1DF (41439) 1
Ch3 status Channel status Enum Read only A1E0 (41440) 1
4 = Hardware error
Ch3 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - A1E1 (41441) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare

CHANNEL 4
Ch4 value Current process value (PV) Scaled See note 1 A1E2 (41442) 1
4 = Hardware error
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare

User Guide HA028910


CHANNEL 5
4 = Hardware error
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare

CHANNEL 6
4 = Hardware error
Ch6 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - A1EA (41450) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare
HA028910 User Guide


CHANNEL 7
Ch7 value Current process value (PV) Scaled See note 1 A1EB (41451) 1
Ch7 status Channel status Enum Read only A1EC (41452) 1
4 = Hardware error
Ch7 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - A1ED (41453) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare

CHANNEL 8
Ch8 value Current process value (PV) Scaled See note 1 A1EE (41454) 1
Ch8 status Channel status Enum Read only A1EF (41455) 1
4 = Hardware error
Ch8 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - A1F0 (41456) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare
User Guide HA028910


CHANNEL 9
Ch9 value Current process value (PV) Scaled See note 1 A1F1 (41457) 1
Ch9 status Channel status Enum Read only A1F2 (41458) 1
4 = Hardware error
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare

CHANNEL 10
4 = Hardware error
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare
HA028910 User Guide


CHANNEL 11
4 = Hardware error
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare

CHANNEL 12
Ch12 value Current process value (PV) Scaled See note 1 A1FA (41466) 1
Ch12 status Channel status Enum Read only A1FB (41467) 1
4 = Hardware error
Ch12 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - A1FC (41468) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare
User Guide HA028910

8.4.4 Group data

Generally: Parameter address for group N = Parameter address for group 1 + 629(N-1) (decimal)
GROUP 1
Grp1 Trend type Trend enhancements Enum Read only A4D6 (42198) 1
0 = Interpolation enabled
1 = Adaptive recording enabled
Grp1 Trend rate Trend update rate in milliseconds Uint32 Read only A4D7 (42199) 2
Grp1 Archive rate Archive (to flash) rate in milliseconds Uint 32 Read only A4D9 (42201) 2
Grp1 Descriptor Group descriptor (20 characters max.) String_20 Read only A4DB (42203) 10
Spare A4E5 (42213) 10
Grp1 Channels in group 16 Registers holding the group contents, as follows: (16)
Register 1 Uint16 Read only A4EF (42223) 1
Bit 0: 0 = Point 1 not in group; 1 = Point 1 is in group
Etc.
Register 2 - as register 1, but for points 17 to 32 Uint16 Read only A4F0 (42224) 1

See table 8.3 Register 7 - as register 1, but for points 97 to 112 Uint16 Read only A4F5 (42229) 1
for point types Register 8 - as register 1, but for points 113 to 128 Uint16 Read only A4F6 (42230) 1
Register 12 - as register 1, but for points 177 to 192 Uint16 Read only A4FA (42234) 1
Register 13 - as register 1, but for points 193 to 208 Uint16 Read only A4FB (42235) 1
Register 14 - as register 1, but for points 209 to 224 Uint16 Read only A4FC (42236) 1
Register 15 - as register 1, but for points 225 to 240 Uint16 Read only A4FD (42237) 1
Register 16 - as register 1, but for points 241 to 256 Uint16 Read only A4FE (42238) 1
Grp1 Text length Identifies the length of a text message to be read Uint16 Read/Write A4FF (42239) 1
Grp1 Text time stamp Time stamp of the text message to be read (UTC format) Double Read only A500 (42240) 4
Grp1 Read text Read text string from instrument display String_60 Read only A504 (42244) 30
Reserved A522 (42274) 30
Grp1 Write text Write a text string to instrument display String_60 Write only A540 (42304) 30
Reserved A55E (42334) 30
Grp1 Batch start Boolean Flag. Value 0001 starts new batch Boolean Write only A57C (42364) 1
Grp1 Batch stop Boolean Flag. Value 0001 stops current batch Boolean Write only A57D (42365) 1
Grp1 Batch running Batch status flag: 1 = Running; 0 = Not running Boolean Read only A57E (42366) 1
Grp1 Text field 1 Batch field 1 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write A57F (42367) 30
Reserved A59D (42397) 30
Grp1 Text field 2 Batch field 2 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write A5BB (42427) 30
Reserved A5D9 (42457) 30
Grp1 Text field 3 Batch field 3 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write A5F7 (42487) 30
Reserved A615 (42517) 30
Grp1 Text field 4 Batch field 4 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write A633 (42547) 30
Reserved A651 (42577) 30
Grp1 Text field 5 Batch field 5 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write A66F (42607) 30
Reserved A68D (42637) 30
Grp1 Text field 6 Batch field 6 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write A6AB (42667) 30
Reserved A6C9 (42697) 30
Spare A6E7 (42727) 100
HA028910 User Guide

8.4.4 GROUP DATA (Cont.)

GROUP 2

Grp2 Trend type Trend enhancements Enum Read only A74B (42827) 1
Grp2 Trend rate Trend update rate in milliseconds Uint32 Read only A74C (42828) 2
Grp2 Archive rate Archive (to flash) rate in milliseconds Uint 32 Read only A74E (42830) 2
Grp2 Descriptor Group descriptor (20 characters max.) String_20 Read only A750 (42832) 10
Spare A75A (42842) 10
Register 1 Uint16 Read only A764 (42852) 1
Etc.
Register 2 - as register 1, but for points 17 to 32 Uint16 Read only A765 (42853) 1
See table 8.3 Register 6 - as register 1, but for points 81 to 96 Uint16 Read only A769 (42857) 1
for point types Register 7 - as register 1, but for points 97 to 112 Uint16 Read only A76A(42858) 1
Register 8 - as register 1, but for points 113 to 128 Uint16 Read only A76B (42859) 1
Register 9 - as register 1, but for points 129 to 144 Uint16 Read only A76C (42860) 1
Register 10 - as register 1, but for points 145 to 160 Uint16 Read only A76D (42861) 1
Register 11 - as register 1, but for points 161 to 176 Uint16 Read only A76E (42862) 1
Register 12 - as register 1, but for points 177 to 192 Uint16 Read only A76F (42863) 1
Grp2 Text length Identifies the length of a text message to be read Uint16 Read/Write A774 (42868) 1
Grp2 Text time stamp Time stamp of the text message to be read (UTC format) Double Read only A775 (42869) 4
Grp2 Read text Read text string from instrument display String_60 Read only A779 (42873) 30
Reserved A797 (42903) 30
Grp2 Write text Write a text string to instrument display String_60 Write only A7B5 (42933) 30
Reserved A7D3 (42963) 30
Grp2 Batch start Boolean Flag. Value 0001 starts new batch Boolean Write only A7F1 (42993) 1
Grp2 Batch stop Boolean Flag. Value 0001 stops current batch Boolean Write only A7F2 (42994) 1
Grp2 Batch running Batch status flag: 1 = Running; 0 = Not running Boolean Read only A7F3 (42995) 1
Grp2 Text field 1 Batch field 1 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write A7F4 (42996) 30
Reserved A812 (43026) 30
Grp2 Text field 3 Batch field 3 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write A86C (43116) 30
Reserved A88A (43146) 30
Grp2 Text field 4 Batch field 4 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write A8A8 (43176) 30
Reserved A8C6 (43206) 30
Grp2 Text field 5 Batch field 5 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write A8E4 (43236) 30
Reserved A902 (43266) 30
Spare A95C (43356) 100
User Guide HA028910


GROUP 3

Grp3 Trend type Trend enhancements Enum Read only A9C0 (43456) 1
Grp3 Trend rate Trend update rate in milliseconds Uint32 Read only A9C1 (43457) 2
Grp3 Archive rate Archive (to flash) rate in milliseconds Uint 32 Read only A9C3 (43459) 2
Grp3 Descriptor Group descriptor (20 characters max.) String_20 Read only A9C5 (43461) 10
Spare A9CF (43471) 10
Register 1 Uint16 Read only A9D9 (43481) 1
Etc.
Register 2 - as register 1, but for points 17 to 32 Uint16 Read only A9DA (42482) 1
Register 3 - as register 1, but for points 33 to 48 Uint16 Read only A9DB (42483) 1
Register 4 - as register 1, but for points 49 to 64 Uint16 Read only A9DC (42484) 1
Register 5 - as register 1, but for points 65 to 80 Uint16 Read only A9DD (42485) 1
See table 8.3 Register 6 - as register 1, but for points 81 to 96 Uint16 Read only A9DE (42486) 1
for point types Register 7 - as register 1, but for points 97 to 112 Uint16 Read only A9DF (42487) 1
Register 8 - as register 1, but for points 113 to 128 Uint16 Read only A9E0 (42488) 1
Grp3 Text length Identifies the length of a text message to be read Uint16 Read/Write A9E9 (43497) 1
Grp3 Text time stamp Time stamp of the text message to be read (UTC format) Double Read only A9EA (43498) 4
Grp3 Read text Read text string from instrument display String_60 Read only A9EE (43502) 30
Reserved AA0C (43532 30
Grp3 Write text Write a text string to instrument display String_120 Write only AA2A (43562) 60
Reserved AA48 (43592) 30
Grp3 Batch start Boolean Flag. Value 0001 starts new batch Boolean Write only AA66 (43622) 1
Grp3 Batch stop Boolean Flag. Value 0001 stops current batch Boolean Write only AA67 (43623) 1
Grp3 Batch running Batch status flag: 1 = Running; 0 = Not running Boolean Read only AA68 (43624) 1
Grp3 Text field 1 Batch field 1 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write AA69 (43625) 30
Reserved AA87 (43655) 30
Grp3 Text field 2 Batch field 2 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write AAA5 (43685) 30
Reserved AAC3 (43715) 30
Grp3 Text field 3 Batch field 3 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write AAE1 (43745) 30
Reserved AAFF (43775) 30
Grp3 Text field 4 Batch field 4 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write AB1D (43805) 30
Reserved AB3B (43835) 30
Grp3 Text field 5 Batch field 5 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write AB59 (43865) 30
Reserved AB77 (43895) 30
Grp3 Text field 6 Batch field 6 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write AB95 (43925) 30
Reserved ABB3 (43955) 30
Spare ABD1 (43985) 100
HA028910 User Guide


GROUP 4

Grp4 Trend type Trend enhancements Enum Read only AC35 (44085) 1
Grp4 Trend rate Trend update rate in milliseconds Uint32 Read only AC36 (44086) 2
Grp4 Archive rate Archive (to flash) rate in milliseconds Uint 32 Read only AC38 (44088) 2
Grp4 Descriptor Group descriptor (20 characters max.) String_20 Read only AC3A (44090) 10
Spare AC44 (44100) 10
Register 1 Uint16 Read only AC4E (44110) 1
Etc.
Register 2 - as register 1, but for points 17 to 32 Uint16 Read only AC4F (44111) 1
Register 3 - as register 1, but for points 33 to 48 Uint16 Read only AC50 (44112) 1
See table 8.3 Register 6 - as register 1, but for points 81 to 96 Uint16 Read only AC53 (44115) 1
for point types Register 7 - as register 1, but for points 97 to 112 Uint16 Read only AC54 (44116) 1
Register 13 - as register 1, but for points 193 to 208 Uint16 Read only AC5A (44122) 1
Register 14 - as register 1, but for points 209 to 224 Uint16 Read only AC5B (44123) 1
Register 15 - as register 1, but for points 225 to 240 Uint16 Read only AC5C (44124) 1
Register 16 - as register 1, but for points 241 to 256 Uint16 Read only AC5D (44125) 1
Grp4 Text length Identifies the length of a text message to be read Uint16 Read/Write AC5E (44126) 1
Grp4 Text time stamp Time stamp of the text message to be read (UTC format) Double Read only AC5F (44127) 4
Grp4 Read text Read text string from instrument display String_60 Read only AC63 (44131) 30
Reserved AC81 (44161) 30
Grp4 Write text Write a text string to instrument display String_60 Write only AC9F (44191) 30
Reserved ACBD (44221) 30
Grp4 Batch start Boolean Flag. Value 0001 starts new batch Boolean Write only ACDB (44251) 1
Grp4 Batch stop Boolean Flag. Value 0001 stops current batch Boolean Write only ACDC (44252) 1
Grp4 Batch running Batch status flag: 1 = Running; 0 = Not running Boolean Read only ACDD (44253) 1
Grp4 Text field 1 Batch field 1 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write ACDE (44254) 30
Reserved ACFC (44284) 30
Grp4 Text field 2 Batch field 2 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write AD1A (44314) 30
Reserved AD38 (44344) 30
Grp4 Text field 3 Batch field 3 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write AD56 (44374) 30
Reserved AD74 (44404) 30
Grp4 Text field 4 Batch field 4 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write AD92 (44434) 30
Reserved ADB0 (44464) 30
Grp4 Text field 5 Batch field 5 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write ADCE (44494) 30
Reserved ADEC (44524) 30
Grp4 Text field 6 Batch field 6 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write AE0A (44554) 30
Reserved AE28 (44584) 30
Spare AE46 (44614) 100
User Guide HA028910


GROUP 5

Grp5 Trend type Trend enhancements Enum Read only AEAA (44714) 1
Grp5 Trend rate Trend update rate in milliseconds Uint32 Read only AEAB (44715) 2
Grp5 Archive rate Archive (to flash) rate in milliseconds Uint 32 Read only AEAD (44717) 2
Grp5 Descriptor Group descriptor (20 characters max.) String_20 Read only AEAF (44719) 10
Spare AEB9 (44729) 10
Register 1 Uint16 Read only AEC3 (44739) 1
Etc.
Register 2 - as register 1, but for points 17 to 32 Uint16 Read only AEC4 (44740) 1
See table 8.3 Register 6 - as register 1, but for points 81 to 96 Uint16 Read only AEC8 (44744) 1
for point types Register 7 - as register 1, but for points 97 to 112 Uint16 Read only AEC9 (44745) 1
Register 8 - as register 1, but for points 113 to 128 Uint16 Read only AECA (44746) 1
Register 9 - as register 1, but for points 129 to 144 Uint16 Read only AECB (44747) 1
Register 10 - as register 1, but for points 145 to 160 Uint16 Read only AECC (44748) 1
Register 11 - as register 1, but for points 161 to 176 Uint16 Read only AECD (44749) 1
Register 12 - as register 1, but for points 177 to 192 Uint16 Read only AECE (44750) 1
Register 13 - as register 1, but for points 193 to 208 Uint16 Read only AECF (44751) 1
Register 14 - as register 1, but for points 209 to 224 Uint16 Read only AED0 (44752) 1
Grp5 Text length Identifies the length of a text message to be read Uint16 Read/Write AED3 (44755) 1
Grp5 Text time stamp Time stamp of the text message to be read (UTC format) Double Read only AED4 (44756) 4
Grp5 Read text Read text string from instrument display String_60 Read only AED8 (44760) 30
Reserved AEF6 (44790) 30
Grp5 Write text Write a text string to instrument display String_60 Write only AF14 (44820) 30
Reserved AF32 (44850) 30
Grp5 Batch start Boolean Flag. Value 0001 starts new batch Boolean Write only AF50 (44880) 1
Grp5 Batch stop Boolean Flag. Value 0001 stops current batch Boolean Write only AF51 (44881) 1
Grp5 Batch running Batch status flag: 1 = Running; 0 = Not running Boolean Read only AF52 (44882) 1
Grp5 Text field 1 Batch field 1 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write AF53 (44883) 30
Reserved AF71 (44913) 30
Grp5 Text field 2 Batch field 2 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write AF8F (44943) 30
Reserved AFAD (44973) 30
Grp5 Text field 3 Batch field 3 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write AFCB (45003) 30
Reserved AFE9 (45033) 30
Grp5 Text field 4 Batch field 4 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write B007 (45063) 30
Reserved B025 (45093) 30
Reserved B061 (45153) 30
Grp5 Text field 6 Batch field 6 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write B08F (45183) 30
Reserved B09D (45213) 30
Spare B0BB (45243) 100
HA028910 User Guide


GROUP 6

Grp6 Trend type Trend enhancements Enum Read only B11F (45343) 1
Grp6 Trend rate Trend update rate in milliseconds Uint32 Read only B120 (45344) 2
Grp6 Archive rate Archive (to flash) rate in milliseconds Uint 32 Read only B122 (45346) 2
Grp6 Descriptor Group descriptor (20 characters max.) String_20 Read only B124 (45348) 10
Spare B12E (45358) 10
Register 1 Uint16 Read only B138 (45368) 1
Etc.
Register 2 - as register 1, but for points 17 to 32 Uint16 Read only B139 (45369) 1
Register 3 - as register 1, but for points 33 to 48 Uint16 Read only B13A (45370) 1
Register 4 - as register 1, but for points 49 to 64 Uint16 Read only B13B (45371) 1
Register 5 - as register 1, but for points 65 to 80 Uint16 Read only B13C (45372) 1
See table 8.3 Register 6 - as register 1, but for points 81 to 96 Uint16 Read only B13D (45373) 1
for point types Register 7 - as register 1, but for points 97 to 112 Uint16 Read only B13E (45374) 1
Register 8 - as register 1, but for points 113 to 128 Uint16 Read only B13F (45375) 1
Grp6 Text length Identifies the length of a text message to be read Uint16 Read/Write B148 (45384) 1
Grp6 Text time stamp Time stamp of the text message to be read (UTC format) Double Read only B149 (45385) 4
Grp6 Read text Read text string from instrument display String_60 Read only B14D (45389) 30
Reserved B16B (45419) 30
Grp6 Write text Write a text string to instrument display String_60 Write only B189 (45449) 30
Reserved B1A7 (45479) 30
Grp6 Batch start Boolean Flag. Value 0001 starts new batch Boolean Write only B1C5 (45509) 1
Grp6 Batch stop Boolean Flag. Value 0001 stops current batch Boolean Write only B1C6 (45510) 1
Grp6 Batch running Batch status flag: 1 = Running; 0 = Not running Boolean Read only B1C7 (45511) 1
Grp6 Text field 1 Batch field 1 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write B1C8 (45512) 30
Reserved B1E6 (45542) 30
Reserved B222 (45602) 30
Reserved B25E (45662) 30
Grp6 Text field 4 Batch field 4 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write B27C (45692) 30
Reserved B29A (45722) 30
Grp6 Text field 5 Batch field 5 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write B2B8 (45752) 30
Reserved B2D6 (45782) 30
Grp6 Text field 6 Batch field 6 text string (max. 60 characters) String_60 Read/Write B2F4 (45812) 30
Reserved B312 (45842) 30
Spare B330 (45872) 100
User Guide HA028910

8.4.5 Feature identification table (FIT)

This table allows the host to identify which features are available at the recorder.
Parameter Description Value Access Start Addr. Register

Number of features Number of supported features 3 Read only CC26 (52262) 1
Feature 1 Indirection Table 1 Read only CC27 (52263) 1
Read only indirection table start address (R/O vector) CD89 Read only CC28 (52264) 1
Read/Write indirection table start address (R/W vector) D18A Read only CC29 (52265) 1
Spare CC2A (52266) 1
Feature 2 Function codes supported (FC I.D.) 4 Read only CC2B (52267) 1
Bit map of supported MODBUS function codes 32940 Read only CC2C (52268) 1
Bit 0: 0 = code 1 not supported; 1 = code 1 supported
Etc.
Reserved CC2D (52269) 1
Reserved CC2E (52270) 1
Feature 3 Security ID (MODBUS login security feature) 9 Read only CC2F (52271) 1
User name Write only CC30 (52272) 40
Password Write only CC58 (52312) 40
Reserved CC80 (52352) 1
Feature N 100 Spare addresses for further features CC81 (52353) 100
8.4.6 Indirection tables

The standard MODBUS protocol allows block register reads and writes. This is efficient only if data is
grouped contiguously, or nearly so. Indirection tables are a means by which widely spaced register ad-
dresses can (in effect) be grouped, offering the host the ability to access a block of user defined data in
one single read/write request.
Two configurable tables are available, one for read only parameters, the other for read/write. Each table
is in two halves - the lower address half contains the addresses of the registers to be accessed; the higher
address half contains the values which have been read or which are to be written.
Notes:
1. For Ethernet connections, indirection table entries are lost at power off, as the result of a
brown-out or if the connection with the host is broken.
2. Parameters in IEEE format can be accessed by configuring two successive entries in the table.
Parameters which occupy more than one register can be loaded into the indirection area by
using function code 16 (pre-set multiple registers) and the parameter’s base address (i.e. the
parameter’s 1st register).
3. Separate indirection table entries are held for each host - the recorder automatically switches
each host to its own indirection table without user intervention.
4. Indirection table addresses (CCE5 to D4E7) cannot be entered in the indirection tables. Any
attempt to do so will be ignored.
HA028910 User Guide

8.4.6 INDIRECTION TABLES (CONT.)

Table 8.4.6a shows the overall arrangement of the indirection table area. Figures 8.4.6b and 8.4.6c show
simple examples of Read only and Read/Write addressing for tables with 6 entries.
D4E6
Read/Write
data area
Read / Write area

D2E7
D2E6
Read/Write
indirection
area
D0E7
D0E6 No. of R/W entries
D0E5
Read only
data area
Read only area
CEE6
CEE5
Read only
indirection
area
CCE6
CCE5 No. of Read Only entries
Table 8.4.6a Indirection table areas
User Guide HA028910

8.4.6 INDIRECTION TABLES (CONT.)
CEEB Alarms chan 1

CEEA PV chan 1
Read values from here

CEE9 PV chan 1
(address + hex 200) CEE8 Archive rate
CEE7 Trend rate
CEE6 Instrument type
CCEB A1DB Channel 1 Alarm status
CCEA F8C4 Channel 1 PV (bits 16 to 31) 32-bit IEEE

channel
Enter required data
CCE9 F8C3 Channel 1 PV (bits 0 to 15)
addresses here CCE8 A4D9 Group 1 archive rate
CCE7 A4D7 Group 1 trend rate
CCE6 0001 Instrument type number
CCE5 0006 Number of Read only entries
Table 8.4.6b Read only indirection example
D2EC Ch6 Alarm1 Sp

D2EB Ch5 Alarm1 Sp
Write values to, or read D2EA Ch4 Alarm1 Sp
values from this area
(address + hex 200) D2E9 Ch3 Alarm1 Sp
D2E8 Ch2 Alarm1 Sp
D2E7 Ch1 Alarm1 Sp
D0EC 0415 Chan 6 Alarm 1 setpoint
D0EB 0373 Chan 5 Alarm 1 setpoint
Enter required data

D0EA 02D1 Chan 4 Alarm 1 setpoint
addresses here D0E9 022F Chan 3 Alarm 1 setpoint
D0E8 018D Chan 2 Alarm 1 setpoint
D0E7 00EB Chan 1 Alarm 1 setpoint
D0E6 0006 Number of Read/Write entries
Table 8.4.6c Read/Write indirection example
HA028910 User Guide

8.4.7 IEEE 32-bit channel configuration data Note: A/B Switching:

The following tables show the hexadecimal addresses for the specified B values are not accessible via modbus
32-bit floating-point values, for channels 1 to 12. Generally, Parameter for this software version. Span, Zone,
Colour etc. are therefore all setting A
address for channel N = Parameter address for channel 1 + 36(N-1) (deci-
mal). The word channel is used as an umbrella term for input channels, maths channels, totalisers etc.
CHANNEL 1
Ch1 span high Upper span value (Display full scale) Float Read only D4E7 (54503) 2
Ch1 span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Float Read only D4E9 (54505) 2
Ch1 Zone high Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D4EB (54507) 2
Ch1 Zone low Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D4ED (54509) 2
Ch1 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) for alarm 1 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D4EF (54511) 2
Ch1 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint (Note 2) for alarm 2 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D4F1 (54513) 2
Spare D4F7 (54519) 20
CHANNEL 2
Ch2 span high Upper span value (display full scale) Float Read only D50B (54539) 2
Ch2 span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Float Read only D50D (54541) 2
Ch2 Zone high Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D50F (54543) 2
Ch2 Zone low Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D511 (54545) 2
Ch2 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D513 (54547) 2
Spare D51B (54555) 20
CHANNEL 3
Ch3 span high Upper span value (display full scale) Float Read only D52F (54575) 2
Ch3 span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Float Read only D531 (54577) 2
Ch3 Zone high Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D533 (54579) 2
Ch3 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D53B (54587) 2
Ch3 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D53D (54589) 2
Spare D53F (54591) 20
Notes
User Guide HA028910

8.4.7 IEEE 32-BIT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION DATA (Cont.)

CHANNEL 4
Ch4 span high Upper span value (display full scale) Float Read only D553 (54611) 2
Ch4 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D55F (54623) 2
Spare D563 (54627) 20
CHANNEL 5
Ch5 Zone high Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D57B (54651) 2
Ch5 Zone low Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D57D (54653) 2
Spare D587 (54663) 20
CHANNEL 6
Ch6 Zone low Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D5A1 (54689) 2
Ch6 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D5A3 (54691) 2
Spare D5AB (54699) 20
Notes
HA028910 User Guide


CHANNEL 7
Ch7 span high Upper span value (display full scale) Float Read only D5BF (54719) 2
Ch7 span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Float Read only D5C1 (54721) 2
Ch7 Zone high Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D5C3 (54723) 2
Ch7 Zone low Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D5C5 (54725) 2
Ch7 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D5C7 (54727) 2
Ch7 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D5C9 (54729) 2
Ch7 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D5CB (54731) 2
Ch7 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D5CD (54733) 2
Spare D5CF (54735) 20
CHANNEL 8
Ch8 span high Upper span value (display full scale) Float Read only D5E3 (54755) 2
Ch8 span low Lower span value (display ‘zero’) Float Read only D5E5 (54757) 2
Ch8 Zone high Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D5E7 (54759) 2
Ch8 Zone low Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D5E9 (54761) 2
Ch8 Alarm 1 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 1 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D5EB (54763) 2
Ch8 Alarm 2 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 2 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D5ED (54765) 2
Ch8 Alarm 3 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 3 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D5EF (54767) 2
Ch8 Alarm 4 setpoint Trigger setpoint for alarm 4 (Note 2) Float Read/Write D5F1 (54769) 2
Spare D5F3 (54771) 20
CHANNEL 9
Ch9 Zone high Zone upper value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D60B (54795) 2
Ch9 Zone low Zone lower value (% of ‘chart’ width) Float Read only D60D (54797) 2
Spare D617 (54807) 20
Notes
User Guide HA028910


CHANNEL 10
Spare D63B (54843) 20
CHANNEL 11
Ch11 span high Upper span value (display full scale) Float Read only D64F (54863) 2
Spare D65F (54879) 20
CHANNEL 12
Spare D683 (54915) 20
Notes
HA028910 User Guide

8.4.8 IEEE Area Channel run-time data

The following tables show the hexadecimal addresses for the specified 32-bit floating-point values, for chan-
nels 1 to 12. Generally, Parameter address for channel N = Parameter address for channel 1 + 4(N-1) (decimal).
CHANNEL 1
Channel 1 value Current process value (PV) Float See note F8C3 (63683) 2
Channel 1 status Channel status Enum Read only F8C5 (63685) 1
4 = Hardware error
Channel 1 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - F8C6 (63686) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare
CHANNEL 2
Channel 2 value Current process value (PV) Float See note F8C7 (63687) 2
Channel 2 status Channel status Enum Read only F8C9 (63689) 1
4 = Hardware error
Channel 2 alarms Alarm information Uint16 - F8CA (63690) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare
User Guide HA028910

8.4.8 IEEE AREA CHANNEL RUN-TIME DATA (Cont.)

CHANNEL 3
Channel 3 value Current process value (PV) Float See note F8CB (63691) 2
Channel 3 status Channel status Enum Read only F8CD (63693) 1
4 = Hardware error
Channel 3 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - F8CE (63694) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare
CHANNEL 4
Channel 4 value Current process value (PV) Float See note F8CF (63695) 2
Channel 4 status Channel status Enum Read only F8D1 (63697) 1
4 = Hardware error
Channel 4 alarms Alarm information Uint16 - F8D2 (63698) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare
HA028910 User Guide


CHANNEL 5
Channel 5 value Current process value (PV) Float See note F8D3 (63699) 2
4 = Hardware error
Channel 5 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - F8D6 (63702) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare
CHANNEL 6
Channel 6 value Current process value (PV) Float See note F8D7 (63703) 2
4 = Hardware error
Channel 6 alarms Alarm information Uint16 - F8DA (63706) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare
User Guide HA028910


CHANNEL 7
Channel 7 value Current process value (PV) Float See note F8DB (63707) 2
Channel 7 status Channel status Enum Read only F8DD (63709) 1
4 = Hardware error
Channel 7 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - F8DE (63710) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare
CHANNEL 8
Channel 8 value Current process value (PV) Float See note F8DF (63711) 2
Channel 8 status Channel status Enum Read only F8E1 (63713) 1
4 = Hardware error
Channel 8 alarms Alarm information Uint16 - F8E2 (63714) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare
HA028910 User Guide


CHANNEL 9
Channel 9 value Current process value (PV) Float See note F8E3 (63715) 2
4 = Hardware error
Channel 9 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - F8E6 (63718) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare
CHANNEL 10
Channel 10 value Current process value (PV) Float See note F8E7 (63719) 2
4 = Hardware error
Channel 10 alarms Alarm information Uint16 - F8EA (63722) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare
User Guide HA028910


CHANNEL 11
Channel 11 value Current process value (PV) Float See note 1 F8EB (63723) 2
Channel 11 status Channel status Enum Read only F8ED (63725) 1
4 = Hardware error
Channel 11 Alarms Alarm information Uint16 - F8EE (63726) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare
CHANNEL 12
Channel 12 value Current process value (PV) Float See note 1 F8EF (63727) 2
Channel 12 status Channel status Enum Read only F8F1 (63729) 1
4 = Hardware error
Channel 12 alarms Alarm information Uint16 - F8F2 (63730) 1
Bit 3: Spare
Bit 7: Spare
Bit 11: Spare
Bit 15: Spare
HA028910 User Guide

8.4.9 Permanent ID table

This table contains information relating to the recorder, and also gives the start address of the feature
identification table (FIT).
FFF4 HHHH Checksum

FFF3 CC26 FIT start address
FFF2 0001 Version ID
FFF1 6100 or 6180 Product ID
FFF0 0500 Company ID
Table 8.4.9 Permanent ID table
8.5 DATA TRANSMISSION

Each message (request or response) is packaged in the (MODBUS) frame shown below. The messages
consist of a 7 byte prefix, followed by the function code (in hex), followed by the relevant data bytes, the
number and content of which depend on the function code, as described in subsequent sections.
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Bytes 8 onwards
Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Number of Recorder Modbus Data
identifier identifier identifier identifier Always 00 bytes fol- Modbus function (Depends on
(usually 00) (usually 00) (00) (00) lowing address code (hex) function code)
Figure 8.5 MODBUS package
Notes:
1 The transaction identifier has no active function - the recorder just copies the bytes from the
request message to the response message.
2. The protocol identifier bytes are always zero.
FUNCTION CODES AND EXCEPTION CODES
Refer to section 8.2.1 for lists of function codes and exception codes supported.
TEXT STRINGS
When sending text strings, such as Batch fields, the final character must be followed by one or two ‘Null’
characters. The number of bytes in the text string (including the null) must be even, even if this means
adding two nulls at the end of the message instead of one.
For example, the text string: “Batch Number’ should be sent as
Ba tc hSpace Nu mb er NullNull, or Ba tc hSpace Nu mb er SpaceNull
where each pair of characters occupies on 16-bit word. Similarly, the text string ‘Batch Number:’ would be
sent as
Ba tc hSpace Nu mb er :null,
but only one Null character is required to provide an even number of bytes.
User Guide HA028910

8.5.1 Function code 03

REQUEST
The bytes after the 7-byte prefix described above are:
Function code (03) (1 byte)
Register start address (2 bytes)
Word count (Total number of registers) (1 to 125 decimal; 1 to 7D hex) (2 bytes)
Thus to read Channel 5 descriptor (start address 031F - 10 registers altogether) the following request (as
described in figure 8.5.1a) would be transmitted for a recorder with a Modbus address of 1:
0000000000060103031F000A
00 00 00 00 00 06 01 03 03 1F 00 0A
Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder Modbus Register Register Word count Word count
identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol- Modbus function start start high byte low byte
lowing address code (hex) address address
high byte low byte
Figure 8.5.1a Function code 03 request example
RESPONSE
As a response to a request, the recorder returns a similar message, but the function code (03) is followed by:
Byte count (= 2 x the number of register values requested) in hex (1 byte)
Value of register at start address (2 bytes)
Value of register at start address + 1 (2 bytes)
etc.
etc.
Value of final register (2 bytes)
Thus as a response to the above request for channel 5 descriptor, the following message (as expanded
in figure 8.5.1b) would be returned to the host (assuming channel descriptor to be: Channel 5 Descriptor
and Modbus address = 1):
0000000000170103144368616E6E656C20352044657363726970746F72
00 00 00 00 00 17 01 03 14 43 68 61
Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder Modbus Byte count ASCII ASCII ASCII
identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol- Modbus function (No of reg- C (Hex) h (Hex) a (Hex)
lowing (hex) address code (hex) isters x 2)
(Hex)
6E 6E 65 6C 20 35 20 44 65 73 63 72
ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII
n (Hex) n (Hex) e (Hex) l (Hex) space (Hex) 5 (Hex) space (Hex) D (Hex) e (Hex) s (Hex) c (Hex) r (Hex)
Byte 24 Byte 25 Byte 26 Byte 27 Byte 28

69 70 74 6F 72
ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII
i (Hex) p (Hex) t (Hex) o (Hex) r (Hex)
Figure 8.5.1b Function code 03 response example
EXCEPTION RESPONSES
Byte 0 = Function code 83 (hex) (i.e. Hex (80 + function code))
Byte 1 = Exception code 01 (Illegal function) or 02 (Invalid data address)
HA028910 User Guide


This is identical with function code 03, except that 04 must be used as the function code and the excep-
tion response Function code is 84 (hex) not 83.

REQUEST
This is used to write a value to a single register. The bytes after the 7-byte prefix described in section 8.5,
above are:
Register address (2 bytes)
Value to be written (2 bytes)
Thus to write a value of 80 degrees as Alarm 1 setpoint for channel 3 (register address 022F), the follow-
ing request (as detailed in figure 8.5.3) would be transmitted to the recorder:
0000000000060106022F0050
00 00 00 00 00 06 01 06 02 2F 00 50
Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder MOodbus Register Register Value Value
identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol- Modbus function start start high byte low byte
lowing address code (hex) address address
(hex) (hex)
high byte low byte
Figure 8.5.3 Function code 06 request/response example
RESPONSE
As a response to a request, the recorder returns a message identical with the request message.
EXCEPTION RESPONSES

This is used to initiate a loop-back test. The bytes after the 7-byte prefix described in section 8.5, above are:
Subfunction code (00 00) (2 bytes)
Query data (loopback value) (HH HH) (2 bytes)
Thus to initiate a loopback test (using, as an example, ‘P’ ’Q’ as the query data), the following request (as
detailed in figure 8.5.4) is transmitted to the recorder:
000000000006010800005051
The response to the receipt of such a message should be to ‘echo’ the request back to the host.
00 00 00 00 00 06 01 08 00 00 50 51
Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder Modbus Subfunction Subfunction Query data Query data
identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol- Modbus function code code high byte low byte
lowing address code (hex) high byte low byte (ASCII 'P') (ASCII 'Q')
(Hex) (Hex)
Figure 8.5.4 Function code 08 (loopback test) example
User Guide HA028910

8.5.5 Function code 16 (Hex 10)

REQUEST
This is used to write values to multiple registers. The bytes after the 7-byte prefix described in section 8.5,
above are:
Register Start address (2 bytes)
Word count (Total number of registers to be written) (1 to 100 decimal; 1 to 64 hex) (2 bytes)
Byte count (B) ( 2 x word count) (1 byte)
Values to be written (2B bytes).
Thus to write ”Batch Number” as batch field 1 for group 1 (start address A57F), the following message
(expanded in figure 8.5.5a) would be transmitted to the recorder:
0000000000150110A57F00070E4261746368204E756D6265720000
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11 Byte 12
00 00 00 00 00 15 01 10 A5 7F 00 07 0E
Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder Modbus Base Base Word count Word count
Byte count
identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes to fol- Modbus function address address High byte Low byte
low (hex) address code (hex) High byte Low byte
Byte 13 Byte 14 Byte 15 Byte 16 Byte 17 Byte 18 Byte 19 Byte 20 Byte 21 Byte 22 Byte 23 Byte 24 Byte 25 Byte 26
42 61 74 63 68 20 4E 75 6D 62 65 72 00 00
ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII
B (Hex) a (Hex) t (Hex) c (Hex) h (Hex) space (Hex) N (Hex) u (Hex) m (Hex) b (Hex) e (Hex) r (Hex) Null Null
Figure 8.5.5a Function code 16 request example
RESPONSE
The response message (detailed in figure 8.5.5b) after the 7-byte prefix described in section 8.5, above is:
Function code 10 (1 byte)
Start address (2 bytes)
Word count (2 bytes)
Thus, the response to the above batch field request would be:
0000000000060110A57F0007
00 00 00 00 00 06 01 10 A5 7F 00 07
Transaction Transaction Protocol Protocol Always 00 Number of Recorder Modbus Base Base Word count Word count
identifier identifier identifier identifier bytes fol- Modbus function address address High byte Low byte
lowing (hex) Address code (hex) High byte Low byte
Figure 8.5.5b Function code 16 response example
EXCEPTION RESPONSES
Note: Function code 16 can be used to write multiple registers into the indirection table area, for
example, by writing the base register address of a 32-bit channel value (e.g. channel 3 - start ad-
dress: F994) into location D18B.
HA028910 User Guide

9 ANALOGUE OUTPUT OPTION

Up to four analogue output boards can be fitted, each of which supplies two outputs. This allows any
of the recorder points to be output as a voltage or current signal, as configured. Any part of the source
point’s span can be mapped to the output range, and the outputs can be adjusted (as described below)
to compensate for errors in the monitoring system.
9.1 SIGNAL WIRING

Figure 2.2.1d shows the output wiring for analogue output boards.
9.2 SPECIFICATION
See Annex A for the analogue output board specification.
9.3 CONFIGURATION
See section 4.3.17 (output channel configuration) for details.
9.4 OUTPUT ADJUST

Notes
1. Output adjust is relevant only to output channels configured as ‘V’ or ‘mA’, not to those config-
ured as Master Comms.
2. Output channels can be adjusted only by users with ‘Adjust I/O’ access permission (section
4.4.1)
9.4.1 Adjustment procedure

This procedure is carried out as follows:
1. Select ‘Output Adjust’ in the System menu.
2. Select the required channel.
3. Enter a low value for the recorder to output.
4. Observe what value the monitoring equipment is reading for this output
5. Enter this monitored value.
6. Repeat for a high value.
Note: 10% and 90% of output range are commonly used as low and high values respectively.
Figure 9.4.1 below, shows typical adjust pages.
9.4.2 Adjustment removal

Adjustments can be removed at any time, as follows:
1. Select ‘Output Adjust’ in the System menu.
2. Select the required channel.
3. Operate the ‘Remove Adjust’ key
4. Select ‘Yes’ from the resulting confirmation dialogue.
User Guide HA028910

9.4 OUTPUT ADJUST (Cont.)
Clock
Locale
Upgrade
Input Adjust
Output adjust
Channel 4
Adjust Channel
Remove Adjust Specify the low output and then the low reading
1) 10.690 13/10/05 15:22:54 Low Output 4

2) 20.960 13/10/05 16:03:09 Low Reading 4.018
3) 3.563 Unadjusted
When the values have been entered select
4) 0.000 Unadjusted Apply
5) 9.365 Unadjusted 1) 10.690 13/10/05 15:22:54
6) 8.896 12/10/05 14:29:26 Apply Discard
Specify the high output and then the high

reading
High Output 9
High Reading 8.917

Apply to complete the adjustment procedure.
Apply Discard
Figure 9.4.1 Typical output adjust pages
HA028910 User Guide

10 EVENT INPUT OPTION
10.1 INTRODUCTION
Each Event input option board offers six isolated input circuits. Inputs can be either switch closures or
voltage levels.
Section 4.3.6 (Event configuration) describes the use of events and how they can be combined to per-
form logic functions, if required. Job lists can be triggered by any event, either internal or as a result of
external events wired to an event input board.
If this option is fitted, ‘Event input board’ appears as a event source, and the user must then specify a
board number and associated input number as required.
Event Number 1) Event 1

Source 1 Event Input Board
Board 1 Select Event Input board
Input 5 Select Input on associated board
Source 1 Sense Source 1

Operator And
Apply Discard
Figure 10.1 Event input selection
10.2 SIGNAL WIRING

See figure 2.2.1d
10.3 SPECIFICATION
See Annex A
User Guide HA028910

11 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY
11.1 INTRODUCTION
WARNING!
Transmitter power supplies must not be used with dc supply voltages.
Notes:
1. Transmitter power supplies are not suitable for use with dc or low-voltage ac supplies.
2 The transmitter power supply is available only with 100 mm. recorders.
This option consists of a circuit board, terminal block and suitable wiring inside a long terminal cover at
the rear of a 100mm recorder. The board supplies three mutually isolated dc supplies (nominal 25 Volts)
each of which is intended to power a single 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA current loop.
11.2 FUSING
11.2.1 Fuse Rating

The circuit board is protected by a 20 mm anti-surge (type T) fuse, the value of which depends on the
supply voltage as shown in table 11.2.1, below.
Access to the output wiring and to the fuse is achieved by isolating the recorder from mains power and
opening the terminal cover (after removing its securing screws). The process is fully described below.
Supply voltage Fuse rating Part Number

115V ac 100 mA CH050012
230V ac 63mA CH050630
Table 11.2.1 Transmitter power supply fuse details
11.2.2 Access to the user connections/fuse

1 Isolate the recorder from the supply voltage.
2 At the rear of the recorder remove the terminal cover securing screws (figure 11.2.2a), taking care to
retain them for use in re-assembly.
Cover securing screws
Figure 11.2.2a Retaining screw locations
HA028910 User Guide

11.2.2 ACCESS TO THE USER CONNECTIONS/FUSE (Cont.)

3 Open the cover (figure 11.2.2b) to reveal the circuit board, user connections etc. (figure 11.2.2c)
Swing rear cover

down for access
Recorder
Body Connector
clip access
Figure 11.2.2b Opening the rear cover
4 The fuse is located as shown in figure 11.2.2c. User wiring to the terminal block (figures 11.2.3a/b)
can be carried out now, or the terminal cover can be removed for convenience, as described in steps
5 onwards below.
Power cord
to recorder
User terminal
block
Fuse
Figure 11.2.2c Fuse and User terminal block locations
To remove the terminal cover:

5. Unplug the IEC connector from the rear of the recorder connector panel and remove the cable tie
securing the loom to the chassis.
6. Close the terminal cover, and lift it off.
Note: Four apertures in each side of the terminal cover allow the user to actuate the clips which
secure the i/o connectors to the rear panel of the recorder. This allows the i/o connectors to be re-
moved if, for example, the recorder is to be removed from the panel for any reason. The positions
of these apertures are shown in figure 11.2.2b (right-hand side shown; left-hand side similar).
User Guide HA028910

11.2.3 User wiring

Figure 11.2.3a shows the terminal block pinout, and figure 11.2.3b shows typical applications wiring.
O/P 1 O/P 2 O/P 3

+ – + – + –
User terminal block
Figure 11.2.3a Terminal block wiring
Long terminal cover
Recorder rear
terminal panel
Transmitter Power Supply
Channel input
100W 250W PCB
0 mA 0V 0V V+ V- I
4 mA 0.4 V 1.0 V
R
Black
Black
Black
Red
Red
Red
20 mA 2.0 V 5.0V
Voltages generated by
various currents for
R = 100W and R =250W
User terminal block
– + – + – +
- + Other transmitters
Only one channel

Transmitter shown, for clarity.
R (minimum spec) = 1.4W, ± 1%. 100W or 250W as required (see table)
Figure 11.2.3b Applications wiring
HA028910 User Guide

12 ASCII PRINTER OUTPUT OPTION
12.1 INTRODUCTION
If the Serial Communications option is fitted, this allows the printing of messages, as and when they
occur, or the printing of configurable reports as a result of job action. The recorder is set up to drive a
number of recommended printers. As more printers become available, printer drivers can be imported
as described in section 12.4, below. For printer specification, refer to the documentation supplied with
the printer.
12.2 WIRING
12.2.1 Serial communications ports

The printer is connected to one of the Serial communications ports, configured for EIA232 standard,
using the Rx, Tx and common signal lines. Printer Tx must be connected to recorder Rx. Printer Rx must
be connected to recorder Tx. Figure 12.2.1 shows the location of, and user connections for, the recorder
ports. See also section 2.2.
1 5
6 9
Serial Port 1 Serial Port 2
View on solder-bucket face
of user socket
EIA232C
Pin Signal
1 NC
2 Rx
3 Tx
4 DTR
5 Signal ground
6 NC
7 NC
8 NC
9 5V via 1500Ω
Figure 12.2.1a Serial port locations (small frame) Figure 12.2.1b Serial port pinout
12.2.2 DC connection
Pin Function
1
3 1 +24V±10%
+24V NC 2 0V
3 Not connected
0V 2
Shell Chassis ground
Figure 12.2.2 DC connector pinout

(solder side of user connector)
User Guide HA028910

12.3 CONFIGURATION
Configuration takes place in two areas viz: ‘Connections’ and ‘Reports’ (section 12.3.2).
12.3.1 Connections
Figure 12.3.1a shows the default configuration page for ASCII printer protocol. See section 4.3.15 for
other protocols.
Port Serial 1
Online
Link Error Count 0
Reset Error Count
Protocol ASCII Printer

Connection EIA232
Parity Even
Printer Type Star TSP600 Select printer type
Printer Name Star TSP600(0)

Printer Status Not Responding
Printer Test
Print Messages From 1) Group 1

Messages To Print
System
Alarms
Power Up
General
Batches
Logins
Apply Discard
Figure 12.3.1a Serial communications configuration menu
PORT
This allows serial port 1 or serial port 2 to be selected for printer configuration. Separate, independently
configurable printers can be connected to the two ports, or, if only one printer is to be connected, any of
the other available protocols can be selected for the non-printer port.
LINK ERROR COUNT

The counter is incremented every time there is a framing error, a parity error or a Cyclic redundancy
check (CRC) error whilst communicating with the printer. The ‘Reset Error Count’ key is used to reset the
count to zero.
Note: For instruments fitted with two printers, the count relates to the currently selected printer.
HA028910 User Guide

12.3.1 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

PROTOCOL
Select ASCII Printer.
BAUD RATE
Select Baud Rate setting to match that set at the Printer.
STOP BITS
Selectable as 1 or 2.
PARITY
Allows Parity to be chosen from a pick list of: None, Odd, Even. For reliable communications with the
printer, it is recommended that the default parity be used.
PRINTER TYPE
Allows a printer driver to be selected for the printer connected to this port.
PRINTER NAME
Allows a name to be entered for the printer.
PRINTER STATUS
Not Responding Printer is not communicating - check wiring
OK Printer is connected and working correctly
Paper Low The printer paper is getting low. The roll should be replaced as soon as possible
Paper Out The printer paper roll is exhausted.
Unknown error Printer is not working correctly - perhaps an unknown type of printer has been at-
tached.
PRINTER TEST
Operating this button causes a test printout to appear at the
printer, as shown in figure 12.3.1b.
PRINT MESSAGES FROM

The user can select a group for message printing. These mes-
sages are printed as they occur, and are not dependent on job
action. Only those messages in the enabled categories (see
‘Messages to Print’ below) are printed.
MESSAGES TO PRINT
Figure 12.3.1b Test printout
This set of enable boxes allows the user to select which, if any,
messages will be printed. Enable boxes appear even if the
relevant option is not fitted.
Messages are printed as they arise, but reports take precedence. For example, if a report is to be printed
when channel one goes into alarm, and ‘Alarms’ is enabled in the ‘Messages To Print’ area, then the Re-
port is printed before the alarm message.
Note: Messages will be printed only if they are enabled in the relevant part of the recorder’s
configuration. For example: ‘Logins’ messages will be printed only if ‘Record Logins’ is enabled in
the unit’s ‘Security’ configuration (section 4.4), and ‘Alarms’ messages will be printed only if ‘Alarm
Message’ and/or ‘Ack Message’ are enabled in the relevant group’s configuration (section 4.3.2).
User Guide HA028910

12.3.2 Reports configuration

This allows the user to configure up to 10 ‘reports’ for printing by the ASCII printer as a result of job ac-
tion. Figure 12.3.2a shows a typical configuration page, accessed from the CONFIG button ‘Reports’
item.
Report 1) Report 1
Descriptor Report 1
Number of Fields 6
Style Normal
Field 2 Type Text
Text
Style Bold
Field 3 Type Process Value
Point Channel 1
Style Emphasised
Field 4 Type Batch Field 1
Style Banner
Field 5 Type 1) Message
Style Normal
Line Feed 1
Apply Discard
Figure 12.3.2a Reports Configuration
REPORT
Allows the user to select the required report number for configuration.
DESCRIPTOR
A name for the Report can be entered here.
NUMBER OF FIELDS
Select 0 to 10 for the number of items to be included in the report.
FIELD N TYPE
N = 1 to the number of fields selected in the previous item.
Date & Time Causes the time and date of report generation to be included in the report
Text Allows the user to enter a text message of up to 60 characters.
Process value Allows a specified point’s process value (including descriptor and units) to be includ-
ed in the report
Batch Field 1 Batch field 1 can be included in the report. See section 4.3.10 for Batch details.
Message A message can be selected for inclusion in the report. See section 4.3.8 for details
of message configuration.
Line Feed Allows one or more blank lines to be left. This can be useful at the end of a report.
HA028910 User Guide

12.3.2 REPORTS CONFIGURATION (Cont.)

STYLE
See figure 12.3.2b for examples of ‘Normal’, ‘Bold’, ‘Emphasised’ and ‘Banner’ print styles. For all styles, if
the text is too long to fit on one line it ‘wraps round’ as shown (for normal style) in figure 12.3.2b, below.
Figure 12.3.2b Text style examples
POINT
Allows a point to be chosen when ‘Process value’ has been selected as Field Type. The point is selected
from a pick-list containing all the input channels, derived channels, totalisers etc. in the instrument.
LINE FEED
Appears only when ‘Line Feed’ has been chosen as Field Type. Allows the user to enter the required
number of blank lines (up to 10) which are to be inserted.
User Guide HA028910

12.4 IMPORTING PRINTER DRIVERS

The importing of new printer drivers is carried out from the SAVE/RESTORE button menu, fully described
in section 4.2. Before a printer driver can be ‘imported’, it must be available from the recorder’s Flash
memory, from an SD or Flash card, from a USB memory stick or, for Bridge users, from the host PC.
Printer driver files have the suffix .uhi.
Figure 12.4 depicts the process for a recorder.
When using a PC as the operator interface, the detailed appearance of the Host PC browse window de-
pends on the Windows version in use.
Save
Restore
New
Text
Import Screen
Export Screen
Import Printer Driver
File Name Printer_Driver.uhi
Import
\user\ Hide

cal\ Folder 03/06/04 12:35:08
config\ Folder 01/05/04 10:27:13
Filter1a Config 05/07/04 10:22:23 4445
lib\ Folder 05/07/04 10:23:14
sdb\ Folder 11/05/04 14:01:08
user\ Folder 05/06/04 17:30:29
Printer_Driver.uhi Folder 05/06/04 17:30:29
FileName P r i n t e r _ D r i v e r . u h i Save Cancel
Figure 12.4 Importing a printer driver
HA028910 User Guide

12.5 REPORT EXAMPLE

This example shows how to configure a report to be printed if any of channel 1 to channel 4 go into
alarm. It is assumed that the Serial comms link with the printer has been successfully established.
The report is to include the process values of channels 1 to 4 and the time and date.
Note: The example assumes that the channels being configured are in their factory default state.
Configuration items not mentioned in the example (e.g. Scale Low) should be left at their default
values.
12.5.1 Group Configuration

Refer to section 4.3.2, as necessary.
GROUP NUMBER 1
Descriptor = Colour mix.
Alarm message = Disable
Deselect all points except Channels 1 to 4.
12.5.2 Channel configuration

Refer to section 4.3.3 as necessary
CHANNEL 1
Input Type = Test
Scale High =100
Units = %
Descriptor = Red
Alarm 1
Enable = Unlatched
Type = Absolute low
Threshold = 10
CHANNEL 2
As channel 1, except
Descriptor = Blue
CHANNEL 3
Descriptor = Green
CHANNEL 4
Waveform = Sine 4 minutes
Descriptor = Orange
User Guide HA028910

12.5.3 Event Configuration

Refer to section 4.3.6 as necessary
EVENT NUMBER 1
Source 1 = Unack’d Alarm on Group
Descriptor = Paint low
Job number 1
Category = Report
Send Report to = Select required printer
Report = 1) report 1
On = Active
12.5.4 Report Configuration

Descriptor = Paint Low
Number of fields = 8
Field 1 Type = Text
Text = ‘Paint Low Warning’
Style = Banner
Field 2 Type = Line Feed
Line Feed = 2
Field 3 Type = Date & Time
Style = Normal
Field 4 Type = Process Value
Point = Red
Style = Normal
Point = Blue
Style = Normal
Point = Green
Style = Normal
Point = Orange
Style = Normal
Field 8 Type = Line feed
Line Feed = 5
HA028910 User Guide

12.5.5 Serial Communications Configuration

Enable ‘Alarms’ in the ‘Messages To Print’ area.
Press ‘Apply’.
A sample Printout is shown in figure 12.5.5, in which it can be seen that it was the Orange channel which
triggered the warning.
Note: In the example above the event trigger is ‘Unacknowledged alarm’. This means that once
the first channel alarm becomes active and the relevant report printed, then no further reports will
be initiated until the alarm is acknowledged, no matter how many other channel alarms go active.
If, however, an unlatched alarm becomes inactive, this is the equivalent of its being acknowledged
as far as report printing is concerned. For latched alarms, each alarm must be acknowledged
before further reports can be triggered.
Figure 12.5.5 Example printout
User Guide HA028910

12.6 TSP600 SWITCH SETTINGS
This section applies only to the Star TSP600 Printer.
The DIP switches are revealed by removing the access panel located on the underside of the printer.
The two switches appear as shown in figure 12.6a, and their elements should be configured as shown in
figure 12.6b. See SW1/SW2 details in the TSP600 ‘User’s guide’ for details.
DSW1 DSW2
DSW1 DSW2
Figure 12.6a DIP switch access Figure 12.6b DIP switch element configuration
DSW3
Figure 12.6c SW3 location Figure 12.6d SW3 settings
The illustrated switch settings (segments 4, 5 and 6 ‘Off’; all other segments ‘On’) give the following pa-
rameter values: Baud Rate = 9600, Data bits = 8, Parity = Even, Handshake = Xon/Xoff.
Settings other than these may result in no communications or unreliable communications with the printer.
See the TSP600 ‘User’s guide’ for more details of SW3.
HA028910 User Guide

13 PORTABLE CASE OPTIONS

Note: Portable case options are available only for the small frame recorder.
The various options described below come provided in a rugged carrying case as depicted in figure 13,
below,
It is possible that input/output circuits can carry high voltages, and this might prove dangerous if the
safety earth connection to the recorder is not in place (e.g. the plug is pulled out) at any time whilst such
hazardous voltages are present. Therefore, the following warning must be complied with:
WARNING
For portable case instruments only:
All I/O connections must be Low Voltage (i.e. maximum 33V ac RMS, 46.7V ac peak, 70V dc) unless the
integrity of the instrument safety earth is maintained for as long as the I/O is connected to the recorder.
430 mm
190 mm 384.8 mm
40.5 mm
190 View on right-hand side 153

mm mm
240 mm 15 mm
300 mm
Top view
174
mm
38
mm
Figure 13 Portable case dimensions
User Guide HA028910

13.1 BASIC OPTION
13.1.1 Introduction
The basic portable case option provides 6 or 12 input channels with up to four option boards, or 18 input
channels and up to two option boards.
13.1.2 Wiring
Figure 13.1.2a, below, gives alternative back panel connector layouts for the 12-input and 18-input re-
corder options.

E E
L N L N
Serial comms (option) Ethernet RJ45 Mains (supply) Serial comms (option) Ethernet RJ45 Mains (supply)
connection connection
Option board 1 Option board 2 Option board 1 Option board 2
1 22 1 22
Option board 3 Option board 4 Ch13 Ch14 Ch15 Ch16 Ch17 Ch18
V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I
+ – + – + – + – + – + –
22 1 22
Ch7 Ch8 Ch9 Ch10 Ch11 Ch12 Ch7 Ch8 Ch9 Ch10 Ch11 Ch12
V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I
+ – + – + – + – + – + – + – + – + – + – + – + –
1 22 1 22
Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch5 Ch6 Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch5 Ch6
V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I V V I
+ – + – + – + – + – + – + – + – + – + – + – + –
1 22 1 22
Figure 13.1.2a Back panel connector details.
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
Caution
Before powering the recorder, check that the supply voltage to be applied lies within the range
specified on the serial number label on the underside of the case.
As shown in Figure 13.1.2a, above, the line supply is terminated using an IEC connector at the rear of the
case. A socket is required to mate with the plug fitted at the recorder. Minimum recommended conduc-
tor size is 16/0.2 (0.5mm2) (20AWG).
SIGNAL WIRING
Input and typical options pinouts are as shown in figure 13.1.2a, above. For full I/O wiring details, refer to
Section 2.2.
INTERNAL WIRING
Figure 13.1.2b, below, shows details of the wiring between the portable case rear panel and the recorder
rear panel.
HA028910 User Guide

13.1.2 WIRING (Cont.)
Portable case
Recorder back panel
L Brown L Power supply unit
Line supply N Blue N
(100 to 240V)
(50/60 Hz) E Green/Yellow E
Chassis ground
Earth (Safety earth)
Ethernet
connector
Note: For the sake of clarity, the 1

2
1
2
Option board 1
Serial Communications and USB op-
3
3
4
4
5
tion wiring are not shown.

5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
Top connector 11
12
12
13
13
14
Option board 2
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
1 1
2
Option board 3
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6 6
7 7
8
8
Note: For 18 input channels, Option

9 9
10 10
11 11
boards 3/4 are replaced with input board 12

13
12
13
Option board 4
3, including associated CJ sensor 14
15
14
15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 20
21 21
22 22
1
1
2
V+ 2 V+ Input board 2
V- 3 V-
3
I 4 I
4
V+ 5 V+
5
6 V- 6 V-
7 I 7 I
V+ 8 V+
8
9 V- 9 V-
I 10 I
10
11
CJ
12 12
sensor
V+ 13 V+
13
V- 14 V-
14
15 I 15 I
V+ 16 V+
16
V- 17 V-
17
18 I 18 I
V+ 19 V+
19
V- 20 V-
20
I 21 I
21
22
22
1
2
V+
1
2 V+ Input board 1
V- 3 V-
3
I 4 I
4
V+ 5 V+
5
V- 6 V-
6
I 7 I
7
V+ 8 V+
8
V- 9 V-
9
I 10 I
10
11
CJ
12 12
sensor
V+ 13 V+
13
V- 14 V-
14
I 15 I
15
V+ 16 V+
16
V- 17 V-
Bottom connector 17
18
I 18 I
V+ 19 V+
19
V- 20 V-
20
I 21 I
21
22
22
Figure 13.1.2b Basic option internal wiring
User Guide HA028910

13.2 TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY (TRS) OPTION

This option is identical with the 6/12 channel basic option described in section 13.1, above except that
one of the option slots is used for TRS output. The TRS pinout is given in figure 13.2, below.
Note: Only one transmitter power supply can be fitted in the portable case, and may be termi-
nated only at option slot 2 OR option slot 4 (if available).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
+V 0V +V 0V +V 0V
Pinout for TRS

(must use option slot 2 OR 4)
Figure 13.2 TRS pinout
13.2.1 Internal wiring

Figure 13.2.1 shows wiring details between the recorder and the back panel connectors.
HA028910 User Guide

13.2 TRS OPTION (Cont.)
Portable case
Recorder back panel

(100 to 240V)
Chassis ground
Ethernet
connector
Note: For the sake of clarity, the 1
Option board 1
Serial Communications and USB op-
1
2
2
3
3
tion wiring are not shown. 4

5
4
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
Top connector 11
12
12
13
13
14
Option board 2
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
1
1
2
Option board 3
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
Note: For 6 or 12 input channel recorders 7

8
7
8
the transmitter power supply may use either

9
9
10
10
11
option board 2 connector or (as shown) the

11
12
12
13
13
option board 4 connector. 14

15
24V
0V
14
15
16
For 18 input channel instruments, the trans- 16

17 24V
0V
17
18
18
mitter power supply must use option board 19
20
24V
19
20
2 connector, because option board 3 and 4

0V 21
21
22
22 TRS
slots (and associated connector) are occupied Terminal
block
by input board 3 and its cold junction sensor. 1
2
V+
1
2 V+ Input board 2
V- 3 V-
3
I 4 I
4
V+ 5 V+
5
V- 6 V-
6
I 7 I
7
V+ 8 V+
8
V- 9 V-
9
I 10 I
10
11
CJ 12 12
sensor V+ 13 V+
13
V- 14 V-
14
I 15 I
15
V+ 16 V+
16
V- 17 V-
17
I 18 I
18
V+ 19 V+
19
V- 20 V-
20
I 21 I
21
22
22
1
1
2
V+ 2 V+ Input board 1
V- 3 V-
3
I 4 I
4
V+ 5 V+
5
V- 6 V-
6
I 7 I
7
V+ 8 V+
8
V- 9 V-
9
I 10 I
10
11
CJ 12
12
sensor V+ 13 V+
13
V- 14 V-
14
I 15 I
15
V+ 16 V+
Bottom connector 16
17
V- 17 V-
I 18 I
18
V+ 19 V+
19
V- 20 V-
20
I 21 I
21
22
22
Figure 13.2.1 Typical internal wiring
User Guide HA028910

13.3 HTM2010 QUARTERLY TEST KIT
13.3.1 Introduction
This option is supplied as a six-channel, 100 mm recorder in a rugged portable case, configured for five
type-T thermocouples and one pressure transducer. The option comes complete with pressure trans-
ducer, insertion tubes and miniature plugs for type T thermocouples. As supplied, the recorder is for use
with small, unwrapped utensil sterilisers. The default configuration for the thermocouples is: Function =
Type T, Input range = 0 to 150˚C, and for the transducer: Input range = -1 to + 3 bar.
13.3.2 Wiring
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
Caution
As shown in Figure 13.3.2a, below, the line supply is terminated using an IEC connector at the rear of the
tor size is 16/0.2 (0.5mm2) (20AWG).
SIGNAL WIRING
Signal wiring consists of wiring the thermocouples to the relevant plugs and plugging them and the
(pre-wired) pressure transducer in. Figure 13.3.2a shows the arrangement of the sockets at the rear of a
six-channel recorder (12 channel similar), and of an 18-channel recorder. Figure 13.3.2b shows the wiring
of the thermocouple plugs.
Ethernet RJ45
USB Ports (option)

USB Ports (option) E
E L N
L N
Serial comms (option) Mains (supply)connection
Ethernet RJ45 Mains (supply)
connection
Con 14
Con 15
Con 16
Con 17
Con 18
Con 13
Con 11
Con 10
Con 12
Con 9
Con8
Con7
Con1 Con2 Con3 Con4 Con5 Con6 Con1 Con2 Con3 Con4 Con5 Con6
Figure 13.3.2 a Connector locations
+ wire T/C type T colours

BS4937:1993
IEC584-3:1989 BS1843:1952
(Current) (Superseded)
+ Brown White
— White Blue
— wire Sheath Brown Blue
Figure 13.3.2b Thermocouple plug wiring (cover removed for clarity)
HA028910 User Guide


INTERNAL WIRING
Figure 13.3.2c shows the internal wiring between the portable case connectors and the recorder rear
panel for a 6 input option..
Recorder back panel
L Brown L
Line supply
N Blue N
(100 to 240V) PSU
(50/60 Hz) E E
Chassis ground Green/Yellow
(safety earth)
Earth
Transmitter PSU
L Brown
Note: For the sake of clarity, the N

Blue
+ Red Terminal
Serial Communications and USB op- O/P 3 Black
Block
tion wiring are not shown. + Red

O/P 2 Black
+ Red
O/P 1 Black
1 Input
Note: For the sake of clarity, only 2 V+
+ Board
one input board shown. Two and Con 1
- 3 V-
three input board wiring similar. 4
5 V+
+
Con 2 6 V-
If fitted, input board 2 channels 1 - 7
to 6 are wired to connectors 7 to 12 8 V+
+
respectively; input board 3 channels Con 3 - 9 V-
1 to 6 wired to connectors 13 to 18 10
respectively. CJ 11
sensor
12
+ 13 V+
Con 4 14 V-
-
15
+ 16 V+
Con 5 17 V-
-
18
+ V+ 19
Con 6 Shunt V- 20
-
Wiring from thermocouple 21
connectors to input terminals
22
is in thermocouple wire
Ethernet
connector
Figure 13.3.2c Internal wiring details
13.3.3 Specification
Information additional to the general specification in Annex A.
Pressure transducer
Input range -1 to 3 Bar G
Output range 4 to 20 mA
Supply voltage range 12 to 32V dc
Non linearity/hysteresis ≤0.25% span
Long term stability 0.1% in 12 months
Safety isolation
DC to 65 Hz: BS EN61010 (Installation category II; Pollution degree 2
Channel to channel: 33V ac RMS, 46.7V ac peak, or 70V dc to earth
Channel to ground 33V ac RMS, 46.7V ac peak, or 70V dc to earth
User Guide HA028910

13.4 THERMOCOUPLE OPTION
13.4.1 Introduction
This option allows the connection of up to 12 type J, K or T thermocouples together with up to two option
boards, or up to 18 thermocouples with no option boards. Transmitter power supply is not available with
this option.
The type of thermocouple (the same for all channels) must be specified at time of order. Each thermocou-
ple input channel will be configured at the factory for the specified type of thermocouple and will be set
to a range of 0 to 100 degrees Celsius.
Thermocouple-style connectors with copper terminals can also be fitted, for use with non-thermocouple
inputs. For such channels the recorder is pre-configured as: Function = Linear, Input range = 0 to 1 Volt.
13.4.2 Wiring
SUPPLY VOLTAGE
Caution
tor size is 16/0.2 (0.5mm2) (20AWG).
SIGNAL WIRING
Signal wiring consists of connecting the transducer wires into the correct type of plug, and inserting the
plugs into the relevant socket at the rear of the recorder.
Figure 13.4.2a shows the arrangement of the connectors at the rear panel for 12 and 18 channel versions.
Figure 13.4.2b shows thermocouple wiring details, and Figure 13.4.2c shows the wiring between the
portable case rear panel and the recorder for a 12 thermocouple option.
Ethernet RJ45

E E
L N L N
Serial comms (option) Ethernet RJ45 Mains (supply) Serial comms (option)
Mains (supply)connection
connection

Con 14
Con 15
Con 16
Con 17
Con 18
Con 13
1 22
Con7 Con8 Con9 Con10 Con11 Con12
Con 11
Con 10
Con 12
Con 9
Con8
Con7
Con1 Con2 Con3 Con4 Con5 Con6 Con1 Con2 Con3 Con4 Con5 Con6
Figure 13.4.2a Rear panel connector locations (typical)
HA028910 User Guide


THERMOCOUPLE WIRING
+ wire
— wire
T/C type J colours T/C type K colours T/C type T colours

BS4937:1993 BS4937:1993 BS4937:1993
BS1843:1952 BS1843:1952 BS1843:1952
IEC584-3:1989 IEC584-3:1989 IEC584-3:1989
(Superseded) (Superseded) (Superseded)
(Current) (Current) (Current)
+ Black Yellow Green Brown Brown White
— White Blue White Blue White Blue
Sheath Black Black Green Red Brown Blue
Figure 13.4.2b Thermocouple wiring details.
User Guide HA028910


Portable case
Recorder back panel

(100 to 240V)
Chassis ground
Ethernet
connector
Note: For the sake of clarity, the
Serial Communications and USB op- 1
1
2
Option board 1
2
3
tion wiring are not shown. 3

4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
Options 8
9
8
9
connector 10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
Option board 2
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
Note: Two input board (12 t/c) wiring shown.

20
20
21
21
22
One input board version (6t/c) similar but

22
input board two and associated wiring and +

1
2 V+ Input board 2
connectors are not fitted. CON 7 - 3 V-
4 I
Three input board (18 t/c) similar, but with CON 8

+
-
5
6
V+
V-
7 I
option boards 1 and 2 being replaced by the CON 9 +
-
8
9
V+
V-
third i/p board and the 22-way connector CJ

10
11
I
being replaced by thermocouple connectors

12
sensor
+ 13 V+
CON 10 - 14 V-
CON 13 to CON18. Input board 3 chan- +

15
16
I
V+
nels 1 to 6 are wired to CON 13 to CON 18 CON 11 - 17

18
V-
I
+
respectively.
19 V+
CON 12 - 20 V-
21 I
22
+
1
2 V+ Input board 1
CON 1 - 3 V-
4 I
+ 5 V+
CON 2 - 6 V-
7 I
+ 8 V+
CON 3 - 9 V-
10 I
11
CJ
12
sensor
+ 13 V+
CON 4 - 14 V-
15 I
+ 16 V+
CON 5 - 17 V-
18 I
+ 19 V+
CON 6 - 20 V-
21 I
22
Figure 13.4.2c Internal wiring
Safety isolation
DC to 65 Hz: BS EN61010 (Installation category II; Pollution degree 2
Channel to channel: 33V ac RMS, 46.7V ac peak, or 70V dc to earth
Channel to ground 33V ac RMS, 46.7V ac peak, or 70V dc to earth
HA028910 User Guide

13.5 LOW SUPPLY VOLTAGE OPTION*

Some of the portable case options described in this manual can be ordered for use with 24V (nom.) sup-
ply voltages. In such cases, the supply voltage part of the wiring diagrams is replaced with that shown in
figure 13.5a unless otherwise stated. The low voltage supply is terminated by a three pin plug, as shown
in figure 13.5b.
Note: The polarity of the dc supply is not critical, but the recorder operates more efficiently with
the polarity shown below
20 to 54V dc, DC+ 3 Brown

or 20 to 42V ac Recorder power
0V 2 Blue supply
(45 to 400 Hz RMS)
Earth 1 Green/Yellow
Earth
Chassis
Ground
Figure 13.5a Internal wiring for low voltage options
24V Earth 0V
Supply connector:
20 to 52Vdc or
20 to 42V(RMS)
1 22
22
1 22
1 22
Figure 13.5b Low supply voltage connector details
* Consult factory for availability
User Guide HA028910

13.6 REMOTE CJC BLOCK OPTION
13.6.1 Introduction
This option allows up to 15 thermocouples of any type(s) to be connected to the recorder using miniature com-
pensating connectors. Thermocouples may be connected directly, or by using extension compensating cable.
Each row of five sockets has an associated aluminium bar, to which is bonded a resistance temperature
detector (RTD) which acts as a cold junctions sensor, connected to the sixth channel of each of the three
input boards. For this reason, connector numbers 6 to 15 do not match the input channel numbering,
but the recorder configuration names the channels in an unambiguous way, to reduce confusion. Table
13.6.1 gives details.
Connector 1 - Channel 1 Connector 6 - Channel 7 Connector 11 - Channel 13

Table 13.6.1 Connector/channel cross reference
13.6.2 Wiring
Caution
1. Before powering the recorder, check that the supply voltage to be applied, lies within the range
2. Thermocouples must not be attached to voltages greater than 24V,
tor size is 16/0.2 (0.5mm2) (20AWG).
SIGNAL WIRING
Signal wiring consists of connecting the transducer wires into the correct type of plug (figure 13.6.2b),
and inserting the plugs into the relevant sockets at the rear of the recorder.
Figure 13.6.2a shows the arrangement of the connectors at the rear panel, and Figure 13.6.2c shows the
wiring between the portable case rear panel and the recorder.
Ethernet RJ45
USB Ports (option)

E
L N
Chan 13 Chan 14 Chan 15 Chan 16 Chan 17
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+
Chan 1 Chan 2 Chan 3 Chan 4 Chan 5 + wire
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+
Figure 13.6.2a Rear panel connector layout Figure 13.6.2b Connector detail (typical)
HA028910 User Guide


Portable case
Recorder back panel

(100 to 240V)
E Green/Yellow E
(50/60 Hz)
Chassis ground
Earth
(Safety earth)
Ethernet
connector
1
11+ Brown 2 V+ Input board 3
Black V- Ch13
11- 3
4 I
12+ Red
Black
5 V+
Ch14
V-
12- 6
7 I
13+ Orange
Black
8 V+
Ch15
13- 9 V-
10 I
11
CJ sensor 12
14+ Yellow
Black
13
14
V+
V- Ch16
14- 15 I
15+ Green
Black
16 V+
V- Ch17
15- 17
18 I
Blue 19 V+
Blue 20 V- Ch18
Violet 21 I
Violet 22
1
6+ Brown 2 V+ Input board 2
Black V- Ch7
6- 3
4 I
7+ Red
Black
5 V+
Ch8
V-
7- 6
7 I
8+ Orange
Black
8 V+
Ch9
8- 9 V-
10 I
11
CJ sensor 12
9+ Yellow
Black
13
14
V+
V- Ch10
9- 15 I
10+ Green
Black
16 V+
V- Ch11
10- 17
18 I
Blue 19 V+
Blue 20 V- Ch12
Violet 21 I
Violet 22
Input board 1
1
1+ Brown
Black
2 V+
Ch1
V-
1- 3
4 I
2+ Red
Black
5 V+
Ch2
V-
2- 6
7 I
3+ Orange
Black
8 V+
Ch3
3- 9 V-
10 I
11
CJ sensor 12
4+ Yellow
Black
13
14
V+
V- Ch4
4- 15 I
5+ Green
Black
16 V+
V- Ch5
5- 17
18 I
Blue 19 V+
Blue 20 V- Ch6
Violet 21 I
Violet 22
RTD mounted
on connector block
(three places)
Measurement accuracy (typical)

Static at 25˚C: <±0.2˚C error (after overall system calibration)
0 to 50˚C: <±0.3˚C error (after overall system calibration)
Start-up time at ambient 2 minutes
Isolation <30V RMS or <60Vdc
User Guide HA028910

14 REMOTE CJ BLOCK OPTION
14.1 LARGE FRAME RECORDER WITH INTEGRAL CJC BLOCK
14.1.1 Introduction
This option allows up to 30 thermocouples of any type(s) to be connected to the recorder using mini-
ature compensating connectors mounted on the rear terminal cover. Thermocouples may be connected
directly, or using extension compensating cable.
Each row of five sockets has an associated aluminium bar, to which is bonded a resistance temperature detec-
tor (RTD) which acts as a cold junctions sensor, connected to the sixth channel of the relevant input board.
For this reason, connector numbers 6 to 30 do not match the input channel numbering, but the recorder
configuration names the channels in an unambiguous way, to reduce confusion. Table 14.1.1 gives details.

14.1.2 Wiring
SIGNAL WIRING
Caution
Thermocouples must not be attached to voltages greater than 24V,
Signal wiring consists of connecting the transducer wires into the correct type of plug (figure 14.1.2a), and
inserting the plugs into the relevant sockets at the rear of the recorder.
Figure 14.1.2b shows the arrangement of the connectors at the rear panel, and Figure 14.1.2c shows the
wiring between the portable case rear panel and the recorder.
+ wire
Figure 14.1.2a Connector detail (typical)
HA028910 User Guide

14 1.2 WIRING (Cont.)
Ethernet RJ45 E
L N
Chan 25 Chan 26 Chan 27 Chan 28 Chan 29 Chan 31 Chan 32 Chan 33 Chan 34 Chan 35
21- 21+ 22- 22+ 23- 23+ 24- 24+ 25- 25+ 26- 26+ 27- 27+ 28- 28+ 29- 29+ 30- 30+
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+ 16- 16+ 17- 17+ 18- 18+ 19- 19+ 20- 20+
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+ 6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+
Figure 14.1.2b Rear panel connector layout
User Guide HA028910

14 1.2 WIRING (Cont.)

Terminal cover
Recorder back panel
(100 to 240V)
E Green/Yellow E
(50/60 Hz)
Chassis ground
Earth
(Safety earth)
Ethernet
connector
1
Input board 6
1
11+ Brown 2 V+ Input board 3 V+ 2 Brown
26+
Ch13 Ch31 V- 3 Black
26-
Black V-
11- 3
4 I I 4
12+ Red 5 V+
Ch14 Ch32
V+ 5
6
Red
Black
27+
V-
12-
Black 6
7
V-
I I 7
27-
13+ Orange 8 V+
Ch15 Ch33
V+ 8 Orange
Black
28+
9
28-
Black V-
13- 9 V-
10 I I 10
11 11
CJ sensor 12 12 CJ sensor
14+ Yellow
Black
13 V+
V- Ch16 Ch34
V+
V-
13
14
Yellow
Black
29+
29-
14
14- 15 I I 15
15+ Green
Black
16 V+
Ch17 Ch35
V+
V-
16
17
Green
Black
30+
V-
15- 17
18 I I 18
30-
Blue 19 V+ V+ 19 Blue
Blue 20 V- Ch18 Ch36 V- 20 Blue
Violet 21 I I 21 Violet
Violet 22 22 Violet
1 1
6+ Brown 2 V+ Input board 2 Input board 5 V+ 2 Brown

21+
Black V- Ch7 Ch25 3 Black
6-
V-
22-
3
4 I I 4
7+ Red
Black
5 V+
Ch8 Ch26
V+ 5
6
Red 23+
V-
7-
V- Black
23-
6
7 I I 7
8+ Orange
Black
8 V+
Ch9 Ch27
V+ 8 Orange
Black
24+
8-
V-
24-
9 V- 9
10 I I 10
11 11
9+ Yellow
Black
13
14
V+
V- Ch10 Ch28
V+
V-
13 Yellow
Black
25+
14
9- 15 I I 15 25-
10+ Green
Black
16 V+
V- Ch11 Ch29
V+
V-
16 Green
Black
26+
10- 17
18 I I
17
18
26-
Violet 22 22 Violet
1
Input board 1 Input board 4
1
1+ Brown
Black
2 V+
Ch1 Ch19
V+ 2
3
Brown
Black
16+
V- V-
1- 3
4 I I 4
16-
2+ Red
Black
5 V+
Ch2 Ch20
V+ 5
6
Red
Black
17+
V- V-
2- 6
7 I I 7
17-
3+ Orange
Black
8 V+
Ch3 Ch21
V+ 8 Orange
Black
18+
3- 18-
9 V- V- 9
10 I I 10
11 11
4+ Yellow
Black
13
14
V+
V- Ch4 Ch22
V+
V-
13
14
Yellow
Black
19+
4- 15 I I 15 19-
5+ Green
Black
16 V+
V- Ch5 Ch23
V+
V-
16 Green
Black
20+
5- 17
18 I I
17
18
20-
Violet 22 22 Violet
RTD mounted
on connector blocks
(six places)

HA028910 User Guide

14.2 LARGE FRAME RECORDER WITH REMOTE CJC BLOCK
14.2.1 Introduction
This option uses two Remote CJC Block units to allow up to 30 thermocouples of any type(s) to be con-
nected to the recorder using miniature compensating connectors at a DIN rail mounted Remote CJ con-
nector unit, with copper wire connections from this unit to the recorder input boards.. Thermocouples
may be connected to the Remote CJ unit directly, or by using extension compensating cable.
Each row of five sockets has an associated aluminium bar, to which is bonded a resistance temperature detec-
tor (RTD) which acts as a cold junctions sensor, connected to the sixth channel of each of the six input boards.
Most connector numbers do not match the input channel numbering, but the recorder configuration
names the channels in an unambiguous way, to reduce confusion. Table 14.2.1 gives details.
Note: Both of the Remote CJC Block units have connectors numbered 1 to 15, so it is important
that the units be identified clearly as, for example’ the ‘input boards 1 to 3’ unit and the ‘input
boards 4 to 6’ unit in order to reduce the possibility of wiring errors.

Connector 3 - Channel 3 Connector 8 - Channel 9 Connector 13 - Channel 15 Input boards
Connector 4 - Channel 4 Connector 9 - Channel 10 Connector 14 - Channel 16 1 to 3

Connector 2 - Channel 20 Connector 7 - Channel 26 Connector 12 - Channel 32 Input boards
4 to 6
Table 14.2..1 Connector/channel cross reference
14.2.2 Signal wiring

Caution
SIGNAL WIRING
Signal wiring consists of
1. connecting the transducer wires into the correct type of plug (figure 14.2.2a), and inserting the plugs
into the relevant sockets in the remote CJ unit.
2 Connecting the Remote CJ unit to the recorder input board terminals..
Figure 14.2.2b shows the arrangement of the connectors at the Remote CJ Block units; Figure 14.2.2c
shows the recorder connector layout and figure 14.2.2d shows the wiring between the remote CJ unit
and the recorder.
+ wire
User Guide HA028910


Note: For the sake of clarity, the units in the figure below are shown one above the other. Nor-
mally they would be mounted side by side.
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+
Input boards
1 to 3
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+
Upper connector
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+ I+ S+ I- S-
(to recorder input board 3)
Middle connector
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+ I+ S+ I- S- (to recorder input board 2)
Lower connector
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+
Input boards
4 to 6
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+
Upper connector
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+ I+ S+ I- S-
Middle connector
Lower connector
Figure 14.2.2b Connector locations (Remote CJC Block units)
HA028910 User Guide

USB Ports (option)

USB1 USB2 E
Port 1 Port 2 L N
Ethernet Safety Earth
RJ45 (M4) Mains (supply)
Serial comms (option) connection
Not used Option board 9
Input
Inputchannels
channels43
1 to 748
Input
Inputchannels
channels31
1 to 736 Input board 6
Input board 5 Input channels 25 to 30
Input
Inputchannels
channels19
1 to 724 Input board 4
Input
Input channels
channels 71 to
to 12
7 Input board 2
Figure 14.2.2c Connector locations (recorder)
User Guide HA028910

2
Block
te CJ
Wire colours chosen
for clarity
Remo Remote CJ unit (input boards 4 to 6) Upper connector
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+ I+ S+ I- S-
Remote CJ unit (input boards 4 to 6) Middle connector
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+ I+ S+ I- S-
V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I Recorder input
2 3 5 6 8 9 13 14 16 17 19 20 21 board 6
Chan 31 Chan 32 Chan 33 Chan 34 Chan 35 Chan 36
V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I
Recorder input
2 3 5 6 8 9 13 14 16 17 19 20 21
board 5 Remote CJ unit (input boards 4 to 6) Lower connector
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+ I+ S+ I- S-
Remote CJ unit (input boards 1 to 3) Upper connector
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+ I+ S+ I- S-
2 3 5 6 8 9 13 14 16 17 19 20 21 board 4
Chan 19 Chan 20 Chan 21 Chan 22 Chan 23Chan 24
2 3 5 6 8 9 13 14 16 17 19 20 21 board 3
Remote CJ unit (input boards 1 to 3) Middle connector
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+ I+ S+ I- S-
Remote CJ unit (input boards 1 to 3) Lower connector
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+ I+ S+ I- S-
2 3 5 6 8 9 13 14 16 17 19 20 21 board 2
Chan 7 Chan 8 Chan 9 Chan 10 Chan 11Chan 12
board 1
Remote CJ Block 1
2 3 5 6 8 9 13 14 16 17 19 20 21
Figure 14.2.2c Wiring details

Dimensions 145 mm wide x 127.5 high x 75.6 mm deep (excluding DIN rail)
145 mm 75.6 mm
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+
127.5 mm
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+ I+ S+ I- S-
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+ I+ S+ I- S-
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+ I+ S+ I- S-
HA028910 User Guide

14.3 SMALL FRAME RECORDER
14.3.1 Introduction
This option allows up to 15 thermocouples of any type(s) to be connected to the recorder using miniature
compensating connectors at a DIN rail mounted Remote CJ connector unit, with copper wire connec-
tions from this unit to the recorder input boards.. Thermocouples may be connected to the Remote CJ
unit directly, or by using extension compensating cable.
Each row of five sockets has an associated aluminium bar, to which is bonded a resistance temperature
detector (RTD) which acts as a cold junctions sensor, connected to the sixth channel of each of the three
input boards. For this reason, connector numbers 6 to 15 do not match the input channel numbering,
but the recorder configuration names the channels in an unambiguous way, to reduce confusion. Table
14.3.1 gives details.
14.3.2 Signal wiring

Caution
SIGNAL WIRING
Signal wiring consists of
1. connecting the transducer wires into the correct type of plug (figure 14.3.2a), and inserting the plugs
into the relevant sockets in the remote CJ unit.
2 Connecting the Remote CJ unit to the recorder input board terminals..
Figure 14.3.2b shows the arrangement of the connectors at the remote CJ unit, and the recorder; figure
14.3.2c shows the wiring between the remote CJ unit and the recorder.
+ wire
User Guide HA028910

11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+
Upper connector
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+ I+ S+ I- S-
Middle connector
Lower connector
a. Remote CJ unit
Safety Earth
USB 1 USB 2 (M4)
USB Ports (option)
E
L N
Port 1 Port 2 Ethernet Mains (supply)
RJ45 connection
Option slot 1 Option slot 2
Input channels 13 to 18 Input board 3 (to CJ unit

upper connector)
Input channels 7 to 12 Input board 2 (to CJ unit

middle connector)
Input board 1 (to CJ unit

lower connector)
b. Recorder
Figure 14.3.2b Connector locations
HA028910 User Guide


Remote CJ unit
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+ I+ S+ I- S- Upper connector
V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I V+ V- I Recorder input board 3

2 3 5 6 8 9 13 14 16 17 19 20 21

Wire colours chosen
for clarity
Remote CJ unit
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+ I+ S+ I- S- Middle connector
Recorder input board 2
2 3 5 6 8 9 13 14 16 17 19 20 21
Remote CJ unit
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+ I+ S+ I- S-
Lower connector
Recorder input board 1
2 3 5 6 8 9 13 14 16 17 19 20 21
Figure 14.3.2c Wiring details

Dimensions 145 mm wide x 127.5 high x 75.6 mm deep (excluding DIN rail)
145 mm 75.6 mm
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+
127.5 mm
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+
11- 11+ 12- 12+ 13- 13+ 14- 14+ 15- 15+ I+ S+ I- S-
6- 6+ 7- 7+ 8- 8+ 9- 9+ 10- 10+ I+ S+ I- S-
1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ 4- 4+ 5- 5+ I+ S+ I- S-
User Guide HA028910

15 TUS OPTION
This option affects the way in which operator batch initiation occurs. Section 4.3.10 contains a full de-
scription of batch recording and the user should refer to that section for details not contained here. The
option also incorporates the ‘Remote CJ block’ option, so channels 6, 12, 18 and so on are ‘reference’
channels used to measure the block temperature.
15.1 PRE CALIBRATION AND POST CALIBRATION ENABLE

If the TUS option is fitted, two extra ‘tick boxes’ (‘Pre calibration’ and ‘Post calibration’) appear in the
Batch configuration menu (figure 15.1).
Figure 15.1 Batch configuration menu
Pre calibration
If this tick box is enabled, the operator is required to carry out an input adjust procedure before the batch
can be initiated.
Post calibration
If this tick box is enabled, the operator is required to carry out an input adjust procedure when the batch
is stopped.
HA028910 User Guide

15.2 INPUT ADJUST

Notes
1. Input adjust cannot be applied to input channels with input type of ‘Digital’, ‘Test’ or ‘comms’.
2. Input adjustments can be carried out only by users with ‘Adjust I/O’ permission (see section 4.4.1).
3. The instrument must be powered for a sufficient time (e.g. 30 mins) for it to reach thermal equi-
librium before an input adjust is performed.
4. The highest numbered channel on each input board (i.e. input channels 6, 12, 18 etc.) are refer-
ence channels and cannot be adjusted
This facility allows the user to compensate for tolerance errors etc. The technique used is to select those
channels to which adjust is to be applied, then for each channel to:
a apply a known low level signal (at or close to the low input range value) to the relevant input. When
the recorder reading is steady, press ‘Apply’.
b. apply a known high level signal (at, or close to, the high input range value) to the relevant input.
When the recorder reading is steady, press ‘Apply’.
Figure 15.2a shows the initial display. Channels 1 to 6 are selected by default.

Note: Channel 6 not available for

adjustment

Figure 15.2a Input adjust status page

First channel Allows the user to select the lowest channel number of all the channels to be adjusted.
Last channel Allows the user to select the highest channel number of all the channels to be adjusted.
Select Channels Presents a list of all the channels from the First channel to the Last channel inclusive,
each of which can be removed from the adjustment list by ‘unticking’ its check box.
The channels displayed in the status page reflect this selection.
Adjust channels Initiates the adjustment procedure to all the channels from the First channel to the
Last channel inclusive, unless the list has been modified using the ‘Select Channels’
key.
Fast Settle Switches off the input filter for 1 second,to allow quicker response. Adjust Channels’
values displayed as ‘RANGING’ for the 1 second duration.
Exit Quits the current page. Must be operated after adjustment is complete, in order to
continue batch initiation.
1) Temps1a etc. A list of channels required to be susceptible to the adjustment procedure, together
with their current values and their adjustment status (i.e. Unadjusted or, the time/date
of the previous adjustment (if any)).
User Guide HA028910

15.2 INPUT ADJUST (Cont.)

ADJUST PROCEDURE
Note: Adjusting a channel invalidates the accuracy values given in the specification in Annex A for
that channel.
Operation of the Adjust Channels key calls the low-end adjust page, as shown in figure 15.2b.

Discard Apply
Figure 15.2b Typical low-end input adjust page

Low Point Usually 0, but a different value can be entered here, if required.
Apply the Low point value to the relevant input channels, and wait for the recorder readings to become
stable. When the readings are stable, press the Apply key, to call the High-end page depicted in figure
15.2c, below.

Discard Apply
Figure 15.2c Typical high-end input adjust page

High Point Default value displayed, but a different value can be entered here, if required.
Apply the High point value to the relevant input channels, and wait some minutes for the recorder read-
ings to become stable. When the readings are stable, press the Apply key, to return to the status page,
then press ‘Exit’. If this is a Pre calibration check, the Batch initiation continues as described in section
4.6.10.
HA028910 User Guide

15.3 CHART MESSAGES

If Audit Trail is enabled then a number of messages appear on the chart, and included in the history file
as described in section 4.4.2. If the TUS option is enabled, ‘Pre calibration’ and/or ‘Post calibration tick
boxes are ticked, then further messages are produced for each adjusted channel, showing the pre cali-
bration and post calibration high and low values.
Example:
05/10/10 16:20:57 5) Temps1e Pre cal high 5.010 Post cal high 5.000
05/10/10 16:20:57 4) Temps1d Pre cal high 4.994 Post cal high 5.000
05/10/10 16:20:57 3) Temps1c Pre cal high 5.001 Post cal high 5.000
05/10/10 16:20:57 2) Temps1b Pre cal high 4.997 Post cal high 5.000
05/10/10 16:20:57 1) Temps1a Pre cal high 4.993 Post cal high 5.000
05/10/10 16:20:57 5) Temps1e Pre cal low 0.000 Post cal low 0.000
05/10/10 16:20:57 4) Temps1e Pre cal low -0.002 Post cal low 0.000
05/10/10 16:20:57 2) Temps1e Pre cal low 0.001 Post cal low 0.000
15.4 OTHER ITEMS

Input channels 6, 12, 18 etc. are reference channels used to measure the temperature of the remote CJ
block. They are therefore excluded from the adjust procedure and channel offsets (section 4.3.3) cannot
be applied to them.
In ‘Save and Restore’, channel configuration will not be restored.
Batch initiation must be by operator action - job triggered batches do not support pre and post calibra-
tion.
User Guide HA028910

ANNEX A: SPECIFICATION
INSTALLATION CATEGORY AND POLLUTION DEGREE

This product has been designed to conform to BS EN61010 installation category II and pollution degree
2. These are defined as follows:
Installation category II
The rated impulse voltage for equipment on nominal 230V ac mains is 2500V.
Pollution degree 2
Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally, however, a temporary conductivity
caused by condensation shall be expected.
HA028910 User Guide

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Recorder)
Board types (I/O)

Universal input board
Relay output boards (3 change-over, 4 normally closed or 4 normally open relays per board)
6 - event input board
Serial communications board
2 - channel analogue output (retransmission) board
Standard features
Bridge ‘Lite’
Configuration Copy
CSV Archive file format
E-mail
File transfer protocol (FTP)
6 Groups
Job search
Log scales
MODBUS TCP
Messages
Timers
USB port behind access flap (not stainless-steel case option)
Web server
Options
Software: ASCII Printer output (supplied as a part of the Serial Communications option)
Audit trail
21CFR11Audit
Batch Recording
Bridge ‘Full’ version
EtherNet/IP Server (adapter)
Event Buttons (supplied as a part of the Screen Builder option)
Master Comms
Maths/Totalisers/Counters
Multiple groups (six additional groups)
Screen Builder (User screens)
Security Manager
Simulation
Thermal Uniformity Survey (TUS)
Hardware: Transmitter power supply - isolated (100 mm recorders only)
Low supply voltage
Access flap lock
Stainless steel case (no access flap) (check availability)
Further two USB ports at rear of recorder
Serial Communications
Environmental Performance
Temperature limits Operation: 0 to 50˚C.
Storage: - 20 to +60˚C
Humidity limits Operation: 5% to 80% RH non - condensing
Storage: 5% to 90% RH non - condensing
Altitude (maximum) <2000 metres
Protection Standard bezel/display: IP66 for a recorder mounted in a panel.
Standard sleeve: IP20
Portable case option: IP21
Stainless-steel case: IP66 for a recorder mounted in a panel.
Shock BS EN61010
Vibration (10 Hz to 150Hz) 2g peak
User Guide HA028910

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (RECORDER) (Cont.)
Physical
Panel mounting DIN 43700
Bezel size Small frame: 144mm x 144mm
Note: For portable case dimensions - see section 13.
Large frame: 292mm x 292mm
Panel cutout Small frame: 138mm x 138mm (-0.0 + 1.0) mm
Large frame; 281mm x 281mm (-0.0 + 1.0) mm
Depth behind bezel Small frame: 246.5 mm (211.5 mm without terminal cover, 284 with long terminal cover)
Large frame: 260.90 mm (211 mm without terminal cover)
Weight Small frame: 3 kg. max. (5 kg. max. if fitted in portable case)
Large frame: 7 kg. max.
Mounting angle ±45 ˚ from vertical
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Emissions and immunity: BS EN61326
Electrical safety
BS EN61010. Installation category II, Pollution degree 2
Power requirements
Supply voltage Standard: 100 to 230 VAC (±15%); 47 to 63 Hz or 110 to 370V dc (dc supply not to be used if isolated transmitter power supply
fitted)
Low voltage option: 20 to 42V RMS; 45 to 400 Hz, or 20 to 54V dc (option not to be used if isolated transmitter power supply fitted)
Power (max.) All options: 60 W
Inrush current Standard: 36A Note:
Low voltage option: 36A Check factory for availabil-
Namur compliant option: 5.5A at 25˚C ity of Low Voltage option
Fuse type None
Interrupt protection Standard: Holdup >200msec. at 240V ac, with full load.
Low voltage option: Holdup 20msec at 20Vdc or RMS, with full load.
Back-up battery
Type Poly-carbonmonofluoride/lithium (BR2330). Part Number PA261095. See also section B2.2.
Support time A fully-charged, new battery supports the Real-Time Clock for a minimum of 1 year with the recorder unpowered
Replacement period 3-years
Stored data Time; date; values for totalisers, counters and timers; batch data; values for those maths functions with history,
such as Fvalue, Rolling average, Stopwatch etc.
Clock (RTC) data

Temperature stability 0 to 50˚C: ± 20 ppm
Ageing ±5 ppm per year
Touch screen
Colour TFT LCD with cold-cathode backlighting, fitted with resistive, analogue, touch panel
Screen specification Small frame: 1/4 VGA Resolution = 320 x 240 pixels
Large frame: XGA Resolution= 1024 x 768 pixels
Update information
Input/relay output sample rate: 8 Hz.
Display update: 8 Hz,
Archive sample value: Latest value at archive time
Trended/displayed value: Latest value at display update time
HA028910 User Guide

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (RECORDER) (Cont.)

Ethernet Communications
Type 10/100 base T (IEEE802.3)
Protocols TCP/IP, FTP, DHCP, BootP, SNTP, Modbus, SMTP, ICMP.
Cable Type: CAT5
Maximum length: 100 metres
Termination: RJ45
RJ45 LED indicators Green: Indicates a 100MB link
Yellow: Indicates Ethernet activity
Internal green LED Indicates a 10MB link
Serial communications option

Number of ports Two, at rear of instrument
Protocol ASCII input, ASCII printer, Modbus master, Modbus slave.
Transmission standards EIA232 and/or EIA485, software selectable per port. EIA485 can be connected as 3-wire or 5-wire as required.
Isolation (dc to 65Hz BS EN61010) Installation category II; Pollution degree 2.
Terminals to ground: 50 V RMS or dc (basic insulation)
Transmitter power supply (Isolated) (Small frame recorders only)

Number of outputs Three
Output voltage 25V nominal
Max. current 20mA per output
Isolation (dc to 65Hz BS EN61010) Installation category II; Pollution degree 2.
Channel to channel: 100V RMS or dc (double insulation)
Channel to ground: 100V RMS or dc (basic insulation).
Fuse (20mm Type T)
Supply voltage = 110/120Vac: 100 mA
Supply voltage = 220/240Vac: 63 mA
USB ports
Number of ports 1 at front of recorder (standard*); 2 further ports (optional - at rear of instrument)
(*No front USB port with Stainless steel case option)
Standard USB1.1
Transmission speeds 12Mbits/sec (full speed devices) or 1.5Mbits/sec (low speed devices)
Maximum current per port 500mA
Peripherals supported Floppy disk drive, Keyboard, Bar code reader, Mouse, Memory stick.
Note: The recorder meets the industrial EMC requirements of BS EN61326. Typically, USB pe-
ripherals are tested to domestic information technology standards (BS EN55022) with category C
performance. Some USB peripherals, designed for use in domestic or office environments, can be
susceptible to ‘lock up’ in environments containing high electromagnetic field strengths. In order
to recover from such ‘lock up’ situations, the peripheral must be disconnected and then recon-
nected. Recorder operation is not affected.
Other items
Virus susceptibility The 6000 series VxWorks operating system is immune to viruses targeted at Windows based operating systems.
As at December 2005, there are no known viruses that target VxWorks.
Calibration coefficients Input: The Read-only input coefficients are stored in EEPROM on the input board.
Instrument: Instrument configuration is held in FLASH memory and has no effect on calibration coefficients.
User Guide HA028910

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Universal input board)

For small frame recorders only:
For 6 input recorders, up to four option boards may be fitted.
General*
For 12 input recorders up to four option boards may be fitted
Termination Edge connector/terminal block For 18 channel recorders up to two option boards may be fitted.
Max. number of inputs Small frame: 18 (three 6-input boards)
Large frame: 48 (eight 6-input boards)
Input ranges ±38mV; ±150mV; ±1Volt; ± 20 Volts
Input types Dc volts, dc millivolts, dc milliamps, (with external shunt), thermocouple, 2/3 wire resistance temperature detector
(RTD), Ohms, Contact closure (not channels 1, 7, 13,19, 25, 31, 37, 43) (Minimum contact closure = 60msec.)
Input type mix Freely configurable
Sample rate See ‘Update information’ above
Noise rejection (48 to 62Hz)
Common mode: >140dB (Channel to channel and channel to ground)
Series mode: >60dB
Maximum common mode voltage 250Volts continuous
Maximum series mode voltage 45mV at lowest range; 23.74 Volts peak at highest range
Isolation (dc to 65Hz; BS EN61010) Installation category II; Pollution degree 2
300V RMS or dc channel to channel (double insulation), channel to common electronics (double insulation) and
channel to ground (basic insulation)
Dielectric strength Channel to ground: 1500Vac for 1 minute.
Channel to channel: 2500Vac for 1 minute
Insulation resistance >10MΩ at 500V dc
Input impedance 20V range: 65.3kΩ
Other ranges: >10MΩ
Overvoltage protection 50V peak (150V with attenuator)
Open circuit detection (applies only to ± 38mV and ± 150mV ranges).
Detection current: ± 57nA max
Recognition time: 500mSec
Minimum break resistance: 10MΩ
Long term drift (typical) Better than 0.03% of reading or 30µV (whichever is greater) over a three month period.
DC input ranges
Shunt Externally mounted resistor modules
Additional error due to shunt 0.1% of input
Performance See table
Low High Typical error Maximum error Worst case temperature
Resolution
Range Range (Instrument at 20 deg C) (Instrument at 20 deg C) performance
-38 mV 38 mV 1.4 µV 0.013% input + 0.031% range 0.030% input + 0.052% range 25ppm of input per deg C
-1 V 1V 37 µV 0.013% input + 0.024% range 0.029% input + 0.029% range 25ppm of input per deg C
-20 V 20 V 720 µV 0.075% input + 0.027% range 0.393% input + 0.033% range 388ppm of input per deg C
Note: The table above applies to recorders with status level E7 or above (June 2007). For instru-
ments prior to this, see the table in ‘Previous instruments’ later in Annex A.
*WARNING
All I/O connections must be Low Voltage (maximum 33V ac RMS, 46.7V ac peak or 70Vdc) unless
the integrity of the instrument safety earth is maintained for as long as the I/O is connected to the
recorder.
HA028910 User Guide

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Universal input board) (Cont.)

Resistance inputs
Temperature scale ITS90
Types, ranges and accuracies See tables (values exclude influence of lead resistance)
Influence of lead resistance Error: Negligible
Mismatch: 1Ω/Ω
Maximum source current 250µA
Low High Resolu- Typical error Maximum error Worst case temperature
Range Range tion (Instrument at 20 deg. C) (Instrument at 20 deg. C) performance
0Ω 150Ω 5mΩ 0.027% input + 0.034% range 0.037% input + 0.077% range 30ppm of input per deg C
0Ω 5kΩ 148mΩ 0.030% input + 0.034% range 0.040% input + 0.041% range 30ppm of input per deg C
Note: The table above applies to recorders with status level E7 or above (June 2007). For instru-
ments prior to this, see the table in ‘Previous instruments’ later in Annex A.
RTD type Overall range (˚C) Standard Max. linearisation error

Cu10 -20 to + 400 General Electric Co. 0.02˚C
Cu53 -70 to + 200 RC21-4-1966 < 0.01˚C
JPT100 -220 to + 630 JIS C1604:1989 0.01˚C
Ni100 -60 to + 250 DIN43760:1987 0.01˚C
Ni120 -50 to + 170 DIN43760:1987 0.01˚C
Pt100 -200 to + 850 IEC751 0.01˚C
Pt100A -200 to + 600 Eurotherm Recorders SA 0.09˚C
Pt1000 -200 to + 850 IEC751 0.01˚C
Thermocouple data
Bias current 0.05nA
Cold junction compensation types Off, internal, external, remote
Remote CJC source: Any input or maths channel.
Internal CJC error 1˚C max with instrument at 25˚C
Internal CJC rejection ratio 50:1 minimum
Upscale/downscale drive Types: ‘High’. ‘low’ or ‘none’ selectable for each thermocouple channel.
Additional error: Typically 0.01˚C - depends on wiring. (Detect current = 57nA.)
Types, ranges and accuracies See table
T/C type Overall range (˚C) Standard Max.linearisation error

0 to 400˚C = 1.7˚C
B 0 to + 1820 IEC584.1
400 to 1820˚C = 0.03˚C
C 0 to + 2300 Hoskins 0.12˚C
D 0 to + 2495 Hoskins 0.08˚C
E -270 to + 1000 IEC584.1 0.03˚C
G2 0 to + 2315 Hoskins 0.07˚C
J -210 to + 1200 IEC584.1 0.02˚C
K -270 to + 1372 IEC584.1 0.04˚C
L -200 to + 900 DIN43710:1985 (To IPTS68) 0.02˚C
N -270 to + 1300 IEC584.1 0.04˚C
R -50 to + 1768 IEC584.1 0.04˚C
S -50 to + 1768 IEC584.1 0.04˚C
T -270 to + 400 IEC584.1 0.02˚C
U -200 to + 600 DIN43710:1985 0.08˚C
NiMo/NiCo -50 to + 1410 ASTM E1751-95 0.06˚C
Platinel 0 to + 1370 Engelhard 0.02˚C
Ni/NiMo 0 to + 1406 Ipsen 0.14˚C
Pt20%Rh/Pt40%Rh 0 to + 1888 ASTM E1751-95 0.07˚C
User Guide HA028910

WORST CASE ERROR CALCULATION

Assuming type T thermocouple at 350˚C, ambient temp = 40˚C, CJC = internal.
Total error = input error + range error + temperature error +linearisation error + cold junction error.
Input error:
From thermocouple tables, a type T thermocouple generates a voltage of 17.819mV at 350 ˚C. From the
dc performance table above, the maximum error is 0.030% input = 0.03 x 17.819/100 = 5.346µV
Range error:
The 38mV range is used as the type t thermocouple is defined to cover the range -270˚C (-6.258mV) to
+400˚C (20.872mV). From the dc performance table, the maximum range error is 0.052% range, and the
range is 38 + 38 = 76 mV. Thus the maximum range error is 0.052 x 76/100 = 39.52µV.
Temperature error:
The dc performance table above is specifed at 20˚C, but the ambient in this example is 40˚C. From the
dc performance table, the worst case temperature performance is 25ppm/˚C, so our error is 25 x (40-20)
x 17.819 x 10 -6 = 8.910µV.
Linearisation error:
From the thermocouple table, the maximum linearisation error for a type t thermocouple is 0.02 ˚C
Cold junction compensation (CJC) error:

The internal CJC error is 1˚C maximum with the instrument at 25˚C. The CJC rejection ratio is 50:1, so a
further error of (40-25)/50 = 0.30 ˚C may occur, giving a total maximum CJC error of 1.3˚C.
Maximum error
From the above, the total error adds up as follows:
Input error: 5.346µV
Range error: 39.520µV
Temperature error: 8.910µV
Linearisation error: 0.02˚C
CJC error: 1.30 ˚C
Total error: 53.776µV + 1.32˚C
From thermocouple tables, a change of 1˚C is equivalent to a change of 60µV, so a change of 53.776µV is
equivalent to a change of 0.896˚C.
Thus the total worst case error for this example is (0.896 + 1.32) = 2.216˚C
HA028910 User Guide

PREVIOUS INSTRUMENTS
This section contains dc performance and resistance input data for instruments with status levels prior to
D6 (June 2007).
DC input ranges
Shunt Externally mounted resistor modules
Additional error due to shunt 0.1% of input
Low High Typical error Maximum error Worst case temperature

Resolution
Range Range (Instrument at 20 deg C) (Instrument at 20 deg C) performance
-1 V 1V 37 µV 0.035% input + 0.024% range 0.084% input + 0.029% range 80ppm of input per deg C
-20 V 20 V 720 µV 0.097% input + 0.027% range 0.448% input + 0.033% range 443ppm of input per deg C
Note: The table above applies to recorders with status level prior to E7 (June 2007). For instru-
ments with a status level of E7 or above, see the equivalent table earlier in Annex A.
*WARNING
All I/O connections must be Low Voltage (maximum 33V ac RMS, 46.7V ac peak or 70Vdc) unless
the integrity of the instrument safety earth is maintained for as long as the I/O is connected to the
recorder.
Resistance inputs
Types, ranges and accuracies See tables (values exclude influence of lead resistance)
Influence of lead resistance Error: Negligible
Mismatch: 1Ω/Ω
Maximum source current 250µA
Low High Resolu- Typical error Maximum error Worst case temperature
Range Range tion (Instrument at 20 deg. C) (Instrument at 20 deg. C) performance
0Ω 6kΩ 148mΩ 0.030% input + 0.028% range 0.045% input + 0.035% range 35ppm of input per deg C
Note: The table above applies to recorders with status level prior to E7 (June 2007). For instru-
ments with a status level of E7 or above, see the equivalent table earlier in Annex A.
RTD type Overall range (˚C) Standard Max. linearisation error
Cu10 -20 to + 400 General Electric Co. 0.02˚C
Cu53 -70 to + 200 RC21-4-1966 < 0.01˚C
JPT100 -220 to + 630 JIS C1604:1989 0.01˚C
Ni100 -60 to + 250 DIN43760:1987 0.01˚C
Ni120 -50 to + 170 DIN43760:1987 0.01˚C
Pt100 -200 to + 850 IEC751 0.01˚C
Pt100A -200 to + 600 Eurotherm Recorders SA 0.09˚C
Pt1000 -200 to + 850 IEC751 0.01˚C
User Guide HA028910

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Relay output board)
General
Maximum number of relay boards
Small-frame unit Four
Large-frame unit Nine
Number of relays per board
Changeover relays: Three
Normally open relays: Four
Normally closed relays: Four
Estimated mechanical life 30,000,000 operations
Update rate See ‘Update rates’ in ‘Recorder specification’ above
AC load ratings
Derating
The figures given below are for resistive loads. For reactive or inductive loads, de-rate in accordance with graph 1, in which
F1 = Actually measured results on representative samples
F2 = Typical values (according to experience)
Contact life = Resistive contact life x reduction factor.
Maximum switching power 500VA
Maximum contact voltage 250V providing this does not cause the maximum switching power (above) to be exceeded
Maximum contact current 2 Amps providing this does not cause the maximum switching power (above) to be exceeded
DC load ratings
Maximum switching power See graph 2 for operating volt/Amp envelope
Maximum contact voltage/current See graph 2 for examples.
Safety isolation
Isolation (dc to 65 Hz; BS EN61010) Installation category II; Pollution degree 2
Relay to relay: 300V RMS or dc (double insulation)
Relay to ground: 300V RMS or dc (basic insulation)
Max. DC load breaking capacity

F 300
1
0.9 200
0.8 F2 resistive load
DC Voltage (Volts)
Reduction Factor F
0.7 F1 100
0.6
0.5
50
0.4 40 inductive load
30 (L/R = 20msec)
0.3 20
1 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2
Power factor (cos φ)
10
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 20
DC current (Amps)
Graph 1 Derating curves for ac loads Graph 2 DC load switching curves
HA028910 User Guide

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Event input board)
General
Maximum number of event input boards Four
Number of inputs per board Six
Type of input Contact closure (active closed) or voltage level (active low)
Recognition levels (input to ‘C’ terminal) (R = contact resistance)
Active: -30V to + 0.8V or switch contacts closed (R < 35kΩ).
Undefined: + 0.8V to + 2.0V (35 kΩ < R < 200kΩ)
Inactive: + 2V to +30V or switch contacts open (R > 200kΩ).
Maximum frequency 8 Hz
Minimum closure or pulse width 62.5 msec
Current sink for voltage inputs 10mA max
Isolation
Event input to ground: 50V RMS or dc (double insulation)
Event input to Event input: 0V
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Analogue output board)
General
Max number of analogue o/p boards Four
Number of outputs per board Two
Output ranges Voltage: 0 to 10V (source 5mA max.)
Current: 0 to 20 mA
Update rate See ‘Update rates’ in ‘Recorder specification’ above
Step response 250msec (10% to 90%)
Linearity 0.024% of hardware range
Performance in instrument at 20 deg. C

Range Accuracy Temperature drift
0 to 10 V 0.1% of range –0.12mV +0.022% of reading per deg. C
0 to 20 mA 0.1% of range – 1µA + 0.03% of reading per deg. C
Safety isolation
Isolation (dc to 65 Hz; BS EN61010) Installation category II; Pollution degree 2
Output channel-to output channel: 300V RMS or dc (double insulation)
Output channel to ground: 300V RMS or dc (basic insulation)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (ASCII Printer)
See the documentation supplied with the printer
User Guide HA028910

ANNEX B: REFERENCE
B1 DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY
B1.1 MAIN DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

At power-up, continuously hold a finger in contact with the screen until the main diagnostic display ap-
pears as shown in figure B1.1
Special Modes Display Test
Touch Calibration System Summary
Diag Summary Quit
Figure B1.1 Top-level diagnostic display
HA028910 User Guide

B1.2 SPECIAL MODES

For factory use only, selecting 'Special Modes' allows the enabling and disabling of the Sales Demo
mode of operation.
An 'S' symbol is displayed at the top of the screen whilst the recorder is in sales demo mode.
B1.3 DISPLAY TEST

Selecting this option, allows the user to check the display by flooding the screen with single colours.
Repeatedly touching the screen, scrolls through the following colour sequence: Black, White, Red, Green,
Blue, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow. A further operation of the touch screen returns the main diagnostic screen.
B1.4 TOUCH CALIBRATION

Touching this key calls a selection screen as shown below:
Touch Screen Calibrate
Touch Screen Verify
Main Menu
Figure B1.4 Touch screen selections
User Guide HA028910

B1.4.1 Touch screen calibrate

This key initiates the display calibration (offset correction) procedure. This procedure ensures that the
display screen image is positioned correctly compared with the touch screen (so that 'what you touch is
what you get'). The procedure, is necessary only rarely, if at all, and is included here only for the sake of
completeness.
1. Operate the 'Touch Screen Calibrate' key to call the first calibration screen, as depicted in figure
B1.4.1
2. Using the stylus, touch the intersection of the upper set of crosshairs, as requested by the display
and keep touching it until the next target appears.
3. Continue the process, according to the directions appearing on the screen. Once all the 'targets'
have been accepted, the recorder returns to the diagnostic display.
Touch top left target
Figure B1.4.1 Initial calibration display
B1.4.2 Touch screen verify

This allows the user to check the accuracy of the touch screen without having to carry out the calibration
procedure described above.
Touching the screen with the stylus produces a crosshair at the position the recorder believes the screen
to have been touched. It is up to the user to decide if the response is good enough for recorder opera-
tion. After a few seconds of non-operation, the recorder returns to the top level touch screen display
(figure 1.4).
B1.4.3 Main menu

Touching this returns the user to the top level diagnostics screen (Figure B1.1)
HA028910 User Guide

B1.5 SYSTEM SUMMARY

This key calls a system summary display, as shown for a typical small-frame recorder, in figure B1.5.
SYSTEM SUMMARY
Variant: 6100A
Software: 4.0
DRAM: 67108864
SRAM: 32768
FLASH: 134217728
MAC address: 000A8D002026
Date: 02/08/05
Time: 16:41:58
Main Menu
Figure B1.5 System summary display
B1.6 DIAG SUMMARY

Note: The diagnostic display does not include details of the Transmitter Power Supply option (if
fitted).
MAC address Software version
00 00 00 N.N
Serial 1 Serial 2 BATTERY LOCKAB...
3_RELAY_1 4_RELAY_2
Option boards
4_RELAY_3 EVENT_IP_3
AI_6
Input boards
AI_6
Main Menu
Figure B1.6 Diag Summary (small frame recorder - large frame similar)
B1.6.1 MAC Address

Each instrument is allocated a unique hex address as a part of the manufacturing process. The display
at the top left of the display screen shows the final 6 characters of this address. The full address can be
found in the System Summary display, described above, or in the Network\Name display described in
section 4.5.1.
B1.6.2 Software version number

This shows the version number of the software fitted to the recorder.
User Guide HA028910

B1.6.3 Serial 1/Serial 2 9-way D-type socket

(solder bucket side)
Touching one of these keys performs a loopback test on the relevant Serial
port. In order for the test to be successful, a 9-way D-type socket, wired as in 1 2 3
5
figure B1.6.3, must be fitted to the relevant serial port at the rear of the re- 9
6 8
corder. If wired as shown, the socket is suitable for testing with both EIA232 7
and EIA485 communications standards. The test will result in the legend 'S1(2)
Passed' or 'S1(2) Failed' replacing 'Serial 1' or 'Serial 2' on the appropriate key. Short pin 1 to pin 7; pin 2 to pin 3;
If the Serial Comms option is not fitted, pressing either key returns a 'Failed' and pin 6 to pin 8
message. Figure B1.6.3

Loop back test wiring
B1.6.4 Battery
This area, normally green, flashes red/white when the battery needs to be replaced (section B2). Battery
status is checked once every 15 minutes.
B1.6.5 Lockable
The lockable flap display is green if the lockable flap is fitted, or flashes red/white if the option is not fit-
ted.
B1.6.6 Option boards

This shows which option boards are fitted where as viewed from the rear of the recorder.
RELAY OUTPUT BOARDS

If relay output boards are fitted, the associated relays can be tested, by touching the Option board key,
then touching the relevant relay key to energise/de-energise the relay. Figure B1.6.6 shows a typical
display.
RELAY TESTS
Exercise relays by
1 (Energised) 2 (De-Energised) touching keys.
Relay 4 greyed-out
3 (De-Energised) 4 (De-Energised) for 3-relay boards.
Return to previous
Main Menu menu level
Figure B1.6.6 Relay board test display
EVENT INPUTS
If event input boards are fitted, touching the option board key calls a display showing input status (1 = ac-
tive; 0 = not active). Changes in input status can be displayed by operating the 'Update' key.
B1.6.7 Input boards

This shows how many input boards are fitted.
HA028910 User Guide

B1.6.8 Main menu

To return to the main diagnostics display, touch the 'Main Menu' key.
B1.7 QUIT
Allows the user to quit diagnostics (after confirmation). The recorder restarts in normal operating mode.
B2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
B2.1 TOUCH SCREEN CLEANING

CAUTION
The touch-sensitive screen used in this product is designed for use by hand or by the stylus sup-
plied only. The use of sharp or pointed implements such as pens, keys and fingernails to operate
the instrument must be avoided, or irreparable damage will be done to the surface material. When
cleaning the touch-screen, a moist cloth should be used, if necessary with a minimal amount of
mild soap solution.
ALCOHOLS SUCH AS ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL MUST NEVER BE USED ON THE SCREEN.
User Guide HA028910

B2.2 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Battery replacement - Every three years
B2.2.1 BATTERY REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

WARNING
In order to eliminate the risk of user contact with hazardous voltages, the recorder must be iso-
lated from line power before its top cover is removed.
The battery is of poly-carbonmonofluoride/lithium construction and should be disposed of according to

local regulations covering this type of battery.
Note: All battery backed RAM data is lost during battery change (see Annex A for details of stored
data)..
1. Isolate the recorder from supply power and remove the recorder from the panel (if fitted)
2. Remove the recorder cover by removing the Four Torx headed screws (A) and the Pozidriv-headed
screw B, and then lifting the cover up and out, under the gasket (C).
A
A
A A
A
A
B A B
A
Large Frame
Small Frame
C
Note: Drawings are not to the same scale.
HA028910 User Guide

B2.2.1 BATTERY REPLACEMENT (Cont.)
3. With the cover removed, the battery board is accessible, allowing the exhausted battery to be slid
out of its holder and the replacement battery to be inserted (+ up).
Small Frame
Battery type BR2330

Disconnect connector for Part Number PA261095
access to battery
Large Frame
Note: drawings are not to the same scale.
User Guide HA028910

B2.3 FLAP RELEASE

For recorders fitted with the lockable flap option (section 2.4), it is possible to unlatch the flap from inside
the recorder as follows:
1. Remove the recorder cover as described in section B2.2.1, above.
2. Press down on the solenoid actuator to release the flap.
Fig 2.3a Flap release - small frame units Fig 2.3b Flap release - large frame units
Note: drawings are not to the same scale.
HA028910 User Guide

B3 OPTION ENABLING
See 'Upgrade' in section 4.6.3.
B4 COLOUR SELECTION
The following table, gives RGB values and decimal and hex numbers for the available channel colours.
Normally, this table is necessary only when communicating over the Modbus link.
Note: Colour representation varies from screen to screen. For this reason, it is unlikely that the
colour on a PC will match those on these pages or those on the recorder display.
User Guide HA028910

B4 COLOUR SELECTION (Cont.)
Colour Red Green Blue Decimal Hex
Red 255 0 0 0 00
Blue 0 0 255 1 01
Green 0 255 0 2 02
Honey 255 191 0 3 03
Violet 170 321 153 4 04
Russet 170 95 0 5 05
Dark Blue 0 0 102 6 06
Jade 0 95 0 7 07
Magenta 255 0 102 8 08

Dusky Rose 255 95 51 9 09
Yellow 255 255 255 10 0A
Powder Blue 85 63 255 11 0B
Dark Red 170 0 0 12 0C
Avocado 0 233 102 13 0D
Indigo 85 0 102 14 0E
Dark Brown 85 63 0 15 0F
Ægean 0 63 51 16 10
Cyan 0 255 255 17 11
Aubergine 85 0 51 18 12
Dark Orange 255 63 0 19 13
Pale Yellow 255 255 51 20 14
Hyacinth 170 0 51 21 15
Dark Green 0 63 0 22 16
Sugar Pink 255 31 204 23 17
Bluebell 85 31 255 24 18
Orange 255 95 0 25 19
Pink 255 159 255 26 1A
Buttermilk 255 255 102 27 1B

Table B4, sheet 1: Colour definitions 0 to 27
HA028910 User Guide

B4 COLOUR SELECTION (Cont.)
Colour Red Green Blue Decimal Hex
Terracotta 170 63 0 28 1C
Blue Babe 85 95 255 29 1D
Lime 0 223 0 30 1E
Blue Jive 85 31 204 31 1F
Cucumber 0 255 153 32 20
EuroGreen 67 107 103 33 21
Wheatgerm 255 223 51 34 22
Sea Blue 85 159 255 35 23
Ginger 255 159 0 36 24
Aqua Pool 0 63 255 37 25
Pale Red 255 63 51 38 26
Pale Blue 85 127 255 39 27
Lilac 170 0 255 40 28
Sky Blue 85 191 255 41 29
Wild Moss 0 127 0 42 2A
Turquoise 0 127 153 43 2B
Pale Green 85 255 153 44 2C
Coffee 170 127 0 45 2D
Wicker 255 255 191 46 2E
Black 0 0 0 47 2F
Dark Dark Grey 48 48 48 48 30
Dark Grey 64 64 64 49 31
Grey 128 128 128 50 32
Light Light Dark Grey 154 154 154 51 33
Light Dark Grey 172 172 172 52 34
Light Grey 192 192 192 53 35
Light Light Grey 212 212 212 54 36
White 255 255 255 55 37

Table B4, sheet 2: Colour definitions 28 to 55
User Guide HA028910

B5 TCP PORT NUMBERS

The following TCP ports are made use of by the recorder. (This information would be needed by anyone
involved in setting up 'firewalls', which may be used selectively to block incoming or outgoing access to
specific ports.)
PORT Usage
20 File Transfer Protocol - data

21 File Transfer Protocol - control
25 E-mail; SMTP
80 Web access
123 SNTP server
502 Modbus/TCPIP communications
1264 Bridge communications - general
2222 EtherNet/IP communications
44818 EtherNet/IP communications
50010 Bridge communications - trend review
HA028910 User Guide

B6 ASCII CHARACTERS FOR SERIAL COMMS

This section contains details of the ASCII characters that may be used with the Serial Comms option. All
the ASCII characters listed can be used as Start or End-of-message characters, but only characters with
decimal codes 32 to 127 can be used in messages, as decimal codes 0 to 31 are replaced by Question
marks in messages.
Character Decimal Hex Character Decimal Hex Character Decimal Hex Character Decimal Hex
NUL 0 00 Space 32 20 @ 64 40 ‘ 96 60
SOH 1 01 ! 33 21 A 65 41 a 97 61
STX 2 02 " 34 22 B 66 42 b 98 62
ETX 3 03 # 35 23 C 67 43 c 99 63
EOT 4 04 $ 36 24 D 68 44 d 100 64
ENQ 5 05 % 37 25 E 69 45 e 101 65
ACK 6 06 & 38 26 F 70 46 f 102 66
BEL 7 07 ’ 39 27 G 71 47 g 103 67
BS 8 08 ( 40 28 H 72 48 h 104 68
HT 9 09 ) 41 29 I 73 49 i 105 69
LF 10 0A * 42 2A J 74 4A j 106 6A
VT 11 0B + 43 2B K 75 4B k 107 6B
FF 12 0C , 44 2C L 76 4C l 108 6C
CR 13 0D - 45 2D M 77 4D m 109 6D
SO 14 0E . 46 2E N 78 4E n 110 6E
SI 15 0F / 47 2F O 79 4F o 111 6F
DLE 16 10 0 48 30 P 80 50 p 112 70
DC1 17 11 1 49 31 Q 81 51 q 113 71
DC2 18 12 2 50 32 R 82 52 r 114 72
DC3 19 13 3 51 33 S 83 53 s 115 73
DC4 20 14 4 52 34 T 84 54 t 116 74
NAK 21 15 5 53 35 U 85 55 u 117 75
SYN 22 16 6 54 36 V 86 56 v 118 76
ETB 23 17 7 55 37 W 87 57 w 119 77
CAN 24 18 8 56 38 X 88 58 x 120 78
EM 25 19 9 57 39 Y 89 59 y 121 79
SUB 26 1A : 58 3A Z 90 5A z 122 7A
ESC 27 1B ; 59 3B [ 91 5B { 123 7B
FS 28 1C < 60 3C \ 92 5C | 124 7C
GS 29 1D = 61 3D ] 93 5D } 125 7D
RS 30 1E > 62 3E ^ 94 5E ~ 126 7E
US 31 1F ? 63 3F _ 95 5F Not printed 127 7F
Notes:
1 All the above characters can be used as Start or End-of-message characters (entered in deci-
mal)
2 If characters 0 to 31 ( 00 to 1F) are used as message characters, they will be replaced by ques-
tion marks on the screen.
User Guide HA028910

B7 TIME ZONE INFORMATION

This section gives an explanation of the time zone abbreviations listed in the System/Locale/Time Zone
pick list. The list starts at GMT, travelling Eastwards round the world.
Abbre- Full title Time at Hours of

viation noon GMT difference
GMT Greenwich mean time 12:00 0
UTC Co-ordinated Universal time 12.00 0
ECT Central European time 13:00 +1
EET Eastern European time 14:00 +2
ART Arabic standard time 14:00 +2
EAT Eastern African time 15:00 +3
MET Middle East time 15:30 +3.5
NET Near East time 16:00 +4
PLT Pakistan Lahore time 17:00 +5
IST India standard time 17:30 +5.5
BST Bangladesh standard time 18:00 +6
VST Vietnam standard time 19:00 +7
CTT China Taiwan time 20:00 +8
JST Japan standard time 21:00 +9
ACT Australia Central time 21:30 +9.5
AET Australia Eastern time 22:00 +10
SST Solomon standard time 23:00 +11
NST New Zealand standard time 24:00 +12
MIT Midway Islands time 01:00 -11
HST Hawaii standard time 02:00 -10
AST Alaska standard time 03:00 -9
PST Pacific standard time 04:00 -8
PNT Phoenix standard time 05:00 -7
MST Mountain standard time 05:00 -7
CST Central standard time 06:00 -6
EST Eastern standard time 07:00 -5
IET Indiana Eastern standard time 07:00 -5
PRT Puerto Rico and US Virgin Islands time 08:00 -4
CNT Canada Newfoundland time 08:30 -3.5
AGT Argentina standard time 09:00 -3
BET Brazil Eastern time 09:00 -3
CAT Central African time 11:00 -1
HA028910 User Guide

B8 HISTORY MAINTENANCE OPTION

This option, which must be specified at time of order, is intended for use by hire companies etc. who
have a requirement to remove all customer data from recorders which are not fitted with the 'Simulation'
option (which includes an 'Erase all history' job). See section 4.3.22 for a description of the Simulation op-
tion. The History maintenance option is not enabled in Trial Mode' (section 4.3.22).
The erase history procedure consists of entering a special keycode into the System\Upgrade\Key Code
area (section 4.6.3) and operating the 'Apply' button.
CAUTION
The option should be used with discretion, as once the history has been erased, it can never be
regained.
B8.1 KEYCODE EXTRACTION

Notes:
1. This operation can be carried out only from the recorder's operator interface. It is not possible
to extract the keycode or to erase history from a remote pc.
2. To be able to carry out the procedure below, users must have 'Paste/Delete Files' permission
enabled in the 'Security' menu (section 4.4.1).
3. The keycode displayed in the System/Upgrade menu returns to its previous value after a history
erase operation.
1. Recorders fitted with this option come complete with a file called 'HMT.TXT in the 'user/' area of the
filing system, accessed as described in section 5.
Filer Options
2. Highlight this file, and copy it using the Filer Options menu 'Copy' key.
3. With a memory device (e.g. SD card, Memory stick etc.) inserted, use the Filer New Delete
Options menu 'Paste' key to save the file into the removable media area.
Cut Copy
4. Move the storage device from the recorder to a pc, and open the file in an ap-
propriate program (e.g. 'Notebook') to reveal a key code. Paste Refresh
5. This keycode can be kept in a secure area for re-use in subsequent erase op-
erations for this recorder. Figure B8.1
Filer option menu
B8.2 ERASING HISTORY

1. Enter the key code into the recorder's System\Upgrade\Key Code area and operate the 'Apply' but-
ton.
2. Operate the 'Ok' button in the dialogue box (figure B8.2). This initiates the erasure of the recorder's
history files, after which the recorder restarts.
!!!HISTORY ERASE!!!
WARNING:
ALL HISTORY DATA WILL BE PERMANENTLY ERASED
(The instrument will restart after erasing history)
Are you ceratin you wish to proceed?
Ok Cancel
Figure B8.2 Confirmation dialogue box
Note: This operation erases only the recorder's history files; the recorder's configuration remains
unchanged. The Save/Restore 'New' selection (section 4.2), with all tickboxes ticked must be used
to reset the configuration to default values (if required).
User Guide HA028910

B9 MENU STRUCTURE
Section 4
Root Menu Engineer Group name
Archive Save/Restore C o n f i g Security Network System
18:10:39
05/10/05
Home Operator
Goto Group
Selected
Home page File Unlock Flap Group 1
Group 2
Trend display
mode Goto View Goto Group Group 3
Group 4
Engineer
Channel 1
Group name
Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6
11:52:0
4
05/10/05
Section 5
700.87ûC
Channel 1
487.39ûC 235.68ûC 378.99ûC 0.49V 0.85V
700.87
Group 5 Group 6
1
Engineer 17:06:41
400.00 480.00 560.00 640.00 720.00 800.00 05/10/05
\ Hide
05/10/05 11:51:18 Alarms(s) off 3(1) Name
\user\
Type
Flash Goto View: Group 1
\P c a r d\ Removable

11:49:24
05/10/05
Figure Figure Figures Figure Figure Figure
B9b B9c B9d to B9i B9j B9k B9l/ B9m
05/10/05 11:47:39 Alarms(s) on 3(1)

11:46:44 Go
dis to se
05//05
pla lec
y m ted

ode

Option Menu
Batch 2 Vertical trend
Note Alarm summary Message Log Engineer Group name 11:52:04
Horizontal trend
3
05/10/05
Engineer 17:07:39 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6
Faceplates On/Off 05/10/05
700.87ûC 487.39ûC 235.68ûC 378.99ûC 0.49V 0.85V
\user\ Hide
05/10/05 Logged out
Group name 09:06:22
Channel 1 700.87
05/10/05
Batch number:020205A12 05/10/05
Channel Cycling Off Name Type Date Bytes 400.00 480.00 560.00 640.00 720.00 800.00 Channel 1 700.87 ûC
user\
Alarm Summary All Messages All History 800
04/10/05 08:57:03
Enter History s d b\ 01/10/05 10:14:56 Message Log: Group name
l i b\ 29/09/05 14:25:13
1(1) Water temp 1a 60.0000 C 68.5277 05/10/05 11:51:18 Alarms(s) off 3(1)
05/10/05 09:06:18 Alarm(s) on 1(1)
2 (1) Water temp 1b 30.0000 C 23.4531
Trend History
cal\ 01/09/05 10:13:48 05/10/05 09:06:18 Operator's name: Andrew
Preparing History, please wait 2 (2)
3 (1)
Water temp 1b
0il pressure
10.0000 C
250.000 PSI
23.4531
260.3425
05/10/05 09:06:18 Batch number:020205A12
mode 4(1) Transfer 15.3678 05/10/05

05/10/05
05/10/05
09:06:18 Config Version:682759 Security Version 746261
09:06:18 Batch start (Engineer)
08:50:30 Configuration version 682,759 was 682,758 11:49:24
05/10/05 05/10/05 08:50:28 Batch) Name files by batch true was false
05/10/05
Channel 1 686.84 ˚C 05/10/05 11:49:50

05/10/05 08:50:28 Batch) On start log 3 was 1
400.00 480.00 560.00 640.00 720.00 800.00
05/10/05 11:47:39 Alarms(s) on 3(1)
11:52:04 05/10/05 08:50:28 Batch) Batch fields 3 was 1
05/10/05
05/10/05 11:51:18 Alarms(s) off 3(1) 11:46:44
04/10/05 16:42:11 Alarm(s) off 2(1) 05/10/05
04/10/05 16:32:50 Alarm(s) off 1(1)
04/10/05 16:31:05 Stop Batch,Signe : d E n g i n e e r , A u t h o r i:z e d E n g i n e e r , B e l t F a i l u r e
04/10/05 16:29:33 Alarm(s) Ackd 1(1) 2(1)
04/10/05 1 6 : 3 1 : 0 5 A c k a l l a l a r m s , S i g n:e d E n g i n e e r , A u t h o r i:z e d E n g i n e e r , B e l t F a i l u r e
11:49:24 04/10/05 16:27:13 Alarm(s) on1(1) 14:11:00 14:13:40 14:16:20
05/10/05 05/10/05 05/10/05 05/10/05
04/10/05 16:27:13 Alarm(s) on2(1)
400
04/10/05 14:06:22 Config Version:682759 Security Version 746261 05/10/05 12:02:20 Alarm(s) off 2 (1)
4
05/10/05 14:47:39 Alarms(s) on 3(1)
14:46:44
5
05/10/05
17:08:08
Numeric page
Engineer
05/10/05
\user\cal\ Hide
TouchScreen uha 03/10/05 10:13:48
Logged out
Group name 18:08:20
05/10/05
05/10/05
Channel 1 Furnace 1 Temp 13 1 hr/rev Furnace 1
Full Screen
Te..
700.87 Instead of using the Root menu:

1500.0000 0.0000 0.0000 1500.000
1 1 2 5 . 0 9 5 6 ûC
05/10/05 10:10
05/10/05 11:05
1 the Up and Down arrow keys can be

05/10/05 10:15
Furnace 1
Channel 2 Te..
Option Menu 1 1 1 3 . 9 8 0 6 ûC
Batch
Note
487.39 used to scroll through display modes; 105/10/05 11:00 05/10/05 10:20
Furnace 1
2 the left and right arrows can be used

Te..
Channel 3 1 2 0 0 . 9 4 5 6 ûC
E x i t H i s t o-
ry
Message Log
235.68 to scroll through groups 05/10/05 10:55 05/10/05 10:25
Flow 1
1 3 6 5 . 2 1/ l h r
Channel 4
378.99 05/10/05 10:50 05/10/05 10:30

Flow 2
1 2 9 9 . 6 5/ l h r
Channel 5
Typical displays -
0.49
Flow 3
05/10/05 10:45 05/10/05 10:35
V
see section 3.4 for full details. 05/10/05 10:40
05/10/05 11:07:52 Engineer,Restarted 11:07

9 8 9 . 5 4/ l h r
See also section 7 if a Screen

6 Builder option is fitted.
Filer Options
Horizontal bargraph Vertical bargraph
New Delete Logged out
Channel 1
Group name
700.87˚C
18:09:47
05/10/05 Logged out
Channel 1
Group name
Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5
10:43:50
05/10/05
700.87˚C 487.39˚C 235.68˚C 378.99˚C 0.49V

800.00 800.00 400.00 400.00 1.00
Cut Copy
400.00 800.00
Channel 2 487.39˚C
400.00 800.00
Paste Refresh Channel 3 235.68˚C
0.00 400.00
Channel 4 378.99˚C
0.00 400.00
Channel 5 0.49V
0.00 1.00
400.00 400.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Figure B9a Root key menu structure
HA028910 User Guide

B9 MENU STRUCTURE (Cont.)
Figure Figures Figure Figure Figure

B9c B9d to B9j B9k B9l/m
B9i
Archive Last Archive 23/08/05 11:32:18
(section 4.1) Local
Local Media mediacard Select Media card, or
USB port
Remote
Archive Last Hour
Archive Last Day

Remote
Archive Last 7 Days
Last Archive 23/08/2005 10:10:46
Archive Last 31 Days
Archive All
Archive Last Hour
Suspend Archiving
Archive Last Day
Cancel Archive
Archive Last 7 Days
Archive Last 31 days Media Full 08/09/2006 00:34:57
Media Size 31954944 Bytes
Archive All
Free Space 28786688 Bytes
Cancel Archive
Figure B9b Archive key menu structure
User Guide HA028910


Save as 6100
Figure Figures Figure Figure Figure Save
File Name
B9b B9d to B9j B9k B9l/m
Save
B9i
Configuration Data
Restore
Save/Restore Security Data
(section 4.2) Network Data
Screens Data
Save Restore
Restore New Configuration Data File Name
New Security Data

Network Data
Text
Screens Data
Import Screen
New/Default
Export Screen
Export User Linearsation
Text
Import Printer Driver File Name
Save As Text
Import Screen User Screen 1

File Name screen
Appear only if Screen
Builder option enabled Import
User Screen 1
Export screen File Name screen
Export
Import User Linearisation User linearisation 1) UserLin1

File Name userlin
Import
User linearisation 1) UserLin1
File Name userlin
Export User
Linearisation Export
\user\ Hide

cal\ Folder 14/04/05 12:35:08
config\ Folder 14/04/05 10:27:13
Filter1a Config 14/04/05 10:22:23 4445
lib\ Folder 14/04/05 10:23:14
Import Printer Driver sdb\ Folder 14/04/05 14:01:08
user\ Folder 14/04/05 17:30:29
File Name Printer
Import
FileName F i l t e r 1 b Save Cancel
Figure B9c Save/Restore menu structure
HA028910 User Guide


Instrument Name Instrument
Figure Figure Fig B9j Figure Figure Normal Display 100 %
Instrument (Section 4.3.1) Saver Display 50 %
B9b B9c B9k B9l/m
Instrument Save After 30 Minutes
Groups Modbus Address 1
Channels (Section 4.3.3) Modbus Security Disabled = Disabled
Channels
Views Channel Number 1) TurbineTempA Preset Hour 00
Value 50.002 22/08/05 11:04:56
Preset Minute 12
Archive
Input Type Thermocouple Disable Warning Dialogs
Events Lin Type Type K Show Operator Notes List
Figure B9e Range Low 0 C
Event Buttons Apply Discard
Range High 100 C
Messages Range Units C
Scaled
Groups (Section 4.3.2)
User Linearisations
Scale Low 0 %
Batch Scale High 100 % Group Number 1) Group 1
Maths Units % Trend Units mm/hr
Offset 0 % Descriptor Group 1
Figure B9f Totalisers Trend Type Adaptive
Scale Type Linear
Views A/B Switching
Counters Scale Divisions - Major 10
(Section 4.3.4)
Scale Divisions - Minor 1 Trend Speed 240 mm/hr
Timers
Home Time-out 0 Minutes Filter None Trend Interval 5 s
Figure B9g Connections Home Group 1) Group 1 Break Response None Circular Settings
Master Comms Scope Group Cold Junction Type Internal Circular Speed 1 week
Group 1) Group 1 Descriptor TurbineTempA Circular Chart Full New Chart
Figure B9h Output Channels Start At Monday
Display Enable A/B Switching
Demand Writes Home Page Circular Trend Spanned A Grid Type From Point
Emails Vertical Trend Span Low A 50 % from Channel 3
Horizontal Trend Span High A 100 % Recording Enable
Reports Circular Trend Zone Low A 0 % Recording Speed 1,200 mm/hr
Figure B9i
EtherNet/IP Server Vertical Bargraph Zone High A 100 % Recording Interval 1 s
Horizontal Bargraph Spanned B Trend History Duration 5.29 Days
Options
Numeric Page Zone Low B 0 % Archive to Media Enable
User Screen 1 Zone High B 100 % Archive via FTP Enable
User Screen 2 PV Format Numeric Alarm Message
User Screen 3 Max Decimal Digits 4 Ack Message
User Screen 4 Colour A 0 Point Type Totaliser
User Screen 23 Colour A 26 Selection 1-3,5,7,9
User Screen 24 Alarm Number 1
Bridge User Screens 0 Enable
Enable Unlatched
Apply Discard Type Absolute Low
Disable
Setpoint Source Constant
Threshold 75 % TurbineTempA List of all available points
Hysteresis 10 % TurbineTempB (input channels, maths
channels, totalisers etc.).
Dwell 1 s Etc.
Job Number 1
Apply Discard
Category No Action
Apply Discard
Figure B9d Config menu structure (sheet 1)
User Guide HA028910

Archive Save/Restore Config Security Network System Compression Normal

Remote
Figure Figure Fig B9j Figure Figure Flash Size 9 6 . 2 5 Mb
B9b B9c B9k B9l/m Archive Shortest Trend History G r o u p 1

Instrument (Section 4.3.5) Duration 1 0 . 8 6 Days
Lo
ca
Groups Show Remote settings
Figure B9d
l
Archive to Remote None
Channels
Event Number 1) Event 1 Ftp File format Binary
Views Source 1 Alarm on Group Remote path / h i s t o r y
Archive Events On Group 1) Group 1 Primary remote host 0.0.0.0
(Section 4.3.6) Source 2 Point Alarm
Events Primary login name a n o n y m o u s
On Math 12 Primary password * * * * *
Event Buttons Alarm 2
Messages Source 1 Sense Source 1
Secondary remote host 0.0.0.0
Operator And
User Linearisations Secondary login name a n o n y m o u s
Source 2 Sense Not Source 2
Batch Secondary password * * * * *
Descriptor Event 1
Maths Job Number 1
Category No Action Apply Discard
Figure B9f Totalisers
Lo
Apply Discard
ca
Counters
l
Archive
Timers (Section 4.3.5) Compression Normal
Event Buttons (Section 4.3.7)
Figure B9g Connections Flash Size 9 6 . 2 5 Mb
Button Number 1) Button 1
Master Comms Descriptor Button 1
Duration 1 0 . 8 6 Days
Figure B9h Output Channels Type Latched
CSV include Values
Text Off Text CSV include Messages
Demand Writes
Latched Text On Text CSV include Header details These fields appear only
Emails Require Signing CSV include Column headings if Media File Format is
'CSV' or 'Binary and CSV'
Require Authorisation CSV Date/Time format Spreadsheet numeric
Reports
Figure B9i CSV use Tab delimiter
EtherNet/IP Server Apply Discard
Show Local settings
Options User Linearisations Media mediacard
(Section 4.3.9) Archive to Media None
Media file format Binary and CSV
User Linearisation 3) UserLin3
Messages On Media Full Overwrite
Descriptor UserLin3
(Section 4.3.8) Media Size 30.4746094 Mb
Format Numeric
Message Number 1) The value of Removable Media Capacity 3 3 . 1 8 Days
Number of Points 2
Message The value of {1} = {2} & {3} = {4}, {5} Media Full event limit 100 %
X1 0
Y1 0 Replace {1} with Source Descriptor Apply Discard
X2 1 Replace {2} with Source Value
Y2 1 Replace {3} with Specified Descriptor

Apply Discard
Replace {4} with Specified Value
Replace {5} with Config Revision
Apply Discard
Figure B9e Config menu structure (sheet 2)
HA028910 User Guide


Figure Figure Fig B9j Figure Figure
B9b B9c B9k B9l/m

Instrument Maths Number 1) Fo 1
Value 32.65 Mins
Groups
Figure B9d Reset now
Reset button appears only
Channels for resettable functions

Function fValue
Views Fvalue of Channel 1

Archive Sterilizing Temp 121.1

Events
Low cut off 75
Figure B9e Event Buttons
Units Mins
Messages Descriptor Fo 1

A/B Switching
User Linearisations Batch
Scale Low 0 Mins
(Section 4.3.10)
Batch
Scale high 60
(Section 15) Scale Type None
Maths

Zone low 0 %

Totalisers Zone high 100 %

PV Format Numeric
Counters

Timers Colour 26

Figure B9g Connections Alarm Number 1
Apply Discard Maths Enable Off
Master Comms (Section 4.3.11) Job Number 1
Figure B9h Output Channels Category No Action
Apply Discard
Demand Writes
Emails
Timers (Section 4.3.14)
Totalisers (Section 4.3.12)
Reports
Figure B9i Timer number 1) Timer 1
EtherNet/IP Server Totaliser Number 1) Totaliser 1 Select totaliser
Enable number
Enable
Options Remaining 00:00:00
Value 123456 Units (totaliser)
Repeat in 00:00:00
Counters (Section 4.3.13) Total of Channel 1 Select channel etc. to be totalised
Reset now Low cut off 0 ch units Units of channel
being totalised
Counter number 1) Counter 1 High cut off 999999 ch units
Start now Enable Units Units
Descriptor Timer 1 Value OFF Units Preset 0 Units (totaliser)
Self start Units Units Preset now

Date Any Preset 0 Units
Month Any Period scaler 1
These fields appear Preset now
Hour Any only if 'Self start' is Unit scaler 1
enabled. Descriptor Counter 1 Descriptor Totaliser 1
Minute Any
A/B Switching A/B Switching
Second Any
Scale Low 0 Units Scale Low 0 Units (totaliser)
Duration 60 Seconds
Scale High 1 Units Scale High 1 Units (totaliser)
Repeat after 0 Seconds
Scale Type None Select None, Linear or Log (if log
Job Number 1 Scale Type None Select None orLinear
scales option fitted)
Category No Action Zone Low 0 % Zone Low 1 %
Zone High 100 % Zone High 100 %
Apply Discard Colour PV format Numeric Select Numeric or Scientific
0
Alarm Number 1 Select Alarm number Max Decimal Digits 4
Select: Off,
Enable Off Unlatched, Colour 0
Latched,
Job Number 1 Select Job number Trigger Alarm Number 1 Select Alarm number
Select: Off,
Category No Action Select Job category Latched,
Apply Discard Category No Action Select Job category
Apply Discard
Figure B9f Config menu structure (sheet 3)
User Guide HA028910


Archive Save/Restore Config Security Network System Port Serial 1 Select port
Figure Figure Fig B9j Figure Figure Link Error Count 0
Online
B9b B9c B9k B9l/m Reset Error Count Link Error Count 0
Protocol ASCII (input) Reset Error Count
Instrument
Connection EIA232
Protocol ASCII Printer
Groups
Baud Rate 19200
Figure B9d Connection EIA232
Channels Stop Bits 1
Views Parity None
Archive Data Bits 8
Parity Even Select None, Odd or Even
Timeout 250 ms
Events Printer Type Star TSP600 Select printer type
First Start Char 0
Figure B9e Event Buttons Second Start Char 0 Printer Name Star TSP600(0)
First End Char 13 Printer Status Not Responding
Messages
Second End Char 10
User Linearisations Printer Test
Group 1
Batch Group 2 Print Messages From1) Group 1
ASCII input
(Section 4.3.15) Group 3 Messages To Print
Maths
Group 4 System
Figure B9f Totalisers Group 5 Alarms
Counters Group 6 Power Up
General
Timers Apply Discard ASCII Printer = Print these messages
Batches
(Section 12)
Connections Logins
Signings
Master Comms
Audit Trail
Figure B9h Output Channels
Apply Discard
Demand Writes
Emails
Reports
Figure B9i Modbus Slave (Section 4.3.15) Modbus Master (Section 4.3.15)
EtherNet/IP Server
Options Port Serial 1 Select port Port Serial 1 Select port
Link Error Count 0 Link Error Count 0

Reset Error Count
Reset Error Count
Protocol Modbus Slave Protocol Modbus Master
Connection EIA232 Connection EIA232
Baud Rate 19200 Select required Baud rate. Baud Rate 19200 Select required Baud rate.
Stop Bits 1 Select 1 or 2 Stop Bits 1 Select 1 or 2
Parity None Select None, Odd or Even Parity None Select None, Odd or Even
Timeout 1000 ms
Apply Discard Enable error code B
Enable Talk Through
Apply Discard
Figure B9g Config menu structure (sheet 4)
HA028910 User Guide


High Priority interval 0.125 Seconds
Figure Figure Fig B9j Figure Figure Medium priority interval 1 Seconds
B9b B9c B9k B9l/m Low priority interval 2 Seconds
Instrument
Store diagnostics
Groups
Figure B9d Slave 1) Remote Device 1
Channels Enable
Views Online
Descriptor Remote Device 1
Archive
Master Comms Network Ethernet
Events (Section 4.3.16) IP Address 149.121.30.0
Figure B9e Event Buttons Modbus address 1
Messages Detect This Slave Output Channel Number 1) Output 1
User Linearisations Enable
Profile Third Party V
Batch
Output Type
Timeout 250 ms Output 1
Descriptor
Maths Retry 3
Range Low 0
Figure B9f Totalisers Max Block Size 124 Register
Range High 10
Share Socket
Counters Offset 0
Login Required
Timers Source span low 0
Username Username
Source span high 10
Figure B9g Connections Password ********
Data Source Channel 1
Master Comms Apply Discard Detect All Slaves
p On Error Drive Off
ogu e o/
Output Channels Anal
Demand Writes Apply Discard
Demand Writes Output channels
M
(Section 4.3.18)
as
(Section 4.3.17)
te
Emails
rC
Write number 1) Write 1
om
Reports 1) Output 1
m
Figure B9i Enable
s
EtherNet/IP Server Enable
Demand Type Master Comms
Options Output Type Master Comms
Status OK
Slave 1) Furn Recorder 2
Demand Write Parameter Comms Channel
Slave 1) Furn 1 Recorder Scaling High/Low
Parameter Alarm setpoint 2 Scale Low 0 Scaling items appear only
Scale High 100 for some slave types
Point Type Channel
Point Number 1 Point Type Channel
Descriptor Write 1 Point Number 1
Source Channel 1 Process Value Medium Priority
Default 0 Descriptor Output 1
Allow Constant Edits Source 1) Channel 4
On Error Write Default Default 0
Disable Retries On Error Write Default
Send On Power Up Apply Discard Detect All Slaves
Apply Discard
Figure B9h Config menu structure (sheet 5)
User Guide HA028910


Mail Server
Figure Figure Fig B9j Figure Figure Port Number 25
B9b B9c B9k B9l/m
Instrument Sender Recorder IP address
Email
Errors To
Groups (Section 4.3.19)
Figure B9d Retry Time 60 Seconds
Channels
Recipient List 1) List1
Views
Descriptor List1
Archive
Rcpt1
Events Rcpt2
Figure B9e Event Buttons Report 1) Report 1 Rcpt3
Descriptor Report 1 Rcpt4
Messages
Number of Fields 6
Rcpt5
User Linearisations Field 1 Type Date & Time
Rcpt6
Style Normal
Batch
Rcpt7
Field 2 Type Text
Maths Rcpt8
Text

Figure B9f Totalisers Rcpt9
Reports Style Bold
(Section 4.3.20) Rcpt10
Counters Field 3 Type Process Value
Email Number 1) Email1
Timers Point Channel 1
Style Emphasised Descriptor Email1
Figure B9g Connections
Field 4 Type Batch Field 1 Protocol SMTP (Email)
Master Comms Style Banner Subject
Figure B9h Output Channels Field 5 Type 1) Message
Style Normal
Demand Writes
Text
Emails Line Feed 1

Reports
Apply Discard

EtherNetI/P Server

EtherNet/IP Server Include Message
Options (Section 4.3.21)
Message 1) Message 1
Options
Import Table eiptable
(Section 4.3.22) Apply Discard
Export Table eiptable
Status Online


(currently 1) Input 4 Channel.4.pv

Input 6 Ch
Input 200
(currently 0)

(currently 0)
Apply Discard Autoconfigure Figure B9i Config menu structure (sheet 6)
HA028910 User Guide

Archive Save/Restore Config Security Network System Login (section 3.3.1) Select the required access level and enter the
password if required
Figure Figure Figs B9d Figure Figure
B9b B9c to B9i B9k B9l/m User Engineer
Password expires in 30 Days
Login Access when Frederick Bloggs

Logout
Access (section 4.4.1)
Security Domain
Access
(section 4.4) New Password ** To change access level, a password may be
Management . Retype Password ** required, (according to configuration).
Connect from remote Engineer password is 100 when dispatched, but
Add user can be edited from Engineer level in 'Access'.
Remote user name Fred
Remove User
Remove user (section 4.4.4) Remote password Service is for use by service engineers only.
Change Password Retype remote password
User User Full Name Operator default password is blank (i.e. none
Clear Password Cache Login Disabled required) unless Auditor pack option is fitted, in
Remove Edit own Password which case it is also 100.
Change Alarm Setpoints
Apply Discard Acknowledge Alarms
Section 4.4.6 Edit Maths Constant
Clear Password Cache Reset Maths
Add user (section 4.4.3) Preset Totalisers
Preset Counters
New User ID
Section 4.4.5 Start/Reset Timers
New Full User Name
Set Clock
Change Password
New Domain Name Adjust I/O
Archiving Control
New Password
Save/Restore
Retype Password
Paste/Delete Files
Based On Operator
Full Configuration
Add Full Security
Batch Control
Apply Discard
Can Sign
Can Authorize
Management (section 4.4.2) Perform Upgrades
Record Logins Event Permission 1
Login Timeout 1 Minutes Event Permission 2
with unapplied changes Ignore timeout Event Permission 3
Password Attempts 3 times Event Permission 4
Passwords Expire 30 Days Event Permission 5
Minimum Password Length 3 Edit Output Channel Default
Require Signing Action Demand Writes
Force Change of Password
Require Authorization
Enable Audit Trail Enter Batch Data
Password Change on Expiry Allow web server
Centralised Security Apply Discard
Login By User List
Apply Discard
Figure B9j Security key menu structure
User Guide HA028910

Figure Figure B9c Figures Figure Figure

B9b B9d B9j B9l/m
to B9i
Instrument number 240

MAC address 08:00:48:80:00:F0
Network (Section 4.5) IP address lookup Get from BootP Server

BootP timeout 28 s
Address IP address 192.168.111.222
Address
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Name Default gateway 0.0.0.0
SNTP server enable
SNTP client enable
'Name' appears only when 'IP
SNTP server 149.121.128.179
address lookup' is set to
EuroPRP server enable
'Get from BootP server' or to
Active Directory server 123.456.234.1
'Get from DHCP Server'
Active Directory security TLS (port 636)
Password Cache expiry 0 Days
Apply Discard
Name
Local Host Andy136-4

Domain FishesRus.co.uk
Domain Name Service
Primary DNS Server 149.121.164.11
Secondary DNS Server 149.121.165.14
Apply Discard
Figure B9k Network key menu structure
HA028910 User Guide

Figure Figure B9c Figures Figure Figure Current date DD/MM/YYYY

System
B9b B9d to B9j B9k Current time HH:MM:SS
(Section 4.6)
B9i
Clock (section 4.6.1) Apply Discard
Clock
Output adjust
(section 9) Locale Locale (section 4.6.2)
Upgrade Language English Select language
Channel 4 Country United Kingdom Pick list:

Input Adjust Appropriate to
Time Zone GMT Select the selected
timezone Language
Adjust Channel
Output adjust Master comms disagnostics Use Summertime (DST)
(section 4.3.16) Slave 1) Furn recorder 1 Start at 12:00:00 PM
Remove Adjust Master Comms Diagnostics
Actual High Priority 2 Seconds on the Last
1) 10.690 13/10/05 15:22:54 Ethernet Diagnostics Actual Medium Priority 1 Seconds Sunday
Pick lists allow
2) 20.960 13/10/05 16:03:09 Copy
.
Actual Low Priority 0.125 Seconds in March Summertime
End at 12:00:00 PM period to be
3) 3.563 Unadjusted Modbus Address 1 defined
Job Search on the Last
Figure Slave Status Online
4) 0.000 Unadjusted
Customise B9m Sunday
5) 9.365 Unadjusted Last Transaction Status OK
in October
About Total Requests 1308
6) 8.896 12/10/05 14:29:26 Long Date format
Bad requests 10
Apply Discard
Good requests 1298
Specify the low output and then the low reading Illegal function codes (01) 0
Illegal addresses (02) 0 Upgrade (section 4.6.3)
Low Output 4
Illegal Values (03) 0 Instrument Number 8203
Low Reading 4.018
Slave Failures (04) 0 Key Code WC8N-9F5E-1D41
When the values have been entered select No Gateway path (10) 0 Key Code File
Apply Gateway Target Fail (11) 0
1) 10.690 13/10/05 15:22:54 Source Files From Remote FTP Site
Timed out requests 10
Apply Discard Ethernet diagnostics Master Rejects 0 Upgrade
(section 4.6.7) Retried requests 4
Serial Link Error Count 0 Apply Discard
Host 149.121.131.78 Input Adjust
Specify the high output and then the high Successful Comms Tests 1 (section 4.6.4)
reading Ping Status Host Reachable
High Output 9 Ping Now Initiate Comms Test

High Reading 8.917 Local Modbus Client 1 127.0.0.1
Reset Diagnostics Last Channel 6 Select final channel for adjust
Local Modbus Client 2 Offline
Apply to complete the adjustment procedure. Remote Modbus Client 1 149.121.130.242 Appear only if Master Select Channels
Remote Modbus Client 2 Offline comms option enabled
Apply Discard Adjust Channels Initiate adjust-
Remote Modbus Client 3 Offline ment procedure
Remote Modbus Client 4 192.168.189.89 IP address remains for five
seconds after message Channels to be Included Remove Adjust Remove previ-
activity ceases, after which ous adjustments
EtherNet/IP Clients:
appears instead. 1) Channel 1
Unconnected Message Manager (UCMM) Offline 2) Channel 2 Fast Settle
Implicit I/O Messaging Offline 3) Channel 3 1) Channel 1 5.0001 29/07/08 12:11:55
Appear only if EtherNet/IP
Explicit Messaging (TCP 1) 149.121.129.141 4) Channel 4 29/07/08 12:11:55
comms option enabled 2) Channel 2 5.0001
5) Channel 5 3) Channel 3 5.0001 29/07/08 12:11:55
6) Channel 6 4) Channel 4 5.0001 29/07/08 12:11:55
Figure B9l System key menu structure (sheet 1)
User Guide HA028910

Figure Figure B9c Figures Figure Figure

System
B9b B9d to B9j B9k
(Section 4.6)
B9i Copy
Source Type Channel
(section 4.6.8) Copy From 1) Furnace Temp 1
Clock Copy To 2) Channel 2
Locale 5) Channel 5
Upgrade Include alarm data
Input Adjust Figure Include job data

B9l
Output adjust Copy Now
Master Comms Diagnostics
Ethernet Diagnostics
Copy Job Search
. Section All Sections
(section 4.6.9)
Job Search Job Category Totaliser
Customise Job Action Preset
About Customise
Search Now
(section 4.6.10)
About Desktop 54
(section 4.6.11) Data Entry Background 55
Selection 27
Fixed Text 47
Active Text 6

Disabled Text 49
Trend Foreground 48
Appears only when Trend Background 55
viewing via
Bridge software

Font set Auto

Default

Apply Discard

Figure B9m System key menu structure (sheet 2)
HA028910 User Guide

User Guide HA028910

ANNEX C: WEB SERVER DETAILS

C1 INTRODUCTION
This feature allows a user limited Read Only access to the recorder from a remote PC, by:
1. Opening a standard internet browser
2. Typing-in the IP address of the recorder in the form: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx, or the 'Local host' name
http://Local host. IP address and Local host are described in section 4.5 of this manual.
3. Entering the correct Remote user name and Remote password (as set up in the Security/Access menu
described in section 4.4.1).
If all the entries are correct, the Web Server home page appears, the top part of which is shown in figure
C1, below.
Note: The 'Remote user' must have 'Allow web server' permission enabled (section 4.4.1) and
must have sufficient network access to the product.
12/04/06 14:53:09
e EUROTHERM Web Server
Home Instrument Trends Message Logs History About

Eurotherm Home Page Recorder Downloads Document Library Search
Figure C1 Home page
As can be seen there are two sets of 'controls' viz the internet links and the instrument access tabs.
C2 INTERNET LINKS
These links (Eurotherm Home Page, Recorder Downloads, Document Library Search) take the user to vari-
ous areas of the manufacturer's web site.
C3 ACCESS TABS
Most of the information displayed in the pages described below is updated every 20 seconds. The ex-
ception is the Trend page refresh rate which can be edited (as shown in figure C3.2) by typing in the new
value, and then either clicking on 'Set' or using the computer <Enter> key. Because of the processing
time required, it is not recommended that a value of less than 5 seconds be entered.
C3.1 INSTRUMENT
This opens the instrument page, a typical example of which is shown in figure C3.1 below.
Home Instrument Trends Message Logs History About
Instrum ent-Status at12/04/06 14:53:24

Instrum entA larm s :SN TP ServerFailure
G lobalChannelA larm : H ealthy
Figure C3.1 Instrument display
C3.1.1 Instrument alarms

Either 'Healthy' (green background) or a list of any active instrument alarm(s) (red background).
C3.1.2 Global channel alarm

Either 'Healthy' (green background) if there are no point alarms, or 'Active' (red background) if there is
one or more active point alarm.
HA028910 User Guide

C3.2 TRENDS
Clicking on the 'Trends' tab displays a screen allowing the user to select a refresh rate and one of Hori-
zontal trend, Vertical Trend or Numeric as the display format. Both the horizontal and vertical trend
modes include the numeric display table.
Home Instrument Trends M
Horizontal Trend Vertical Trend Numeric Display
Select
Please selecta trend page viewing
forvi ew ing mode by
Edit refresh rate clicking on required heading
(then click on 'Set')
Trend Refresh Rate 30 Seconds

Figure C3.2 Trend mode selection
C3.2.1 Horizontal trend

Figure C3.2.1 shows a horizontal trend display for an imaginary group (Furnace Temps 1) with two chan-
nels (Stack 1 and Stack2North)
Time and date of most
recent sample update 12/04/06 14:53:09
e EUROTHERM Web Server

Return to mode
selection page
Home Trends Message Logs History About
Select required group by
Trends Group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
clicking on required number
Descriptor of selected group

Furnace Tem ps 1
Span H igh
Earliest sample
Latest sample
Span Low
D escriptor Span Low Process V alue Span H igh

Stack 1 0.0000 100.0000
Stack2N orth 0.0000 100.0000
Select horizontal scale here... ...Confirm horizontal scale here
Show m e the last 20 m inutes ofdata Set
Figure C3.2.1 Horizontal trend example
As shown in the figure, the group process values appear as though being traced on a chart which is roll-
ing from right to left (i.e the oldest sample is at the left edge of the chart, and the latest sample is at the
right edge of the chart). The point Descriptors, Span high and Span low values and process values (at the
time and date at the top left of the screen) appear in a table below the chart.
The amount of time across the width of the chart (the 'horizontal scale') can be edited from its default of
20 minutes by typing a new value in the box at bottom left of the page, and confirming either by clicking
on the 'Set' button at bottom right or by using the pc's <Enter> key.
To return to the Trend Mode selection page, Click on the 'Trends' link at top left.
User Guide HA028910

C3.2.2 Vertical trends

This viewing mode is identical in operation to the Horizontal Trend mode described above, except that
the 'chart' is vertical, with the most recent sample at the top, and the oldest at the bottom. The 'Vertical
scale' (i.e the amount of trend history displayed within the height of the chart) is edited as described for
'Horizontal scale' in the Horizontal Trend description above.
C3.2.3 Numeric display

This viewing mode contains only a table of point descriptors, spans high and low, and process values.
The table is identical in layout to that shown below the 'chart' in figure C3.2.1, above.
C3.3 MESSAGE LOGS

Figure C3.3 shows an imaginary message log with a number of alarm messages, for a group called Fur-
nace Temps 1.
Home Instrument Trends Message Logs History

Select required group by
Group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 clicking on required number
Furnace Tem ps 1 Selected group's descriptor

All Messages
19/04/06 11:21:26 CO 2 O K
19/04/06 11:21:26 SO 2 O K
19/04/06 11:21:26 CO O K
19/04/06 11:21:26 A larm (s)off1(1)
19/04/06 11:21:26 A larm (s)off2(1)
19/04/06 11:11:13 CO 2 overlim it
19/04/06 11:11:13 SO 2 overlim it
19/04/06 11:11:13 CO overlim it
19/04/06 11:11:13 A larm (s)on1(1)
19/04/06 11:11:13 A larm (s)on2(1) Enter history time here... ...Confirm time here
Show m e the last 20 m inutes ofdata Set
Figure C3.3 Message log
The required group is selected by clicking on the relevant number at the top of the page. The length of
time that the list covers, can be edited from its default of 20 minutes by typing a new value in the box at
bottom left of the page, and confirming by clicking on the 'Set' button at bottom right or using the <En-
ter> key on the pc. If there are more messages than can be accommodated in the window height, a scroll
bar appear at the left edge of the window to allow hidden messages to be revealed.
HA028910 User Guide

C3.4 HISTORY
This produces a list of all the .uhh files held in the instrument archive. The files can be saved to a user-
specified location, for use in Review or Quickchart applications. Figure C3.4 shows part of a typical page.
Home Instrument History About

Click here to select all files for sav-
Download All Data Files
ing to a user specified location
Note: This data is in archived (TA R)form at,and cannotbe opened directly by Review w ithoutfirsthaving been unzipped.
File Name Size Last Modified
Group-1~20060501 00204B26000001C4.uhh Click on individual files to save to a 391 Kb 01/05/06 16:20:10
user specified location
Group-1~20060501 00204B26000001C5.uhh 391 Kb 01/05/06 20:20:10
C3.4 History file display
C3.5 ABOUT
Clicking on this tab displays a subset of the information which appears in the recorder's 'About' screen,
described in section 4.6.11. The items which appear are:
Instrument variant
Serial number
Product software version
Boot ROM version
Board version
SRAM and DRAM capacities.
User Guide HA028910

INDEX
Symbols A (Cont)
1) Channel 1.................................................................221, 372 Alarm
3D effect................................................................................265 Acknowledge
10 to the power..................................................................... 110 Jobs.........................................................................238
{n} source................................................................................. 95 Message enable/disable........................................ 69
?Out of Range....................................................................... 186 Permission...............................................................200
! Symbol................................................................................... 16 Acknowledge (ACK ALL ALARM)................................. 19
? Symbol..................................................................14, 95, 152 Channel indicator........................................................... 18
?Syntax Error......................................................................... 186 Configuration.................................................................. 71
.uhh files................................................................................. 418 Data (Include in copy)...................................................225
.uhq file..................................................................................230 Disable............................................................................238
.uht files.................................................................................. 187 Enable............................................................................... 78
Icons.................................................................................. 15
A Identifier........................................................................... 20
Indication......................................................................... 16
A0 to A5................................................................................. 127 Instrument........................................................................ 16
Abort...................................................................................... 156 Summary................................................................... 19
About............................................................................229, 413 Jobs.................................................................................238
Absolute high/low.................................................................. 78 Marks, colour selection................................................265
A/B switching................................................................... 67, 76 Messages......................................................................... 81
Access Enable/disable......................................................... 69
Configuration.......................................................198, 410 Message log............................................................. 25
Flap.................................................................................... 10 Number............................................................................ 77
Levels.......................................................................15, 198 On Group (Event source)............................................... 91
To configuration.............................................................. 32 Parameters....................................................................... 79
When............................................................................... 199 Setpoint
Ack all alarms.......................................................................... 19 Edit permission......................................................200
ACK Message.......................................................................... 69 Source........................................................................ 78
Acknowledge Sounds............................................................................ 249
Alarms............................................................................... 19 Summary page................................................................ 20
Jobs.........................................................................238 System.............................................................................. 16
Permission...............................................................200 Type................................................................................... 78
AC Supply voltage range............................................... 9, 377 All
Action demand writes.........................................................202 Messages......................................................................... 25
Active Directory Points.............................................................................. 270
Security........................................................................... 215 Allow
Server..................................................................... 199, 215 Constant edits............................................................... 175
Setup....................................................................... 210 Web server.....................................................................202
Active Text colour................................................................227 Always...........................................................................269, 270
Adaptive recording................................................................ 66 Amount Rate-of-change alarms........................................... 79
Add Analogue outputs.......................................................173, 332
Key...................................................................................256 Specification..................................................................384
Maths function............................................................... 109 AND.......................................................................................... 93
Points to groups.............................................................. 70 Apply...................................................................................... 156
User.................................................................................208 Key (Ethernet IP config.)............................................... 185
Configuration menu.............................................. 410 Arc
Address Angle...............................................................................263
Allocation (Modbus).....................................................290 Definition........................................................................ 278
IP...................................................................................... 214 Height.............................................................................263
MAC...................................................................... 213, 388 Width..............................................................................263
Map (Modbus)...............................................................288 Archive
Network.......................................................................... 213 All....................................................................................... 53
Adjust Configuration
Channels................................................................221, 372 Automatic.................................................................. 85
Inputs..............................................................................221 Manual....................................................................... 52
Permission...............................................................200 Menu........................................................................405
Outputs..........................................................................332 Control permission....................................................... 201
Permission...............................................................200 Enable............................................................................... 69
Remove...........................................................................221 File formats...............................................................89, 90
Advanced Indicator........................................................................... 18
Edit level.........................................................................258 Jobs.................................................................................238
Parameters.....................................................................265 Key menu........................................................................402
HA028910 User Guide

Archive (Cont.) Batch (Cont.)

Local.................................................................................. 52 Number.......................................................................... 102
Media % full..................................................................... 92 Operator initiation........................................................104
Remote............................................................................. 54 Running (Event source)......................................... 91, 107
To media........................................................................... 87 Start (Event source)................................................ 91, 107
To remote......................................................................... 88 Start (Job).......................................................................234
with lockable flap............................................................ 53 Stop (Event source)................................................92, 107
Archive failed instrument alarm........................................... 16 Summary.......................................................................... 22
ASCII Battery
Codes..............................................................................398 Backed RAM data.......................................................... 377
Input................................................................................ 149 Diagnostics....................................................................389
Printer.............................................................................338 Indicator........................................................................... 18
Configuration menu..............................................407 Low (Event source).......................................................... 92
Specification...........................................................384 Replacement..................................................................391
At version...............................................................................229 Specification.................................................................. 377
Audible warnings................................................................. 249 Battery-backed RAM cleared............................................... 16
Audit trail................................................................................. 25 Baud rate
Demand write messages............................................. 177 Selection........................................................................ 151
Enable.............................................................................205 Serial comms.................................................................340
Autoconfigure key................................................................ 194 Serial printer.................................................................. 347
Auto detect page................................................................. 157 Bell symbol.............................................................................. 18
Automatic archive........................................................... 87, 88 Best Fit Font..........................................................................265
A values.................................................................................... 67 Binary....................................................................................... 89
Average and CSV............................................................................ 86
Rolling............................................................................. 118 Blue line across the chart...................................................... 36
Time.................................................................................. 79 Bold........................................................................................ 183
BootP Timeout...................................................................... 213
B Break response....................................................................... 76
Bridge
Background Alarm acknowledgement............................................250
Colour....................................................................227, 263 Configuration
Decimal...........................................................................266 Access menu.......................................................... 247
Quartile..........................................................................266 Options menu........................................................246
Banner.................................................................................... 183 Connection details....................................................... 245
Bargraph Minimum PC requirements.........................................244
Channel.......................................................................... 272 Operation.......................................................................250
Group Running the program...................................................248
Horizontal................................................................ 271 Software installation.....................................................246
Vertical.................................................................... 271 Start as Lite.....................................................................248
Style................................................................................265 Brightness control.................................................................. 63
Bargraph display mode Bring archive up to date........................................................ 53
Horizontal......................................................................... 46 Jobs.................................................................................238
Vertical.............................................................................. 44 BSpc......................................................................................... 33
Based on................................................................................208 Button
Basic/Advanced selection..................................................258 Number............................................................................ 94
Batch Text..................................................................................263
As event source............................................................. 107 B values.................................................................................... 67
Configuration................................................................100
Menu........................................................................406 C
Control.............................................................................. 23
Permission............................................................... 201 Cable
Counter initiation.......................................................... 107 Diameter
Enter data permission..................................................202 Power........................................................................... 9
Event sources................................................................. 107 Signal........................................................................... 5
Field 1....................................................................182, 341 Calibration coefficients....................................................... 378
Fields............................................................................... 102 Can
Initiation.......................................................................... 107 Authorize........................................................................ 201
Jobs.................................................................................234 Sign................................................................................. 201
Message display............................................................ 106 Cancel Archive........................................................................ 52
Message filter.................................................................. 25 Jobs.................................................................................238
Message log option........................................................ 26 Caps......................................................................................... 33
Modbus initiation.......................................................... 107 Card slot.................................................................................. 11
Mode............................................................................... 101 Category........................................................................... 81, 93
User Guide HA028910

C (Cont.) C (Cont.)
Centralised Security............................................................206 Close key...............................................................................257
Change Cold junction compensation (CJC)..................................... 76
Alarm setpoints permission........................................200 Remote CJC Block option........................................... 361
Battery Colour
Procedure...............................................................391 Alarms.............................................................................265
Symbol....................................................................... 18 B.......................................................................................236
Maths constant permission.........................................200 Group......................................................................236
Password........................................................................209 Backgrounds..................................................................265
Time and date................................................................ 219 Backgrounds, Text etc..................................................227
Time (Rate-of-change alarms)....................................... 79 Channel...................................................................77, 266
Change Password................................................................ 197 Foregrounds..................................................................266
Changes not recorded........................................................203 RGB definitions..............................................................395
Channel Style................................................................................266
Alarms.............................................................................266 Thresholds.....................................................................266
Indicator.................................................................... 18 Trace.................................................................................. 77
Sounds..................................................................... 249 Colours and Fonts configuration menu............................ 413
Ave/Max/Min..................................................................111 Communications
Bargraph......................................................................... 272 Channel timeout......................................................63, 91
Colour............................................................................... 77 Diagnostics...........................................................171, 223
Configuration.........................................................71, 404 Modbus master............................................................. 171
32-bit data (MODBUS).......................................... 318 Printer settings.............................................................. 347
MODBUS.................................................................291 Serial............................................................................... 149
Copy...................................................................... 224, 225 Compact Flash location........................................................ 11
Cycle time.......................................................................265 Component
Cycling enable/disable.................................................. 36 Definitions...................................................................... 271
Damping........................................................................... 76 Info on screen................................................................258
Data................................................................................. 272 Compressibility factor................................................ 115, 116
Descriptor........................................................................ 76 Compression........................................................................... 86
Error.................................................................................. 16 Config
Failure............................................................................... 16 Key......................................................................... 58 to 242
Maths..............................................................................108 Revision..........................................................................229
Number......................................................... 72, 160, 162 Number....................................................................111
Numeric.......................................................................... 272 Configuration.......................................................................... 51
Run-time data (Modbus)..............................................303 A/B switching........................................................... 67, 76
IEEE (32-bit)................................................. 322 to 374 Access............................................................................. 198
Select.....................................................................221, 372 Alarm................................................................................. 71
Thresholds.....................................................................266 Analogue outputs......................................................... 172
User screen parameter.................................................263 Archive.............................................................................. 85
Value........................................................................72, 270 ASCII printer..................................................................339
Virtual.............................................................................. 195 Audit pack......................................................................203
Character set........................................................................... 33 Batch...............................................................................100
Serial comms.................................................................398 Break response................................................................ 76
Chart Channel............................................................................ 71
Full..................................................................................... 67 Clock............................................................................... 219
Speed......................................................................... 42, 67 Cold junction compensation........................................ 76
Circular Copy................................................................................224
Chart Full.......................................................................... 67 Counter........................................................................... 143
Settings............................................................................. 67 Country........................................................................... 219
Speed................................................................................ 67 Date format.................................................................... 219
Trend Mode..................................................................... 40 Decimal places................................................................ 77
CJC........................................................................................... 76 Demand Writes............................................................. 174
Remote CJC Block Unit................................................ 361 Display brightness settings........................................... 63
Cleaning................................................................................390 DST.................................................................................. 219
Clear..............................................................................196, 236 Email............................................................................... 178
Password Cache................................................... 197, 210 Ethernet Diagnostics....................................................223
Clock Event................................................................................. 91
Accuracy......................................................................... 377 Buttons...................................................................... 94
Failure (instrument alarm).............................................. 16 Filter.................................................................................. 76
Jobs.................................................................................233 Full (access permission)............................................... 201
Preset hours and minutes settings............................... 64 Group................................................................................ 65
Setting............................................................................ 219 Input adjust....................................................................221
Permission...............................................................200 Input low/high................................................................. 73
HA028910 User Guide

Configuration (Cont.) Counter (Cont.)

Instrument........................................................................ 63 Configuration menu.....................................................406
Language....................................................................... 219 Copy................................................................................225
Linearisation Enable............................................................................. 143
Range......................................................................... 73 Jobs.................................................................................233
Type........................................................................... 72 Modbus addressing
Locale............................................................................. 219 Configuration......................................................... 144
Locked icon...................................................................... 18 IEEE (32-bit).....................................................146
Management option.....................................................203 Runtime data.......................................................... 145
Master comms............................................................... 153 Number.......................................................................... 143
Maths channels..............................................................108 Preset permission.........................................................200
Menu.................................................................. 404 to 409 Country, Selection of........................................................... 219
Message........................................................................... 95 Created on............................................................................229
Network.......................................................................... 213 Creating a user screen........................................................254
Offset................................................................................ 73 CSV........................................................................................... 86
Options............................................................... 194 to 196 Date/time format............................................................. 90
Output Channel Files................................................................................... 89
Analogue outputs.................................................. 173 Format.............................................................................. 89
Master comms........................................................ 172 Use tab delimiter............................................................. 89
Printer comms parameters..........................................346 Currently ............................................................................... 194
Reports..................................................................182, 341 Cursor keys.............................................................................. 28
Scale.................................................................................. 73 Custom Faceplate style....................................................... 267
Security........................................................................... 197 Customise..............................................................................227
Serial communications................................................. 150 Configuration menu..................................................... 413
Shunt value....................................................................... 73 Cut file....................................................................................240
Span.................................................................................. 77 Cutoff (High/Low)................................................................. 138
Summertime.................................................................. 219 Cycle channels on/off............................................................ 36
System............................................................................ 217
Time and date................................................................ 219 D
Timers............................................................................. 147
Time zone....................................................................... 219 Daily................................................................................... 87, 88
Totaliser.......................................................................... 138 Data
Trace colour..................................................................... 77 Bits
Upgrade.........................................................................220 Printer...................................................................... 347
User linearisation tables................................................ 98 Serial Comms......................................................... 151
Views................................................................................. 82 Compression Ratio......................................................... 86
Zone Encoding (MODBUS).................................................... 281
Area of chart............................................................. 77 Entry Background colour.............................................227
Time................................................................219, 399 Source............................................................................. 173
Connected messaging........................................................ 184 Transmission (MODBUS)..............................................328
Connect from Remote permission.................................... 199 Type........................................................................164, 281
Connections.......................................................................... 149 Demand writes....................................................... 176
Connector locations Date and time....................................................................... 341
Large frame units.............................................................. 6 Configuration....................................................... 219, 412
Small frame units............................................................... 5 CSV format....................................................................... 90
Constant................................................................................ 109 Reports configuration.................................................. 182
Contents of group.................................................................. 70 Daylight saving configuration............................................ 219
Continuous batches............................................................. 101 DC supply
Controller parameters......................................................... 162 Printer wiring.................................................................338
Copy..............................................................................110, 224 Recorder wiring................................................................. 9
Facility....................................................................224, 413 Decimal.................................................................................. 187
File...................................................................................240 Places.............................................................. 77, 177, 266
Key...................................................................................256 EtherNet/IP............................................................. 187
Maths function............................................................... 110 Scale................................................................................ 269
Rules................................................................................225 Decrement counter..............................................................233
Screen.............................................................................257 Default................................................................................... 172
To/From..........................................................................225 Demand Write value..................................................... 175
Counter Gateway.......................................................................... 214
Batch initiation............................................................... 107 Passwords........................................................................ 31
Configuration................................................................ 143 Default Table......................................................................... 185
Data (Modbus)........................................................ 144 Delete key
IEEE 32-bit........................................................145 File...................................................................................240
User Screens..................................................................256
User Guide HA028910

D (Cont.) D (Cont.)
Demand Disk
Type................................................................................. 175 Size.................................................................................... 87
Writes.............................................................................. 174 Symbol.............................................................................. 18
Action permission.................................................202 Display
Button...................................................................... 175 Alarms............................................................................. 267
Configuration menu..............................................408 Bargraph......................................................................... 267
Copy........................................................................225 Batch Dialogue.............................................................. 107
Jobs......................................................................... 237 Brightness........................................................................ 63
To specific register................................................ 176 Calibration.....................................................................386
With Audit Trail...................................................... 177 Colour configuration menu......................................... 413
Deploy....................................................................................257 Descriptor...................................................................... 267
Descriptor Enable (group)................................................................. 83
Channel............................................................................ 76 Home................................................................................ 82
Demand write................................................................ 175 Messages....................................................................... 267
Email Recipient list........................................................ 179 Modes............................................................................... 35
Event................................................................................. 93 Circular trend........................................................... 40
Event Button.................................................................... 94 Enable........................................................................ 83
Font................................................................................. 267 Home......................................................................... 82
Group.........................................................................15, 66 Horizontal bargraph................................................ 46
Group minimum maths function................................ 132 Horizontal trend....................................................... 38
Instrument........................................................................ 63 Numeric..................................................................... 48
Minimum Channel......................................................... 132 Select......................................................................... 28
Output channel.................................................... 172, 173 Vertical bargraph..................................................... 44
Report....................................................................182, 341 Vertical trend............................................................ 36
Slave device................................................................... 155 Pens................................................................................. 267
Timer............................................................................... 148 Test..................................................................................386
User Linearisation table................................................. 98 Units................................................................................ 267
Detect Update rate.................................................................... 377
All slaves......................................................................... 156 Values (truncation of)..................................................... 14
This slave........................................................................ 155 Dispose..................................................................................257
Deviation Divide..................................................................................... 109
Alarm type....................................................................... 78 DNS........................................................................................ 216
Value................................................................................. 79 Domain name
DHCP Server failure............................................................... 16 Access menu.................................................................. 199
Diagnostics Domain Name Service......................................................... 216
Display............................................................................385 Do Not Remove Archive Media............................................ 13
Ethernet..........................................................................223 Draw
Master comms............................................................... 171 Edge................................................................................263
Summary........................................................................388 Order..............................................................................263
Dialogue action.................................................................... 272 Drive Relay job...................................................................... 231
Digital............................................................................160, 162 Dry bulb temperature.......................................................... 127
Disable Dryness.................................................................................. 120
Alarms.............................................................................238 DST......................................................................................... 219
Counter...........................................................................233 D-type connector wiring......................................................... 9
Display Duration................................................................................. 148
Alarms..................................................................... 267 Dwell........................................................................................ 79
Descriptor............................................................... 267
Messages................................................................ 267 E
Pens.......................................................................... 267
Units......................................................................... 267 Earlier messages.................................................................... 26
Group counters.............................................................233 Edit
Group totalisers............................................................. 231 Level................................................................................258
Login...............................................................................200 Maths constant permission.........................................200
Maths Function..............................................................232 Output channel default................................................ 201
Retries............................................................................. 175 Own password permission..........................................200
Timer job........................................................................234 Parameter.......................................................................263
Totaliser.......................................................................... 231 EIA232 / EIA485 selection.................................................. 151
Warning dialogs.............................................................. 64 Elapsed time format............................................................. 112
Disabled Text colour............................................................227 Electrical installation................................................................ 5
Discard................................................................................... 156 Email
Ethernet IP Table........................................................... 185 Access............................................................................. 181
Key...................................................................................257 Appearance................................................................... 180
HA028910 User Guide

Email (Cont.) Event (Cont.)

Configuration................................................................ 178 Configuration.........................................................91, 405
Menu........................................................................409 Copy................................................................................225
Failure............................................................................... 92 Input board
Generation............................................................180, 181 Specification...........................................................384
Jobs.................................................................................239 Wiring.......................................................................... 8
Messages....................................................................... 181 Inputs..............................................................................334
Number.......................................................................... 179 As event sources...................................................... 92
Emphasised........................................................................... 183 Number............................................................................ 91
Enable Permissions 1 to 5......................................................... 201
Alarm................................................................................. 78 Source............................................................................... 91
Audit trail........................................................................205 Batch........................................................................ 107
Batch............................................................................... 101 Source sense.......................................................... 92 to 93
Counter........................................................................... 143 Exclamation mark symbol..................................................... 16
Demand writes.............................................................. 175 Exit.......................................................................................... 372
Display Explicit messaging..................................................... 184, 224
Alarms..................................................................... 267 Export
Descriptor............................................................... 267 Ethernet table................................................................ 185
Messages................................................................ 267 Key...................................................................................257
Modes........................................................................ 83 Screen............................................................................... 56
Pens.......................................................................... 267 User linearisation............................................................ 57
Units......................................................................... 267 User screens..................................................................253
Error code B................................................................... 152 External CJ.............................................................................. 76
EUROPRP Server........................................................... 215
Modbus Slave................................................................ 155 F
Options........................................................................... 394
Output channel.................................................... 172, 173 Faceplates............................................................................... 42
Recording.......................................................................235 Location.......................................................................... 267
Remote device............................................................... 155 Style................................................................................ 267
SNTP Server................................................................... 214 Failed to authenticate user name...................................... 251
Talk through................................................................... 152 Fast Settle..................................................221, 222, 372, 373
Timer............................................................................... 148 Feature...................................................................................263
Totaliser.......................................................................... 138 Changed.........................................................................243
End of message characters................................................ 151 Identification table........................................................ 315
Engineer, Access level.................................................. 31, 198 Locked............................................................................243
Enter batch data (permission)............................................202 Fields 1 to 6
Enter history............................................................................ 35 Batch............................................................................... 102
Message log option........................................................ 26 Type
Erase all history.................................................................... 196 Reports.................................................................... 182
Job..................................................................................235 Serial comms.......................................................... 341
Option.............................................................................400 File..........................................................................................240
Error Delete.............................................................................240
Code B enable............................................................... 152 Format.............................................................................. 87
Messages Media......................................................................... 89
Bridge...................................................................... 251 Key..................................................................................... 28
User screens........................................................... 279 Name character limitation............................................. 56
Errors To (Email configuration)........................................... 179 Paste/delete permission.............................................. 201
EtherNet Structure......................................................................... 242
Address..........................................................................388 Transfer (FTP) facility...................................................... 54
Diagnostics...........................................................223, 412 Filer option menu keys........................................................240
LED interpretation........................................................ 378 Fill Area..................................................................................263
Modbus Slave................................................................ 155 Filter......................................................................................... 76
EtherNet/IP........................................................................... 184 First
Client...............................................................................224 Channel (Input adjust)..................................................221
Comms Input................................................................. 109 Start/End character...................................................... 151
e to the power........................................................................111 Switch on.......................................................................... 31
EUROPRP Server enable..................................................... 215 First channel.......................................................................... 372
Event FIT........................................................................................... 315
As event source............................................................... 91 Fixed Text colour..................................................................227
Button.............................................................................263 Flap, lockable.......................................................................... 12
As event sources...................................................... 92 Unlock permission........................................................ 201
Configuration................................................. 94, 405 Flash size.................................................................................. 86
Size, shape etc........................................................ 273 Flow........................................................................................ 120
User Guide HA028910

F (Cont.) Group (Cont.)

Folder keys.............................................................................. 28 Group
Font Adding points to............................................................. 70
Set....................................................................................227 Average/Minimum/Maximum..................................... 109
Style................................................................................ 267 Configuration........................................................ 65, 404
Force change of password.................................................202 Copy................................................................................225
Foreground Data (MODBUS).............................................................309
Colour....................................................................227, 264 Descriptor.................................................................15, 66
Decimal...........................................................................266 Display Mode enable..................................................... 83
Quartile..........................................................................266 Home................................................................................ 82
Format Horizontal Bargraph..................................................... 271
PV.............................................................................. 77, 112 Latched Maximum maths function............................. 110
User Lin. point pairs........................................................ 98 Latched Minimum maths function.............................. 110
For (nodes)............................................................................ 156 Minimum........................................................................ 132
Freeze.....................................................................................236 MKT maths function..................................................... 124
From Number................................................66, 160, 175, 264
Node............................................................................... 156 Numeric display............................................................ 272
Point.................................................................................. 68 Recording enable/disable............................................. 68
From point............................................................................. 187 Report destination........................................................239
FTP Selection for comms messages.................................. 151
Error messages................................................................ 16 Trend............................................................................... 271
File format................................................................. 87, 90 Vertical bargraph.......................................................... 271
Icon.................................................................................... 18 Views, Scope.................................................................... 83
Transfer............................................................................. 54
Full H
Configuration access.................................................... 201
Detail................................................................................. 23 Handshake............................................................................. 347
Details (Message log)..................................................... 26 Hardware version.................................................................229
Screen (circular trends).................................................. 42 Height....................................................................................264
Security........................................................................... 201 Hide key.................................................................................240
User name......................................................................208 High
Function code..............................................................164, 176 Cutoff.............................................................................. 138
03.....................................................................................329 Point................................................................................222
04.....................................................................................330 Priority interval.............................................................. 154
06.....................................................................................330 Select.............................................................................. 110
08.....................................................................................330 Highlight.................................................................................. 23
16..................................................................................... 331 High/Low............................................................................... 177
Fuse (Transmitter power supply)............................. 335, 378 High Point.............................................................................. 373
FValue maths function......................................................... 113 History.................................................................................... 418
Amount of.................................................................35, 69
G Background/Foreground colours..............................227
Home
Gas constant................................................................ 114, 116 Group................................................................................ 82
General message filter.......................................................... 25 Key..................................................................................... 28
Global Page.................................................................................. 83
Channel alarm............................................................... 415 Timout............................................................................... 82
Global alarm Horizontal
Event source.................................................................... 91 Alignment....................................................................... 267
Unacknowledged............................................................ 91 Bargraph..................................................................46, 269
Goto Faceplate............................................................... 267, 269
Canvas............................................................................257 Grid total........................................................................ 267
Group................................................................................ 29 Minor Divisions..............................................................268
View................................................................................... 28 Trend display mode........................................................ 38
Green line across the chart................................................... 36 Enable........................................................................ 83
Grid User screens........................................................... 271
Line colour Trend mode
Major........................................................................ 267 Web server.............................................................. 416
Minor.......................................................................268 Host........................................................................................223
Type................................................................................... 68 Hourly................................................................................ 87, 88
HTM2010 Quarterly Test kit................................................353
Hysteresis................................................................................ 79
HA028910 User Guide

I J
Identifier................................................................................264 Jobs........................................................................................ 231
Image..................................................................................... 273 Active while/on................................................................ 81
File...................................................................................264 Alarm...............................................................................238
Implicit I/O messaging.............................................. 184, 224 Archive............................................................................238
Import Batch...............................................................................234
An image........................................................................ 273 Category.......................................................................... 81
Ethernet table................................................................ 185 Clock...............................................................................233
Key...................................................................................257 Counter...........................................................................233
Printer driver...........................................................57, 343 Data
Screen..................................................................... 56, 253 Include in copy.......................................................225
User linearisation............................................................ 57 Demand Writes............................................................. 237
In alarm or error.................................................................... 270 Drive relay...................................................................... 231
Include Email...............................................................................239
Alarm data......................................................................225 Maths..............................................................................232
Job data..........................................................................225 Message.........................................................................232
Message......................................................................... 179 Number..................................................................... 81, 93
Increment counter................................................................233 Output............................................................................ 237
Indirection tables (Modbus)............................................... 315 Recording.......................................................................235
Input Report.............................................................................239
Adjust..............................................................................221 Search....................................................................226, 413
Configuration menu.............................................. 412 Timer...............................................................................234
Board pinout...................................................................... 7 Totaliser.......................................................................... 231
Board specification....................................................... 379 Trend...............................................................................236
Low/high........................................................................... 73 Just value............................................................................... 267
Type................................................................................... 72
Input 1 to 200........................................................................ 185 K
Installation
Category........................................................................ 375 K.............................................................................................. 114
Electrical............................................................................. 5 Key
Mechanical......................................................................... 2 Code...............................................................................220
Large frame unit......................................................... 4 File............................................................................220
Small frame unit......................................................... 3 Functions.......................................................................... 28
Inst cal corr n......................................................................... 134
Inst calibration points.......................................................... 134 L
Inst cal temp n....................................................................... 134 Label symbols........................................................................... 1
Instrument Language............................................................................... 219
Alarms............................................................................... 16 Last
As event sources...................................................... 92 Channel..........................................................................221
Message disable...................................................... 64 Error................................................................................264
Summary................................................................... 19 Updated.........................................................................229
Symbol (Exclamation mark).................................... 16 Last channel.......................................................................... 372
Configuration.................................................................. 63 Latched.................................................................................... 78
Menu........................................................................404 Text.................................................................................... 94
Data (Modbus)...............................................................290 Later messages....................................................................... 26
Name................................................................................. 63 LED INDICATORS................................................................... 11
Number.................................................................213, 220 Left arrow key.......................................................................... 28
Variant.............................................................................229 Line......................................................................................... 277
Insufficient non-volatile memory......................................... 16 Across the chart.............................................................. 36
Internal CJ............................................................................... 76 Feed....................................................182, 183, 341, 342
Internal flash error messages............................................... 16 Thickness........................................................................268
Interval B................................................................................236 Wiring................................................................................. 9
Invalid Linear
Multiple register writes................................................ 281 Chart grid......................................................................... 68
Password entry................................................................ 92 Mass flow........................................................................ 114
Selection.......................................................................... 70 Scales................................................................................ 74
Invalid item (EtherNet IP).................................................... 186 Linearisation
I/O Table................................................................................ 185 Function (LIN Type)......................................................... 72
IP Address....................................................................155, 214 Function (User entered)................................................. 98
Lookup............................................................................ 213 Link error count...........................................................151, 339
Manual entry.................................................................. 214 List of operators................................................................... 270
User Guide HA028910

L (Cont.) Maths (Cont.)

Local Channel (cont.)
Archive.............................................................................. 52 Run-time data (Modbus)....................................... 136
Host................................................................................. 216 IEEE 32-bit........................................................137
Modbus Client...............................................................223 Configuration...................................................... 108, 406
Locale............................................................................ 219, 412 Modbus data.......................................................... 135
Lockable flap........................................................................... 12 IEEE 32-bit........................................................136
Locked icon............................................................................. 18 Function
Log 10 to the power...................................................... 110
Base 10............................................................................111 Add.......................................................................... 109
Base e...............................................................................111 Channel Ave/Max/Min...........................................111
Chart grid......................................................................... 68 Config Revision Number.......................................111
Scale.................................................................................. 74 Constant.................................................................. 109
Logged out.............................................................................. 31 Copy........................................................................ 110
Login........................................................................25, 32, 410 Disable....................................................................232
By User List..................................................................... 207 Divide...................................................................... 109
Disabled.........................................................................200 Edit constant permission......................................200
Required......................................................................... 155 Ethernet/IP Comms Input..................................... 109
Timeout..........................................................................204 e to the power.........................................................111
Log/Linear............................................................................... 74 FValue...................................................................... 113
Logout key............................................................................. 197 Group
Long Average............................................................109
Date format.................................................................... 219 Latched Maximum..........................................110
Messages.......................................................................286 Latched Minimum...........................................110
Loop Number.....................................................162, 172, 175 Maximum.........................................................109
Low Minimum................................................ 109, 132
Cutoff.............................................................................. 138 High Select............................................................. 110
Point................................................................................222 Log Base 10.............................................................111
Priority interval.............................................................. 154 Log Base e...............................................................111
Select.............................................................................. 110 Low Select............................................................... 110
Low Point............................................................................... 373 Master comms.........................................................111
MKT.......................................................................... 118
M Group...............................................................124
Modbus Comms Input.......................................... 109
MAC Address.............................................................. 213, 388 Modulus...................................................................111
Mail Server............................................................................ 179 Multiply.................................................................... 109
Mains wiring.............................................................................. 9 O2 correction......................................................... 126
Maintenance.........................................................................390 Polynomial.............................................................. 112
Schedule.........................................................................391 Rate of change....................................................... 125
Major/minor circular chart divisions.................................... 67 Relative Humidity................................................... 127
Management Reset........................................................................232
Configuration menu..................................................... 410 Reset permission...................................................200
Option.............................................................................203 Sample and Hold................................................... 110
Manual Archive Sample and Hold trigger......................................232
Local.................................................................................. 52 Saturated steam
Remote host..................................................................... 54 Heat consumed...............................................123
Mass flow Heat Flow.........................................................122
Linear.............................................................................. 114 Mass flow..........................................................120
Saturated Steam............................................................ 120 Security Revision Number.....................................111
Square root.................................................................... 116 Square Root............................................................ 110
Master Comms..................................................................... 153 Stopwatch............................................................... 109
Configuration menu.....................................................408 Subtract................................................................... 109
Diagnostics....................................................................223 Switch...................................................................... 110
Example configuration................................................. 167 Switch to B job........................................................232
Maths function................................................................111 Timestamp...............................................................111
Slave Failure event source............................................. 92 Zirconia probe........................................................ 128
Maths Jobs.................................................................................232
Channel Number..........................................................................108
Copy........................................................................225
Failure........................................................................ 16
Partial failure............................................................. 92
HA028910 User Guide

M (Cont.) M (Cont.)
Maximum Minimum
Block size........................................................................ 155 Channel Descriptor...................................................... 132
Decimal digits.................................................................. 77 Height.............................................................................268
Number of Bridge ........................................................ 251 Password length............................................................204
Number of data bytes..................................................280 PC requirements...........................................................244
Max/Min (adaptive recording).............................................. 66 Width..............................................................................268
Mean kinetic temperature (MKT)....................................... 118 Min-max recording................................................................ 66
Measured Missing pixels test................................................................386
Gas.................................................................................. 126 MKT maths function............................................................. 118
Oxygen........................................................................... 126 Group.............................................................................. 124
Measuring units.................................................................... 279 Modbus
Mechanical installation............................................................ 2 Address.................................................................155, 156
Large frame unit................................................................ 4 Setting....................................................................... 63
Small frame unit................................................................ 3 Address 255................................................................... 152
Media....................................................................................... 86 Batch initiation............................................................... 107
Archiving error messages.............................................. 16 Comms Input................................................................. 109
File format................................................................. 87, 89 Master/Slave configuration menus............................407
Full..................................................................................... 53 Maximum number of data bytes................................280
Event limit................................................................. 87 RTU.................................................................................. 149
Location............................................................................ 11 Security........................................................................... 281
Removal............................................................................ 12 Enable/disable......................................................... 63
Size.................................................................................... 87 Slave
Medium Priority interval...................................................... 154 Enable...................................................................... 155
Memory device location....................................................... 11 Online...................................................................... 155
Memory size............................................................................ 86 Selection................................................................. 154
Menu structure Status..............................................................................223
Archive key.....................................................................402 Wiring.............................................................................280
Config menu..................................................... 404 to 409 Modulus..................................................................................111
Network key menu........................................................ 411 Monthly............................................................................. 87, 88
Root menu......................................................................401 Mouse lock-up...................................................................... 378
Save/Restore key...........................................................403 Move Screen.........................................................................257
Security key.................................................................... 410 Multiply.................................................................................. 109
System key..................................................................... 412
Message.......................................................................182, 341 N
Alarm................................................................................. 81
Auditor, Batch................................................................100 Name files by Batch............................................................. 103
Bar..................................................................................... 42 NAND....................................................................................... 93
Batch, Initiation.............................................................. 103 Navigation
Colour.............................................................................268 Action............................................................................. 272
Configuration........................................................ 95, 405 Keys................................................................................... 28
Copy................................................................................225 Network
Display (batch)............................................................... 106 Address.......................................................................... 213
Enable/disable................................................................. 69 Master comms........................................................ 155
Entry.................................................................................. 95 Boot failure....................................................................... 16
Example.................................................................... 97 Configuration....................................................... 213, 411
Inclusion in reports....................................................... 182 Connection has timed out........................................... 251
Jobs.................................................................................232 Ethernet/Serial selection............................................. 155
Log.................................................................................... 24 Key................................................................................... 411
Number............................................................................ 95 Name............................................................................... 216
Operator entered........................................................... 50 Scanning tool................................................................. 215
Power up........................................................................... 31 Specification.................................................................. 378
Serial comms................................................................. 149 Never...................................................................................... 270
Start/End characters.................................................... 151 New................................................................................ 56, 257
Text.................................................................................... 95 Chart................................................................................. 67
To print............................................................................340 Configuration.................................................................. 56
Messages Domain name................................................................208
Log.................................................................................. 417 File...................................................................................240
Messaging Full user name...............................................................208
Information.................................................................... 152 Key (File).........................................................................240
Rules................................................................................ 152 Password...............................................................199, 208
User ID............................................................................208
User Screen key................................................... 256, 257
User Guide HA028910

N (Cont.) O (Cont.)
No Out of Range......................................................................... 186
Action............................................................................. 231 Output
Alarms............................................................................. 267 Adjust..............................................................................332
Chart grid......................................................................... 68 Channel
Nominal height/width.........................................................268 Configuration
None.......................................................... 68, 74, 87, 88, 177 Analogue outputs...........................................173
NOR.......................................................................................... 93 Master comms.................................................172
Normal Menu.................................................................408
Print style........................................................................ 183 Edit default permission......................................... 201
View (circular charts)....................................................... 41 Number.......................................................... 172, 173
Normal/Saver display............................................................ 63 Range High/Low.................................................... 173
Notes.............................................................................. 50, 268 Copy................................................................................225
Message log option........................................................ 26 Jobs................................................................................. 237
No Text................................................................................... 269 Type........................................................................ 172, 173
Not in alarm or error............................................................ 270 Output 1 to 200.................................................................... 185
Number Oval........................................................................................ 277
Of batch messages....................................................... 102 Overwrite................................................................................. 87
Of columns.....................................................................268 Existing slaves............................................................... 156
Of Fields................................................................182, 341 Ovr............................................................................................ 33
Of points........................................................................... 99 Oxygen
Of rows...........................................................................268 Concentration............................................................... 128
Numeric Correction...................................................................... 126
Display mode................................................................... 48 Potential.......................................................................... 130
Enable........................................................................ 83
Web server.............................................................. 417 P
PV format................................................................. 77, 112
Width..............................................................................268 Page
N Value...................................................................................264 Name................................................................................. 15
Title.................................................................................264
O Up/down keys.................................................................. 28
Paint
O2 All.....................................................................................268
Concentration............................................................... 128 Background....................................................................268
Correction...................................................................... 126 Paper Low/Out instrument alarm........................................ 17
Potential.......................................................................... 130 Paper Low/Paper Out............................................................ 17
Off......................................................................................78, 91 Parameter.................................................. 160, 162, 172, 175
Offset..............................................................................73, 173 Parity...................................................................................... 151
Correction (touch screen)............................................386 Serial comms.................................................................340
OK to remove archive media................................................ 12 Serial printer.................................................................. 347
On Password
Becoming active/inactive etc...................................... 231 Attempts.........................................................................204
Error................................................................................ 173 Authentication............................................................... 210
Write Default................................................. 172, 175 Cache.............................................................................. 210
Job active.................................................................. 81, 93 Expiry....................................................................... 215
Media full.......................................................................... 87 Change...........................................................................209
New clear....................................................................... 102 Change on Expiry.........................................................206
Start/stop log................................................................. 102 Default (=100)........................................................... 31, 32
Visibility change............................................................268 Editing............................................................................ 199
Online (Modbus slave)......................................................... 155 Edit own, permission....................................................200
Open/Closed strings........................................................... 165 Expire..............................................................................204
Operator Expiry time.....................................................................200
Access level...................................................................... 31 Force change.................................................................202
Button............................................................................. 273 Master comms............................................................... 155
Event logic........................................................................ 93 Minimum length............................................................204
Key..................................................................................... 28 New/Retype................................................................... 199
Notes................................................................................. 50 Remote........................................................................... 199
Options...................................................................... 194 to 196 Paste
Board pinout...................................................................... 8 File...................................................................................240
Display............................................................................409 Key...................................................................................256
Key..................................................................................... 28 Paste/Delete files permission............................................. 201
OR............................................................................................. 93 Perform upgrades................................................................ 201
HA028910 User Guide

P (Cont.) Printer (Cont.)

Period Test..................................................................................340
Filter.................................................................................. 25 Type.................................................................................340
Scaler.............................................................................. 139 Print Messages From...........................................................340
Permanent ID table..............................................................328 Priority intervals.................................................................... 154
Ping Status/Ping Now..........................................................223 Process Value..........................160, 162, 172, 182, 187, 341
Pixels (Absolute/relative).....................................................254 Profile..................................................................................... 155
Point............................................................................. 183, 342 Properties page (User screens)..........................................256
Alarm................................................................................. 91 Protocol........................................................................151, 340
Number.................................................................160, 172 Email............................................................................... 179
Status.............................................................................. 187 Psychrometric constant....................................................... 127
Type...............................................................172, 175, 187 PV.......................................................160, 162, 172, 182, 341
Selection..........................................................70, 160 Format..................................................................... 77, 112
Pollution degree................................................................... 375
Polygon.................................................................................. 276 Q
Polyline................................................................................... 275
Polynomial maths function................................................. 112 Question mark...............................................................14, 152
Port Question marks in message................................................. 95
Numbers.........................................................................397 Quick entry to user screen edit..........................................258
Selection (serial communications)............................. 151
SMTP............................................................................... 179 R
Portable case Range
Basic option...................................................................349 Low/High........................................................................ 173
Basic option with TRS................................................... 351 Units.................................................................................. 73
Dimensions....................................................................348 Rate of change
HTM2010 Test kit...........................................................353 Alarms............................................................................... 78
Low supply voltage.......................................................358 Maths function............................................................... 125
Remote CJ Block option.............................................. 359 Rcpt1 to Rcpt10..................................................................... 179
Remote CJC Block option........................................... 359 Reading
Thermocouple option..................................................355 Digital values................................................................. 165
Positioning User defined registers.................................................. 163
Grid.................................................................................258 Recall mode.......................................................................... 196
Tip....................................................................................258 Recipient List......................................................................... 179
Power requirements............................................................ 377 Recorder
Power up Configuration.................................................................. 58
Event source.................................................................... 92 Dimensions.................................................................3 to 4
Messages......................................................................... 31 Electrical installation.................................................5 to 8
Filter........................................................................... 25 Panel installation........................................................2 to 4
Preset Specification.................................................................. 376
Clock job........................................................................233 Unpacking.......................................................................... 2
Counter................................................................. 143, 233 Wiring..........................................................................5 to 8
Permission...............................................................200 Recording
Group counters.............................................................233 Enable/disable................................................................. 68
Group totalisers............................................................. 231 Failure instrument alarm....................................... 17, 206
Hour/Minute.................................................................... 64 Jobs.................................................................................235
Now................................................................................. 138 Speed B job...................................................................235
Totaliser.................................................................138, 231 Speed / interval............................................................... 69
Permission...............................................................200 Record logins........................................................................204
Pressure................................................................................. 120 Rectangle.............................................................................. 274
Unit conversion............................................................. 121 Round.............................................................................. 274
Preventive maintenance......................................................390 Red
Primary Bell symbol....................................................................... 18
DNS server..................................................................... 216 Line across the chart....................................................... 36
Login name/password................................................... 88 Reference................................................................................ 79
Primary/Secondary remote host.......................................... 88 Refresh..................................................................................... 26
Printed keys............................................................................. 28 File...................................................................................240
Printer Register.................................................................................. 164
Driver, importing new..................................................343 Demand write destination........................................... 176
Name...............................................................................340 Relative Humidity................................................................. 127
Not responding............................................................... 17 Relay
Status..............................................................................340 Board specification.......................................................383
Supply Wiring................................................................338 Jobs................................................................................. 231
Switch settings.............................................................. 347 Wiring................................................................................. 8
User Guide HA028910

R (Cont.) S
Remaining.............................................................................. 148 Safety notes............................................................................... 1
Remote Sales Demo Enable/Disable...............................................386
Archiving (FTP transfer)................................................. 54 Sample and Hold.................................................................. 110
CJ block option Sample rates......................................................................... 377
Portable case.......................................................... 359 Saturated steam
CJC block option.......................................................... 361 Heat consumed............................................................. 123
Cold junction compensation........................................ 76 Heat flow......................................................................... 122
Modbus Client...............................................................223 Mass flow........................................................................ 120
Password........................................................................ 199 Save................................................................................ 56, 257
Path................................................................................... 88 After.................................................................................. 63
User name...................................................................... 199 As....................................................................................... 56
Removable media Saver Display
Capacity........................................................................... 87 Configuration.................................................................. 63
Error messages (instrument alarms)............................ 17 Job..................................................................................236
Remove Save/Restore
Adjust..............................................................................221 Key..................................................................................... 55
Media................................................................................ 28 Menu........................................................................403
User........................................................................209, 410 Permission...................................................................... 201
Repeat after/in...................................................................... 148 Scale
Replace {n} with...................................................................... 95 Circular chart................................................................... 42
Reports...........................................................................25, 341 Divisions........................................................................... 74
Configuration.......................................................182, 341 Divisions (Major/Minor)................................................268
Menu........................................................................409 Low/high......................................................................... 143
Destination.....................................................................239 Maths functions.......................................................111
Example..........................................................................344 Low/high/units................................................................ 73
Jobs.................................................................................239 Style................................................................................ 269
Number.......................................................................... 182 Type................................................................................... 74
Selection........................................................................239 Scaled...................................................................................... 73
Require Scale Low/High
Authorization..........................................................94, 205 Totaliser.......................................................................... 139
Signing.................................................................... 94, 204 Scaling....................................................... 160, 164, 172, 177
Re-scan.................................................................................. 156 Factor..................................................................... 114, 116
Reset Scientific PV format....................................................... 77, 112
Maths Function..............................................................232 Scope..............................................................................82, 101
Permission...............................................................200 Screen
Now................................................................................. 148 Brightness........................................................................ 63
Timer Builder option.....................252. See also User Screens
Job...........................................................................234 Calibration.....................................................................386
Permission...............................................................200 Import/Export................................................................. 56
Restore..................................................................................... 56 Number..........................................................................264
Retransmission..................................................................... 173 Saver................................................................................. 63
Retry....................................................................................... 155 Size.................................................................................. 279
Time................................................................................ 179 SD card location..................................................................... 11
Retype password.........................................................199, 208 Secondary
Reversed colour....................................................................268 Login/Password/Remote Host...................................... 88
Revert.....................................................................................257 Secondary DNS server........................................................ 216
Revision numbers.................................................................229 Second Start/End character............................................... 151
RFC2822................................................................................ 180 Security
RH........................................................................................... 127 Full, access permission................................................ 201
Right arrow key....................................................................... 28 Key.......................................................................... 197, 410
Rolling average..................................................................... 118 Levels.............................................................................. 198
Root mass flow...................................................................... 116 Modbus.......................................................................... 281
Root menu Revision Number...........................................................230
Keys................................................................................... 28 Maths function........................................................111
Overview........................................................................401 Select
Rotate chart......................................................................40, 67 Channels................................................................221, 372
Round Rectangle.................................................................. 274 Display mode................................................................... 28
RTD input specification.......................................................380 Group................................................................................ 29
Point Type......................................................................... 70
Selected item colour...........................................................227
Self Start................................................................................ 148
HA028910 User Guide

S (Cont.) S (Cont.)
Send Span High/Low
On Power Up.................................................................. 175 EtherNet/IP.................................................................... 187
Report to........................................................................239 Spanned.................................................................................. 77
Sender.................................................................................... 179 Special modes......................................................................386
Serial 1/Serial 2.....................................................................389 Specification
Serial communications........................................................ 149 Analogue output board...............................................384
Configuration................................................................407 ASCII Printer..................................................................384
Message information................................................... 152 Back-up battery............................................................ 377
Pinout.................................................................................. 9 Event input board.........................................................384
Port selection................................................................. 151 Input board.................................................................... 379
ASCII printer...........................................................339 Pressure transducer.....................................................354
Specification.................................................................. 378 Previous instruments...................................................382
Standard (EIA232 or EIA485)...................................... 151 Recorder, general......................................................... 376
Service level access............................................................... 31 Relay output board.......................................................383
Set clock permission............................................................200 RTC.................................................................................. 377
Setpoint source...................................................................... 78 Serial comms board..................................................... 378
Setting the time and date................................................... 219 Transmitter Power Supply........................................... 378
Share Socket......................................................................... 155 USB ports....................................................................... 378
Shift.......................................................................................... 33 Specific gas constant................................................. 114, 116
Shortest trend history/duration........................................... 86 Specified descriptor/value/alarm........................................ 96
Show Specified O₂......................................................................... 126
Batch entry list............................................................... 101 Speed/Interval B........................................................ 235, 236
Disk (local) settings......................................................... 86 Speed of recording............................................................... 69
Operator notes list.......................................................... 64 Square Root.......................................................................... 110
Title Bar...........................................................................264 'S' symbol..............................................................................386
Show Errors key.................................................................... 185 Start
Shunt........................................................................................ 73 and End characters...................................................... 151
Signal wiring.............................................................................. 5 and stop batches.......................................................... 101
Remote CJC block Angle..............................................................................264
Large frame...................................................361, 364 as Lite..............................................................................248
Small frame.............................................................368 At....................................................................................... 67
Signings................................................................................... 25 New Table...................................................................... 187
Simulation option................................................................. 196 Now................................................................................. 148
Single line Faceplate............................................................ 267 Slave detection............................................................. 156
Slave..................................................154, 160, 162, 172, 175 Timer
Slave detection..................................................................... 156 Job...........................................................................234
SMPT...................................................................................... 179 Permission..............................................................200
SMS......................................................................................... 179 Start of message characters.............................................. 151
SNTP Status
Client enable................................................................. 214 Bar..................................................................................... 15
Server.............................................................................. 214 Demand write................................................................ 175
Enable...................................................................... 214 Ethernet IP..................................................................... 185
Server failure instrument alarm.................................... 17 Stop
Socket, share......................................................................... 158 Bits.........................................................................151, 340
Software version...................................................................229 On media full................................................................... 87
Sort........................................................................................... 23 Stopwatch............................................................................. 109
Source Store Diagnostics................................................................. 154
Demand write................................................................ 175 Style............................................................................. 183, 342
Descriptor/value/alarm data......................................... 95 Stylus location........................................................................ 11
Files From.......................................................................220 Subject................................................................................... 179
Output channel............................................................. 172 Subnet mask......................................................................... 214
Span high/low............................................................... 173 Subtract................................................................................. 109
Type Summary
Copy........................................................................225 Menu................................................................................. 19
Event.......................................................................... 91 Page
Source 1 sense........................................................................ 92 Alarm......................................................................... 20
Source 2 sense........................................................................ 93 Batch......................................................................... 22
Spam...................................................................................... 180 Summertime configuration................................................ 219
Span..............................................................................160, 162 Supply voltage
Span B Ranges....................................................................... 9, 377
Configuration.................................................................. 77 Wiring................................................................................. 9
Jobs.................................................................................236
User Guide HA028910

S (Cont.) Time and date (Cont.)

Support File..........................................................................230 Time synchronisation failure message........................ 17
SupportInfo.uhq...................................................................230 Zone................................................................................ 219
Suspend Archive.................................................................... 53 Timeout
Jobs.................................................................................238 BootP.............................................................................. 213
Switch..................................................................................... 110 Comms channel.............................................................. 63
Printer, settings............................................................. 347 Event source............................................................. 91
to B maths function.......................................................232 Home display................................................................... 82
Symbols used on labels........................................................... 1 Login...............................................................................204
Synchronisation by SNTP.................................................... 214 Read/Write..................................................................... 155
Syntax Error........................................................................... 186 Screen saver..................................................................... 63
System Serial communications................................................. 151
Alarms............................................................................... 16 Slave detection.............................................................. 156
Key................................................................................... 217 Timer
Menu........................................................................ 412 Active (Event source)...................................................... 91
Message........................................................................... 25 Configuration.......................................................147, 406
Copy................................................................................225
T Jobs.................................................................................234
Number.......................................................................... 148
Tag, Channel........................................................................... 76 Start/reset permission..................................................200
Talk through enable............................................................. 152 Timestamp
T/C cal corr n......................................................................... 134 Circular charts................................................................. 43
T/C cal temp n....................................................................... 134 Maths function................................................................111
Temperature......................................................................... 120 Title Bar background colour...............................................227
Termination and biassing.................................................... 149 To point.................................................................................. 187
Text............................................................................... 264, 341 Torque (wiring connectors)..................................................... 5
Colour.............................................................................227 Totaliser
Email body text.............................................................. 179 Configuration...................................................... 138, 406
Entry techniques............................................................. 33 Data (Modbus)........................................................ 140
Event button.................................................................... 94 IEEE 32-bit........................................................141
Messages (Modbus).....................................................286 Copy................................................................................225
Report field type........................................................... 182 Incorrect values......................................................86, 139
Save and Restore............................................................ 56 Jobs................................................................................. 231
Size......................................................................... 227, 413 Modbus addressing..................................................... 140
User screens.................................................................. 274 Number.......................................................................... 138
There appears to be no free disk space..................243, 251 Preset permission.........................................................200
Thermal uniformity survey.........................................100, 371 Run-time Data (Modbus).............................................. 141
Thermocouple...................................................................... 134 IEEE 32-bit............................................................... 142
Cal correction................................................................ 134 Total of................................................................................... 138
Types and ranges..........................................................380 Touch screen
Type selection................................................................. 72 Calibration.....................................................................386
Types J, K and T colours...............................................356 Precautions....................................................................390
Threshold................................................................................ 79 Transmitter Power Supply...................................................335
Indication......................................................................... 15 Trend
Time Foreground/Background colour selection...............227
Marker Freeze............................................................................. 196
Colour...................................................................... 269 History.............................................................................. 35
Interval..................................................................... 269 Colour......................................................................227
To fill storage medium................................................... 87 Duration.................................................................... 69
Zone Shortest..................................................................... 86
Details......................................................................399 Horizontal....................................................................... 416
Time and date Jobs.................................................................................236
Change indication.......................................................... 36 Padding.......................................................................... 269
Configuration................................................................ 412 Speed / Interval............................................................... 67
Edit permission.............................................................200 Thickness........................................................................ 269
Format............................................................................ 219 Type................................................................................... 66
PV format........................................................................ 112 Units.................................................................................. 66
Setting............................................................................ 219 Vertical............................................................................ 417
Synchronisation Trial mode.............................................................................. 195
Hours and minutes settings................................... 64 Symbol (T)........................................................................ 18
Recorder clocks.....................................................233 Trigger.............................................................................78, 232
Synchronisation (SNTP)................................................ 214
HA028910 User Guide

T (Cont.) User (Cont.)

Truncation of values............................................................... 14 Screens............................................................................. 84
'T' symbol.......................................................................18, 195 Basic/Advanced selection....................................258
TUS................................................................................100, 371 Component info on screens................................258
Type...................................................................................78, 94 Component list......................................................255
Creation...................................................................254
U Image Error............................................................. 273
Importing/Exporting.............................................253
UCMM.......................................................................... 184, 224 Key descriptions.......................................... 256, 257
Unable to connect to host.................................................. 251 Number of................................................................. 84
Unable to resolve hostname.............................................. 251 Option.....................................................................252
Unack’d Parameters
Alarm on Group.............................................................. 92 Advanced.........................................................265
Point alarm....................................................................... 91 Basic..................................................................263
Unconnected Message Manager............................ 184, 224 Properties page.....................................................256
Unconnected messaging.................................................... 184 Quick entry.............................................................258
Unicode.......................................................................... 89, 152 Username.............................................................................. 155
Units.......................................................................................254 Use Summertime.................................................................. 219
Counter........................................................................... 143
Font................................................................................. 269 V
Input range...................................................................... 73
Pressure conversion..................................................... 121 Value
Scale.................................................................................. 73 and Units
Scaler.............................................................................. 139 Faceplate style....................................................... 267
Totaliser.......................................................................... 138 Changes......................................................................... 269
Universal input board wiring.................................................. 7 Channel............................................................................ 72
Unlatched................................................................................ 78 Counter........................................................................... 143
Unlock flap Font................................................................................. 269
Key..................................................................................... 28 Register.......................................................................... 164
Permission...................................................................... 201 Totaliser.......................................................................... 138
Unpacking the recorder.......................................................... 2 Vertical
Update when......................................................................... 269 Alignment....................................................................... 269
Upgrade.................................................................................220 Bargraph..................................................................44, 269
Configuration menu..................................................... 412 Display mode enable.............................................. 83
Initiation..........................................................................220 Grid total........................................................................ 270
Permission...................................................................... 201 Minor Divisions.............................................................. 270
USB Trend........................................................................36, 271
Instrument alarms........................................................... 17 Display mode enable.............................................. 83
Lock-up........................................................................... 378 Trend display mode
Port location.................................................................... 11 Web Server............................................................. 417
Specification.................................................................. 378 Views
Use Configuration.................................................................. 82
Counter as batch number............................................ 102 Menu........................................................................404
Last properties..............................................................258 Virtual channels configuration................................. 195, 409
Temperature or pressure............................................. 120 Virus susceptibility............................................................... 378
Text for batch field 1..................................................... 102 Visible
User Alarm............................................................................... 270
Add and Remove..........................................................208 Channel.......................................................................... 270
Defined Operator......................................................................... 270
Descriptor............................................................... 132 Value............................................................................... 270
Registers................................................................. 163
Linearisation table.......................................................... 98 W
Configuration menu..............................................405
Import/Export.......................................................... 57 Web server............................................................................ 415
Number..................................................................... 98 Enable.............................................................................202
Units....................................................................73, 98 Weekly.............................................................................. 87, 88
Logged In event source................................................. 92 Wet bulb temperature......................................................... 127
Login account disabled................................................. 92 When visible.......................................................................... 270
Name While [alarm] active, inactive, unacknowledged.81, 93, 231
Full............................................................................208 Width......................................................................................264
Remote.................................................................... 199 Wire size
Signal.................................................................................. 5
Supply................................................................................. 9
User Guide HA028910

W (Cont.) X
Wiring X1.............................................................................................. 98
Analogue outputs............................................................. 8 Xon/Xoff................................................................................ 347
ASCII printer..................................................................338 XOR.......................................................................................... 93
D-type connector.............................................................. 9 X points/position..................................................................264
Event inputs....................................................................... 8
Input board........................................................................ 7 Y
Modbus..........................................................................280
Option boards................................................................... 8 Y1.............................................................................................. 98
Relay.................................................................................... 8 You are already running ... message........................243, 251
Remote CJC block You are authenticating Full Bridge... message................ 251
Large frame...................................................361, 364 Y points/position..................................................................264
Small frame.............................................................368
Serial comms............................................................ 9, 149 Z
Signal.................................................................................. 5
Supply (Mains)................................................................... 9 Z-Factor.................................................................................. 115
Transmitter Power Supply............................................337 Zirconia probe...................................................................... 128
Wire size Zone
Signal........................................................................... 5 B, select job...................................................................236
Supply.......................................................................... 9 Chart area......................................................................... 77
with unapplied changes......................................................204 Time
Wizard (Ethernet IP) Details......................................................................399
Ethernet IP...................................................................... 185 Selection................................................................. 219
Worst case error calculation...............................................381 Z value.................................................................................... 113
Write
Enable............................................................................. 175
Number.......................................................................... 175
to a specific register..................................................... 176
HA028910 User Guide

User Guide HA028910

Eurotherm: International sales and service
AUSTRALIA Melbourne GERMANY Limburg SPAIN Madrid
Invensys Process Systems Australia Pty. Ltd Eurotherm Deutschland GmbH Eurotherm España SA
Telephone (+61 0) 8562 9800 Telephone (+49 6431) 2980 Telephone (+34 91) 661 6001
Fax (+61 0) 8562 9801 Fax (+49 6431) 298119 Fax (+34 91) 661 9093
E-mail [email protected] E-mail [email protected]
E-mail [email protected]
SWEDEN Malmo
INDIA Mumbai Eurotherm AB
AUSTRIA Vienna Telephone (+46 40) 384500
Eurotherm GmbH Invensys India Pvt. Ltd.
Fax (+46 40) 384545
Telephone (+91 22) 6757 9800
Telephone (+43 1) 798 7601 E-mail [email protected]
Fax (+91 22) 6757 9999
Fax (+43 1) 798 7605
E-mail [email protected] SWITZERLAND Wollerau
Eurotherm Produkte (Schweiz) AG
Telephone (+41 44) 787 1040
IRELAND Dublin Fax (+41 44) 787 1044
BELGIUM & LUXEMBOURG Moha Eurotherm Ireland Limited E-mail [email protected]
Eurotherm S.A/N.V. Telephone (+353 1) 469 1800
Telephone (+32) 85 274080 Fax (+353 1) 469 1300 UNITED KINGDOM Worthing
Fax (+32 ) 85 274081 E-mail [email protected] Eurotherm Limited
E-mail [email protected] Telephone (+44 1903) 268500
Fax (+44 1903) 265982
ITALY Como E-mail [email protected]
BRAZIL Campinas-SP Eurotherm S.r.l Web www.invensys.co.uk
Eurotherm Ltda. Telephone (+39 031) 975111
Telephone (+5519) 3707 5333 Fax (+39 031) 977512 U.S.A Ashburn VA
Fax (+5519) 3707 5345 E-mail [email protected] Eurotherm Inc.
E-mail [email protected] Telephone (+1 703) 724 7300
Fax (+1 703) 724 7301
KOREA Seoul E-mail [email protected]
CHINA Invensys Operations Management Korea

Telephone (+82 2) 2090 0900 ED63
Eurotherm China
Fax (+82 2) 2090 0800
Shanghai Office
Telephone (+86 21) 6145 1188
Fax (+86 21) 6145 2602
NETHERLANDS Alphen a/d Rijn
Beijing Office
Eurotherm B.V.
Telephone (+86 10) 5909 5700 Telephone (+31 172) 411752
Fax (+86 10) 5909 5709 / 5909 5710 Fax (+31 172) 417260
E-mail [email protected] E-mail [email protected]
FRANCE Lyon
Eurotherm Automation SA POLAND Katowice
Telephone (+33 478) 66 45 00 Invensys Eurotherm Sp z o.o
Fax (+33 478) 35 24 90 Telephone (+48 32) 7839500
E-mail [email protected] Fax (+48 32) 7843608/7843609
©Copyright Eurotherm Limited 2011

Invensys, Eurotherm, the Invensys Eurotherm logo, Chessell, EurothermSuite, Mini8, EPower, Eycon, Eyris and Wonderware are trademarks of Invensys plc, its
subsidiaries and affiliates. All other brands may be trademarks of their respective owners.
All rights are strictly reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, modified or transmitted in any form by any means, neither may it be stored in a
retrieval system other than for the purpose to act as an aid in operating the equipment to which the document relates, without the prior written permission of
Eurotherm Linited.
Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The specifications in this document may therefore be changed
without notice. The information in this document is given in good faith, but is intended for guidance only.
HA028910/9 (CN27313)

Pisač Euroterm6100a - 6180a - Man - en PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pisač Euroterm6100a - 6180a - Man - en PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

6100A/6180A

6100A/6180A Paperless graphic recorder

Manufacturer's name: Eurotherm Limited

Manufacturer's address: Faraday Close, Worthing, West Sussex,

Product type: Paperless graphic recorders

Models: 6100A Status level A1 and above

Safety specification: EN61010-1: 2001

EMC emissions specification: EN61326-1: 2006 Class A

EMC immunity specification: EN61326-1: 2006 Industrial locations

© 2011 Eurotherm Limited

PAPERLESS GRAPHIC RECORDER

HA028910 User Guide

PAPERLESS GRAPHICS RECORDER USER GUIDE

User Guide HA028910

LIST OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

HA028910 User Guide

LIST OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

User Guide HA028910

LIST OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

HA028910 User Guide

LIST OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

User Guide HA028910

LIST OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

HA028910 User Guide

LIST OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

User Guide HA028910

LIST OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

HA028910 User Guide

LIST OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

User Guide HA028910

LIST OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

HA028910 User Guide

LIST OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

User Guide HA028910

LIST OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

HA028910 User Guide

This page is deliberately left blank

User Guide HA028910

SYMBOLS USED ON THE RECORDER LABELLING

! Refer to the manual for instructions

This recorder for ac supply only

This recorder for dc supply only

This recorder for either ac or dc supply

Risk of electric shock

HA028910 User Guide

1.1 UNPACKING THE RECORDER

2.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

User Guide HA028910

Panel thickness = 3 to 25 mm. Optimum thickness

Maximum installed angle

Figure 2.1a Mechanical installation details - small frame unit

HA028910 User Guide

x Panel thickness range = 6 to 25 mm.

MAXIMUM INSTALLED ANGLE

Panel mounting technique

Figure 2.1b Mechanical installation details -large frame unit

User Guide HA028910

2.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

2.2.1 Signal wiring

CONNECTOR WIRING DETAILS

Safety Earth Safety Earth

Option slot 1 Option slot 2 Option slot 1 Option slot 2

Option slot 3 Option slot 4 Option slot 3 Option slot 4